MITSUBISHI For CO2 laser machine CAD/CAM

LA

Operating Manual

Aug. 2020
BDD-CD04T089-X2
Preface
In this manual, basic operations of special CAD/CAM software LA for laser processor are
introduced.
Before use, please read this manual and keep it properly.

Hint
This manual is to introduce operation of LA software.
For information of installation, uninstall, addition of optional parts, etc, refer to Installation
Procedures; for utilization of optional functions, refer to relevant instructions.

Before use of LA, training is necessary.

Some special operations are introduced in this manual.

If not introduced here, it can be deemed “prohibited”.

Some part of this manual may not be consistent with the revisions of the software and
hardware.

When you find errors in this manual, please contact us.

Precautions
Any operation, not introduced in this manual, may cause malfunction and failure to the
equipment.

Backup of screen / NC data, processing condition files and start . end code file, etc created by
users should be made according to requirements.
When errors occur, data cannot be recovered although CamMagic LA can be installed again.

In recent years, data leakage and system wrong operation caused by computer virus, always
appear.
As for the anti-virus method, please use anti-virus software to protect your PC, such as the
anti-virus software which is installed on your PC..

NC data created will be used as the command of operating laser processor.

In order to ensure the safety of operations, please through NC data check and processing tests
to check whether laser processing machine works normal on NC data which is just made.
Because a serious accident may causes by any wrong operation on laser processing machine,
please operates strictly follow the instructions on laser processing machine manuals..

We will not be held responsible for direct or indirect failures or losses due to NC data creation.

Because the use of this product may needs long time to process before the PC display, please
take a appropriate rest, create a comfortable operation environment for yourself.

In order to avoid H/W trouble that may associates with the PC in which this product is
installed, or related machines, please follow the instructions on each machine manual.

Creation of programs such as animation character, laser processing and distribution may cause
violation of other copyrights.

We will not be responsible for damages and relevant duties as a result of natural calamities.
 Other precautions on LA
1 Restrictions on starting CAD screen
LA can only be used in a computer which is connected with protection device and has LA, it
cannot be started from other computer via network.
2 3.5 in. photo magnetic disk (medium)
The 3.5 in. photo magnetic disk (medium) used in LA600A/E optional function “3.5 in. photo
magnetic disk software” should be formatted according to UNIX of Hewlett Packard Corp
workstation before use.
Since it is not MS-DOS format, thus, it cannot be recognized (input/output) in LA, (Windows
OS).
3 OS environment
Various kinds of latest versions of Windows 7 with higher edition are available, besides,
“Service pack” software is also provided additionally.
If the software here can operate properly in a computer with LA, there is no need to install
other additional software, otherwise, OS and LA may become instable, therefore, do not perform
registration and installation additionally when not necessary.
Please note that some LA may not operate normally due to Windows performance, for example,
when file system of the hard disc is in the form of FAT, number of files which can be saved in a
folder is limited although there is still unoccupied room on hard disc, as a result, when nesting
material data registration quantity reaches thousands, registration cannot be continued,
regardless of whether there is empty room on hard disc. For above problems, although it is not
clear that whether there is limit for NTFS format, more files can be registered compared with
FAT format, therefore, you can avoid this problem by means of changing file system format.
4 Consultation of OS and computer, etc
For information of OS (various Windows®), computer, printer, plotter, other peripheral
equipment, and software purchased, etc, please contact the seller or manufacturer.
About abbreviation . registered trade mark
The official name of Windows® 7 is Microsoft® Windows® 7 operating system.
The official name of Windows® 8 is Microsoft® Windows® 8 operating system.
The official name of Windows® 10 is Microsoft® Windows® 10 operating system.
MS-DOS® and Windows® and Windows NT® are a registration brand in the United States of
America in the United States of America Microsoft Corporation and the other country.
Microsoft® Excel® is a registration brand in the United States of America in the United States of
America Microsoft Corporation and the other country.
AutoCAD is registration brand in the United States of America Autodesk Inc.
Other company and product names appearing in this pamphlet are trademarks or registered
trademarks of the individual companies.
Reproduction and transmission prohibited

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means
without permission.

1998- MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Contents

Preface
1. Contents
2. Basic operation procedure
2-1. Statement . symbol 1-1
2-2. Starting and ending LA 2-2
2-3. Operations of mouse and keyboard 2-5
2-3-1. Operations of mouse 2-5
2-3-2. Operations of keyboard 2-5
2-3-3. File management 2-10

2-4. Screen summary 2-17

2-4-1. LA screen summary 2-17
2-4-2. Tool bar summary 2-18
2-5. Operation example 2-24
2-6. File name---difference between uppercase / lower case,
Restriction on number of characters, precautions 2-35
2-7. User data management directory/ file list 2-37
2-8. LA backup / list tool 2-39
3. Command specification (CAD function, CAM function)
[A] Figure drawing
[A1] Figure
1 Point A1-1
2 Equally-dividing points A1-2
3 Line Normal A1-4
3-1 Vertical line segment A1-4
4 Line Horizontal A1-4
5 Line Horizontal line segment A1-5
6 Line Vertical A1-4
7 Line Vertical line segment A1-5
8 Line Angle A1-5
9 Line Angle line segment A1-6
10 Line 2-point line A1-7
11 Line 2-point line segment A1-7
12 Line Parallel A1-7
13 Line Parallel line segment A1-8
14 Offset Increment A2-9
15 Offset Absolute A2-9
16 Offset Both sides A2-9
17 Circle/Arc Circle A3-7
18 Circle/Arc Semicircle A3-8
19 Corner/Cut Loop A2-3
20 Corner/Cut Round A2-1
21 Corner/Cut Chamfer A2-2
22 Corner/Cut Cut A2-3
23 Corner/Cut Square cut A2-4
24 Edit Element Split at A1-9
25 Edit Element Split by A1-10
26 Edit Element Connection A1-10
27 Edit Element Restore A1-10
28 Edit Element Length A1-11
29 Edit Element Partially delete A1-11
30 Auxiliary line trace A1-12
31 Back clear A1-12
32 Quadrangle input A1-13
33 Stretch A1-14
34 Regular polygon A1-14
35 Offset・pattern changing A1-15
36 Corner rounding・pattern changing A1-15
37 Bidirectional trimming A1-16
38 No trimming A1-16
39 First trimming A1-16
40 Second trimming A1-17
41 Link A1-17
42 Non-linkage A1-17
43 Edit Diameter A1-18

[A2] Corner/ Cut / Offset

1 Corner Round A2-1
2 Corner Batch round A2-1
3 Corner Chamfer A2-2
4 Corner Batch chamfer A2-2
5 Corner Cut A2-3
6 Corner Loop A2-3
7 Corner Angle chamfer A2-4
8 Corner Square cut A2-4
 9 Cut U cut A2-5
10 Cut V cut A2-6
11 Cut Quad cut A2-7
12 Edit Element Split at A1-9
13 Edit Element Split by A1-10
14 Edit Element Connection A1-10
15 Edit Element Restore A1-10
16 Edit Element Length A1-11
17 Edit Element Partially delete A1-11
18 Offset Increment A2-9
19 Offset Absolute A2-9
20 Offset Both sides A2-9
21 Insertion mode Block A2-10
22 Insertion mode Arc A2-10
23 Insertion mode Intersection A2-10
24 Insertion mode ExtIntersection A2-10
25 Form mode Group A2-10
26 Form mode Single element A2-10
27 Auxiliary line trace A1-12
28 Back clear A1-12
29 Rectangle A1-13
30 Stretch A1-14
31 Contour extroperation extract A2-12
32 Contour extroperation end A2-12

[A3] Special figures

1 Special figures Involute A3-1
2 Special figures Simulation A3-4
3 Special figures Result A3-4
4 Special figures Rack A3-5
5 Special figures Ellipse A3-7
6 Circle/Arc Circle A3-7
7 Circle/Arc Semicircle A3-8
8 Circle/Arc Arc (Start pint/End point) A3-8
9 Circle/Arc Arc (Center point) A3-9
10 Free curve Draw A3-10
11 Free curve Done A3-10
12 Free curve Edit A3-10
13 All Lines A3-11
14 Curve offset A3-12
15 External point group data conversion A3-13
16 Spline curve Close curve A3-14
17 Spline curve Open curve A3-14
18 Spline curve Specify pass points A3-15
19 Spline curve Spline division A3-16
20 Spline curve Set tolerance A3-16
21 Spline curve Tolerance change A3-17
[A4] Central line
1 Draw central line Line/Arc A4-1
2 Draw central line Circle A4-1
3 Draw central line On circle A4-1
4 Draw central line Random A4-1
5 Entry mode cross A4-2
6 Entry mode Horizontal / Arc A4-2
7 Entry mode Vertical / Line A4-2
8 Projection amount Setting Ratio (Circle) A4-3
9 Projection amount Setting Real value A4-3
[B] Auxiliary line
[B1] Figure
1 Point A1-1
2 Equally-dividing points A1-2
3 Line Normal A1-4
4 Line Horizontal A1-4
5 Line Horizontal line segment A1-5
6 Line Vertical A1-4
7 Line Vertical line segment A1-5
8 Line Angle A1-5
9 Line Angle line segment A1-6
10 Line 2-point line A1-7
11 Line 2-point line segment A1-7
12 Line Parallel A1-7
13 Line Parallel line segment A1-8
14 Offset Increment A2-9
15 Offset absolute A2-9
16 Offset both sides A2-9
17 Circle/Arc circle A3-7
18 Circle/Arc semicircle A3-8
19 Corner/Cut Loop A2-3
20 Corner/Cut Round A2-1
21 Corner/Cut Chamfer A2-2
22 Corner/Cut Cut A2-3
23 Corner/Cut Square Cut A2-4
24 Edit Element Split at A1-9
25 Edit Element Split by A1-10
26 Erase auxiliary lines Erase auxiliary lines B1-2
27 Erase auxiliary lines Erase all auxiliary lines B1-2
28 Erase auxiliary lines YES B1-2
29 Erase auxiliary lines NO B1-2
[C] Poly-Line
[C1] Dialogue input
1 Poly-Line line Dialogue C1-1
2 Poly-Line arc Arc C C1-3
3 Poly-Line arc 3 arcs C C1-3
4 Poly-Line arc Semicircle C1-3
5 Poly-Line corner Round R C1-4
6 Poly-Line corner Chamfer K C1-4
7 Poly-Line corner Loop L C1-4
8 Back clear B C1-5
9 Corner Round A2-1
10 Corner Batch round A2-1
11 Corner Chamfer A2-2
12 Corner Batch chamfer A2-2
13 Corner Cut A2-3
14 Corner Loop A2-3
15 Corner Angle chamfer A2-4
16 Corner Square cut A2-4
17 Cut U cut A2-5
18 Cut V cut A2-6
19 Cut Quad cut A2-7
20 Edit Element Split at A2-9
21 Edit Element Split by A1-10
22 Edit Element Connection A1-10
23 Edit Element Restore A1-10
24 Edit Element length A1-11
25 Edit Element Partially delete A1-11
[D] Graphic edit
[D1] Moving copying
D1-1
1 Moving rotation K1-60
2 Copying rotation K1-60
3 Moving copying D1-1
4 Cutting command・changing reference D1-2
5 Cutting command・editing element D1-2
6 Cutting command・the number of copying D1-2
7 Cutting command・redo D1-2
8 Cutting command・measure D4-7

[D2] move/copy D2-1

1 Move Move and rotate K1-60

2 Move Parallel D2-2
3 Move Rotate D2-3
4 Movement Mirror D2-3
5 Move Scale D2-4
6 Move Scale(Include Notes) D2-4
7 Copy Copy and rotate K1-60
8 Copy Parallel D2-5
9 Copy Rotate D2-6
10 Copy Mirror D2-7
11 Copy Scale D2-8
12 Copy Scale (Include Notes) D2-8
13 Corner Round A2-1
14 Corner Batch round A2-1
15 Corner Chamfer A2-2
16 Corner Batch chamfer A2-2
17 Corner Cut A2-3
18 Corner Loop A2-3
19 Corner Angle chamfer A2-4
20 Corner Square cut A2-4
21 Cut U cut A2-5
22 Cut V cut A2-6
23 Cut Quad cut A2-7
24 Edit Element Split by A1-9
25 Edit Element Split at A1-10
26 Edit Element Connect A1-10
27 Edit Element Recover A1-10
28 Edit Element Length A1-11
29 Edit Element Part delete A1-11
30 Stretch A1-14

[D3] Check sizes

1 Check size Check D3-1
2 Change display data Previous data D3-1
3 Change display data Next data D3-1
4 Decimal place 3 digits after decimal point D3-2
5 Decimal place 4 digits after decimal point D3-2
6 Decimal place 5 digits after decimal point D3-2
7 Decimal place 6 digits after decimal point D3-2
8 Illegal data check D3-2

[D4] Dimension drive

 1 Dimension drive Edit D4-1
2 Dimension drive Execute D4-1
3 Variable setting Set D4-2
4 Display mode Variable name D4-2
5 Display mode Dimension value D4-2
6 Input dimension Horizontal H1-1
7 Input dimension Vertical H1-1
8 Input dimension Parallel H1-4
9 Input dimension Interval H1-4
10 Input dimension Radius H1-4
11 Input dimension Diameter H1-6
12 Input dimension Angle H1-7
13 Input dimension Chamfer H1-11
14 Input dimension Half arrow H1-11
15 Input dimension Arc H1-10
16 Measure D4-7

[D5] Dimension setting

1 Edit Dimension H2-1
2 Edit Out scale H2-1
3 Edit Position of characters H2-1
4 Edit Position of arrow H2-2
5 Edit Height of character H2-2
6 Edit Decimal place H2-2
7 Edit Loader H2-3
8 Edit With () H2-3
9 Edit Line ON/OFF H2-3
10 Edit Gap H2-3
11 Edit Arrange intervals H2-4
12 Edit center H2-4
13 Dimension mode Tolerance H2-4
14 Dimension mode Character H2-4
15 Set Height of character H2-6
16 Set Decimal place H2-6
17 Set Tolerance large H2-6
18 Set Tolerance small H2-6

[D6] Screen copy

1 Screen copy Copy elements D6-1
2 Screen copy Paste D6-2
3 Screen copy Pasted data confirmation D6-2
[E] Sub pattern
[E1] Sub-pattern
1 Sub-pattern Load E1-1
2 Sub-pattern List E1-1
3 User pattern Load E1-5
4 User pattern Save E1-6
5 User pattern / E1-6
6 Central line draw Line/Arc A4-1
7 Central line draw Circle A4-1
8 Central line draw Circumference position A4-1
9 Central line draw Random position A4-1
10 Laser macro Load E1-14
11 Laser macro List E1-15
12 Layout On circle E1-19
13 Layout On circle (Radial) E1-20
14 Layout On arc E1-21
15 Layout On arc (Radial) E1-22
16 Layout Grid-shaped X E1-23
17 Layout Grid-shaped Y E1-23
18 Layout On line E1-24
19 Sequence pattern shift left rotation E1-25
20 Sequence pattern shift right rotation E1-25

[E2] Sub-P list

1 P0 : Circle 0 E2-1
2 P1 : Circle 1 E2-1
3 P2 : Single D E2-1
4 P3 : Double D E2-1
5 P4 : Fan hole without E2-1
6 P5 : Fan hole with R E2-1
7 P6 : Square hole without R E2-1
8 P7 : Square hole with R E2-1
9 P8 : Square hole with C E2-1
10 P9 : Slot connected E2-1
11 P10: Slot Non-connected E2-1
12 P11: Key hole E2-1
13 P : Open pierce E2-1
14 K1 : Marking E2-1
15 Linkage Layout On circle E1-19
16 Linkage Layout On circle (Radial) E1-20
17 Linkage Layout On arc E1-21
18 Linkage Layout On arc (Radial) E1-22
19 Linkage Layout Grid-shaped X E1-23
20 Linkage Layout Grid-shaped Y E1-23
21 Linkage Layout On line E1-24

[E3] Screw hole list with R

1 R1 : R pierce circle left E3-1
2 R01 : R pierce circle E3-1
3 R1R: R pierce circle right E3-1
4 R6 : No R pierce square hole E3-1
5 R9 : R pierce square hole left E3-1
6 R9R: R pierce square hole right E3-1
7 Screw hole M1 E3-1
8 Screw hole M1.2 E3-1
 9 Screw hole M1.4 E3-1
10 Screw hole M1.6 E3-1
11 Screw hole M2 E3-1
12 Screw hole M2.5 E3-1
13 Screw hole M3 E3-1
14 Screw hole M3.5 E3-1
15 Screw hole M4 E3-1
16 Screw hole M5 E3-1
17 Screw hole M6 E3-1
18 Screw hole M8 E3-1
19 Screw hole M10 E3-1
20 Screw hole M12 E3-1
21 Linkage Layout On circle E1-19
22 Linkage Layout On circle (Radial) E1-20
23 Linkage Layout On arc E1-21
24 Linkage Layout On arc (Radial) E1-22
25 Linkage Layout Grid-shaped X E1-23
26 Linkage Layout Grid-shaped Y E1-23
27 Linkage Layout On line E1-24

[E4] Laser macro list

1 Laser macro list L1 : Marking E4-1
2 Laser macro list L2 : Pierce E4-1
3 Laser macro list L3 : Round holes E4-1
4 Laser macro list L4 : Slot E4-1
5 Laser macro list L5 : Single D E4-1
6 Laser macro list L6 : Double D E4-1
7 Laser macro list L7 : Rectangle hole without R E4-1
8 Laser macro list L8 : Rectangle hole with R E4-1
9 Laser macro list L9 : Square hole without R E4-1
10 Laser macro list L10: Square hole with R E4-1
11 Linkage Layout On circle E1-19
12 Linkage Layout On circle (Radial) E1-20
13 Linkage Layout On arc E1-21
14 Linkage Layout On arc (Radial) E1-22
15 Linkage Layout Grid-shaped X E1-23
16 Linkage Layout Grid-shaped Y E1-23
17 Linkage Layout On line E1-24

[E5] Dimension drive

1 Dimension drive Edit D3-1
2 Dimension drive Execute D3-1
3 Variable setting Set D3-2
4 Display mode Variable name D3-2
5 Display mode Dimension value D3-2
6 Dimension input Horizontal H1-1
7 Dimension input Vertical H1-1
8 Dimension input Parallel H1-4
9 Dimension input Interval H1-4
10 Dimension input Radius H1-4
11 Dimension input Diameter H1-6
12 Dimension input Angle H1-7
13 Dimension input Chamfer H1-11
14 Dimension input Half arrow H1-11
15 Dimension input Arc H1-10
[F] Development
[F1] Composite development
1 Composite development Composite development F1-1
2 Extension development Extension development F1-9
3 Extension development Extension amount registration F1-10
4 Section-bend development Section definition Group setting F1-13
5 Section-bend development Section-bend development F1-13
6 Erase auxiliary lines Erase all auxiliary lines B1-2
7 Erase all Point G1-2
8 Erase all Note G1-2
9 Duct development Duct development F1-19
10 Section development Elements Load F1-75
11 Section development Elements Save F1-78
Section development /
12 Section development Development execute F1-83
13 Flange development Element Load
F1-134
14 Flange development Element Save
F1-137
Flange development /
15 Flange development Development execution
F1-141

[F2] Erase
1 Independent erase Element G1-1
2 Independent erase Attribute G1-1
3 Independent erase Auxiliary lines G1-1
4 Erase all Point G1-2
5 Erase all Dimension G1-2
6 Erase all Note G1-2
7 Erase all Line type/color G1-3
8 Erase all Layer G1-4
9 Erase all Figures G1-5
10 Erase all auxiliary lines B1-2
11 Display auxiliary line ON B1-2
12 Display auxiliary line OFF B1-2
[G] Erase
1 Independent erase Element G1-1
2 Independent erase Attribute G1-1
3 Independent erase Auxiliary lines G1-1
4 Erase all Point G1-2
5 Erase all Dimension G1-2
6 Erase all Note G1-2
7 Erase all Line type/color G1-3
8 Erase all Layer G1-4
9 Erase all Figures G1-5
10 Erase all auxiliary lines B1-2
11 Display auxiliary lines ON B1-2
12 Display auxiliary lines OFF B1-2
[H] Dimension
[H1] Input dimension
1 Horizontal dimension Element H1-1
2 Horizontal dimension Total H1-1
3 Horizontal dimension Continuous (reference) H1-1
4 Horizontal dimension Continuous (increment) H1-2
5 Horizontal dimension Ordinate H1-2
6 Horizontal dimension Ordinate arrow H1-2
7 Vertical dimension Element H1-1
8 Vertical dimension Total H1-1
9 Vertical dimension Continuous (reference) H1-1
10 Vertical dimension Continuous (increment) H1-2
11 Vertical dimension Size increment H1-2
12 Vertical dimension Increment arrow H1-2
13 Ordinate dimension Ordinate edit H1-3
14 Ordinate dimension Bend point H1-3
15 Ordinate dimension Bend width H1-3
16 Ordinate dimension Interval H1-3
17 Ordinate dimension Bend length H1-3
18 Parallel dimension H1-4
19 Interval dimension H1-4
20 Radius dimension Standard Starting from center point H1-4
21 Radius dimension Standard Random position H1-5
22 Radius dimension Leader type Starting from center point H1-5
23 Radius dimension Leader type Random position H1-5
24 Diameter dimension Standard Starting from center point H1-6
25 Diameter dimension Standard Random position H1-6
26 Diameter dimension Leader type Starting from center point H1-6
27 Diameter dimension Leader type Random position H1-6
28 Angle dimension Line arc (center) H1-7
29 Angle dimension Line arc (random) H1-7
30 Angle dimension Draft H1-7
31 Angle display Decimal point H1-8
32 Angle display Degree H1-8
33 Angle display Degree and minute H1-8
34 Angle display Degree, minute and second H1-9
35 Angle display Tangent H1-9
36 Angle display Horizontal H1-9
37 Arc dimension Tangent H1-10
38 Arc dimension Horizontal H1-10
39 Chamfer H1-11
40 Half arrow Input H1-11
41 Half arrow Input mode With Phi H1-11
42 Half arrow Input mode Without Phi H1-12
43 Edit dimension H2-1
44 Edit Position of character H2-1
45 Edit Position of arrow H2-2
46 Edit Height of character H2-2
47 Edit Decimal place H2-2
48 Dimension mode Intercross H2-4
49 Dimension mode Character H2-4
50 Dimension mode Front character H2-5
51 Dimension mode Middle character H2-5
52 Dimension mode Back character H2-5
53 Dimension mode () H2-5
54 Dimension mode Φ H2-5
55 Dimension mode Ｒ H2-5
56 Setting Height of character H2-6
 57 Setting Number of digits H2-6
58 Setting Tolerance large H2-6
59 Setting Tolerance small H2-6
60 Linear Dimension H1-13
61 Auto progressive H1-14
62 Auto progressive H1-14
63 Auto size condition H1-15
64 Progressive alignment H1-17
65 Chamfer size・standard type H1-18
66 Chamfer size・drawer type H1-18

[H2] Dimension setting

1 Edit Dimension value H2-1
2 Edit Out scale H2-1
3 Edit Character position H2-1
4 Edit Arrow position H2-2
5 Edit Height of character H2-2
6 Edit Decimal place H2-2
7 Edit Leader H2-3
8 Edit With ( ) H2-3
9 Edit Line ON/OFF H2-3
10 Edit Gap H2-3
11 Edit Arrange intervals H2-4
12 Edit Center of characters H2-4
13 Dimension mode Intercross H2-4
14 Dimension mode Character H2-4
15 Dimension mode Front character H2-5
16 Dimension mode Middle character H2-5
17 Dimension mode Back character H2-5
18 Dimension mode () H2-5
19 Dimension mode Φ H2-5
20 Dimension mode R H2-5
21 Setting Height of character H2-6
22 Setting Number of digits H2-6
23 Setting Tolerance large H2-6
24 Setting Tolerance small H2-6
25 0-suppress H2-7
26 0-suppress ON H2-8
27 0-suppress OFF H2-8

[H3] Note
1 Note Input /edit H3-1
2 Note Copy H3-1
3-1 Note Move and rotate K1-60
3-2 Note Copy and rotate K1-60
4 Note Half angle kana→all angle kana
H3-2
5 Note mode Layout H3-3
6 Note mode Input H3-3
7 Character setting Size H3-3
8 Character setting Slant H3-4
9 Character setting Space H3-4
10 Character setting Standard H3-5
11 Character setting Display frame H3-5
12 Character setting > Display (1) H3-5
13 Character setting > Erase (0) H3-5
14 Character setting > Setting (S) H3-5
 15 Character setting > Fix (CR) H3-5
16 Mirror Up and down H3-6
17 Mirror Left and right H3-6
18 Mirror Not mirror H3-7
19 Mirror > Setting (S) H3-6
20 Arrange characters Not specified H3-7
21 Arrange characters Centering H3-7
22 Arrange characters Left justification H3-8
23 Arrange characters Right justification H3-8

[H4] Finish symbol

1 Finish symbol ~ H4-1
2 Finish symbol H4-1
3 Finish symbol H4-1
4 Finish symbol H4-1
5 Finish symbol Symbol draw/move H4-1
6 Finish symbol Setting height H4-2
7 Finish symbol Leader H4-2
8 Parts management Register M1-17
9 Parts management Load M1-7
/ H4-3
10 Balloon Input Edit H4-3
11 Mode setting Preceding balloon H4-4
12 Mode setting Cancel preceding setting H4-4
13 Default setting Size of balloon H4-4
14 Hatching Hatching H4-5

[H5] Group edit

1 Group edit Set H5-1
2 Group edit Cancel independent H5-1
3 Group edit Cancel All H5-2
4 Group edit Select Low level H5-2
5 Group edit Select Top level H5-2
6 Arrangement number show H5-3
7 List show H5-3

[H6] Central line

1 Draw central line Line . Arc A4-1
2 Draw central line Circle A4-1
3 Draw central line Circumference configuration A4-1
4 Draw central line Random configuration A4-1
5 Entry mode Cross A4-2
6 Drawing mode Horizontal/Arc A4-2
7 Drawing mode Vertical/Line A4-2
8 Projection amount setting Ratio (cirlce) A4-3
9 Projection amount setting Real value A4-3
[I] Manual setting
[I1] Manual setting
1 Manual setting Offset I1-1
2 Add NC attribute Dwell I1-2
3 Add NC attribute Z movement I1-2
4 NC code I1-3
5 Add NC code "G09" I1-3
6 NC code execute display ON I1-4
7 NC code execute display OFF I1-4
8 NC code attribute Erase I1-4
9 NC code attribute Display I1-5
10 Automatic condition registration Condition 2 M2 I1-5
11 Automatic condition registration Condition 2 M300 I1-9
12 Width decision I1-17
13 Automatic conditions registration Condition 1 l1-19

[I2] Registration condition confirm

1 Registration condition confirm M2 I2-1
2 Registration condition confirm M300 I2-1
3 Registration condition delete M2 I2-1
4 Registration condition delete M300 I2-1

[I3] Manual condition

1 Specified machine I3-1
2 Confirm / Change parameter I3-2
3 Manual condition setting Pierce condition I3-3
4 Manual condition setting Path condition I3-3
5 Processing condition attribute Automatic cancellation I3-4
6 Processing condition attribute Automatic reopening I3-5
7 Processing condition attribute Manual condition I3-5
8 Processing condition attribute Automatic condition I3-5
9 Processing condition attribute Condition deletion I3-5
10 Condition excuse display ON I3-5
11 Condition excuse display OFF I3-5
12 Additional NC attribute NC code I3-5
13 Color designation example Red (M102) I3-5
14 Color designation example Green (M103) I3-5
15 Color designation example Yellow (M104) I3-5
16 Color designation example Light blue (M105) I3-5
17 Color designation example Purple (M106) I3-5
18 Color designation example White (M107) I3-5
19 Color designation example Red (M108) I3-5
20 Color designation example Green (M109) I3-5

[I4] Group edit

1 Group edit Set H5-1
2 Cancel Independent H5-1
3 Cancel Screen all H5-1
4 Select Low level H5-2
5 Select Top level H5-2
[J] Path setting
[J1] Path setting
1 Reference point of processing J1-1
Reference point(0,0) J1-1
2 Pierce Line J1-2
3 Pierce Arc J1-4
4 Pierce Cancel J1-6
5 Pierce Addition J1-6
6 Pierce Auto pierce J1-7
6-2 Pierce Auto pierce message confirm J1-9-2
7 Pierce BEAM ON 1 J1-10
8 Pierce BEAM OFF 1 J1-10
9 Switch of BEAM ON/OFF J1-10
10 Path setting Outer specify J1-10
11 Path setting Automatic check J1-11
12 Path setting Manual J1-11
13 Path setting Automatic J1-12
14 Path setting Arrange order J1-12
15 Path setting Check J1-12
16 Path setting Range Arrange order J1-13
17 Path setting Range automatic J1-14
18 Rapid feed Erase all J1-16
19 Rapid feed Erase J1-16
20 Cut J1-16
21 2-point line segment J1-16
22 Corner R J1-16
23 Micro joint J1-17
24 End joint Display / Setting J1-18
25 Delete Path J1-18

[J2] BEAM ON/OFF

1 Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON1 J1-10
2 Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON2 J2-1
3 Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON 3 J2-1
4 Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF1 J1-10
5 Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF2 J2-2
6 Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF3 J2-2
7 Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON1 J2-3
8 Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON2 J2-3
9 Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON3 J2-4
10 Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF1 J2-4
11 Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF2 J2-5
12 Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF3 J2-5
13 Switch BEAM ON/OFF J2-5
Precede pierce (Pre-pierce) J2-6
14 Pre-pierce Add (all) J2-7
15 Pre-pierce Add (manual) J2-8
16 Pre-pierce Cancel J2-9
17 Pre-pierce Setting J2-10
18 Pre-pierce Path (automatic) J2-11
19 Pre-pierce Path (range) J2-12
20 Pre-pierce Process reference point J1-1
21 Reference (0, 0) J1-1
22 Path setting Automatic inspection J1-11
23 Path setting Manual J1-11
24 Path setting Automatic J1-12
25 Path setting Arrange order J1-12
 26 Path setting Check J1-12
27 Path setting Range arrange order J1-13
28 Path setting Range automatic J1-14
29 Rapid feed Erase all J1-16
30 Rapid feed Erase J1-16
Pre-pierce Procedure of operation J2-14

[J3] Interference check

1. Processing reference point J1-1
2. Reference (0,0) J1-1
3. Pierce Line J1-2
4. Pierce Arc J1-4
5. Pierce Cancel J1-6
6. Pierce Addition J1-6
7. Pierce Automatic pierce J1-7
8. Pierce Message confirmation J1-9-2
9. Beam ON1 J1-10
10. Beam OFF1 J1-10
11. Path setting Perimeter designation J1-10
12. Path setting Automatic check J1-11
13. Path setting Manual J1-11
14. Path setting Automatic J1-12
15. Path setting Configuration order J1-12
16. Path setting Trace check J1-12
17. Path setting Range configuration order J1-13
18. Path setting Range automatic J1-14
19. Pierce path setting… J1-72
20. Pierce Path Automatic avoidance J3-2
21. Pierce Path Range avoidance J3-3
22. Rapid Feed Setting J3-5
23. Rapid-Feed Interference check J3-9
24. Rapid-Feed Detour creation J3-10
25. Rapid-Feed Clear all J1-16
26. Rapid-Feed Clear J3-16
27. Rapid-Feed Change Rapid-Feed 1 J3-11
28. Rapid-Feed Change Rapid-Feed 2 J3-12
29. Joint Micro Joint J1-17
30. End Joint Settings J1-18
31. End Joint Display J1-18
32. Overlaid cutting check J3-12
33. Message List J3-13

[J4] Marking
1 Marking ON/OFF add / delete add (element) J4-1
2 Marking ON/OFF add / delete add (type of line) J4-2
3 Marking ON/OFF add / delete Delete J4-3
4 Marking ON/OFF add / delete Delete all J4-4
5 Automatic path setting of marking J4-4
6 Erase all rapid feed lines J1-16
7 Erase rapid feed lines J1-16
8 BEAM ON/OFF switch J1-10
9 Marking path Setting J4-8
10 Marking path Cancel J4-9
11 Note-marking character conversion Conversion execution J4-9
12 Marking character Upper case J4-10
13 Marking character Large case J4-10
14 Marking character Number J4-10
 15 Move Move and rotate K1-18
16 Move Parallel D1-2
17 Move Rotate D1-3
18 Move Mirror D1-3
19 Move Scale D1-4
20 Move Scale (include Note) D1-4
21 Copy Copy and rotate K1-19
22 Copy Parallel D1-5
23 Copy Rotate D1-6
24 Copy Mirror image D1-7
25 Copy Scale D1-8
26 Copy Scale (include Note) D1-8

[J5] Scrap
1 Scrap treatment Setting Condition setting J5-1
2 Scrap line Make Complement display J5-4
3 Scrap line Make Voluntary designation (vertical) J5-5
4 Scrap line Make Voluntary designation (horizontal) J5-5
5 Scrap line Make Delete all complements J5-6
6 Scrap path Path creation J5-7
7 Scrap path Cancel J5-10
8 Processing reference point J1-1
9 Reference (0, 0) J1-1
10 Path setting Automatic check J1-11
11 Path setting Manual J1-11
12 Path setting Automatic J1-12
13 Path setting Arrange order J1-12
14 Path setting Check J1-12
15 Rapid feed Erase all J1-16
16 Rapid feed Erase J1-16
17 Pierce Line J1-2
18 Pierce Arc J1-4
19 Pierce Cancel J1-6
20 Pierce Addition J1-6
21 Joint Micro- joint J1-17
Scrap procedure J5-12

[J6] Common line part J6-1

1 Common line part Summary J6-2
2 Common line part Save J6-6
3 Common line part Load J6-8
4 Common line part composite Part composition J6-11
5 Common line pierce BEAM ON / OFF added J6-18
6 Common line pierce Path setting J6-22
Common line pierce List of common line cutting messages J6-26
7 Group edit Low level H5-4
8 Group edit Top level H5-2
9 Joint Micro joint J1-17
10 End joint Setting J1-18
11 End joint Display J1-18
12 Manual setting Offset J1-1
13 Outer specify J1-10
14 Processing reference point J1-1
15 Reference (0, 0) J1-1
16 Path setting Automatic inspection J1-11
17 Path setting Manual J1-11
18 Path setting Check J1-12
[J7] Positioning J7-1
[J8] Edge-Cut J8-1
1 Add ON, Add OFF J8-1
2 Edit J8-2
3 Set J8-3

[J9] CutOffRoute J9-1

1 CutOffRoute J9-1

[K] Nesting
[K1] Free (high-speed free) nesting
1 Part Material Save K1-1
Part Material / K1-1
1-2 Part Material Range save K1-3-2
2 Part Material Load K1-8
3 Part Material Inner hole specify K1-9
4 Part Material Inner hole cancel K1-9-2
5 Work sheet Load(Save) K1-10
Work sheet / K1-10
6 Clamp position setting K1-12
7 Edge Material Save K1-23
Edge Material / K1-23
8 Edge Material Load K1-26
9 Group Nesting K1-27
10 Arrangement demand nesting Execution K1-38
Arrangement demand nesting / K1-38
11 More-kind small quantity K1-53
12 Less-kind large quantity K1-53
13 Try of size of kinds and quantity K1-53
14 Error confirmation K1-54
15 Report K1-55
16 Snap move(Move and rotate) K1-60
17 Snap copy(Copy and rotate) K1-60
18 Gap width K1-60
19 Re-arrangement K1-63
20 Free nesting flow K1-64
21 Add parts K1-68
[K2] Automatic nesting
1 Parts material Save K1-1
2 Parts material Load K1-8
Parts material / K1-1
3 Work sheet Load(Save K1-10
Work sheet / K1-10
4 Automatic nesting K2-2
5 Report K1-55
6 Move and rotate K1-60
7 Copy and rotate K1-60
8 Gap width K1-60
9 Processing reference point J1-1
10 Path setting Manual J1-11
11 Path setting Automatic J1-12
12 Path setting Arrange order J1-12
13 Path setting Check J1-12
14 Interference check path Automatic J3-5
15 Interference check path Arrange order J3-9
16 Interference prevention setting J3-10
17 Rapid feed Erase all J1-16
18 Rapid feed Erase J1-16
19 Rapid feed change Rapid feed 1 J3-11
20 Rapid feed change Rapid feed 2 J3-12
21 Yield recalculation Whole of board K2-3
22 Yield recalculation In real rectangle K2-3
23 Automatic nesting flow K2-5
[L] NC input and output
[L1] NC creation
1 NC data creation NC creation L1-1
2 Edit L1-25
Automatic condition register condition1 L1-20
Automatic condition register condition2 M300 L1-9
3 Print Print output execution L1-27
4 Space deletion L1-27
5 NC data clear L1-27
6 NC data FD management List input L1-27
7 NC data FD management List delete L1-28
8 NC data FD management Input L1-28
9 NC data FD management Extension L1-29
10 NC data FD management Output L1-29
11 NC data FD management Delete L1-29
12 NC data FD management FD list L1-30
13 NC file management Load L1-31
14 NC file management Save L1-32
NC file management / L1-32
15 NC file management Merge L1-34
16 NC file management Input from outside… L1-36
17 NC file management Output from outside… L1-36
18 NC data checker L1-37
19 Inversion L1-42
20 Start/End code management List screen L1-43
21 Start/End code management Delete Execute L1-43
22 FD format L1-44
23 Second cutoff processing data creation L1-46
24 Setting Start/End Codes L1-55
25 The NC creation example of Edge-Cut process L1-56
26 NC data example of High Acc Prcs Time Cal executing L1-60

[L2] Processing instructions

1 Processing time parameter Parameter setting L2-1
2 Processing time parameter Processing condition FLD input L2-1
3 Processing time parameter Beam ON / OFF time setting L2-2
4 FLD input condition confirmation Display of the list of screens L2-3
5 FLD input condition deletion Delete execution L2-3
6 Processing instruction NC data creation L2-3
7 Processing instruction Format Setting L2-3-2
8 Processing instruction Processing instructions creatio4
9 Processing instruction Processing attributes deletion L2-8
10 Processing instruction Processing instructions edit L2-9
11 Retry change codes Retry M202,NO L2-11
12 NC data edit L2-12
13 Material specific gravity setting Specific gravity registration L2-12
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal L2-13

[L3] NC input and output

1 NC link NC link… L3-1
2 Paper tape device Reader L3-1
3 Paper tape device Puncher L3-1
[M] File management
[M1] File management
1 File management Load M1-1
2 File management Save M1-3
File management / M1-3
3 Load from outside … M1-5
4 Save from outside… M1-6
5 Part management Load M1-7
6 Part management Save M1-17
Part management / M1-17
7 CAD data FD management List input M1-20
8 CAD data FD management List delete M1-21
9 CAD data FD management Input M1-22
10 CAD data FD management Output M1-22
11 CAD data FD management List M1-23
12 CAD data FD management Delete M1-23
13 Word pattern 2 M1-24
14 Word pattern 3 M1-28
15 FD format M1-32
16 Temporarily save Save M1-32
17 Temporarily save Load M1-32

[M2] log file

1 Log file Change M2-1
2 Log file Execute M2-1
3 Automatically execute log when starting Creation Start M2-1
4 Automatically execute log when starting Creation End M2-1
5 Delete unnecessary log files Delete execute M2-2
[N] Special function
[N1] Special figures
1 Involute… A3-1
2 Simulation… A3-4
3 Results… A3-4
4 Rack… A3-5
5 Ellipse… A3-7
6 CAD data converter… N1-2
6-2 DXF conversion function N1-4-2
6-3 DXF conversion function N1-4-3
7 Plot print… N1-5
8 Endpoint connection N1-13
9 Free curve Draw A3-10
10 Free curve Done A3-10
11 Free curve Edit A3-10
12 Free curve All lines A3-11
13 Free curve Curve offset A3-12
14 Corner mode Block A3-10
15 Corner mode Arc A3-10
16 Corner mode Intersection A3-10
17 Corner mode ExtIntersection A3-10
18 External point group data conversion A3-13
19 Spline curve Open curve A3-14
20 Spline curve Close curve A3-14
21 Spline curve Pass-through point edit A3-15
22 Spline curve Spline decomposition A3-16
23 Spline curve Tolerance setting A3-16
24 Spline curve Tolerance changing A3-17
25 Digitizer N1-15

[N2] Returning conversion

1 Returning table data change Y V change N2-1
2 Returning table data change NC data edit N2-1
3 Returning table data change Change file edit N2-1
4 Returning table data change Check file edit N2-1
5 NC output FLD output L1-29
6 NC output Puncher L3-1

[N3] Other companies NC change

1 3.5 model FLD Input N3-1
2 3.5 model FLD FD list N3-1
3 Outside NC input N3-1
4 A company change A company change execution N3-1
5 A company change Conversion result output N3-1
6 M company change M company change execution N3-1
7 NC output edit L1-25
8 Inverse conversion L1-42

[N4] Sheet change

1 3.5 model FLD Input L1-28

2 3.5 model FLD Output L1-29
3 3.5 model FLD List of FD L1-30
4 NC sheet change N4-1
 5 NC data Edit L1-25
6 All lines A3-11
7 Path setting Processing reference point
8 Path setting Beam ON1 J1-10
9 Path setting Beam OFF1 J1-10
10 Path setting Automatic J1-12
11 Path setting Manual J1-11
12 NC creation NC code addition I1-3
13 NC creation NC data creation L1-1
14 Sheet NC change N4-1
15 Inversion L1-22

[O] Screen operation

[O1] Screen operation
1 Screen operation Zoom O1-1
2 Screen operation Zoom out O1-1
3 Screen operation Incremental O1-1
4 Screen operation Continuous O1-2
5 Screen operation Previous O1-2
6 Screen operation Automatic Zoom O1-2
7 Screen operation Re-draw O1-3
8 Screen operation Up O1-3
9 Screen operation Left O1-3
10 Screen operation Right O1-4
11 Screen operation Down O1-4
12 Multi view Setting O1-4
13 Multi view Change O1-5
14 Multi view Erase O1-5
15 View change Multi O1-5
16 View change Single O1-5
17 Grid ON O1-6
18 Grid OFF O1-6
19 Grid Size O1-6
20 Grid Origin O1-6
21 Hardcopy O1-7
22 Auxiliary coordinates O1-9
23 Clip board paste (Rectangle) O1-10
24 Clip board paste (Frame) O1-12

[P] Exit
[P1] Exit
1 Exit Exit? P1-1
2 Version Version confirm… P1-1

[Z] GNU-GPL published Z-1

Basic operation order

2-1. Statement . symbol

Explain statements and symbols in this book.

2－１
 2-2. Start and end of LA
1) Starting method of CamMagic LA
Start up the personal computer.
For details regarding the personal computer startup procedure, see the personal
computer operation manual.
Operate according to either A or B to start CamMagic LA.
A) Double click (click two times rapidly and leave) shortcut icon of CamMagic LA on
desktop.
B) Select "Start" "MITSUBISHI CADCAM LA" "LA".

CamMagic LA screen appears after several seconds.

2－２
2) Ending method of CamMagic LA
Operate according to one of A ~ C to start the command of ending menu.
A) Select "End" in main menu and "End CamMagic LA" of submenu.
B) Select "File" "End program" in pull-down menu.
C) Select " " at the top right corner.

The "end confirmation" dialog box displays.

To end the CamMagic LA operation, click [Yes] or key-in [Y] or [y].

(To return to the CamMagic LA screen, click [No] or key-in [N] or [n].)
The following message displays if the drawing has not been saved.

To save the drawing, click [Yes] or key-in [Y] or [y], then enter the name of the save
destination file.
If the drawing is not to be saved, click [No] or key-in [N] or [n].
End the personal computer operation.
For details regarding the personal computer END procedure, see the personal computer
operation manual.

2－３
 2-3. About operations of mouse and keyboard
2-3-1. Operations of mouse
1) Movement of mouse cursor

When moving mouse on mat, cursor ( ) on the screen will move correspondingly.

2) Function of mouse buttons

Left button Select Used to select points, lines and circles (arcs)
made, or select endpoints, intersection
points, middle points and centers of line
segments or arcs.
Middle button (right button Indicate Indicating X, Y coordinates displayed on
for double-button mouse) screen, used in specified areas or for
indicating directions.
Right button (none for Confirm Same with "Enter" key in function, but
double-button mouse) operation sometimes different for different commands
(it can not be used for input or inputting
values via keys).

3) Usage of mouse buttons

Select menu
Move the cursor on buttons of menu or tool bar to
be used, click left or middle button.

2－４
2－５
* Selection range
Select elements in this tool bar (In the Standard tool bar).
You can appoint it from a keyboard.
(W ) : Select the figures in specified rectangle. Not selected Selected

(C ) : Select figures intercrossed (E ) : Delete the selected elements.

with specified rectangle as
well as inside figures.

(A ) : Add selected elements.

(O ) : Select figures outside selected rectangle.

(D ) : Select all figures displayed on screen.

2－６
 Selection range Various kinds of lines selection function
When executing various kinds of commands, selecting button in range tool bar can specify
elements to be processed.

[Selection function of various kinds of lines Example]

1. Complete cancellation method of only light blue two-point link shaped line from DXF data after
input conversion.
After enabling function "F9: element cancellation", click

button of "Select range tool bar".

On the left screen, "Sort of lines" is "Two-point link shaped line"

and "Color" is "Light blue".

Clicking "End" will only select "light blue" "two-point link shaped
line" and clicking "Enter" will execute "Cancel elements".

2. Range
button is useful for "elements cancellation"" and "Move" and "Copy", etc function of figures.

[Precautions]
3. After inputting conversion DXF data, etc, the size line may be grouped when size lines can not
be selected in selection functions of different kinds of lines.
Generally, when creating DXF data containing size lines, the following may occur:
(1) Output in the form of data recognized as size lines.
(2) Output size lines as a grouped pattern data.
(3) Output figures constituting size lines as disorder data.
(2) You should perform ungrouping in (2) in order to recognize as size lines in selection
functions of various kinds of lines.
(3) It can not be recognized as size lines after input conversion in (3).

4. This command, separately start (button), not operating.

After executing figure edit commands such as "Cancel elements" or "Move" "Copy", etc., enable
this function and perform operations.

2-7-2
 Selection of overlapped lines
If figures overlap, upper figure (drawn later) will be selected after selection.
Use [ ? ] key to select lower (drawn earlier) figure.
1) [F9] ( = cancel elements)
[Select elements] is displayed in message
column.
2) [ ? ] [Enter]
3) Elements cancelled

"Enter | next alternate ( or )"is

displayed in message column.
Selected figures become yellow.
4) If right
When errors occur, [ ] or [ ]

2) Functions of keys

2-10
2-11
 [Esc] key
Used to return (Undo) the previous step.
1) [F10] (= cancel elements)
2) Figures cancelled

Selected elements are cancelled.

3) [Esc] key

Cancelled elements are displayed.

2-12
3) Input method of X, Y coordinates
There are following two methods for inputting X, Y coordinates:
Absolute value input .. Input X, Y distance from origin.
Increment input ......... Input X, Y distance from the former point.
Example of drawing figures according to real points

4) Input method of polar coordinates

Input according to polar coordinates

2-13
5) Useful operational symbols and functions
When X, Y coordinates are input with numbers, they indicate useful operational symbols
and functions.

Each function can be used for arithmetic and bracket operations.

Each function is valid only for upper case mode.

 - Precaution -
Input X, Y coordinates or circle radius,
controlled by the following range.
0 ~ ± 99999.999 unit: mm

2-14
2-3-3. File management
When accessing files, following screen appears:

1) Selection menu

1.1) Selection method

Press the function key (for instance, for "F1: call out", press "F1".) for number
selection or utilize , move cursor to selected menu.
1.2) "F2: interrupt"
End this screen (button " " at the top right corner of screen has the same function.).
1.3) "F4: management"

0 Folder is a management unit (case) registered to each item (e.g. user name, order
name, etc.), a folder can exist in another folder.
Management is very easy on the basis of level.
(Example) After registered in user name unit, one user is a folder.

1 Multi-item selection is invalid.

2 Multi-item selection is valid.
3 When the setting is NOT WRITABLE, ( ) is displayed in column "Book" of the
list.
4 Exclusively controlled items are displayed with “ ” in the column of “book”.
About exclusive control, please refer to -5-3-4 on page 2-21-2.

2-15
1.4) "F5: Retrieval"

In the same retrieval (retrieval of screen name and file name, etc) as mentioned above,
execute "Retrieve the character string contained", and you can perform insertion
retrieval (10 continuous times at most).
After retrieval, display the character strings retrieved on the list (refer to the
following diagram).
Besides, move pointer to the display column of retrieved character string during
insertion retrieval, character strings inserted for retrieval will be displayed several
seconds later.

1.5) "F6: Display"

2-15-2
2-15-3
1.6) "F7: Print"

7 CSV (Comma Separate Value) file is a kind of text file which are arranged after
data is divided by comma (,).
It can be used for computation software or to input values in database, etc.

1.7) "F8: Previous page"

Display the previous page in list.

1.8) "F9: next page"

Display the next page in list.

2-15-4
2) List

2.1) Selection method

Utilize arrow keys (" ", " ", " " and " ") to move cursor to selected place, or to
move it to selected place.
Pressing "Shift" together with can select several continuous items in one time.
Besides, pressing "Ctrl" together with can select any items in one time.
When there are too many files or folders and they can not be displayed in one screen,
you can use scroll bar (shown above).

2.2) Movement of folders

Select folder (indicated with [folder name]) to be moved or is used for
"Screen name" field at the selected place.
[..] on the first line of list can be moved to the folder of previous level.
But it cannot be moved to folders before "FS~".

2.3) Input method of comments

Select folders or files into which comments will be input is used for "Comment"
field at the selected place.

, please input comments and click "OK"

button after the left screen is displayed.

2.4) Input method of materials, board thickness, vertical size and horizontal size (these
items may not exist in some condition) is same with that of comments in 2.3.

However, unit for "Size" is KB (kilo bit).

For change of "update time" "creation time", please refer to 1.5) "F6: Display".

2-15-5
3) Schematic diagram
Schematic diagram can be displayed for screen files and material files.
For display method, please refer to 1.5) "F6: Display".

3.1) Detailed display of one screen

Display schematic diagram, names and sizes of screen selected in list.

(These will not be displayed when selecting folders.)
Double-click (press two times rapidly) schematic diagram to call out.

3.2) A list of nine screens

Display schematic diagrams and names of the nine screens below selected screen in the list
(according to the number when there are less than nine screens.)
(For folders, only folder names can be displayed.)
The yellow part of displayed screen name is the presently selected contents in the list.
However, when "Shift" or "Ctrl" key is used to select several items, only selected items can be
displayed.
Double-click (press two times rapidly) schematic diagram to call out.

2-15-6
4) Precaution
When switching from or into the drawing (CAD) screen, please use task bar.

Task bar

Contents of using to move cursor to switch screen

When drawing (CAD) screen has been ended, file management screen will automatically end.

2-16
2-4. Screen summary
2 - 4 -1. LA screen summary
①menu bar(pull-down menu)
left number②standard tool bar③coordinate tool bar④idle space
tool bar
left number⑤screen tool bar⑥option tool bar⑦edit tool bar
left number⑧drawing tool bar⑨liner tool bar
⑩file format tool bar title bar
⑪one click tool bar

⑯main menu

⑰submenu
⑱tab

⑫auxiliary menu tool bar

⑭screen tool bar

(message display bar)

⑬function tool bar ⑮status tool bar

⑲layer tool bar ⑳layer list tool bar

For each tool bar and status bar (②～⑮、⑲、⑳), display/not display switch and display place
can be changed freely via [Display] [Tool bar].

Besides, display/not display switch can be performed on left

displayed screen after pressing the middle mouse button( Right
button for double button mouse) at drawing area and outside
title bar.

Each menu bar and menu (①、⑯～⑱) are displayed at the place above mentioned.
Submenus can be switched and displayed via main menu and tab selection.
For details, refer to:
Menu bar, tool bar, status bar 2-4-2. About tool bar
Main menu, submenu, menu bar 3. About commands

2-17
2-4-2. About tool bar
Menu bar
Select command name with mouse left button, or after clicking buttons at ( ) after command
name, display pull-down menu.

After selecting items marked with "..." or " " in pull-down menu, display windows or
pull-down menu.
-1

Build a bland drawing file

Open
Save
Name and save…(Rename)

Print
NC data print
Set text print
→ ①－１－１
→ ①－１－２
→ ①－１－３

End of CamMagic LA

-1–1

１～９ : Call drawing file

①- 1 – 2
Call drawing file

Entry of backup

Call the drawing file whitch

backuped

Delete backup history

2-18
-1–3
Input any file
Output any file
Start IGES / DXF / BMI replacement
screen
Draw after changing input DXF data
→①－３－１－１
Connection end points
Treatment of figures overlaps, etc.
Inverse change

- 1－3－1

Input random drawing file

Output random drawing file
Input random NC file
Output random NC file
Input random DXF file
Output random DXF file
Input random IGES file
Output random IGES file

-2

Cancel elements

-3

Partially magnify
Automatic magnification of display
Magunify
Minify
Previous magnification
Mavement
Draw again
Magunify connection part

Switch status bar display/not display

→①－３－１

2-18-2
 -3-1
Show/Hide of each tool
bar

When reading screen data made in CamMagic

LA from LA500, LA600, LA600A/E, set this tool
bar, and output screen data from CamMagic LA.
Please refer to pages 2-22-2 and M1-20.
If you do not use LA500, LA600, LA600A/E,
please set as “Specigy CamMagic type”. In order
to avoid misoperation, set the tool bar into NOT
DISPLAY.

Setting display status

Initializing location of the all tool

bars.
-4

→ -4-1
→ -4–2
→optional menu is displayed.

-4-1

Switch modal ON/OFF

Random point becomes operational
Relative point becomes operational
Central point becomes operational
Extention intersection point becomes
operational
Element center becomes operational
Intersection point becomes operational
Element endpoint becomes operational

-4-2
Selected figures / Measure the shortest distance

Data before / after display

Elements before / after display
Display relative neighbor

Set selected number of bits

A : Confirmation of identical figures

B : Display element endpoints
A B C : Display number of identical figures
C D : Display confirmation symbols of indentical
D
E figures
F E : Check the small of the lines
F : Check the improper data

2-19
①－５

→ ①- 5 – 1

→ ①- 5 – 2
→ ①- 5 – 3

→ ①- 5 – 4 - 1
→ ①- 5 – 5

→ ①- 5 – 6
→ ①- 5 – 7

→ ①- 5 – 8

→ ①- 5 – 9

①－５－１
Line：choose line type

Arrow：choose arrow type

Color ：choose line color

①－５－２
A : Change work layer
B : Change work layer mane，line type and line color
C : Layer operation while referring to an image list（⑱－１－２）
D : Confirm and change the name, line tpye and line color of the
chosen layer
E: Confirm and set the line type and color which is processing at that
time by list
F : Confirm and edit the Edit /Dispaly state of all layers by list
G : Delete all elements that belong to a certain layer.
H: Remove all elements that belong to a certain layer to other layers
A B
I: Copy all elements that belong to a certain layer to other layers
C J : Move specified elements (only) to other layers
K : Copy specified elements (only) to other layers
D L : Change the chosen layer to “Display ON” mode
E F
M : Change the chosen layer to “Edit OFF” mode (low light display)
N : Change the chosen layer to “Dispaly ON” mode (high light
G display)
H I O : Change the chosen layer and work layer only to “Dispaly ON”
mode (high light dispaly)
J K P : Change all layers except the chosen layer and work layer, to “Edit
M OFF” mode (low light display)
L N Q : Change all layers to “Dispaly ON” mode (high light dispaly)
O P
Q
2-20
①-5-4-1
Settings of switching mouse buttons (2 button / 3
button)
Switching to graph ①-5-4-2
Switching to graph ①-5-4-6
Settings of switching keybord types (AT compatible machines / NEC PC98)
Response settings when
Settings of switching mouse buttons (2 button / 3 button)
switching menu buttons
Response time (when pushing
or after pushing and releasing
menu button) switch

Designate floppy drive

Switch directions of screen
movement by roller mouse when
the mouse pointer is located at
upper, lower, left or right part of the
screen

Display the help screen of input device

Print the currentiy-displayed screen
Restore the setting value of input device to the initial value (as indicated)
Switch zoom and screen-rolling speed of the roller mouse
① -5-4-2 Switching to graph ①-5-4-1
Switching to graph ①-5-4-6
Display the folder of each file.
Display the change screen of file
system
Specify of Drive : see (①-5-4-3A)
Specify of UNC : see (①-5-4-3B)

Display the help screen of file

system (①-5-4-5)
Display option setting screen (①-5-4-5)
Display exclusive control setting screen (①-5-4-4)

The folder where the "drawing data", "NC data", "part data", "work sheet data", "Arrangement
requirements data" are saved can be transferred to another PC within the network.
To permit full access to the other PC, specify a "shared" status.
If you need to refer to the data in other computers to make settings, always start the object
computer first to ensure that it can be recognized via computers on the network when used for
CamMagic LA.

2-21
①－５－４－３Ａ(Specify of Drive)

Designation of drive for saving folder of files.

Designation of folder for saving files(Double

click designation)

Save folder of files and return to initial value.

Create the folder for saving files in selected

folder.

Display the folder for saving files.

①－５－４－３Ｂ(Specify of UNC)
Open the network computer. Go down the
folder hierarchy and select the desired folder.

Create a folder under the selected folder to

save each file.

Precautions For "Drawing files", always set the name of saving folder to FSdwg.
For "NC data files", always set the name of saving folder to FSnc.
For "Part files", always set the name of saving folder to FSbuzai.
For "Work sheet files", always the name of saving folder to FSwork.
For "Arrangement request data files", set the name of saving folder to FSjob.

2-21-2
①－５－３－４

Exclusive control switch setting

Precautions When there are more than two CamMagic LAs on network, and picture file, NC data
folder, and part file are shared, set all CamMagic LA as the object to “YES”.

①－５－３－５

Select ( enter a check-mark) to

switch to a database file
management format.

Precautions To specify a database file management format, enter a check-mark, then click [OK].

A database must be build order to use the database format.

For databae details, refer to the file management(database) operation manual(

2-21-3
①－５－4－６
switching to graph ①－５－4－２
switching to graph ①－５－4－２
current value change drawing/attribute
number
Default settings ：30000
（30000～300000）
change the type of NC
editor standard ISP table
「change」button
open graph ①－５－4－２
choose Eternal editor

External editor must

be selected firstly and
then push 「change」
button.
Notice item・in order to make drawing/attribute number valid，must start CamMagic LA again.
now the start again message dialog box will be showed .

①－５－4－７

Please choose the external editor needed

2-21-4
①－５－５
→ -5–5-1
→ -5–5-2
→ -5–5-3
→ -5–5-4
→ -5–5-5

① －５－５－１

Set arrow color

Set arrow type
Set linecolor
Set line type
Under the characteristic point choice automatic
mode, set the characteristic point which will be
treated as an object The characteristics point which
is on will be setted as an object
Set characteristic point guidence（remark1）
Set minimum mumber of the analyzed results.
Set MarkingSize
Set the error range of the selected shape
Set whether to convert NumLock key to comma
Set the color changed by the ChkShortLineColor
Set the approximation procedure of spline
Max distance bofore and after the command.
The angle more than value then not create tangent
angle.
The radius less than value then not convert.
（remark１）
ON：When push the SHIFT key and move mouse near it,the characteristic point mode will
automaticly navigate to ON characteristic point
ON（reverse）：When move mouse near it ,the characteristic point mode mill automaticly naviget to
ON characteristic point
OFF：Characteristic point navigation will not be done

①－５－５－２

A : Set the shape which has been offested

B : Set the insert mode of offset
C : Set the initial value of size digit
D : Set the value after size digit is changed
E : Set the initial state of ０ suppress
F : Set the after ０ suppress change is done
G : Set the initial value of character height
H : Set the value after character height is changed
I : Set the value of one arrow write mode
J : Set the height of comments
K : Set the width of comment
L :Set the minimum size in which comment can be
displayed
M: Note Display (VectorChar/FontChar) is set. (Note 1)
(note１)

・The case only that a note display setting is [FontChar] is displayed in the second level Kanji

・As for the note tilt function, the case that a note display setting is [FontChar] becomes invalid.

・The handwriting of the FontChar can't be changed.

・Even the case that a note → marking convert function was used, the case that a note display Setting is [FontChar]
become marking by the VectorChar. (* the second level Kanji can't convert, character only except for that is converted)

2-21-5
・As for the note mirror image highlight function, an operation varies in the note display setting as the following.

Note display setting is [VectorChar] Note display setting is [FontChar]

Up and down The display of the note highlights up The order of the character highlights

highlight and down. up and down.

left and right The display of the note highlights left The order of the character highlights

highlight and right. left and right.

①－５－５－３

A
B
C

A : Set if do automatic backup or not

B : Set backup maximum value (remark3)
C : Set whether the backup is done in accordance with command times（specify the
execution times）
D : Set whether backup is done in every fixed time（specify the update interval）
(remark3)
E : Set if backup or not wheh the rest elements changes
（remark２） : Update from old-version when backup is successed and reach the preparation number
（remark３） : Backup is not automaticly being done under the state without any operation

①－５－５－４

Change to standard type or arrow type

Set if docks assistant menu or not
Set if automaticly erase an inependent menu
or not
Change menu type
remark
When ①－５－５－４ setting is changed, please save image thickness then restart the
program changed setting will be effective after restart

①－５－５－５

Set ON/OFF of undo function

Change undo mode
Set undo times

About undo mode

Nrml : In the case of the normal use, please set this. (Normal mode)
Simple : Please set when command response is slow. Though the unit which can be undone
becomes a command unit, but the response within command will be improved. (Simple mode)

2-21-6
－5－6

3 10
17
11
4 18
12
5 19
13
6
14
7
15 16 20
8 9
No Item Content
1 Machine List Select the machine number to edit setting.
2 No. Machine number
3 Name Input a name of machine no.
4 Machine Select the type of processing machine.
If select processing machine name, NC equipment name is
5 NC
automatically determined.
6 Comment Input comment.
7 Prcs ref Select the position of processing reference point.
Offset dir Select offset direction. If don’t know what to select, follow the
8
recommended offset direction.
Recommend If select processing machine name, the recommended offset
9
direction is automatically determined.
10 Prcs cnd setting Select whether to use auto condition set.
11 IP (host name) Input IP address or host name of the processing machine.
Port Input port number of the processing machine. The initial value is
12
2000.
13 Post Select "F-CUT" when using F-CUT
14 Post(NC-CHG) ( Cannot choose )
15 Update button Update the set machine no. information.
16 Clear button Clear the information of the machine no. currently specified.
17 Count Display the number of process conditions registered.
Select folder Select folder and register all process condition files stored in the
18
folder.
From machine Register all the process conditions registered in the processing
19
machine.
20 Close Close the processing machine information setting screen.

2-21-7
 An NC Equipment name determines automatically if a machine name is chosen and the
recommendation offset direction is chosen.

About HII, HV, LV, two kinds of models of 2kw or less and 3kw or more exist in an oscillator.
When these models are set earlier CamMagic LA Ver.4, it is loaded as 3kw or more in
upgrade .When the oscillator of 2kw or less, please change on the setting screen..

When there is no processing machine which it has in the list of names, please choose what has a
same NC.

The backup data of processing conditions before upgrading after CamMagic LA ver.3 is contained
in No. 8～10 machine.

How to find out the IP address of a processing machine

「Parameter」→「Menu Switch」→「Input-and-output Para」screen is displayed.
Please push the 「network connection」button on the second page of the 「Input-and-output Para」
screen.
a) When there is a name in the list (processing machine that boards are two sheets of types)：
Please choose a name and push 「property」button.
Please check TCP/IP setting and check IP address.
b) When there is no name in the list (processing machine that a board is one sheet of type)：
Please push the 「setting change of processing machine communication」button on the second
page of the 「input-and-output Para」screen.
Please check mentioned 「#11 IP address」in the (PC).

If update the processing machine information, the standard processing machine file is
overwritten and copied to the folder of the specified number in FMost folder of CamMagic LA.
Even if processing file has got from your processing machine, it will be overwritten, so if updated
the processing machine information setting, please re-register the processing file.

2-21-8
 －5－7

1. Set whether to specify individually register folder or not when in nesting.

2. Set whether to register generated edge materials or not when in nesting.
3. Select the Edge material kind ( Skelton, Contour, Steps, Line ). Please refer to K1-10-7.
4. Create the Edge Material cutting line. Please refer to J8, K1-10-7.
5. The matter whether a part No. is displayed at the time as the Nesting is set.
6. The part number size when displaying a part number is set.
7. The division angle of the part at the time of the part register is set.
8. It is set whether a confirm dialog is displayed at the time of editing nesting result.
9. The display number of a part thumbnail when displaying a confirm dialog is set.
10. The part load type at the time of adding parts is set.
「Auto」is called as part shape (corresponding to non-display of pierce and rapid feed /snap
argmnt) if nesting result is displayed.
A「drawing」is called as drawing shape (uncorresponding to display of pierce and rapid feed
/snap argmnt). However, it calls as part shape when the part of the same name is arranged
during nesting result is displayed.
11, The reference position of the mouse of the drag shape at the time of snap argmnt is set.
12, Here you can select whether to display the interference state when a drag shape of the snap
deployment time are interfering.
13. By auto pierce function / range avoid function, when one closed form is chosen, it is set whether
it adds as the inside or it adds as the outside.
14. Set the code for judging marking when in NC reverse converting.
At “ , (comma)”end, regist three codes.

15. Set the distance for judging micro joint when in NC reverse converting.
16. The matter whether NC file is saved in the NC formation time is set.
17. Folder is specified in the NC formation time, and the matter whether a NC File is saved is set.
18. It is set whether R value is added to a pin angle corner when create NC.
19. The minimum angle is set whether R value is added to a pin angle corner when create NC.
20 Set whether to display comment of processing length etc. at the beginning during NC generation.
21 Set whether to output the code for collecting the part performance during NC generation.
22. The matter whether First Mark On NC at the time as the Nesting is set
The subject of First Mark On NC is only registed nesting figure.
When First Mark On NC result is visual observation, "NC inversion" or "NC data
checker" is executed.
23. Set how to do to calculate processing time when creating NC.
24. Set the max thickness which performs F-CUT when create NC
25. Here you can select whether to route setting target shape to open the automatic avoidance
runtime.

2-21-9
－5－8－1

1 2 3 15

16
5
4
6

12

10 11

13

14

17 18

2-21-10
 No Name Function
1 Initial button To initialize the contents of customization.
2 Open button To open the saved menu
3 Save button Save as name of the menu under edit.
4 Addition item selection view A menu to add is selected.
The menu selected with the addition item selection view is added to a
5 Add button
menu display view.
6 Delete button The menu selected with the menu display view is deleted.
7 Add line button The null line is inserted in the line chosen with the menu display view.
8 Delete line button The line chosen with the menu display view is deleted.
9 Add label button A label is added to a menu display view.
10 Move left button The menu selected with the menu display view is moved to the left.
11 Move right Button The menu selected with the menu display view is moved to the right.
12 Move up Button The menu selected with the menu display view is moved to the up.
13 Move down Button The menu selected with the menu display view is moved to the down.
The displayed contents of a menu display view can be checked by
14 Preview Button
preview.
15 Switching menu list box 1 and 2 of the menu to customize are changed.
16 Menu display view The contents to customize are displayed.
17 OK button The contents of edit are decided and customization is ended.
18 Cancel button The contents of edit are canceled and customization is ended.

「add label」button proceed to enter the label name.

The length of label name is from 1 to 24 characters in half width. (from 1 to 12 characters in full
width.)

If it is right-clicked on a menu display view, the background color of a button can be changed.

A preview screen displays the image of the actual menu screen.

2-21-11
When a menu type is 「LA4 menu」, it is not reflected in a menu even if it customizes.

The maximum of the menu button which can be arranged is 46 of 23 lines x 2 rows.
When a label is used, one line is monopolized with one label.

2-21-12
－5－8－2

1 2 3 11

２
12
5
4
6

10

13 14

No Name Function
1 Initial button To initialize the contents of customization.
2 Open button To open the saved tool bar
3 Save button Save as name of the tool bar under edit.
4 Addition item selection view A tool bar to add is selected.
The tool bar selected with the addition item selection view is
5 Add button
added to a tool bar display view.
6 Delete button The tool bar selected with the too bar display view is deleted.
7 Add separator button A label is added to a tool bar display view.
The tool bar selected with the tool bar display view is moved to
8 Move up Button
the up.
The tool bar selected with the tool bar display view is moved to
9 Move down Button
the down.
The displayed contents of a tool bar display view can be checked
10 Preview Button
by preview.
11 Switching tool bar list box 1 and 2 of the tool bar to customize are changed.
12 Tool bar display view The contents to customize are displayed.
13 OK button The contents of edit are decided and customization is ended.
14 Cancel button The contents of edit are canceled and customization is ended.
A

2-21-13
preview screen displays the image of an actual tool bar.

The maximum of the tool bar which can be arranged is 30 pieces.

－5－8－3

1 2 3
10
5
4
6

11 12

2-21-14
 No Name Function
1 Initial button To initialize the contents of customization.
2 Open button To open the saved function key
3 Save button Save as name of the function key under edit.
4 Addition item selection view A function key to add is selected.
The function key selected with the addition item selection
5 Add button
view is added to a function key display view.
The function key selected with the function key display view
6 Delete button
is deleted.
The function key selected with the function key display view
7 Move up Button
is moved to the up.
The function key selected with the function key display view
8 Move down Button
is moved to the down.
The displayed contents of a function key display view can be
9 Preview button
checked by preview.
10 function key display View The contents to customize are displayed.
11 OK button The contents of edit are decided and customization is ended.
12 Cancel button The contents of edit are canceled and customization is ended.

A preview screen displays the image of an actual function key.

The number of the function keys which can be arranged is 12 pieces.

Notes common to customization

Reflection of the contents of customization requires the reboot of CamMagic LA.

CamMagic LA cannot be operated during customization.

It is the list of an error message common to customization and solution.
Error message Solution
Please empty the last line. Please make addition processing at the last line into a
Addition processing was interrupted. blank possible.
Please make the label character into the half Please input the label with less than 24 characters of half
width of less than 24 characters. width (12 characters of full width).
Please delete the file in a PRM folder and reinstall
The form of a PRM file is different.
CamMagic LA.
Please save at
In the case of menu：USERPRM¥Menu
The specified folder cannot be saved
In the case of tool bar：USERPRM¥Toolbar
In the case of function key：USERPRM¥Functionkey
Please open the file of
In the case of menu：USERPRM¥Menu
Files of the specified folder cannot be opened
In the case of menu：USERPRM¥Toolbar
In the case of menu：USERPRM¥Functionkey
Failed to load the PRM file Please delete Filing. PRM and reinstall CamMagic LA.
In the label name, following characters are
Please do not use the mentioned character string for a
not allowed¥n : , ; * ? "" > < @
label name.
~ []

2-21-15
① －５－９
■ Operation
Register the command name corresponding to the shortcut key in "ShortCutKey.ini". When you
press the shortcut key, the dialog of "Recent command name" is listed, and "ShortCutKey.ini" also
starts at the same time.
You can set it as a shortcut key by copying the command name in the "Recent command name"
dialog and pasting it on the right side of "CTRL _? =" In "ShortCutKey.ini". After editing
"ShortCutkey.ini", save and exit.

The command name is displayed in

order of the most recently used
command.
You can select and copy.

Set the command referring to [Recent

command name]

■ Explanation
Edit "ShortCutKey.ini" and assign a command to the shortcut key.
The keys that can be set as shortcut keys are the keys in the red frame below. Up to 179 types of
command registration, such as "Ctrl + alphanumeric characters", "Ctrl + Shift + alphanumeric
characters", "Ctrl + Alt + alphanumeric characters", "Ctrl + Shift + Alt + alphanumeric characters",
etc., are available for shortcut keys.

2-21-16
・"Ctrl key + key in red frame"

・"Ctrl key + Shift key + key in red frame"

・"Ctrl key + Alt key + key in red frame"

・"Ctrl key + Shift key + Alt key + key in red frame"

2-21-17
■ Setting Example
Here is the procedure for assigning the command to create the center line as the origin to the
shortcut key of Ctrl + A.

（a）Create the center line as the origin

Input the origin coordinate with the

key

(b) Assign a command to create a shortcut key with the center line as the origin
Copy the command name of "Recent command name", paste it on the right side of "CTRL_A =" in
"ShortCutKey.ini", and set the key input operation of 「;0,0;」origin.「;」Means enter key input.

(c) When "Ctrl + A" is pressed, a center line is drawn at the origin.

2-21-18
■Notes
1) Default operation of shortcut key
For keys not assigned a command in "ShortCutKey.ini", the default shortcut keys in the table below
will operate.
# Item Shortcut key

1 「Create New (N)」 Ctrl+N

2 「Open (O) …」 Ctrl+O

3 「Overwrite Save (S)」 Ctrl+S

4 「Plot printing (P)…」 Ctrl+P

5 「Text printing (T)…」 Ctrl+T

6 「Undo」 Ctrl+Z

7 「Redo」 Ctrl+Y

8 Copy string of interface area Ctrl+C

9 Paste string into interface area Ctrl+V

For example, if you press "Ctrl + Z" when "ShortCutKey.ini" is below, Undo processing will be
executed.

"Ctrl + C" and "Ctrl + V" are fixed in the system, so commands can’t be assigned.
2) How to register file input / output commands
When registering the following two functions related to file input / output to the shortcut key, set
the command in the table below to the right side of "ShortCutKey.ini".

# Function Command to set

1 External read ¥E_EXT_LOADALL
2 External save ¥E_EXT_SAVEALL

2-21-19
3) How to register [move copy] command
Since move copy is a special command, when registering as a shortcut key, set the command in the
table below to the right side of "ShortCutKey.ini".
# Movement Move type Command to set
method
1 Move Parallel ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPMOVE;¥MCPPARA
2 Rotation ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPMOVE;¥MCPTURN
3 Symmetry ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPMOVE;¥MCPMIRROR
4 Scaling ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPMOVE;¥MCPSCALE
5 （ Linked with ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPMOVE;¥MCPSCALEN
note）
6 Copy Parallel ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPCOPY;¥MCPPARA
7 Potation ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPCOPY;¥MCPTURN
8 Symmetry ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPCOPY;¥MCPMIRROR
9 Scaling ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPCOPY;¥MCPSCALE
10 （ Linked with ¥MOVECOPY;¥MCPCOPY;¥MCPSCALEN
note）

4) How to register the [Line type-specific selection] / [Continuous drawing selection] command
Since [Line type-specific selection] is a special command, the command name is not displayed in
"Recent command name".
Below is an example of starting the [Line type-specific selection] dialog with the [Delete] command.

Please set "Line type-specific selection" command "ADSTYLESEL" without adding "¥" after
"Delete" command "¥ ERA". When this is executed, the [Line type-specific selection] dialog will be
started.。

¥ERA;ADSTYLESEL

For [Continuous drawing selection], please set it to the right side of "ShortCutKey.ini" like
"¥ERA;ADCONTSEL".

5) Commands that can’t be registered

Plot printing (Ctrl + P) Text printing (Ctrl + T) is a menu that only starts the dialog, so it can’t be
assigned to another shortcut key.

2-21-20
6) The popup of menu dialog can’t be registered
It is not possible to pop up the menu dialog with the shortcut keys. Even if you register the
command displayed in "Recent command name" in "ShortCutKey.ini", the popup menu will not
start. Below is an example of [Polyline Drawing].

When you touch [Drawing] - [Center line ...], a dialog of [Center line] pops up. When you press the
[Random Position] setting in this dialog and create the center line, the command name
"¥ CENPOIN" is displayed in the command name that was recently used. This is a command of
[Center line] - [Random Position], it is not a command to pop up the menu dialog.

7) Explanations of shortcut keys in the pull-down menu

As shown below, the display such as "Ctrl + N" in the pull-down menu of [File (F)] remains the
original display even if it is assigned to another shortcut key in "ShortCutKey.ini".

8) Priority with shortcut keys of other applications

The shortcut keys of other application software may operate preferentially.

2-21-21
-6

→Help is displayed.
→The folder of the manual is displayed.
→The folder of the seminar Text is displayed.
→ -6-1

-6-1

2-21-22
②Standard tool bar
Standard functions(File I/O, Print, etc.)
Create new drawing data
Open drawing data
Save drawing data

Interrior : Choose rectangular internal elements

Intersection : Choose the intersection element
that crosses with
rectangularinternal and rectangular
External : Choose rectangular external elements
Display : Choose all the elements showing in the
screen
Add : Add to choosed elements
Delete : Delete from choosed elements
Help:Context-sensitive help is displayed

About the context-sensitive help

・If push Context-sensitive help Button, Mouse Cursor changes into the Mark .
An Explanation Page about that Function is displayed when the Button of the Function
which wants to know how to use in that Condition is chosen.
・The Explanation of the menu Bar (pull down menu), the tool bar, the Main menu, the
submenu and the Auxiliary menu is possible as to the Display.
・Double-click on the pull down menu in this case that the Explanation of the menu Bar
(pull down menu) is displayed.
・The Beginning of the Explanation Page about the chosen menu is displayed by the
context-sensitive help.
In this case that a bottom side inside the Page has an applicable Explanation must
scroll a Screen.

③Coordinate tool bar

Display coordinate value of mouse pointer

④Available space tool bar

Display available space

2-22
⑤Screen tool bar
Zooming, Paning operation
Pan up
Pan down
Pan left
Pan right

Ensure screen operation commands can act continuously

Pan screen
Automatic magnification range
Zoom of part

⑥Selection tool bar

Choose mouse pointer
Set modal
Choose nearest point
Choose relative point
Choose center point

Choose extend intersection point Measure the distance between 2 elements

Choose middle point Choose the continuous shape without branchs
Choose intersection point Choose the figure which is in accordance with
Choose end point linear type, color, and shape type specified by
each linear

⑦Edit tool bar

Image edit

R Move rotation Please refer to K1-16

S Copy rotation Please refer to K1-17
T Dot connection Please refer to N1-8
U Figure arrangement Please refer to N1-6-3

2-22-2
⑧Drawing tool bar
Drawing

⑨Line type tool bar

Set line type or color

Open line type / arrow type change dialog ( ① – 5 – 1 )

Choose line color
Choose line type

⑩File type toolbar

When drawing data created via CamMagic LA ( or LA700W ) is input LA500, LA600 and
LA600A/E, set this toolbar, and output drawing data from CamMagic LA( or LA700W ).

After set to “Specify old LA format”, drawing data output to floppy or file management can be
input LA500, LA600 and LA600A/E.
Please refer to pages 2-19, pages M1-20.
However, for customers who do not use LA500, LA600 and LA600A/E, generally set to “specify
CamMagic LA format”. In order to prevent misoperation, disable the toolbar.

2-22-3
⑪One click Toolbar
The functions of One click Toolbar can prepare NC data of individual item processing from the
input of DXF/IGES data or NC data of nesting processing from nesting executing with simple
operations.
The following is specific functions.
· According to dragging & dropping DXF/IGES data, it does input converting, drawing
organizing, end point connecting, batch deleting, enlargement and reduction, then display on
screen.
· At one click individual item executing, it does drawing register, process reference point, note
ruled writing converting, interfering avoidance path, part register, NC formation · register and
formation of process instruction manual which of individual item data.
· At one click nesting executing, it does arrangement request nesting, processing reference point,
NC formation · register, drawing registering and formation of process instruction manual.

⑪-1 One click (process condition) Toolbar

Be based on the setting of process condition, it executes path setting and formation of NC data
and so on.
The setting and change of parameter can be executed together with the parameter setting of ⑪
-1-1 one click (process condition). This parameter setting links the setting value of each
command of CamMagic LA.
When 「one click: process condition」of toolbar screen of (1)-3-1 is selected, it displays.

A Update toolbar to the latest condition.

B Select machine No.. The addition and change of machine No., please refer to 【L1】
25.processing machine information management edit.
C Select process condition.
D Display the screen of process condition register. Please refer to【L1】13.automatic condition
register condition 1.
E Execute one click individual item. Please refer to ⑪-4.
F Execute one click nesting. Please refer to ⑪-5.
G Execute the CAD Batch Input Nestingg. Please refer to ⑪-6.
H Display the CAD Error List. Please refer to ⑪-6.
I Display one click (process condition) parameter setting ( ⑪-1-1, ⑪-7 )

As for the machine with which restricting is performed on the processing condition registration
screen, the background of a combo box becomes yellow.
A processing condition list of the machine with which restricting is performed is displayed in the
state where it was restricted.

2-22-4
⑪-1-1 one click (process condition) parameter setting
Set parameters which is relative to one click (process condition).About details, please refer to ⑪
-6.

⑪-2 one click (simple formation) toolbar

Be based on the setting of simple formation parameter, it executes path setting and formation of
NC data and so on.
The setting and change of parameter can be executed together with the parameter setting of ⑪
-2-1 one click (simple formation). This parameter setting can keep 99 types and doesn’t link the
setting value of each command of CamMagic LA.
When 「one click: simple formation」of toolbar screen of (1)-3-1 is selected, it displays.

A B C D E F G H
A Update toolbar to the latest condition.
B Select parameter number.
C Display the comment of parameter.
D Display the machine No. of parameter.
E Display the process condition of parameter.
F Execute one click individual item. Please refer to ⑪-4.
G Execute one click nesting. Please refer to ⑪-5.
H Display one click (simple formation) parameter setting ( ⑪-2-1).
⑪-2-1 one click (simple formation) parameter setting
Set parameters which are relative to one click (simple formation). About details, please refer to
⑪-6.
In the setting contents of NC data simple formation parameter before CamMagic LA ver.2, there
are locations where the setting contents are default settings. Please check and set them again.

2-22-5
⑪-3 data input
According to dragging & dropping DXF/IGES data, it does input converting, drawing organizing,
end point connecting, batch deleting, enlarging and reducing, then display on screen.
＊After installing CamMagic LA, in the case that

one click parameter setting hasn’t been executed

once, guidance dialogue will be displayed, then

push [OK] button, the setting screen will start.

After input setting items, please click [OK] button

to execute parameter setting. (About one click

parameter setting screen, please refer to ⑪-6.)

1) In the screen such as explorer, select folder, drag

and drop file name.

＊Drag and drop is an operation that click mouse at

file name, keep mouse being clicked and move it,

then separate mouse at CamMagic LA drawing

screen. When mouse is moving, keep mouse being

clicked and move to CamMagic LA drawing

1) screen, the shape of mouse cursor becomes arrow

mark and □
＋.

＊It can convert into the files of which the extend

names are *.dxf, *.igs, *.iges, *.igf. If want to

convert into the files of which the extend names

are others, it will display error dialogue.

＊ In the case that there exist drawings in the

drawing screen, all delete check dialogue will

start. In the case that delete all drawings, then

2-22-6
 display drawings which have been
input-converted, please click 「Yes」button. In the

case that don’t delete drawings, then display

drawings which have been input-converted

(merge) , please click「No」button. In the case that

cancel input-convert, please click「Cancel」button.

＊In the input-convert, the progress is displayed

with processing dialogue. In the case that want to

cancel input convert halfway, please click

「Cancel」button. If it’s a simple shape, the change

will be finished in an instant and the dialogue will

display for an instant too.

＊The drawings which have been input-converted

are displayed with automatic magnification ratio

in drawing screen.
＊The drawings which have been input-converted

are kept in work\convert.dwg file. This will be

overwritten with the convert-executing.

＊After input-converted, it will suggest that register

the drawings which have been displayed in

drawing screen to drawing file.

＊ About the comparison of CAD data converter

function, please refer to the table of next page.

＊ In the case that the number of elements is

insufficient, please increase the number of

elements of drawing/attribute by environment

setting tool. (refer to 2-21-3 )

＊About drawing organize and later, because the setting ＊ After input-convert, about the drawings that

of required parameters is completed by one click display in drawing screen, execute check

parameter, drawing selecting and input job won’t be command of date input screen of one click

occurred in executing. parameter setting screen from upper by order.

2-22-7
 ＊After input-convert, in the case that there doesn’t

exist drawings in drawing screen, display error

message.
＊About drawing organize function, it will spend a

lot of time in the case that there are many

elements in the screen. In executing, similar to

drawing organize executing, [redundant searching

(can abort by pushing Break key)] will be

displayed at the first line of message column. If

push Break key, the command will be aborted and

[drawing organize has been aborted. Return to the

condition prior to execute] will be displayed at the

third line of message column.

＊About end point connection function, it will spend

a lot of time in the case that there are many

elements in the screen. In executing, similar to

end point connection, 「 connecting[connect

complete number of elements/select number of

elements」will be displayed at the first line of

message column and numerical value in actual

processing will be displayed at the second line.

＊ In the case that error occurs halfway in this

command, error dialogue will be displayed and

error contents will be displayed in message

column too.

＊About the different of between DXF/IGES input function, DXF/IGES drag & drop function and CAD data

converter function.

No Item to compare DXF/IGES input function DXF/IGES input convert function

DXF/IGES drag & drop function of CAD data converter

1 Display for drawing screen Yes No

after convert

2 Number of times of operation DXF/IGES input function: 4 11 times (Convert : 7 times,

till the drawing screen is times display : 4 times)

displayed drag & drop : once

3 Batch convert of multiple files No Yes

2-22-8
4 File storage/folder specification Keep in fixed file Use same file name to register

after convert Folder can not be specified Folder can be specified

5 the setting method of DXF/IGES input screen of one Parameter setting screen of CAD

converting parameter click parameter setting screen data converter

DXF/IGES input function and DXF/IGES drag & drop function are suitable for the case that after input-convert

a DXF/IGES file and edit it at once. DXF/IGES input convert function of CAD data converter is suitable for the

case that batch-convert multiple DXF/IGES files and edit them which are selected from file list.

2-22-9
⑪-4 one click individual item executer
For the drawings which are displayed in drawing screen, execute drawing register, process
reference point, note ruled writing convert, interfering avoidance path, part register, NC
formation · register and formation of process instruction manual with the contents which have
been set by one click parameter.
＊After the install of CamMagic LA, in the case that one

click parameter setting has not been executed once,

guidance dialogue will be displayed, push [OK] button

and one click parameter setting screen will start.

After input setting items, please push [OK] button to

execute parameter setting. (About one click parameter

setting screen, please refer to ⑪-6.)

＊For drawings which is displayed in drawing screen,

Execute check command of individual item screen of

one click parameter setting screen from upper by

order.
＊ In the case that there exist drawings in drawing

screen or the command to execute which is not with

check by one click parameter, the executer won’t be

1) done and error message will be displayed.

1)Input name.
＊ When drawing register, part register, NC

formation·register and formation of process

2) instruction manual are with check in individual item

screen of one click parameter, it displays.

＊In the case that 「use drawing file name as note」of

drawing register screen of one click parameter is OFF,

display drawing name of screen title as default value.

When it’s ON, display the note in shape as default

value.

2-22-10
 ＊In the case that to do part register, please input no

more than 24 characters. In the case that not to do

part register, please input no more than 49 characters.

2) Push [OK] button.

＊In process reference point adding function, in the case
that there have exist process reference points, the
addition won’t be done.
＊In interfering avoidance path function, pierce of out
perimeter is added to the opposing angle side of
process reference point.
＊ In path check function, for process object shape,
similar to path check command, add yellow × mark,
after execute this command, 「There exists process
object shape」will be displayed.
＊The superscription confirmation screen is displayed
when there are a drawing, a material, NC data, and a
processing instruction sheet of the same name. No
please push the button when the button of entire yes
and interrupting without overwriting when you
overwrite the button and all files displayed after this
when you overwrite the displayed file yes.

3)

3) Fill in information in the part registration setting

dialog.
＊The auxiliary line and the linear without the end
point (horizontal line etc.) are automatically deleted
at the start of part registration.
＊For details of the dialog, please refer to the end of
[K1] 1.part registration.

4) Push [OK] button.

＊In NC formation function, in the case that there exists
4) process object shape, similar to NC formation
command, add yellow × mark, after execute this
command, 「There exists process object shape」will be
displayed.
＊In formation of process instruction manual function,
in the case that select HTML or Excel file format in
instruction manual form selection, display HTML or
Excel instruction manual.
＊ In the case that has opened and executed the
drawings which are in the sub folder of drawing folder
(FSdwg), register NC data and process instruction
manual to the same name sub folders of each NC
folder (FSnc) and process instruction manual folder
(FSreport¥HTML or XLS). Register part just to part
folder (FSbuzai).
＊In the case that there exist multiple process shapes in
drawing screen, execute drawing register, path
setting, NC formation and so on by process shapes.

2-22-11
 File name is added serial number automatically.
Furthermore, delete the shapes (rapid feed between
individual items and etc) which are not in process
reference point and the interior of circumscription
rectangle of outer perimeter.
＊ In the case that error occurs in executing the
command, error contents will be displayed in message
column.
＊By setting - processing machine information setting,
when it sets to except (「processing prcs ref 」, 「offset
direction 」, the value of「prcs cnd setting」, 「blank」
and 「the last value」), one-click parameter setting
value is read and performed.
＊When the check box of High Acc Prcs Time Cal in
“Single item” item with one click parameter setting is
ON, High Acc Prcs Time Cal is executed for each
single item execution.

5) After the one click parts execution, an execution

result is divided into a layer and displayed. The error

content of every layer is as mentioned in following

table.

0:NoE r It was completed without error.

1:RouteErr Error occurred in the path

formation.

2:PartsErr Error occurred in the part

register.

3:NcmakeErr Error occurred in the NC

formation.

4:OtherErr Error occurred in job state of it

except for 1 -3.

5:OpenElem It is an open shape. (It is outside

the processing object of the one

click parts executing)

6:HideLayer It is the element of the Edit

improper layer and the not

displayed layer. (It is outside the

Object of the one click parts

executing.)

*It is overwritten by the layer name of the case shown

above that layer name is given to 0 - 6 Layer.

*The error history File of the textual form is saved in

2-22-12
 WORK\OcPrts\OcPrtsFile.txt.

6) When it is divided into the layer, a register file name

is displayed in the note. In error note becomes red.

* Note has already existed, and in the case that drawing

name was not changed by the [Note is acquired as a

drawing name] Setting doesn't add a Note.

When executing, please do not push keyboard

for a long time.

2-22-13
* The error list of the one click parts executing and countermeasure are shown.
Message Countermeasure
When there is an element of Please perform "Path setting", "NC generation", etc.
Edge-Cut, one-click one piece of without using one-click one piece of article command.
article cannot be carried out.
The error occurred in division of a Close shapes both are revise the case that an inclusive
figure. relation has interference (Intersection) and inner holes
both.
Cancel grouping, and execute a parts.
Delete an unnecessary file, and secure the capacity of the
hard disc.
The error occurred in interference Delete a drawing frame from the Drawing.
evasion course creation. Remove a dimension line from the drawing, or make [data
The error occurred in input] [Batch Delete] [Dimension Line (Dimension Group)]
routing(Automatic Pierce). of the one click Parameter to ON.
Please do not specify the drawing of the 3-face drawing
Close shapes both are revise the case that an inclusive
relation has interference (Intersection) and inner holes
both.
Cancel grouping, and execute a parts.
Please adjust the Parameter of [Parts] [Automatic
Pierce/interference avoidance path].
The error occurred in part material Specify the part of the shape which can be registered as a
registration. part and a parts program.
Change part and parts program into the reverse in the
CamMagic LA and check shape.
Delete an unnecessary file, and secure the capacity of the
hard disc.
The error occurred in NC data Make [processing basing point] of the one click parameter
generation. to ON.
Delete an unnecessary file, and secure the capacity of the
hard disc.
Please check shape.

2-22-14
⑪-5 one click nesting executer
Execute arrangement request nesting, process reference point, path setting, NC
formation·register, drawing register and formation of process instruction manual with the
contents which have been set by one click parameter.
＊After the install of CamMagic LA, in the
case that one click parameter setting has
not been executed once, guidance dialogue
will be displayed, push [OK] button and one
click parameter setting screen will start.
After input setting items, please push [OK]
button to execute parameter setting. (About
one click parameter setting screen, please
refer to ⑪-6.)

＊Execute check command of nesting screen of

one click parameter setting screen from
upper by order.
＊In the case that there is no check with the
command which is executed by one click
parameter, error message will be displayed.
＊In the case that there exist drawings in
drawing screen, delete check dialogue will
start. In the case that it’s ok to delete
drawing, please click 「YES」.In the case
that abort with no deleting drawings, please
click 「NO」.

＊By setting - processing machine information

setting, when it sets to except (「processing
prcs ref 」, 「offset direction 」, the value of
「prcs cnd setting」, 「blank」 and 「the last

2-22-15
 value」), one-click parameter setting value is
read and performed.
1) Specify arrangement request file.
1) 1-a) In the case that to specify exiting
arrangement request file, please select
arrangement request file and push [F1: edit]
button.
1-b) In the case that specify a new
arrangement request file, select the first
line (line of [..]) or a blank line and push [F1:
edit] button, please input arrangement
request file name in arrangement request
file name input screen shown below and
push [OK] button.

＊In the case that 「arrangement file name」

2)
of arrangement request nesting screen of
one click parameter is「specified」, omit this
operation.
2) Edit arrangement request table and push
[F1: register] button.
＊About details of arrangement request table,
please refer to 【 K1 】 13. arrangement
request nesting executer.
＊ Display arrangement result and
arrangement result check dialogue. In the
case that the arrangement result which has
been displayed is all right, please click
「 YES 」 . In the case that to edit
arrangement result, please click 「NO」.

＊If click [NO] at arrangement result check

dialogue, it will be possible to edit
arrangement result. After edit, execute this
command again and re-arrangement
execute check dialogue will be displayed,
please click 「YES」. If click 「NO」, it will

2-22-16
 execute this command (specification of
arrangement request file) from beginning.

＊In path check function, for process object

shape, similar to path check command,
add yellow × mark, after execute this
command, 「 There exists process object
shape」will be displayed.
＊In NC formation function, in the case that
there exists process object shape, similar to
NC formation command, add yellow × mark,
after execute this command, 「There exists
process object shape」will be displayed.
＊In formation of process instruction manual
function, in the case that select HTML or
Excel file format in instruction manual form
selection, display HTML or Excel
instruction manual.
＊In the case that arrangement result become
multiple work sheets, execute drawing
register, path setting and NC formation by
work sheet.
＊The superscription confirmation screen is
displayed when there are a drawing, NC
data, and a processing instruction sheet of
the same name. No please push the button
when the button of entire yes and
interrupting without overwriting when you
overwrite the button and all files displayed
after this when you overwrite the displayed
file yes.

＊ When the check box of High Acc Prcs Time

Cal in “Nesting” item with one click
parameter setting is ON, High Acc Prcs

2-22-17
 Time Cal is executed for each work sheet.
＊In the case that error occurs in executing
the command, error contents will be
displayed in message column.
When One Click Nesting executing,
please do not push keyboard for a long
time.

2-22-18
⑪－６ CAD batch input nesting
Register the CAD file (CamMagicLA drawing, DXF, AutoCAD) stored in the specified folder,
and create a nesting arrangement request table based on the registered parts. If it is
determined that note information (part name, material, thickness, quantity, comment) is
included in the CAD data, processing can be performed while importing them (for details, refer
to ⑪-8 One-Click Parameter). (Refer to (2e) Part registration).
This can be used when there is only one part in the CAD data file. If there are multiple
parts, use "⑪-5 One-Click nesting" after registering the parts with "⑪-4 One-Click
individual item execution".

(1) Set the parameters in advance. For details of each item, refer to “⑪-7 One-Click Parameter
Setting”. This section describes the items to be set depending on the contents of CAD data to
be subjected to CAD batch nesting.
(a) Individual item
Turn on path setting (interference avoidance),
detour creation, and part registration.

(b) Individual item / drawing registration

Turn off "Use notes as drawing file name (individual item)".

①
②
(c) Individual item / part registration ③

Set parameters according to the target

CAD data.

2-22-19
 Work policy ① ② ③
When registering CAD data including ――― ―――
annotation information without acquiring
the annotation information
When registering CAD data including
annotation information collectively
When registering parts collectively by
replacing CAD data including annotation
information with the material / thickness of
the process condition toolbar
When registering parts while checking the
contents of CAD data including annotation
information
When registering CAD data including
annotation information while checking the
contents, and replacing the material and
thickness with those on the process
condition toolbar
Switch to the file management database when using the "Add to group nest" check box ON
(Refer to 2-4-2 Toolbar ①-5-4-5).

(2) Create a folder and store the CAD data. The folder name becomes the arrangement request
name.
CAD data includes CamMagicLA drawing data, DXF data, and AutoCAD data. These three
types of data can be mixed in one file.
To target CAD data in a network destination folder, copy it to a network drive or to a
local computer.

(3) Click the CAD batch input nesting button on the one-click toolbar.
If any drawing is drawn, dialog box will appear. Click YES to delete
all data. (If the batch input nesting is not in the erased state, the process will be
interrupted.)

(4) You will be asked for the CAD data storage folder, so
specify it. The figure on the right specifies the CAD
folder in the prototype folder on drive D.
Remember the folder you specified last time, but if
you change the name or delete it, the DXF folder
where CamMagicLA is installed will be displayed.

2-22-20
(5) Click the OK button in the Browse for Folder dialog box to begin processing immediately.

(6) If the parameter "Display dialog" is ON, a dialog will be opened at the time of part
registration processing, and the note information acquisition result will be displayed. Please
correct it with the keyboard according to the situation and click the OK button to process the
next CAD data.

(7) If you execute the part registration process for all CAD data in the specified folder
is displayed. Click YES.
If there is any error when registering
the part or if registration is
interrupted, the result will be
automatically reported.
Check the contents and close with
F1: End.
The contents can be checked at any
time with .

(8) The arrangement request file management opens. Select and open the arrangement request
file for the CAD data folder name.

(9) From here on, the operation is the same as in ⑪-5 One-Click Nesting.

2-22-21
CAD batch input nesting error list
Message Countermeasure
There are multiple machining Register the target CAD data using one-click individual item
shapes in one drawing. Make one execution or by manual operation.
machining shape in one drawing.
Out of memory or unexpected error
Interrupted during data entry Processing was interrupted by the Break key. Please execute
processing CAD data batch input nesting from the beginning.
Interrupted during part
registration process
No CAD data available There is no CAD data in the specified folder. Please specify
the folder again.
The previous arrangement request
information cannot be acquired.
Perform arrangement request
nesting once.
There is an error CAD file. Create There is CAD data that could not be registered correctly or
an arrangement request table? canceled the overwrite of the part file.
YES: Create a placement request table with only those parts
that have been processed successfully.
NO: Interrupt CAD batch input nesting.
Material and thickness are not all The material / thickness set in the note information or dialog
the same. Create an arrangement when registering parts is not the same.
request table? YES: Nesting is performed without considering material and
thickness. The material and thickness are specified
when generating NC.
NO: Interrupt CAD batch input nesting.
Creation of CAD error list file
failed.
The number of part types has The folder containing CAD data contained more than 500
exceeded the maximum number drawings.
that can be requested for YES: Create an arrangement request table with 500 types.
arrangement. Create an NO: Interrupt CAD batch input nesting.
arrangement request table with
the maximum number?
Error loading AutoCAD drawing. AutoCAD drawings require options.
Please purchase if there is no
option
The folder name contains Please remove characters that cannot be described in the
characters (Space,:; *? ¥ "<> | @ ~ folder name for storing CAD data.
#) That cannot be used in the
arrangement request. Please
change the folder name.

If you make a mistake in selecting the CAD data batch target folder, if an error occurs in
some CAD files, or if you want to continue nesting after registering parts, start again from
the folder selection. If you only want to register parts (if you want to perform nesting
separately), create a folder for only those parts that have not been registered, select that
folder, and execute.

2-22-22
⑪-7 one click parameter setting
Set parameters for using in data input, one click individual item execute and one click nesting
execute.
＊ In the case that other screens of
CamMagic LA or screens of other function
(CamMagic LA environment setting
screen, drawing file management screen
and so on) are starting, starting will fail.
Please end them, then execute.
＊ The operation of drawing screen of
CamMagic LA can not be done during the
starting of this screen. To execute the
operation of drawing screen of CamMagic
LA, please end this screen by pushing
[OK] or [cancel] button.
＊In the case that this screen is displayed
back than other screens, click task bar of
CamMagic LA at the bottom of screen to
let the screen displays in the front.

1) 1)About [parameter number]

＊It is possible to register the settings of this
screen with 99 types. Please register them
with each comment.
＊In the case that to change number, please
click ▼ besides number to select number.
＊ When in changing number, check the
setting contents of number before change.
In the case that there exist incorrect
location of setting contents, error content
will be displayed by dialogue and the
location of error will be displayed too.
＊In the case that it is the first time for the
type being displayed, the setting of screen
load the setting value of CamMagic LA at
that moment. Depending on the situation,

2-22-23
 please return to default settings or
execute setting change.
＊In the case that there exists one click
(process condition) parameter setting, this
setting doesn’t exsit.

2) About setting items

＊If select the item, it will switch to each
setting screen, and the settings relative to
2)
its function can be done.

3) 3)About [print] button

＊Print dialogue starts.

＊If push [OK] button, the contents of screen

which is being displayed will be printed.

4)About [return to default setting] button

＊Make setting contents only in displaying
screen return to default setting. Setting
4)
contents of other screens will not be
changed.
＊After return to default settings, in the
5)
case that cancel the setting change, please
push [cancel] button.

5)About [load setting value of LA] button

＊Read setting value of CamMagic LA and
change setting contents only in displaying
screen.
＊ In the case that there doesn’t exist
relevant command of CamMagic LA, it is

2-22-24
 not possible to operate (characters are
gray).
＊After load, in the case that cancel the
setting change, please push [cancel]
button.
＊In the case that there exists one click
(process condition) parameter setting, this
button doesn’t exist.

6)About [OK] button

6)
＊Output the contents which are set in all
screen as one click parameters.
＊When output, check the setting contents
of all screens. In the case that there exist
locations where setting contents are
incorrect, error contents will be displayed
with dialogue and error locations will be
displayed too.
＊ After output, this screen will end.
Drawing screen of CamMagic LA can be
operated.
7)

7)About [cancel] button

＊Don’t output one click parameters and end
this screen.
＊In the case that [suitable] button can not
be operated (characters are gray), after
this screen starts or [suitable] executes,
keep setting contents having not be
changed and end.
＊In the case that [suitable] button can be
operated (characters are black), there is
possibility that setting contents have been
changed after this screen start, end check
dialogue will start.

2-22-25
 ＊Push [OK] button and this screen will
end. Push [Cancel] button and this screen
will not end.
＊ In the case that ESC key has been
inputted or × button （
「close」button） in
the upper right of screen has been clicked,
it will do same operation as the case that
8)
[cancel] button has been clicked.

8) About [suitable] button

＊ It is a matter that in the case that
[suitable] button can not be operated
(characters are gray), after this screen
starts or [suitable] executes, setting
contents can not be changed.
＊Output the contents which are set in all
screens as one click parameter.
9) 10)
＊When output, check the setting contents
of all screens. In the case that there exist
locations where setting contents are
incorrect, error contents will be displayed
with dialogue and error locations will be
displayed too.
＊ After output, this screen will not end.

9)About [reflect on the setting value of LA]

button
＊Reflect the contents which are set in all
screens on the setting value of relevant
command of CamMagic LA.
＊In the case that there is one click (process

2-22-26
 condition) parameter setting, this button
does not exist.

10)About [delete] button

＊Delete the parameters whose number are
selected.
＊In the case that there is one click (process
condition) parameter setting, this button
does not exist.

2-22-27
＜About various settings＞
·Data input

Select function to execute when doing data input (DXF/IGES).

Item Explanation Default Setting

settings range

GroupExplode The matter whether group explodebling is set. ON ON/OFF

Tidy figure Set whether to do drawing organizing or not. ON ON/OFF

Edge point Set whether to do end point connection or not. ON ON/OFF

connection

All delete Set whether to do batch deletion or not. ON ON/OFF

Point Set whether to batch-delete point or not. ON ON/OFF

When [batch deletion] is OFF, deletion won’t be done.

Dimension(Dim Set whether to batch-delete dimension lines or not. OFF ON/OFF

ension Group) When [batch deletion] is OFF, deletion won’t be done.

Note Set whether to batch-delete note or not. OFF ON/OFF

When [batch deletion] is OFF, deletion won’t be done.

Illegal data Set whether to batch-delete incorrect data or not. ON ON/OFF

When [batch deletion] is OFF, deletion won’t be done.

Spline Explode The matter whether spline explode is set. ON ON/OFF

Magnification Set whether to do enlargement and reduction or not. OFF ON/OFF

reduction

2-22-28
·DXF/IGES input

Set parameters for using at when do DXF/IGES input convert by the operation of drag & drop.
Setting items are the same as the parameters of DXF/IGES input convert of CAD data converter.

·Tidy figure

Set parameters for drawing organizing which is executed after DXF/IGES input convert by the
operation of drag & drop.
Setting items are the same as the parameters of drawing organizing.

2-22-29
·Edge point connection

Set parameters for end point connection which is executed after DXF/IGES input convert by the
operation of drag & drop.
Setting items are the same as the parameters of end point connection.

·Magnification reduction

Set parameters for enlargement and reduction which is executed after DXF/IGES input convert
by the operation of drag & drop.
Item Explanation Default setting

setting range

Magnification Set magnification ratio of enlargement and reduction. 1.0 0.0005 ～

999999

2-22-30
·Individual item

Select function to execute when one click individual item is executing.

Item Explanation Default Setting
setting range
Parts Check The matter whether parts Number are checked before the ON ON/OFF
one click parts executing is set.
Drawing save Set whether to do drawing register before path setting or ON ON/OFF
(Before setting the not.
route)
Processing reference Set whether to set process reference point or not. ON ON/OFF
point
Automatic Marking processing object is designate d by the OFF ON/OFF
marking Character color, Line type, and Line color.
designate
Routing The matter whether executing routing or not is set. ON ON/OFF
Auto Pierce When executing routing, it is specified whether the OFF ON/OFF
pierce of the fixed direction is added using an auto
pierce. The path at this time uses an interference
avoidance route (routing is not automatic).
Interference The matter whether an interference avoidance ON ON/OFF
avoidance route route is prepared is set.
Detour create The matter whether detour create is set after the ON ON/OFF
path setting.
Part material save Set whether to do part register or not. OFF ON/OFF
NC create / save Set whether to do NC formation·register or not. ON ON/OFF
High Acc Prcs Time Set whether to execute High Acc Prcs Time Cal when OFF ON/OFF
Cal
executing one click single item.
Drawing save (After Set whether to do drawing register after path setting or not. ON ON/OFF
setting the route)
Processing directions Set whether to do formation of process instruction manual or OFF ON/OFF
document create not.
Processing attribute Set whether to delete process attribute after the formation of OFF ON/OFF
delete process instruction manual or not. When [formation of
process instruction manual] is OFF, process attribute
deletion won’t be done.
Drawing save (After Set whether to do drawing register after the formation of OFF ON/OFF
processing directions process instruction manual or not. When [formation of
document create) process instruction manual] is OFF, drawing register won’t
be done.
Display result The matter whether one click result are displayed after the ON ON/OFF
one click parts executing is set.

2-22-31
·Drawing save

Set parameters for drawing register of one click individual item/nesting.

Item Explanation Default Setting

setting range

The note is made Set whether to use drawing file name as note when it is OFF ON/OFF

a drawing file individual item.

name(One thing) ＊When the note is two or more lines, the line becomes a drawing

file name. It loads when notes are included by the closed-shaped

circumscription rectangle.

Drawing folder Set registering drawing folder name. automati automatic/s

name Automatic: automatically determine registering folder name from c pecify

drawing name which is being opened. In the case that the

drawing is in drawing folder (FSdwg), it is the same folder or sub

folder. In the case that the drawing is not in drawing folder

(FSdwg), it is drawing folder (FSdwg).

For example

drawing name which is registering drawing file name

being opened

/FSdwg/SCL2 C:¥LA700W¥FSdwg¥SCL2.dw

@C:¥LA700W¥FSdwg¥SC g

L2

/FSdwg/subfolder/SCL2 C:¥LA700W¥FSdwg¥subfolder

@C:¥LA700W¥FSdwg¥su ¥SCL2.dwg

bfolder¥SCL2

@C:¥folder¥subfolder¥SC C:¥LA700W¥FSdwg¥SCL2.dw

L2 g

Specify: specify registering drawing folder name.

2-22-32
Specify Display drawing file name (absolute path). It can not be direct blank -

inputted. column

... The dialogue which specifies drawing folder name is displayed. - -

If push [OK] button, the dialogue will end and drawing folder

name will be displayed in [Specify] column.

Character string Specify character string which is added to registering drawing file - -

which is added to name.

drawing file

name

After setting Specify character string which is added to registering drawing file _R up to ten

name when it’s after path setting. half angle

characters

After processing Specify character string which is added to registering drawing file _S up to ten

directions name when it’s after the formation of process instruction manual. half angle

document create characters

2-22-33
·Process reference point

Set parameters for process reference point of one click individual item/nesting.
Item Explanation Default Setting range

setting

Position Set position for adding process reference point. the lower the lower left of

left of drawing/the
drawing upper left of

drawing/the

lower right of

drawing/the

upper right of

drawing/origin (0,

0)

Position Set position for adding process reference point when it is work end work end/edge

(Nesting) nesting. allowance end

When [position] is origin (0, 0), it is not used.

2-22-34
・Automatic marking designate

It is set when marking processes note on the drawing and drawing element at the time as the one
click part. In the case as notes, it specifies in a character color. In the case as drawing element, it
specifies by line type and line color.
Item Explanation Default Setting

settings range
Marking The matter whether Note →marking conversion or not is set. OFF ON/OFF
conversion(Not
e)
Color of Note →Marking conversion object is specified in the color of the All colors All colors or
charactor
character. from 32

colors to 1

color
Marking It is specified whether marking beam-on/OFF addition is executed. OFF ON/OFF
conversion(Ele
ment)
Type of line Marking convert object is specified in the type of the drawing All kinds Solid line/
Broken line/
element. Dot chain line
/Two-dot
chain line
Color of line Marking convert object is specified in the color of the drawing All colors All colors or

element. from 32

colors to 1

color

2-22-35
・ Auto pierce/interference avoidance route

Set parameters for interfering avoidance path of one click individual item.
The setting items of [automatic pierce] are the same as the parameters of pierce path setting
[automatic pierce] of interfering avoidance function.
The setting items of [interfering check] are the same as the parameters of rapid feed setting
[interfering check] of interfering avoidance function.

2-22-36
・Save Parts

Change the settings for part registration. In addition, this setting item is applied not only to one
click parts execution but also to part registration command, range part command.(It does not
apply to part registration by "F3: registration" from the part management list.)
Item Explanation Initial Setting range

value

Get parts info Select when registering parts, whether get material / ON ON/OFF

thickness / comment and display in the input dialog or

not.

from Note Get material / thickness from the notes on the parts. ON ON/OFF

from Toolbar Get material / thickness value displayed on one click OFF ON/OFF

toolbar currently,.

Color of note When getting from note, it can specify color of the note All colors All colors or

to be got. From 32 colors

to 1 color

Show dialog When set to ON, part registration dialog (refer to the next ON ON/OFF
page) is displayed when registering parts.
When set to OFF, do not display a dialog when registering
part, and register directly with the got part name and part
attribute.

[Notes]
・This setting is effective only for one click part execution.
With part register command, the dialog is always displayed
regardless of this setting.
・ When using with OFF, please use after confirming the
following limitations.

[Limitations when "Display dialog" is set to OFF]

・Path check is not performed.
・If the same part name exists, overwrite without overwriting
confirmation.
・If part name string contains character that can't be used as

part name, register it with the part name replaced by "_".

Add to summary ON : Create information for the Group Nest during the Part OFF ON / OFF
registration.
nest(Only parts with OFF : No create information for the Group Nest.
material thicjness)

2-22-37
·NC create / save 1

Set parameters for NC formation·register of one click individual item/nesting.

The setting items of [machine setting], [process condition setting], [process condition automatic
setting], [NC output setting] and [start end code] are the same as the parameters of NC
formation.
In the case that there is one click (process condition) parameter setting, [machine setting],
[process condition setting] and [start end code] can not be changed.
Item Explanation Default Setting
setting range

The NC data Set whether to display parameter table of NC data formation OFF ON/OFF

generattion or not

parameter table is

displayed

2-22-38
·NC create / save 2

Set parameters for NC formation· register of one click individual item/nesting.

The setting items of [automatically control rapid feed line retract code] are the same as rapid
feed setting [automatically control rapid feed line retract code] parameters of interfering
avoidance path.
Item Explanation Default Setting
setting range
NC folder Set registering NC folder name. Automat Automatic/S

name Automatic: automatically determine registering folder name from ic pecify

drawing name which is being opened. In the case that the drawing

is in drawing folder (FSdwg), it is the same folder or sub folder of

NC folder (FSnc). In the case that the drawing is not in drawing

folder (FSdwg), it is NC folder (FSnc).

For example
drawing name which is being registering NC file name
opened
/FSdwg/SCL2 C:¥LA700W¥FSnc¥SCL2.nc
@C:¥LA700W¥FSdwg¥SCL2

/FSdwg/subfolder/SCL2 C:¥LA700W¥FSnc¥subfolder
¥SCL2.nc
@C:¥LA700W¥FSdwg¥subfol
der¥SCL2

@C:¥folder¥subfolder¥SCL2 C:¥LA700W¥FSnc¥SCL2.nc
Specify: specify registering NC file name.

Specify Display NC folder name (absolute path). It can’t be direct inputted. Blank -
column
... The dialogue which specifies NC folder name is displayed. - -

If push [OK] button, the dialogue will end and NC folder name will
be displayed in [Specify] column.

2-22-39
·Processing directions document create

Set parameters for the formation of process instruction manual of one click individual
item/nesting.
Item Explanation Default Setting
setting range
Processing Set folder name of registering HTML/Excel process instruction Automat Automatic/S
manual
directions Automatic: automatically determine registering folder name from ic pecify

document drawing name which is being opened. In the case that the drawing
is in drawing folder (FSdwg), it is the same folder or sub folder of
folder name process instruction manual folder (FSreprot\HTML or XLS). In the
case that the drawing is not in drawing folder (FSdwg), it is process
instruction manual folder (FSreprot\HTML or Excel).
For example
drawing name which is file name of registering process
being opened instruction manual
/FSdwg/SCL2 C:¥LA700W¥FSreport¥HTML¥S
@C:¥LA700W¥FSdwg¥S CL2¥report.html
CL2 C:¥LA700W¥FSreport¥XLS¥SCL
2.xls
/FSdwg/subfolder/SCL2 C:¥LA700W¥FSreport¥HTML¥s
@C:¥LA700W¥FSdwg¥su ubfolder¥SCL2¥report.html
bfolder¥SCL2 C:¥LA700W¥FSreport¥XLS¥subf
older¥SCL2.xls
@C:¥folder¥subfolder¥SC C:¥LA700W¥FSreport¥HTML¥S
L2 CL2¥report.html
C:¥LA700W¥FSreport¥XLS¥SCL
2.xls
Specify: specify folder name of registering process instruction

manual.
Specify Display the name (absolute path) of process instruction manual Blank -
folder. It can’t be direct inputted.
column
... Display the dialogue which specifies the folder name of process - -
instruction manual.

If push [OK] button, the dialogue will end and the name of process
instruction manual folder will be displayed in [Specify] column.

2-22-40
·Nesting

Select executing function when one click nesting is executing.

Item Explanation Defaul Setting

t range

setting

Arrangement demand Set whether to execute arrangement request nesting (arrangement ON ON/OFF

nesting request, some tests, result display, generated edge material register

and individual register) or not.

Processing reference Set whether to set process reference point or not. ON ON/OFF

point

Path set (Arrange Set whether to execute path setting (arrangement order) or not. ON ON/OFF

order)

Path check After path setting (arrangement order), set whether to do path check ON ON/OFF

or not. When [path setting (arrangement order)] is OFF, check won’t

be done.

Detour create After path setting (arrangement order), set whether to do detour ON ON/OFF

prepare or not. When [path setting (arrangement order)] is OFF,

detour prepare won’t be done.

NC create / save Set whether to do NC formation·register or not. ON ON/OFF

High Acc Prcs Time Set whether to execute High Acc Prcs Time Cal when executing one ON ON/OFF

Cal click nesting.

Drawing save (After After path setting, set whether to do drawing register or not. ON ON/OFF

setting the route)

Processing directions Set whether to create process instruction manual or not. OFF ON/OFF

document create

Processing attribute After the formation of process instruction manual, set whether to OFF ON/OFF

delete delete process attribute or not. When [process instruction manual] is

OFF, process attribute deletion won’t be done.

Drawing save (After After the formation of process instruction manual, set whether to do OFF ON/OFF

processing directions drawing register or not. When [process instruction manual] is OFF,

document create) drawing register won’t be done.

2-22-41
· Arrangement demand nesting

Set parameters for arrangement request nesting of one click nesting.

Item Explanation Default Setting

setting range

Arrangement Specify executing arrangement request file name. check check/specif

demand file Check when in executing: specify arrangement request file name when in y when in

name when one click nesting is executing. executin executing

Specify: specify the arrangement request file name of executer. g

Specify Display arrangement request file name (file name that .job has blank -

been cleared in relative path just below arrangement request folder column

FSjob). It can not be direct inputted.

... Dialogue for specifying arrangement request file name is displayed. - -

If push [Open] button, the dialogue will end and arrangement

request file name will be displayed in [Specify] column.

In the case that the file has been specified in the folder which is

other than arrangement request folder FSjob, the dialogue won’t

close.

2-22-42
・Detour create

Set parameters for detour prepare of One Click Exec Parts or Exec Nesting
Setting items are the same as the parameters of rapid feed setting [detour prepare] of interfering
avoidance path

＊Please refer to one click individual item for process reference point, NC formation· register 1,
NC formation· register 2, drawing register, formation of process instruction manual.

2-22-43
⑫auxiliary menu tool bar
Combines menu which is Frequently used.

Layer menu Figure edit menu Group edit menu Dimension check menu
※Details of each command please refer to ”Command Explanation” (Section No.3)

⑬Function tool bar

A command can be assigned to a function key.

*Refer to the 3. command explanation for explanation of each command.

*The contents of the tool bar are customizable with setting - function key.

⑭Message area
Display message

⑮Status bar
Display every type of state.

＊All the state item which is displayed on screen will change in accordance with the command
which is processing at that time

2-23
⑲Layer tool bar
Set layer

Copy specified element to other layer

Move specified element to other layer
Open layer catalogue dialog (⑲-1-2)
Open layer dialog (①-5-2)
Set specified layer name, color and line type(⑲
-1-1)
⑲-1-1 Display and change work layer

No. : Set layer number

Name : Set layer name
Color : Set layer color
Type : Set line type of layer

2-23-2
⑲-1-2

A
B
C
D
E
G
F
I
H
J

A : Display layer list

B : When choose this check box and click List Display button, auto magnificationratio will be
display in accordance with every layer
C : When choose this check box and click List Display button, all layers will be displayed in
list
D : Change work layer
E : Change the chosen layer to display OFF (Invisible and cannot edit)
F : Change the chosen layer to edit OFF (Visible and cannot edit)
G : Change the chosen layer to display ON (Visible and can edit)
H : Change the chosen layer and work layer(Only) to display ON (Visible and can edit)
I : Change all layers except the chosen layer and work layer to edit OFF (Visible and cannot
edit)
J : Change all layers to display ON (Visible and can edit)
K : Delete all elements in a certain layer
L : Move all elements in a certain layer to other layer
M : Copy all elements in a certain layer to other layer
N : Execute Delete / Move / Copy.
O : Close layer catalogue dialog

⑳Layer list tool bar

Display the list of the layer being used

Update button : Update layer state to latest state.

2-23-3
㉑Laser CAM tool bar
The menus often used by CAM function are collected.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

The content of the tool bar The content of the tool bar
A prcs ref N Delete Path
B Line Pierce O End joint
C Arc pierce P Micro joint
D Addition pierce Q Marking Add
E Auto pierce R Notes marking
F Pierce cancel S Marking automatic path
G Beam ON 1 T NC create
H Beam OFF 1 U NC edit
I Outer Spcfy V Inversion
J Auto check W Processing Instructions
K Avoid Interference X Add parts
L Detour Create Y Snap move
M Rapid Feed Erase All Z Snap copy

*Refer to the 3. command explanation for explanation of each command.

㉒FRG tool bar

*Please refer to the software option operation manual for "NC Output opton for F-CUT".

㉓User tool bar

The button among often used buttons of tool bar is customizable.

*Refer to the 3. command explanation for explanation of each command.

*The content of the tool bar are customizable by setting - user tool bar.

2-23-4
 After selecting “Start” menu “Program” “MITSUBISHI ELECTRICAL
CamMagic LA”, display the menu of applications used in CamMagic LA.

“MITSUBISHI
ELECTRICAL
CamMagic
LA”

CamMagic LA host computer

CamMagic LA”, “CamMagic LA text

editor”
* Start the right screen.

* The initial value of folder displayed is CamMagic LA environment.

* MSXENV is the file for setting operation environment of CamMagic
LA.

2-23-5
 2-5. Example of operatioon

②Start CamMagic LA
Double click (click two times rapidly and leave) the short cut icon of
CamMagic LA on desktop.
Besides, move mouse pointer to “Start” menu “Program” “MITSUBISHI
ELECTRICAL CamMagic LA” “CamMagic LA”.

Seconds later, CamMagic LA screen is started.

2-38-2
2-38-2
2-38-2
2-38-2
2-38-2
2-38-2
2-38-2
2-38-2
Example for Operation Screen

2-38-2
2-38-2
 - In such condition –

3) When an exception handling dialoge is displayed during operation of CamMagic LA.

(1) Select “OK” to end CamMagic LA forcibly.

Drawing data on CamMagic will be saved to a Work folder with the file name of
“SIGNAL_SAVE”(The installation of the standard is “C:\LA700W\WORK\SIGNAL_SAVE.*”)

(2) After restarting CamMagic LA, the file can be called out on screen via function “<external
drawing> reading”. (Please refer to instructions [M1] 3. Load from outside)

*Exception handling will occur during common operations.

4) When protector error screen is displayed during CamMagic LA operations.

(1) Please confirm whether Protector has come off. Then please set Protector correctly. Click
the OK buttonto continue working.
(2) When Protector has not been come off, click “OK” button 100 times to can accept the
command about 10 times. Also, for saving data execute necessary operations.

2-38-2
 2-6. File name uppercase / lowercase difference restrictions on
number of characters precautions
1. Uppercase / lowercase difference
For file names registered / called out in CamMagic LA, there is no difference in
uppercase/lowercase DBC case letters. Names of registered / called out data, for example, will
be treated as the same name even if AAA, Aaa or aaa is used.
However, note that uppercase and lowercase are different for “retrieve” function of table
input.
For file names added in registration, even if key input is “all uppercase” “AAAAAAAA”,
“uppercase only for the initial letter” or “all lowercase”, etc, results are different.
Please note.

We use workstation for the host computer for LA series of models earlier than CamMagic LA,
since the installed OS is UNIX, there is difference in uppercase/lowercase.
In CamMagic LA, conform to Windows specifications.

When uppercase/lowercase of registered file name cannot be confirmed and it cannot be

retrieved, retrieve according to the following contents and methods on the following page.

Retrieval method of screen data file name:

Start “Open file” dialogue in “pull down menu file (F)” “screen input and output
(D)” “write to external screen (L)”, utilize wild card ( or ?) to specify and retrieve
in field “File name (N)”.
Example of specifying Retrieval results
A All file names starting with DBC case letter A or a
AB All file names of any character containing DBC case letter AB, Ab, aB or ab.

2-38-2
Retrieval method of NC data file name:
Start “Open file” dialogue in “NC input and output” “external input”, utilize wild card (*or ?) to
specify and retrieve in field “File name (N)”.

2. File name restrictions on number of characters

For character string of name of data file processed in CamMagic LA, the number of characters
should
conform to the following restrictions.
Provided that the specified number of characters is exceeded, registration / call out may not be
performed normally.
When number of characters is too long, and it is difficult to determine what data should be
called out,
please utilize above-mentioned “write to external screen” or “external input” to execute the call
out.
Type of data Number of characters (DBC case character
conversion)
Data input and output with Less than 8 characters
floppy
Part data of nesting Less than 24 characters
Work sheet data of nesting Less than 24 characters
Component data Less than 20 characters
NC file management Less than 20 characters

2-38-2
 2-7. LA user data custody direct / file list
Indicate registered / modified data by customer’s operations.
Customer can prepare backup, etc. according to actual situation.
It is not necessary to backup all items, just backup the things you are using.
When data cannot be used due to personal computer malfunction, system down, system mess,
etc., we cannot recover the data.
The folder names indicated in the following table represent the portion of the name which
follows the folder name in which CamMagic LA is installed (normally, C:¥LA700W).
No Item Menu Contents/custody place/record
. method
1 Text print (Menu above CAD screen) “Attribute” at the center of the
setting “File (F)”→ “Text print setting” screen are different according to
the pattern of your printer, please
record it by yourself.
2 Environment (Menu above CAD screen) “setting “Two or three-button mouse”
setting (S)” → “environment…” setting, please print screen and
record it.
3 Environment (Menu above CAD screen) “setting Only for changed settings, please
setting/file (S)” → “environment…”→ “file print screen and record it.
system system”
4 Sub-pattern/call “Sub-pattern” → “Sub-pattern” → When using size parameters of
out “call out” specified patterns such as
“positive circle” pattern and “long
hole” pattern, please print the
value and record it.
5 Sub-pattern/desi “Sub-pattern” → “Sub-pattern” → (See above-mentioned “4.”)
gnation dialogue “designation dialogue”
6 User pattern “Sub-pattern” → “Sub-pattern” → Registered to folder
“user pattern” “\FSptn\subptn\userptn”.
7 Laser macro/ “Sub-pattern” → “Sub-pattern” → (See above-mentioned “4.”)
callout “laser macro | call out”
8 Laser “Sub-pattern” → “Sub-pattern” → (See above-mentioned “4.”)
macro/designati “laser macro |designation
on dialogue dialogue”
9 Configuration / “Sub-pattern” → “Sub-pattern” → When using specified
on “configuration | on circumference” configuration pattern parameters,
circumference etc. please print the value and record
etc. it.
10 Composite/Stret “Outspread function” → Please print set parameter value
ch side “composite Stretch side” → and record it.
Outspread/stret “composite outspread”
ch condition
setting
11 Stretch “Outspread function” → \Bend
registration “composite Stretch side” → Registration of files (multi-item)
“registration stretch” starting with “Bend”.
12 Duct outspread “Outspread function” → Please print set parameter value
“composite Stretch side” → “duct and record it.
outspread”
13 New . section “Outspread function” → Registered to folder “\FSdanmen
outspread/eleme “composite Stretch side” → “New . \youso”.
nt registration section outspread | element
registration”
14 New . section “Outspread function” → Please print set parameter value
outspread/settin “composite Stretch side” → “New . and record it.
g section outspread | outspread
execution”
15 New . section / “Outspread function” → Saved to folder “\FSdanmen
flange bend “composite Stretch side” → “New . param \mgtbl”.
parameter section outspread | outspread
execution”
16 Flange “Outspread function” → Registered to folder “\FSflange
outspread/eleme “composite Stretch side” → \youso”.
nt “Flange outspread | element”
17 Automatic “Manual setting” → “manual Registered to folder “\Cut2”.
condition setting” → “Automatic condition
registration / M2 registration | M2”

2-38-2
18 Automatic “Manual setting” → “manual Registered to folders “\Cut” and
condition setting” → “Automatic condition “\Cutse” respectively. Please save
registration / registration | M300” to the two folders.
M300
19 Manual “Manual setting” → “manual Registered to folder “\FSbmcond”.
processing setting” → “manual condition
condition setting setting”
20 Automatic “Path setting” → “path setting” → Please print set parameter value
pierce “automatic pierce” and record it.
21 (Nesting) parts “Nesting” → “parts | registration” Registered to folder “\FSbuzai”.
22 (Nesting) work “Nesting” → “work sheet | call out Registered to folder “\FSwork”.
sheet (registration)”
23 Free nesting / “Nesting” → “Free nesting | Registered to folder “\FSjob”.
configuration configuration requirements”
requirements
24 Dot matrix pin “Nesting” → “dot matrix pin” →“dot Registered to folder “\FSkenzan”.
figure matrix pin figure registration”
25 NC data creation “NC input and output” → “NC creation” Registered to "NCPARA.PRM".
parameter → “NC data creation | NC creation”
26 Start and end “NC input and output” → “NC creation” Registered to folder “\Lcam” as
codes → “NC data creation | NC creation” numerical beginning file. Please save
the files of numerical beginning in the
folder.
27 NC file “NC input and output” → “NC creation” Registered to folder “\FSnc”.
management → “NC file management | registration”
28 Processing time “NC input and output” → “processing Registered to folder “\Nctime.pra”.
counting instructions” → “processing time
parameter counting parameter”
29 Processing “NC input and output” → “processing Registered to folder “\FLDCUT”.
condition FLD instructions” → “processing condition
input FLD input”
30 BEAM ON / OFF “NC input and output” → “processing Registered to folder “\Beamtime.pra”.
time setting instructions” → “BEAM ON / OFF time
setting”
31 Specific gravity “NC input and output” → “processing Registered to folder “\Material.prm”.
registration instructions” → “Material specific
gravity registration”
32 NC “NC input and output” → “NC input and Please print set parameter value and
link/communicatio output” → “NC link” → “setting record it.
n environment detailed communication setting”
setting
33 Paper tape Windows “Start” menu → “program”→ Registered to "IODEVICE.PRM".
communication “MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CamMagic
setting tool LA”→ “CamMagic LA paper tape
communication setting tool”
34 File management “File management” → “File Registered to folder “\FSdwg”.
management” → “registration”
35 Component “File management” → “component Registered to folder “\FSparts”.
management management” → “registration”
36 Automatically “File management” → “log file” → Registered to folder “\Setup.log”.
running log while “automatically running log while
starting starting | creation”
37 Involute “Special function” → “special figure” → Please print set parameter value and
“special function | involute” record it.
38 Rack “Special function” → “special figure” → Please print set parameter value and
“special figure | rack” record it.
39 Ellipse “Special function” → “special figure” → Please print set parameter value and
“special figure | ellipse” record it.
40 CAD data “Special function” → “special figure” → Please print set parameter value and
converter/paramete “CAD data converter”→ “parameter record it.
r setting setting”
41 Figure collation “Special function” → “special figure” → Please print set parameter value and
“figure collation” record it.

2-38-2
42 Plot print / printer “Special function” → “special figure” → Please print set parameter value and
setting “plot print | printer setting…” record it.
43 Plot print / detailed “Special function” → “special figure” → LA700W.INI
setting “plot print | detailed setting…”
44 Clipboard paste / “Screen operations”→ “clipboard paste | Registered to folder “\ FSclp\frame”.
registration frame registration frame”
45 File management File management, NC file management, Registered in the "~LA700WDB" folder.
database part registration, work sheet
registration, configuration
requirements
46 File management File management, NC file management, Registered in the "~¥FSsort" folder.
database sorting part registration, work sheet
conditions registration, configuration
requirements
47 File management File management, NC file management, Registered in "FileMng.ini".
database settings part registration, work sheet
registration, configuration
requirements
48 Automatic [Manual Setting] → [Manual Setting] → Registered in folder
conditions [Conditions 1] "~¥FSsysp¥ConditionList".
registration
"processing
conditions 1"
49 Location of Tool Each Tool bars. LA700W.INI
bars
50 Recently files [File] → [Open Recently] LA700W.INI

51 Process machine [Set]→[Machine Process Condition Registered in

information Setting] FSsysp¥MachineList.TBL.
52 Process condition [manual set] → [manual set] → Registered in folder "~¥FScnd".
[condition 1]
53 One click One click tool bar [parameter] Recorded in folder "~¥Easy".
parameter
54 HTML/Excel [NC input output] → [process Registered in folder "~¥FSreport".
process instruction instruction] → [create process
manual instruction manual]
55 User menu [Set] →[User Menu] Registered in folder
"~¥PRM¥ButtonMenu_Customize.PR
M".
The file preserved in the tool is
preserved in folder "USERPRM¥Menu".
56 User ToolBar [Set] →[User ToolBar] Registered in folder
"~¥PRM¥ToolBar_Customize.PRM".
The file preserved in the tool is
preserved in folder
"USERPRM¥ToolBar".
57 Function Key [Set] →[Fiunction Key] Registered in folder
"~¥PRM¥FUNCTIONKEY_Customize.
PRM".
The file preserved in the tool is
preserved in folder
"USERPRM¥FunctionKey".

2-38-2
 A1 Figure drawing

1 Point

Command specification (CAD function, CAM function)

[A] Figure drawing

[A1] Figure
1. Point

A1-1
 A1 Figure drawing

1 Point

2. Equally-dividing points

A1-2
 A1 Figure drawing

2 Equally-dividing point

The input number of divisions should be an integer between 1 and 100.

After selecting unlimited line, errors occur.
After selecting positive circle, make equally-dividing points according to 0-degree
direction.

A1-3
 A1 Figure drawing

3 Normal line

3. Line Normal line

3.1 Line line segment
A vertical line (line segment) is vertical to and intersected some line.

4. Line Horizontal
6. Line Vertical

A1-4
 A1 Figure drawing
Line
5 Horizontal line segment

5. Line Horizontal line segment

7. Line Vertical line segment
Make a horizontal (vertical) line segment passing through specified place.

8. Line Angle

A1-5
 A1 Figure drawing

9 Line Angle line

segment

9. Line Angle line segment

Make line segment with specified angle

A1-6
 A1 Figure drawing

10 Point 2-point line

10. Line 2-point line

11. Line 2-point line segment
Make 2-point line to connect two figures; make 2-point line segment to connect two figures.

12. Line Parallel

A1-7
 A1 Figure drawing
Line
13
Parallel line segment

13. Line Parallel line segment

Make a line segment parallel with the element.

A1-8
 A1 Figure drawing

14 Offset Increment

14. Offset Increment

Please refer to 18. Offset Relative in [A2] Corner cut / OFF SET.
15. Offset Absolute
Please refer to 19. Offset Absolute in [A2] Corner cut / OFF SET.
16. Offset Both sides
Please refer to 20. Offset Both sides in [A2] Corner cut / OFF SET.
17. Circle / Arc Circle
Please refer to 6. Circle . arc Circle in [A3] Special figure.
18. Circle / Arc Semicircle
Please refer to 7. Circle . arc Semicircle in [A3] Special figure.
19. Corner / Cut Loop
Please refer to 6. Corner Loop in [A2] Corner Cut / Offset.
20. Corner / Cut Round
Please refer to 1. Corner Bend in [A2] Corner Cut / Offset.
21. Corner / Cut Chamfer
Please refer to 3. Corner Chamfer in [A2] Corner Cut / Offset.
22. Corner / Cut Cut
Please refer to 5. Corner Cut in [A2] Corner Cut / Offset.
23. Corner / Cut Square cut
Please refer to 8. Corner Square cut in [A2] Corner Cut / Offset.

24. Edit Element Split by

If same lines (circles) are utilized repeatedly in a figure, necessary lines (circles) will disappear
after cutting.
If division has been performed beforehand, it can be avoided.
Intersection division is to divide figure with the point of intersection.

A1-9
 A1 Figure drawing

25 Trimming Split at

25. Edit Element Split at

Divide the selected figure.

26. Edit Element Connection

27. Edit Element Restore

A1-10
 A1 Figure drawing
Trimming
28
Modify line length

28. Edit Element Modify line length

Change length of figure.

29. Edit Element Partially delete

A1-11
 A1 Figure drawing

30 Auxiliary line trace

30. Auxiliary line trace

31. Back clear
Make desired figure on basis of auxiliary drawings.
Return via back clear.
If pass-through points are input, after selecting back clear, line (arc) will disappear, ask about
endpoints.
If endpoints are input, after selecting back clear, neglect the selected pass-through points, ask
about pass-through points.

A1-12
 A1 Figure drawing

32 Rectangle

32. Rectangle
Methods of making quadrangle according to reference point, width and height as well as from two
opposite angle points

A1-13
 A1 Figure drawing

33 Stretch

33. Stretch
Move a part of completed figure in X . Y direction, and retract the figure.

34．Regular polygon
The methods of drawing which specify point or inscribe, circumscription circle.。
a In the case of drawing by specifying
point drawing
1) Specify the number of angles
the number of angles
2) Specify center point
Let center point
or center point coordinate

3)Input the radius of inscribe ／

circumscription
radius
4)Input the angle of the first apex
Angle
※ Angle 0 is Y-axis direction.
5)use key←，→key to choose inscribe or
circumscription
b In the case of drawing by specifying
circle drawing
1) Specify the number of angles
the number of angles
2) Specify circle
circle
3) Input the angle of the first apex
angle
4) use key ← ， →to choose inscribe or
circumscription

A1-14
 A1 Figure drawing

35 Stretch

35．Offset・pattern changing
■Function
Open the menu of inserting pattern・shape pattern which can change offset.

■Operation

1) Click offset・change pattern

2) After opening the menu of changing

inserting pattern・shape pattern，change by
click.

The content of every menu, please refer to

A2-10.

36．Corner rounding・pattern changing

■Function
Open the menu of processing pattern・line type changing pattern which can change corner
rounding.

■Operation

1) Click corner rounding・change pattern

2)
After opening the menu of processing
pattern・line type changing pattern，change by
click.

The content of every menu, please refer to

A1-16.

A1-15
 A1 Figure drawing

37 Stretch
37． Bidirectional trimming
■Function
Bidirectional trim the revising pattern of corner rounding processing command.

■Operation

1) Click bidirectional trimming

2) In corner rounding R, choose

corner rounding by the order of①，
②.

Corner rounding R

38．No trimming
■Function
Do not bidirectional trim the revising pattern of corner rounding processing command.

■Operation

1) Click no trimming

2 In corner rounding R, choose

corner rounding by the order of①，
②.

Corner rounding R

39． First trimming

■Function
Revise the revising pattern of corner rounding processing command only in the case of first
element.
■Operation

1) Click first trimming

2) In corner rounding R, choose

corner rounding by the order of①，
②.

Cornerrounding R

A1-16
A1-17
 A1 Figure drawing

40 Stretch

40．Second trimming
■Function
Revise the revising pattern of corner rounding processing command only in the case of second
element.
■Operation

1) Click second trimming

2) In corner rounding R, choose

corner rounding by the order of①，
②.

Corner rounding R

41．Link
■Function
Change the line type of corner rounding shape according to first element.
■Operation

1) Click link

2) In corner rounding R, choose

corner rounding by the order of①，
②.
Corner rounding shape

Corner rounding R

42．Non-linkage
■Function
Change the line type of corner rounding shape according to the line type which is chosen now.
■operation

1) Click non-linkage

2) In corner rounding R, choose

corner rounding by the order of①，
②.
Corner rounding shape
Corner rounding R
In this graph, it is the case that the line type (by
changing line type chosen) which is chosen now is rough
solid line.

A1-18
43．Edit diameter
■Function
Check the diameter of selected circle (hole) at once and change it.
【Condition of circle element with diameter change】
・It is a circle element (not an arc with both end points)
・It is not a group element. (To edit group elements, move to lower level group.)
・Be in the edit permission layer
・It is not an auxiliary line
・Attribute is not added
■Operation
a) Element selection １）Start diameter change by command
Drawing creation｜shape
２ ） Select circle element
―lement editing｜diameter change
(initial)
a) Element selection
２) circle element selection (initial)
The selection method is 3 patterns
Ⅰ）Rectangle-select circle element (s)
Select circle elements that satisfies
the condition.
Go to ３ ） Select circle elements
(after the second time)
Ⅱ ） Element-select a circle element
(singular)
All circle elements having the same
diameter and satisfying the conditions
in the drawing are all automatically
selected, and the selection process is
Press ENTER key ended
Go to display the diameter change
dialog
Ⅲ)
All the circle elements satisfying the
conditions in the drawing are
automatically selected and the
selection process is ended.
Go to display the diameter change
dialog

A1-19
 ３ ) circle element selection (after the
３）Select circle element (after the second time) second time)
The selection method is 3 patterns
Ⅰ）Rectangular-select circle element
(s)
A circle element that satisfies the
condition is additionally selected,
and continuing to the selection after
the second time

Ⅱ ） Element-select a circle element

(singular)
The selected circle element is
additionally selected, and continuing
to the selection after the second time

Ⅲ)
Go to display the diameter change
Press ENTER key dialog

４）End selection process

A1-20
■Operation
Drawing：
b) Display diameter edit dialog ・Circle elements are color coded
for each diameter and line type
・ Circle elements on selected
lines are displayed in yellow

Diameter change dialog：

・ Display information on the
circle for each diameter and
line type in a list
・No. of selected line displayed
in yellow

1) Directly change the value in the

c) Change the diameter value cell column of the diameter
(after change) of the diameter
change dialog
75

100→75

1) Change the diameter of the

d) Change diameter of circle element circle element by pressing the
execution button and pressing
the OK button on the
confirmation dialog
Before change diameter

After changed

diameter

The diameter of all the circle

elements to be changed is
changed, and the circle element
color returns to the color before
the diameter change

A1-21
[ Other functions ]
Other function-1 Specify batch change amount (difference)

１）If you want to uniformly increase or decrease the

values of all the diameters, you can change them all at
once.

1) Set the value that you want to set

uniformly for specifying the batch
change amount (difference)
（5.5 is set in the example on the
left）

2) Press update button

The value of "diameter" + "batch change

amount" is set in each "diameter
(after change)" column.

A1-22
Other function-2 Change circle element to point
If you set 0 to the value of the “D (changing)” of the circle, you can change the circle element to a point at the center

of the circle.

Other function-3 Delete circle element

If you set -1 to the value of the “D (changing)” of the circle, you can delete the circle element.

Other function-4 Change the number of display digits after the decimal point
If you change the value of “number of decimal
places”, you can change the display digits after
the decimal point(effective from next time).

A1-23
[A2] Corner . Cut / Offset
1. Corner Round
Make corner R on the angle of two figures.
Since it is same with cut when R value is 0, when corner often requires cut, it is convenient to set R
value to 0.
In order to prevent crack, you can also make direction R.

2. Corner Batch round

A2-1
 A2 Corner . Cut / Offset
3 Corner Chamfer

3. Corner Chamfer
Make chamfer of specified angle on angle of two figures.
There are chamfers same with or different from excavated length
.

4. Corner Batch chamfer

[Precautions]
1. Do not modify corner R.
2. For the corner to which chamfer is added, you should not only change chamfer length, but add
chamfer on the figure.
3. When adding chamfer to corner to which corner R or chamfer has been added, or executing the
edit as changing chamfer length after adding all chamfers, please correct individually via
corner treatment chamfer .
4. Before executing complete addition of chamfers, it is recommended that data should be saved via
current saving function.

A2-2
 A2 Corner . Cut / Offset
5 Corner Cut

5. Corner Cut
Corner cut of two figures

6. Corner Loop

A2-3
 A2 Corner . Cut / Offset
7 Corner Angle
chamfer

7. Corner Angle chamfer

Make chamfer of specified angle on angle of two figures.

8. Corner Square cut

A2-4
 A2 Corner . Cut / Offset
9 Cut U-cut

9. Cut U-cut
Create U-cut on either or both sides of the line.

A2-5
 A2 Corner · Cut / Offset
10 Cut V-cut

10. Cut V-cut

Create V-cut on either or both sides of the line.

A2-6
 A2 Corner · Cut / Offset
11 Cut Quad cut

11. Cut Quad cut

Create quad cut on either or both sides of the line.

A2-7
 A2 Corner · Cut / Offset
要素編集
12
Split by

12. Edit Element Split by

Please refer to 25. Edit Element Split by in [A1] Figure.

13. Edit Element Split at

Please refer to 26. Edit Element Split at in [A1] Figure.

14. Edit Element Connection

Please refer to 27. Edit Element Connection in [A1] Figure.

15. Edit Element Restore

Please refer to 28. Edit Element Restore in [A1] Figure.

16. Edit Element Modify line length

Please refer to 29. Edit Element Line length correction in [A1] Figure.

17. Edit Element Partially delete

Please refer to30. Edit Element Partial clearance in [A1] Figure.

A2-8
 A2 Corner · Cut / Offset
18 Relative Offset

18. Increment Offset

Offset means the distance between the reference line (circle) and the parallel line (concentric
circle). Offset includes increment, absolute and both sides, relative here means movement towards
parallel lines (concentric circle) consisting of reference elements.

19. Absolute Offset

20. Both sides offset

A2-9
 A2 Corner · Cut / Offset
21 Insert mode blocks

21. Insert mode blocks

22. Insert mode Arc
23. Insert mode Intersection
24. Insert mode ExtIntersection
When offsetting continuous figures, specify the outline of the corner.
25. Figure mode Group
26. Figure mode Single element
For the figure formed by offsetting continuous figures, specify configuration.

A2-10
 A2 Corner · Cut / Offset

27 Auxiliary line trace

27. Auxiliary line trace

[A1] Auxiliary line trace according to Fig.30.

28. Back clear

[A1] Back clear according to Fig.31.

29. Rectanglem
[A1] Rectangle input according to Fig.32.

30. Stretch
[A1] Stretch according to Fig.33.

A2-11
 A2 Corner · Cut / Offset

31 Auxiliary line trace

31．Contour extroperation extract
32．Contour extroperation end

■Function
Extract graphic from background.

■Operation

1)Extract essential graphic

1)-a-1 Choose features

1)-a-2 Choose element
1)-a-3 Choose features
1)-a-4 Enter and end

1)-b Specify position

Extroperation，is considered is the minimun area ghaphic which turning specified

position.

A2-12
 A3 Special figures
1 Involute

[A3] Special figure

1. Involute
Draw involute gear.

Starting point
of figure

Center of gear

A3 - 1
 A3 Special figures
1 Involute

10) Toothtip circle diameter

 Please refer to the left diagram.
Blank when not specified.
Set module  (number of teeth of a
circumference + 2 + 0.2 dislocation
coefficient) when it is blank.
11) Dedendum circle diameter
 Please refer to the left diagram.
Blank when not specified.
Set module  (number of teeth of a
circumference – 2 + 0.2  dislocation
coefficient) – 2  top interval when it is
blank.
12) Top interval
 Blank when not specified.
When blank, a setting of "0" is adopted.
This setting is required if the dedendum
circle diameter setting is omitted.
 When used in accordance with JIS
standards, specify a "top interval  0.25 
module" setting.
13) Number of divisions of arc
 For high-precision involute gear, it should
be set above 3 when necessary. For common
gears, it can be set 3.
14) Specify starting position of figure
Determine whether toothtip or dedendum
should be the starting angle in 15).
Shift toothtip or dedendum using the space
key.
15) Starting angle
 Input starting angle of gear.
Set 0 when it is blank.
16) Configuration number
 Input configuration number, it is blank
when it is a circumference.
17) Specify configuration direction
 Shift whether to turn right or turn left using
space key.
18) When input is completed. 1:Finish or F1
Delet
e line
 Using, parameter can be blank.
When you want to change the input values
into blank, please use .

 A half of involute gear will be regarded as a

group.
When you want to add pierce lines etc.,
please cancel group state first.

 Please note that values should not be input

after space key is pressed.

A3 - 2
 A3 Special figures
1 Involute

A3 - 3
 A3 Special figures
2 Simulation

2. Simulation
Indicate the clutch state of involute gear and track teeth using simulation figure.

3. Calculation result

A3 - 4
 A3 Special figures
4 Rack

4. Rack
Draw track figure

A3 - 5
 A3 Special figures
4 Track

A3 - 6
 A3 Special figures
5 Ellipse

5. Ellipse
Draw ellipse.

A3 - 7
6. Line segment arcing
Convert a set of minute line segments to a set of tangent arcs.

1) Select the line or

2) End selection

* Group are not eligible.

If you want to make a group element
into an arc, you need to release the group
and make a line segment arc.
* You can adjust the parameters related to
line segment arcing.
[Setting]-[Change Setting]-[Operation /
CAD]

* If the distance to the midpoint of the line

segment is larger than the tolerance amount,
an error is displayed and a red x marking is
displayed at the corresponding location.

* If it is necessary to make the arc of

a minute line segment, the arc may be
formed by slightly increasing the
tolerance amount based on the
displayed separation amount.

A3 - 8
7. Circle Arc Circle

A3 - 9
 A3 Special figures
7 Circle . Arc
Semicircle
8. Circle . Arc Semicircle
Draw semicircle.

9. Circl Arc Arc of starting point and end point

A3 - 10
 A3 Special figures
9 Arc (Center point)

10. Circle . Arc Arc (Center point)

Specify center to draw arc

A3 - 11
 A3 Special figures
10 Free-form curve

11. Free-form curve

12. Done free-form curve
Draw free-form curve passing through one point

13. Edit free-form curve

A3 - 12
 A3 Special function
13 All Lines

14. All Lines

Approximate the designated circle and arc into very short line segments.

For creating the data used for ?, you should perform ? conversion (optional), you must execute
this command beforehand.
Utilizing this function will produce the figure with very short line segments. “HP control”
function of our new style laser processor can be used to process figures of very short line
segments. If you want to create NC data containing very short line segment figures, please
introduce G64 code at the beginning of processing NC data, close “HP control” function.

A3 - 13
 A3 Special figures
14 Curve offset

15. Curve offset

Magnify or minify figures to a specified extent.

d.ExtIntersection point offset

1) Corner mode ExtIntersection
point
2) Select figures of curve offset
*Select rectangle
3) After selecting, click or
4) Click the reference line
5) Click direction of offset
Corner mode Extintersection 6) Offset Extent
point *The created figure is a
group.
*This command is not
appropriate for discontinuous
Please refer to Page A2-11 for the difference between Intersection
figuresand Extintersection.

A3 - 14
 A3 Special figures
15 External point group
data conversion

16. External point group data conversion

Draw complementary curve between two arcs, which will pass through a series of points stored
via external files.

 A comma can also be used as the

breakpoint between X-coordinate and
Y-coordinate values. CSV format files
output by spreadsheet software can be
8.4000,0 entered as point-group data.
8.2724, 1.3892
7.8934, 2.7362
: :

A3 - 15
 A3 Special figures
16 Spline curve Close

17. Spline curve Close curve curve

Specify the pass position and draw three-dimensional spline curve.

(remark1)Please specify three or more pass points.

(remark2) Depending on the setting of
"Set/ChangeSettings/OperationCAD"-"ApproxProc
edureOfSpline"
, to generate a spline curve that is approximated
by the arc or line segment.

18. Spline curve Open curve

(remark1)Please specify two or more pass points.

(remark2) Depending on the setting of
"Set/ChangeSettings/OperationCAD"-"ApproxProc
edureOfSpline", to generate a spline curve that is
approximated by the arc or line segment.

A3 - 16
 A3 Special figures
Spline curve
18
Specify pass points

19. Spline curve Specify pass points

Edit pass points of spline curve via spline close curve or open curve.

A3 - 17
 A3 Special figures

19 Spline curve
Spline division

20. Spline curve Spline division

Divide spline curve to arc or line segment.

22. Spline curve Set tolerce

A3 - 18
 A3 Special figures
20 Spline curve Set
tolerance

Spline curve maintains special group that is approximated by the arc or line segments.

Tolerance represents the error amount between spline curve and approximate shape.

21. Spline curve Tolerance change

A3 - 19
 A4 Central line
1 Draw Line . Arc

[A4] Central line

1. Draw central line Line . Arc
Line, arc draw the central lines between lines and between arcs

2. Draw central line Circle

Central line is used when user PATTERN register in.
Draw central line on circle.

3. Draw central line Circumference configuration

Draw central line of circle configured on circumference.

4. Draw central line Random configuration

Draw central line at any position.

A4-1
 A4 Central line
5 Entry mode Cross

5. Entry mode Cross

Change central lines of arc . circle into cross mode.

6. Drawing mode Horizontal/Arc

Change central lines of arc . circle into horizontal mode.

7. Drawing mode Vertical/Line

Change central lines of arc . circle into vertical mode.

A4-2
 A4 Central line
Projection amount
8 setting Ratio (circle)

8. Projection amount setting Ratio (cirlce)

Change the projecting central line amount of circle . arc into proportion setting mode.

Precaution

(1) Projection proportion is relative to radius.

(2) During the course of drawing central line, projection amount is specified, however, after
inputting the value, it will be temporarily switched into real number setting mode, therefore,
projection amount equal
to the input value will be drawn.

9. Projection amount setting Real value

Change the projecting central line amount of circle . arc into real size setting mode.

A4-3
 B1 Auxiliary line Figure

1 Point

[B] Auxiliary line

When drawing figures without specified coordinates, we will utilize the charting function with
auxiliary line.
Points, lines and circles made of auxiliary lines are indicated with purple dotted lines.
Purple points, lines and circles are the auxiliary figures used to draw real processing lines
(green).

! – Precautions –
When selecting main menu of auxiliary lines, you can not perform sub-pattern such as
callout group setting ( 1), function key [F8], etc.
Figures grouped with auxiliary lines and sub-pattern called out in auxiliary line mode are
created.
When lines other than auxiliary lines are edited (e.g. additional artwork lines of process
lines) in the condition of simultaneous display of auxiliary lines and other lines, you can take
necessary measures such as separate area operation to avoid wrong edit of auxiliary lines.
Besides, do not display
temporarily auxiliary lines to operate via Auxiliary Line Display OFF of the menu Auxiliary
Line. Auxiliary lines can be displayed again via Auxiliary Line Display ON.
( 1) Group setting menu in . Standard tool bar “Group”, . “Setting” of auxiliary menu “Group edit”, . “Size, notes” of
main
menu or . Manual setting and . “Setting” of nesting “Group edit”.

B1 - 1
[B1] Figure
1. Point
2. Equally dividing points
3. Line Normal
4. Line Horizontal
5. Line Horizontal line segment
[A1] Please refer to figure
6. Line Vertical
charting, figure 1~25,
7. Line Vertical line segment
charting methods are same.
8. Line Angle
9. Line Angle line segment
10. Line Two point line
11. Line Two point line segment
12. Line Parallel
13. Line Parallel line segment
14. Offset Relative
15. Offset Absolute
16. Offset Both sides
17. Arc / Circle Circle
18. Arc / Circle Semicircle
19. Corner cut Loop
20. Corner cut Round
21. Corner cut Chamfer
22. Corner cut Cut
23. Corner cut Cut angle
24. Edit Element Split by
25. Edit Element Divide

B1 - 2
 B1 Auxiliary line Figure
26 Erase auxiliary lines

26. Remove auxiliary lines

Remove auxiliary lines

27. Remove all auxiliary lines

Remove all auxiliary figures

28. Display auxiliary lines ON

29. Display auxiliary lines OFF

B1 - 3
 C1 Poly-Line
1 Poly-Line Line Input

[C] Poly-Line
Input the absolute value and added value via keyboard in order to perform continuous description.
You can also draw arcs and clear back.
Besides, you can perform corner treatment in input. ( , , , )

[C1] Poly-Line input

Input method

1. Poly-Line line Input

C1-1
 C1 Poly-Line
1 Poly-Line line Input

C1-2
 C1 Poly-Line
2 Poly-Line arc Arc C

2. Poly-Line arc Arc C

3. Poly-Line arc 3 arcs
4. Poly-Line arc Semicircle

C1-3
 C1 Poly-Line
Corner treatment in
5 input Round R

5. Corner treatment in input Round R

6. Corner treatment in input Chamfer K
7. Corner treatment in input Loop L
Corner treatment is to draw latest continuous corners between lines.

C1-4
 C1 Poly-Line
8 Back-clear B

8. Back-clear B
After selecting back-clear B, clear the drawn lines (arcs) in drawing order.

Pressing key ESC will clear all figures.

After pressing key ESC , figures will appear again.

C1-5
 C1 Poly-Line
9 Corner Round

9. Corner Round
10. Corner Batch round
11. Corner Chamfer
12. Corner Batch chamfer
13. Corner Cut
14. Corner Loop
15. Corner Angle chamfer
16. Corner Square cut
17. Cut U cut [A2] Draw figures
18. Cut V cut Please refer to 1~17.
19. Cut Quad cut
20. Edit Element Split by
21. Edit Element Split at
22. Edit Element Connect
23. Edit Element Restore
24. Edit Element Length
25. Edit Element Part delete

C1-6
 D1 Moving copying
Cutting command ・
1
[D] Graphic edit changing reference

[D1] Moving copying

1. Moving rotation
Please refer to “18.Moving rotation” of “[K1] Free nesting” section.

2. Copying rotation
Please refer to “19.Copying rotation” of “[K1] Free nesting” section.
The function about the referred-to 「snap argmnt」 cannot be used by 「move rotation」and
「copy rotation」.

3. Moving copying
■Function

When using moving copying， please click the button first

Shift moving format by moving／copying

Please refer to 2（moving parallel）～12（copying enlarge

shrink（note link））of D1[Graphic edit]

Decide whether shift moving copying when moving

（Please refer to「operation」）

■Operation

1)Click moving copying start button

2)Click moving pattern・copying、

moving type・parallel、pulling・
ON button

3)Choose copying object element

３ ）
５） 4)After establishing copying
reference 、 use mouse to move
target to copying area

5)After establishing copying area ，

copy

４） 6)After copying， end。

D1-1
 D1 Moving copying
Cutting command ・
4. utting command・changing reference 4
changing reference
■Function
In moving copying command, set and change the reference moving copying point.

5. Cutting command・editing element

■Function
In moving copying command, move object element to choosing operation

6. Cutting command・the number of copying

■Function
In moving copying command, set the copying number of moving copying

7. Cutting command・redo
■Function
Not moving copying command, redo the copying operation.

8. Cutting command・measure
please refer to “16. Measure” of “[D4]graphic edit size drive” section

D2-2
 D2 Move/copy
Move Move and
1
[D2] move/copy rotate
Select several figures from the ones on screen to move and copy.
Selection method

For select area menu, please refer to 2. Basic operations description, 2-3-1. Mouse operations, 3)
Usage of mouse buttons About select area.
Select area menu can be used together with above mentioned select methods.

D2-1
 D2 Move/copy
2 Move Move and
rotate

1. Move Move and rotate

Move figures on screen and the ones with larger gap at the same time, turn with arrow key ( , ,
, ). For operation method, refer to [K1] Nesting Free 16. Move and rotate.
The function about the referred-to 「snap argmnt」 cannot be used by「move rotation」.

2. Move Parallel
Move figures on screen parallel.

D2-2
 D2 Move/copy
3 Move and rotate

3. Move Rotate
Rotate figures on moving screen.

Input angle should be equal to X axis angle.

A counterclockwise course is consider to be a positive value.

4. Movement Mirror
Move figures on screen mirror.
Draw Mirror line beforehand.

D2-3
 D2 Move/copy
5 Move Scale

5. Move Scale
Magnify (minify) figures on screen

6. Move Scale (Include Notes)

Magnify (minify) figures on screen.
When there are notes, size of notes will be magnified (minified) simultaneously.

D2-4
 D2 Move/copy
7 Copy Copy and rotate

7. Copy Copy and rotate

Drag and copy figures on screen and the ones with larger gap at the same time, turn with arrow
key ( , , , ). For operation method, refer to [K1] Nesting Free 17. Copy and rotate.
The function about the referred-to 「snap argmnt」 cannot be used by 「copy rotation」.

8. Copy Parallel
Copy figures on screen parallel.

D2-5
 D2 Move/copy
9 Copy rotate

9. Copy Rotate
Rotate and copy figures on screen

D2-6
 D2 Move/copy
10 Copy Mirror

10. Copy Mirror

Make figures on copy screen mirror
Draw mirror line beforehand.

D2-7
 D2 Move/copy
11 Copy Scale

11. Copy Scale

Magnify (minify) figures on screen.

12. Copy Scale (Include Notes)

Magnify (minify) figures on screen.
When there are notes, size of notes will be magnified (minified) simultaneously.

D2-8
 D2 Move/copy
13 Conner Round

13. Corner Round

14. Corner Batch round
15. Corner Chamfer
16. Corner Batch chamfer
17. Corner Cut
18. Corner Loop
19. Corner Angle chamfer
20. Corner Square cut
21. Cut U cut Please refer to “[A2] figure to
22. Cut V cut draw”
23. Cut Quad cut corner cut/offset 1~17.
24. Edit Element Split by
25. Edit Element Split at
26. Edit Element Connect
27. Edit Element Recover
28. Edit Element Length
29. Edit Element Part delete
30. Stretch

D2-9
 D3 Edit figures
1 Check sizes Check

[D3] Check sizes

1. Check sizes Check
2. Change display data Previous data
3. Change display data Nexe data
Analyze separate and relative relationship of figures

Color att.( )

LineType Color att.( )

LineType Color att.( )

D3-1
 D2 Edit figures
Replace display data
3
Next data

4. Decimal place 3 digits after decimal point

5. Decimal place 4 digits after decimal point
6. Decimal place 5 digits after decimal point
7. Decimal place 6 digits after decimal point
Specify number of digits after decimal point when performing size examination.
Initial value is 5 digits.

8. Illegal data check

Utilize this function when figures can not be normally moved or copied.
Executing this command will cancel this illegal data.

D3-2
 D4 Dimension drive
1 Dimension drive Edit

[D4] Dimension drive

1. Dimension drive Edit
2. Dimension drive Execute
There are additional size lines for sizes of all figures on screen, and there is no contradiction
(excess and deficiency). Under such circumstances, we change figures by changing the value of size
line.

(1) Normally execute Example 1 .... Without setting variables

If radiuses of arc and circle are same, the arc and circle of the same radius will be changed in
the state of linkage, even though there is only one size line specified.
Please draw arc and circle of different radiuses in this condition.

D4-1
 D4 Dimension drive

3 Variable setting Set

3. Variable setting Set

4. Display mode Variable name
5. Display mode Dimension value
(2) Normally execute Example 2 .... with variables specified

If radiuses of arc and circle are same, the arc and circle of the same radius will be changed in
the state of linkage, even though there is only one size line specified. Please draw arc and circle
of different radiuses in this condition.

D4-2
 D4 Dimension drive
Display mode
5
Dimension value

(3) Example of failure to execute normally

When performing size drive edit, please add size lines properly. Size lines of excess or
contradiction will cause failure to execute. Besides, even after execution, files can not be
accessed to manage.

D4-3
 D4 Dimension drive
1 Dimension drive Edit

(4) Figures to be processed via size drive edit

Size drive edit is only useful for the figures drawn via the following:
Figures made of auxiliary lines can not be processed.

1. Point
a) Origin point
b) Point of intersection (point of intersection of lines)
(point of intersection of line and circle)
(point of intersection of circles)
c) Point of tangency (point of tangency of line and circle)
(point of tangency of circles)
d) Arc center point

2. Line
a) Line between two points
b) Pass point and angle
c) Tangent (pass point and tangent arc)
(angle and tangent arc)
(connected with two arcs)

3. Circle Arc
a) Center point, radius / diameter
b) Center point and points on circumference
c) Radius and two connected figures (radius and two lines are connected)
(radius and tangent are connected with tangent arc)
(radius and two tangent arcs)
d) Three figures are connected (connected with three points on circumference)
(connected with three lines)

(5) Size lines which can be processed via size drive edit
Size drive edit is only useful for the following size lines:
a) Horizontal size
b) Vertical size
c) Size (horizontal. Vertical)
d) Horizontal size
e) Interval size
f) Radius size
g) Diameter size(center . arbitrary
h) Angle size
i) Chamfer size
j) Single arrow size

D4-4
 D4 Dimension drive
1 Dimension drive Edit

(6) Error message list

Errors, causes and actions of size drive edit execution are as follows:
Error message Causes and actions
Intercross value error of size Though red size lines indicate the same part, intercross value of
line. size lines are different.
Please correct intercross values.
Variable name error of size Though red size lines indicate the same part, variable names set
line. via size lines are different. Please correct variable names or
cancel the setting of variable names.
When there are several size Since there are other size lines indicating the same part,
lines on the same part, please unnecessary size lines may appear on size drive edit drawings.
delete them. Please delete red size lines and the ones indicating the same part.
When size lines on figures do The red sizes do not relate to figures on edit drawings, please
not indicate the size, please delete red size lines.
delete them.
If the drawing is of Red size lines indicate that conversion can not be performed due
contradiction, please perform to deficiency of size line, etc. red circles indicate the size lines
supplement and correction of lacking end points, etc which determine position of figures. Please
size lines. utilize figure charting and size line charting functions to correct
drawing, and execute size drive edit function again.
Figure analysis space is not There should be enough unoccupied pattern data space for size
guaranteed. drive edit, available data space of conversion drawings is below
half the whole of data space.
Space necessary for figure Memory required for executing size drive edit can not be
analysis is not guaranteed. guaranteed.
Space storing analysis results The complicated upper limit of figures for which size drive edit
is not guaranteed. can be performed is extended.
There is no space for drawn
figures which are calculated
again.
There is unnecessary angle Red angle size lines are unnecessary, data can be converted
size. without them, please delete them (exactly, angle size lines
indicating right angle part).
There are size lines which are Please replace size lines which cannot be processed in size drive
not supported. edit with the ones which can be analyzed.
Point and end point (center Points marked with red circles can not be calculated, please
point) calculation is impossible. examine size lines and intercross values determining points.
When it is center of arc, please examine size lines determining
center as well as related data determining arcs.
Line calculation is impossible. Always make sure that sizes of circle . lines are appropriate,
Circle calculation is impossible. please examine related size line values and intercross values.

D4-5
 D4 Dimension drive
6 Dimension input

6. Dimension input Horizontal

7. Dimension input Vertical
8. Dimension input Parallel
9. Dimension input Interval
10. Dimension input Radius
Please refer to” [H1] size .
11. Dimension input Diameter
comment
12. Dimension input Angle
size input “ 1~42.
13. Dimension input Chamfer
14. Dimension input Half arrow
15. Dimension input Arc

D4-6
 D4 Dimension drive
16 Dimension input

16．Measure
■Function
Get the distance between two elements.

■Operation

1) Choose first element

2) Choose second element

・ After choosing second element correctly， the distance will be showed in status column.
・ After choosing the end point of the segment whose two elements are not parallel line, will
become the operation of getting angle.
・ After choosing one line twice， will become the operation of getting line length.
・ After choosing one circle twice， will become the operation of getting circle radius.
・ By inputting the key「－」and「＋」on keyboard， will become the operation of changing
measure symbol.

D4-7
 D5 Dimension setting
1 Edit Dimension value

[D5] Dimension Setting

1. Edit Dimension value
2. Edit Out scale
3. Edit Position of characters
4. Edit Position of arrow
5. Edit Height of character
6. Edit Decimal place
7. Edit Leader
8. Edit With ( )
9. Edit Line ON/OFF [H2] Please refer to size and
10. Edit GAP comment
11. Edit Arrange interval size setting 1~18.
12. Edit Center
13. Dimension mode Tolerance
14. Dimension mode Character
15. Setting Height of character
16. Setting Decimal place
17. Setting Tolerance large
18. Setting Tolerance small

D5-1
 D6 Screen copy
Copy between screens
1
Copy

[D6] Screen copy

Function of copy between screens means that after two CamMagic LA screens are started, figures
of one CamMagic LA are copied to another CamMagic LA screen.

Two CamMagic LA screens should be started beforehand.

At most two CamMagic LA screens can be started, or, processing memory will become
insufficient and this will cause abnormal processing.
When two CamMagic LA screens are started, log files cannot be created normally.
Attributes such as BEAM ON/BEAM OFF cannot be copied.

1. Copy between screens Element copy

Obtain figures to be copied between screens.

D6 - 1
 D6 Screen copy
Copy between screens
2
Paste
2. Copy between screens Paste
Paste figures obtained from Step 1.

3. Copy between screens Confirmation of paste number

D6 - 2
 E1 Sub-pattern
1 Load sub-pattern

[E] Sub-pattern
[E1] Sub-pattern
Processing holes such as round holes and square holes which are frequently processed in laser
processing are embodied as sub-pattern. You can call out the processing holes with pierce lines (cut
line) by means of selecting types of sub-pattern and inputting this sub-pattern and configuration
place.

There are following three call-out methods of sub-pattern:

Input sub-pattern names [E1] sub-pattern 1
Call out from the list of diagrams [E1] sub-pattern 2
Call out from the list of characters [E2] sub P list 1~14

When method is utilized for call out, offset number [0 –100] can be selected and YES/NO in
automatic deceleration route (G09) can be added. For methods , , G09 can be added.
When calling out screw holes, always select from menu via mouse.

1. Sub-pattern Load
Input sub-pattern name to make sub-pattern.

2. Sub-pattern dialogue settings Select formed sub-pattern form the list of diagrams

E1 - 1
 E1 Sub-pattern
2 Sub-pattern List

E1 - 2
 E1 Sub-pattern
2 Sub-pattern List

Standard sub-pattern figures list

E1 - 3
 E1 Sub-pattern
2 Sub-pattern List

Angle displayed in figures is 0 degree.

Please input values without contradiction, or, figures can not be displayed normally.
The input height of P3 single D is larger than half of diameter.
Horizontal size for P9 long hole tangent is larger than vertical size.
Holes called out via sub-pattern are all of group type.
In order to mark with size lines, please utilize “Ungroup” in standard tool bar to ungroup before
marking with size lines.
Pressing FUNCTION KEY ( F8 ) can also call out sub-pattern.
After using F8 ,it will become automatically sub-pattern character list screen.

E1 - 4
 E1 Sub-pattern
2 Sub-pattern List

When called out via a, b methods, automatic deceleration code (G09) will be added at pierce
and corner.
For instance, when calling out P6 square hole without R, the following five places will be
added with G09
(Light blue indicates additional attributes.)

When c method is used for call out, you can select whether to add offset number [0~100] and
automatic
deceleration code (G09).For methods a b,G09 can be added.
When calling out screw holes, always select from menu via mouse.

3. Load user pattern

E1 - 5
 E1 Sub-pattern
4 Save user pattern

4. User pattern Save

5. User pattern /
Pierces used frequently can be registered as use pattern.
During registration, make figures and designate size via variable setting as below:

E1 - 6
 E1 Sub-pattern
4 Save user pattern

E1 - 7
 E1 Sub-pattern
4 Save user pattern

E1 - 8
 E1 Sub-pattern
4 Save user pattern

E1 - 9
 E1 Sub-pattern
4 Save user pattern

E1 - 10
 E1 Sub-pattern
4 Save user pattern

E1 - 11
 E4 Sub-pattern
4 Save user pattern

E1 - 12
 E1 Sub-pattern
4 Save user pattern

If logging in figures with same radius or arcs in user pattern, all circles or arcs will be changed
into the final settings even though respective values are set at the time of call out. If you want to
change them respectively, please make them with different radiuses when making drawings for
user pattern.

When logging in user pattern, you cannot set respective variables of circles or arcs with same
radius.
Therefore, when making drawings for user pattern, make them with different radiuses.

E1 - 13
 E1 Sub-pattern

6 Draw central lines / arcs

6. Draw central lines Line / Arc

7. Draw central lines Circles
[A4] Circle drawing Central
8. Draw central lines Circumference position
line
9. Draw central lines Random position
please refer to 1~4.

Laser Macro
Laser Macro is a kind of software used to make artwork holes such as round holes and square holes
via special NC commands.
Compared with figures called out in sub-pattern, NC data is shorter, however, the processing time
become longer.
Therefore, round holes and square holes of Laser Macro are suitable when number of holes is very
large or for process via configuration pattern on grids and circumference, etc.

Laser Macro precautions

1 Nesting is not possible for figures which have utilized Laser Macro.
2 Artwork hole called out via Laser Macro is not suitable for figure edit rotation, mirror,
magnification movement or copy.

Laser Macro call out methods include:

1 Call it out by means of inputting Laser Macro name [E1] sub-pattern 10
2 Call it out from figures list [E1] sub-pattern 11
3 Call it out from character list [E4] sub-pattern 1 ~10

10. Laser Macro load

Input Laser Macro name to call it out.

E1 - 14
 E1 Sub-pattern
11 Laser Macro List

11. Laser Macro List

Select from figures list, callout Laser Macro.

Laser Macro is displayed white.

For users whose NC device is M2, please buy OPTION Laser Macro on the side of NC device.
For NC data creation at the time of calling out Laser Macro, always make it with absolute value
(G90).
Artwork hole length will be determined automatically according
to the size (3mm at most)
Generally, 1mm length unit is used, round holes below #1 are
specified as below, processing starts from central hole.

E1 - 15
 E1 Sub-pattern
11 Laser Macro List

Laser Macro figures list

In figures, the angle is 0 degree.

Please input values without contradiction.
If there is contradiction, figures cannot be displayed normally.
If NC device is M2, users cannot utilize L1 (Lineation) L2 (pierce).

E1 - 16
 E1 Sub-pattern
11 Laser Macro List

When Laser Macro has been used, NC data output formats are as follows:
1 G code lists of different kinds of Laser Macro

When NC device is M3
Round hole Long Rectangle holes Square hole (without R, with
Figure name Pierce Pierce Single D Double D
hole R)
Laser Macro name L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10
G code 221 222 223 224 225
NC side label No. 9221 9222 9223 9224 9225

When NC device is M2:

Single D Lineation Rectangle holes Square hole (without R,

Figure name Round hole long hole
D with R)
Laser Macro name L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10
G code 923 924 925
NC side label No. 9923 9924 9925

2 Program No. table with configuration pattern utilized.

When NC device is M3:
Configuration Circumference Line Arc configuration Grid Grid configuration
name configuration configuration configuration X Y
Program No. 9226 9228 9229 9236 9237
#101 Radius Pitch Radius X pitch X pitch
#102 Gradient Starting angle Y pitch Y pitch
Starting angle
#103 Number Number Number of Y Number of Y
Number
#104 Pitch angle Number of X Number of X
#105 Gradient Gradient

When the number of circumference and arc configurations (#103) is less than 0, configuration
will in the form of radiation.

When NC device is M2:

Configuration Circumference Line Arc Grid configuration Grid configuration

name configuration configuration configuration X Y

Program No. 9926 9928 9929 9936 9937

D1 Radius Pitch Radius X Pitch X Pitch
D2 Starting angle Gradient Starting angle Y Pitch Y Pitch
D3 Number Number Number Number of Y Number of Y
D4 Pitch angle Number of X Number of X

When Laser Macro variable (I) of circumference and arc configurations is less than 0,
configuration
will in the form of radiation.

E1 - 17
 E1 Sub-pattern
11 Laser Macro List

E1 - 18
 E1 Sub-pattern
12 Layout On circle

12. Linkage Layout On circumference

Configure sub-pattern and Laser Macro on circumference.

Number of configurations is 255 at most in one time.

E1 - 19
 E1 Sub-pattern
Layout On circle
13
(Radial)

13. Linkage Layout On circle (Radial)

Configure sub-pattern and Laser Macro into radiation form on circumference.

Number of configurations is 255 at most in one time.

E1 - 20
 E1 Sub-pattern
14 Layout On arc

14. Layout On arc

Configure sub-pattern and LaserMacro on arcs.

Number of configurations is 255 at most in one time.

E1 - 21
 E1 Sub-pattern
Layout On arcs
15
(Radial)

15. Linkage Layout On arcs (Radial)

Configure sub-pattern and Laser Macro into radiation form on arcs.

Number of configurations is 255 at most in one time.

E1 - 22
 E1 Sub-pattern
16 Layout Grid form X

16. Linkage Layout Grid form X

17. Linkage Layout Grid form Y
Configure sub-pattern and Laser Macro into grid form.

If NC device is M2, please set “Gradient” of grid to 0 (zero) when creating Laser Macro data,
other settings are invalid.
Number of configurations is 255 at most in one time.

E1 - 23
 E1 Sub-pattern
18 Layout On line

18. Linkage Layout On line

Configure sub-pattern and Laser Macro on lines

Number of configurations is 255 at most in one time.

E1 - 24
 E1 Sub-pattern
19 Sequence pattern shift

19．Sequence pattern shift left rotation left rotation

20．Sequence pattern shift right rotation

■Function
Can do left rotation or right rotation shift for sequence pattern processing direction.

■Operation

2. After clicking button ， the processing

direction of sequence pattern will do left
rotation or right rotation shift.
3. After shift，in the information column，the
information will be showed as the left
graph.

Right rotation shift，after showing dialog screen, in note column， as the following
graph「circle ０ right」，will show the note of right rotation sequence pattern.（when
left rotation，no「left」will be showed）

When a machine switch is performed where the offset direction is set to the 「left」 or the
「right」 by setting - processing machine information setting, subpattern switch left rotation
/ right rotation is switched automatically.

E1 - 25
 E2 Sub-pattern
1 P0: positive circle

[E2] Sub-P list

1. P0: circle 0
Call out subschema P0 (positive circle 0).

2. P1: circle 1
3. P2: Single D
4. P3: Double D
5. P4: Fan hole without R
6. P5: Fan hole with R
7. P6: Square hole without R
8. P7: Square hole with R
9. P8: Square hole with C
10. P9: Slot connected
11. P10: Slot non connected
12. P11: Key holes
13. P: Pierce
14. K1: Marking

Just like 1. above mentioned, call out Macro while inputting parameters.

E2 - 1
 E2 Sub-pattern
Linkage layout
15
On circle

15. Linkage layout On circle

16. Linkage layout On circle (Radial)
17. Linkage layout On arc
18. Linkage layout On arc (Radial) (E1) Sub-pattern
19. Linkage layout Grid form X Please refer to 12~18
20. Linkage layout Grid form Y
21. Linkage layout On line

E2 - 2
 E3 Screw hole list with R
R1: R pierce positive
1
circle left

[E3] Screw hole list with R

1. R1: R pierce positive circle left
Call out R1 with R pattern (R pierce positive circle left).

2. R1R: R pierce circle right

3. R01: R pierce circle
4. R6: no R pierce square hole
5. R9: R pierce square hole left
6. R9R: R pierce square hole right
7. Screw hole M1
8. Screw hole M1.2
9. Screw hole M1.4
10. Screw hole M1.6
11. Screw hole M2
12. Screw hole M2.5
13. Screw hole M3
14. Screw hole M3.5
15. Screw hole M4
16. Screw hole M5
17. Screw hole M6
18. Screw hole M8
19. Screw hole M10
20. Screw hole M12
Just like 1. above mentioned, call out Macro while inputting parameters.

E3 - 1
 E3 Screw hole list with R
Linkage layout On
21
circle

21. Linkage layout On circle

22. Linkage layout On circle (Radial)
(E1) Sub-pattern
23. Linkage layout On arc
Please refer to 12~18
24. Linkage layout On arc (Radial)
25. Linkage layout Grid form X
26. Linkage layout Grid form Y
27. Linkage layout On line

E3 - 2
 E4 Laser Macro
1 L1: Marking

[E4] Laser Macro

1. L1: Marking
Call out Marking

2. L2: Pierce
3. L3: Round hole
4. L4: Slot
5. L5: Single D
6. L6: Double D
7. L7: Rectangle hole without R
8. L8: Rectangle hole with R
9. L9: Square hole without R
10. L10: Square hole with R
Just like 1. above mentioned, call out Macro while inputting parameters.

11. Linkage layout On circle

12. Linkage layout On circle (Radial)
13. Linkage layout On arc (E1) Sub-pattern
14. Linkage layout On arc (Radial) Please refer to 12~18
15. Linkage layout Grid form X
16. Linkage layout Grid form Y
17. Linkage layout On line

E4 - 1
 E5 Dimension drive
1 Dimension drive edit

[E5] Dimension drive

1. Dimension drive Edit [D3] 1.
2. Dimension drive Execute 2.
3. Variable setting Setting 3.
4. Display mode Variable name 4.
5. Display mode Dimension value 5.
6. Dimension input Horizontal [H1] 1 ~ 6.
7. Dimension input Vertical 7 ~ 2.
8. Dimension input Parallel 18.
9. Dimension input Interval 19.
10. Dimension input Radius 20 ~ 23.
11. Dimension input Diameter 24 ~ 27.
12. Dimension input Angle 28 ~ 36.
13. Dimension input Chamfer 39.
14. Dimension input Half arrow 40 ~ 42.
15. Dimension input Arc 37 ~ 38.

For your reference.

E5 - 1
 F1 Development
1 Composite development

[F] Development
[F1] Composite development
1. Composite development
Development of composite of different figures.

F1-1
 F1 Development
1 Composite development

F1-2
 F1 Development
1 Composite development

Extension condition setting table

Extension condition setting (mm)
1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Machine / 4: Materials / 5: Print
Machine name M1
Smallest Bend R [mm] 0.1
Material name SPC
Board thickness [mm] 1.6
Bending angle 90
Bend R [mm] 1
Basic figure size (Outside size=0/Inside size =1) 0
Movement figure size (Outside size=0/Inside size 0
=1)
Tangent (YES=0/NO=1) 0
Peak/Valley (Peak=0/Valley=1) 0
Calculation method (Offset=0/Coefficient=1) 1
Extension coefficient 0.45
Figure offset -2.49823

1 Select menu 1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Machine / 4: Materials / 5: Print

Selection method Place to be selected
Or press numbered FUNCTION KEY.
1: End Select when you want to end table input.
Contents
2: Select when you want to interrupt composite development.
Interrupt
3: Machine Select when you want to change machine name displayed.
4: Material Select when you want to change material name displayed.
5: Print Select when you want to print extension condition setting
table.

2 Input items

b) Material name
Display material name set last time.
If you need to change it, please select 4: Material in the menu.

c) Board thickness [mm]

Input thickness of board to be processed (0.1~99.9)

d) Bending angle
Input the angle for bend processing (1~179 degrees).

e) Bend R [mm]
Input inside R for bend processing (smallest bend R~99.9).

F1-3
 F1 Development
1 Composite development

f) Basic figure size (Outside size=0 / Inside size = 1)

When basic figures are made via outside size, input 0.
When basic figures are made via inside size, input 1.

g) Movement figure size (Outside size = 0 / Inside size = 1)

When movement figures are made via outside size, input 0.
When movement figures are made via inside size, input 1.

h) Tangent (YES = 0 / NO = 1)
If basic reference line has different length from movement reference line, and figure offset is
negative, then, input 0 in order to make tangent or 1 otherwise.

i) Peak/valley (Peak = 0 / Valley = 1)

When curve is at the peak, input 0.
When curve is at the valley, input 1.

j) Calculation method (Offset = 0 / Coefficient = 1)

When calculating offset via the values registered in outside size (inside size offset) offset of
extension condition registration-in table, input 0.
When calculating offset via the values obtained according to extension coefficient, input 1.

k) Extension coefficient
When extension coefficient has been registered in extension condition registration table, display the
registration values.
When extension coefficient has not been registered in extension condition registration table:
J) When calculation method is offset, display 0.
J) When calculation method is coefficient, display the previous value.

F1-4
 F1 Development
1 Composite development

1) Figure offset
Display the figure offset (extension . reduction) calculated according to calculation method.
When figure offset is positive value, it is extended, on the contrary, it is reduced.
Calculation Offset Coefficient
method
Display offset registered in extension condition registration table. Display values
Figure offset When it is not registered in extension condition registration table, 0 is calculated according to
displayed. displayed extension
Figure offset which is displayed via basic size . movement size. coefficient.
Basic size Movement Figure offset For the formula,
size please refer to the
Outside Outside size offset following.
size Outside size (Outside size offset + Inside size
Outside Inside size offset)/2
size Outside size (Outside size offset + Inside size
Inside size Inside size offset)/2
Inside size Inside size offset

Calculation method is that of figure offset with respect to coefficient

Figure offset= Length of neutral line (without extension or reduction) - Length of input figure

F1-5
 F1 Development
1 Composite development

< Calculation example >

Figure after composite development

F1-6
 F1 Development
1 Composite development

Notes: About board thickness offset

When composite development of the following case model is performed via outside size
drawings, thickness of board should be shortened.
This is called board thickness offset.

F1-7
 F1 Development
1 Composite development

Notes) Composition when lines which are extended or reduced due to composition are not vertical to
composite lines
If the following composite development is performed via reduction offset, then, there will be gap
between composite lines of basic figures and movement figures and connection lines.
There are three connection methods here, the connection method required by customers will be
adopted, therefore, gap will be reserved.

F1-8
 F1 Development
2 Extension development

2. Extension development
Make and development surface via lines of figure.

F1 Development
2 Extension development

F1-9
3. Extension registration

F1 Development
3 Extension registration

Extension screw in condition table

F1-10
 Extension screw-in condition
1: Extension condition registration / 2:
Interrupt
Machine name M1
Material name SPC
Bend angle 90

1 Select menu 1: Extension condition registration / 2: Interrupt

Selection method. Move mouse pointer to the place to be selected and click left button.
Or press numbered FUNCTION KEY.
Contents 1. End Select when registration-in table of extension condition
corresponding to input machine name, material name and bend
angle is started.
2. Select when extension screw-in condition table is interrupted.
Interrupt

2 Input items
a) Machine name input machine name.
Click the pointer to get in, machine name registration table is opened.

After opening the table, move pointer to machine name to be selected, after
selecting the machine name with left button of mouse, the table closes.

b) Material name Input material name.

Click the pointer to get in, material name registration table is opened.

c) Bend angle Input bend angle

F1-11
 F1 Development
3 Extension registration

1 Select menu 1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Print

Selection method move mouse pointer to the place to be selected and press the left button.
or press numbered FUNCTION KEY.
Contents 1. End Select when extension condition registration is completed.
Overwritten.
2. Interrupt Select when extension condition registration is interrupted. Not
overwritten.
3. Print Select when extension condition registration is printed.

2 Input items
a) Board thickness
Input board thickness (0.1~99.9).
b) Bend R
Input inside R (smallest bend R~99.9) for bend processing.
c) Outside size offset
Input figure offset (reduction) of basic figure and move figures made via outside size.
It doesnt input minus.
d) Inside size offset
Input figure offset (extension) of basic figure and movement figures made via inside size.

Normally, register in on the condition of following materials, board thickness and 90-degree
bend angle as reference data.
Please change it before utilizing.

It is not necessary to input all of c) Outside size offset d) Inside size offset e) Extension
coefficient.

F1-12
Blanks in c) Outside size offset d) Inside size offset can be regarded 0.

F1-13
 F1 Development
4 Section definition G
setting

4. Section bend out spread Section definition G SET

5. Section bend outspread Section bend outspread

F1-14
 F1 Development
5 Section bend
development

In section development, if two section figures cannot be displayed at the same time, then,
development is not possible.
(Occasionally, special figures cannot be development.)
In section development, development of 90-degree bend angle should be guaranteed.

F1-15
 F1 Development
5 Section . bend
development
Extension condition setting table
Extension condition setting (mm)
1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Machine / 4: Material / 5: Print
Machine name M1
Smallest bend R [mm] 0.1
Material name SPC
Board thickness [mm] 1.6
Board thickness offset (NO=0/YES=1) 1
Size reference (Outside figure=0/Inside figure=1) 0
Justify (Central = 0/45 degrees=1/Vertical=2/Horizontal=3/Outside 0
open=4)
Development mode (Extension=0/Cutting=1) 0
Bend part (Same=0/Different=1) 0
Same bend [mm] 1
Calculation method (Offset=0/Coefficient =1) 1
Same extension coefficient 0.45
90-degree offset 0.70177

1 Select menu 1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Machine / 4: Material / 5: Print

Selection method place to be selected
Or press numbered FUNCTION KEY.
Contents 1: End Select when you want to end table input.
2: Interrupt Select when you want to interrupt section . bend
development.
3: Machine Select when you want to change machine name displayed.
4: Material Select when you want to change material name displayed.
5: Print Select when you want to print extension condition setting
table.
2 Input items
a) Machine name . smallest Bend R
Display machine name and smallest Bend R set last time.
If you need to change it, please select 3: Machine in the menu.

b) Material name
Display material name set last time.
If you need to change it, please select 4: Material in the menu.

c) Board thickness [mm]

Input thickness of board to be processed (0.1~99.9).

F1-16
 F1 Development
5 Section . bend
development

d) Board thickness offset (NO=0 / YES=1)

Enter "0" to enable board thickness offsets, or "1" to disable board thickness offsets. The
board
thickness offset function should be enabled or disabled according to the surface justification
direction in question.
Performing board Not performing
thickness offset board
thickness offset

 Heavy lines are inside size

lines.

e) Size reference (Outer Figure =0, Inner Figure =1)

Enter "0" if the created section figure is an outside figure, and enter "1" if it is an inside
figure.
Outside figure input Inside figure input

f) Justify (Center 0/45=1; Vertical=2; Horizontal=3; Outside Open=4)

Specify the upper covers alignment method. Overlapping examples are shown below.
Inside bend figure Outside bend figure

For inside bend figure

Center 45 Vertical Horizontal Outside open

*Overlapped

For outside bend figure

Center 45 Vertical Horizontal Outside open

F1-17
 F1 Development
5 Section . bend
development

g) Development mode (Extension=0/Cut=1)

Input the processing mode for upper excessive part.

h) Bend part (Same = 0 / Different = 1)

Input calculation method of offset of each part.
Same : When j) calculation method is coefficient, calculate offset of each part via bend
angle, k)
same bending coefficient.
Different : input offset of each part via table input.

i) Same bend R [mm]

Input inside bend R of calculation methods in which "same" is selected in h) Bend part and
"coefficient"
is selected in j) calculation method.
For detailed information, please refer to the next page about offset.
j) Calculation method (offset=0/coefficient =1)
Input calculation method of offset
Offset : The value displayed for l) 90 degree offset is offset.
Coefficient : Calculate offset via k) same extension coefficient.
For detailed information, please refer to the next page about offset.

F1-18
 F1 Development
5 Section . bend
development

l) 90 degree offset
Offset of bend part between lines can be calculated according to size reference, outside or
inside
figure, in bend development.
It can be changed via key input.
h) When calculation method is offset : Offset of bend angle 90 degrees registered in
during
extension registration, when size reference is
outside
figure, it is displayed as outside figure, when it is
inside
figure, it is displayed as inside figure.
h) When calculation method is coefficient : Display 90-degree offset calculated according to is
same
bend bending coefficient (when size reference is
outside
figure, it is outside size offset, when it is inside
figure, it is inside size offset).
For calculation method, please refer to composite
development extension condition setting table l)
figure offset.
About offset
Bend part: same
Bend part: different
Calculation method: offset Calculation method: coefficient
Bend angle It is 90 degrees, independent of Calculate according to each bend Display each bend angle.
all bend angles. angle.
(Same) Display the value input last time. Display the value input last time. Display the same bend R.
bend R For referring to offset registered in For referring to offset registered
for extension, therefore, it is in for extension, therefore, it is
necessary. necessary.
Same Display extension coefficient of
extension bend angle 90 degrees registered
coefficient in for extension.
(90 degrees) Display the offset of bend angle Display 90-degree offset When calculation method is
offset 90 degrees registered in for calculated from extension offset, display offset registered in
extension (when size reference is coefficient (when size reference is for extension (when size reference
outside figure, it is outside size outside figure, it is outside size is outside figure, it is outside size
offset, when it is inside figure, it offset, when it is inside figure, it offset, when it is inside figure, it
is inside size offset). is inside size offset). is inside size offset) according to
bend angle and bend R.
Any bend part corresponds with When calculation method is
the above-mentioned offsets. The offset can be calculated via coefficient, calculate and display
above-mentioned extension offset (when size reference is
coefficient according to bend outside figure, it is outside size
angle at corner bend. offset, when it is inside figure, it
is inside size offset) via extension
coefficient in extension
registration according to bend
angle and bend R.

F1-19
6. Remove auxiliary lines Remove all
auxiliary lines
7. Remove auxiliary lines YES [G1] Remove
8. Remove auxiliary lines NO Please refer to 9,10,11,4 and
9. Remove all Point 6
10. Remove all Comment

F1-20
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

11. Duct development

Select duct development menu on screen and make development figures with drawing lines by
inputting parameters.

There are 46 patterns

Cylinder form: 18, Circular cone form: 12, Square column form: 3,
Square cone form: 7, Others: 6.

F1-21
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-22
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-23
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-24
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

About same parameter item

Explain the same items via parameter input.

Number of divisions N
Curves of development figure are mainly indicated via the number of divisions.
For instance, when number of divisions is 24, calculate coordinates dividing equally the curve into
24 parts, and form the arc with free-form curve which will pass through the point.
Number of divisions is 24, and there are around 48 arcs.
The largest number of divisions is 400, please specify the number properly.
Since free-form curve part is grouped, please ungroup it.
For instance) Beveled cylinder

Interval S
Add Lineation lines of scales for bend processing to development figures.
(Lineation means that scales are marked on materials.)
Interval means the distance from development figure and the formed Lineation line.
When it is minus, development figure will be exceeded.
For example, right circular pipe . branch pipe

F1-25
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

Curve interval
Development figure
interval
Elbow form . square round form, etc. in order to avoid waste in board processing, several figures
are grouped every time.
Curve interval and development figure interval are reserved in order to avoid overlap of figures.

Number of Lineation divisions KN

It looks like a cone form, divide the development figures as a whole equally according to specified
number of divisions, and add Lineation lines to such places if the number is large, then, add thin
Lineation lines.
For example) Truncated cone

F1-26
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

Development method Whole / Half / 1/4

Whole =360 degrees (a revolution) Half = 180 degrees 1/4 =90 degree

Whether to perform board thickness offset Y YES/NO

YES = Consider board thickness, perform development via neutral line without dilation as
reference line, and perform development according to the foremost place for reference where
other figures are
connected.
The input values will change due to this offset.
NO = As explained above, utilize when the input values do not need offset.
Do not change the development of input values, input according to neutral line as reference
line.

Board thickness t
Input thickness of board used. It is set valid only for board thickness offset.

Neutral line
Indicating center of board thickness.
When board bends, it is located where dilation will not occur.

F1-27
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-28
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-29
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-30
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-31
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-32
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-33
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-34
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-35
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-36
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-37
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-38
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-39
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-40
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-41
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-42
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-43
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-44
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-45
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-46
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-47
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-48
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-49
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-50
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-51
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-52
 F1 Development
1 Duct development

F1-53
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-54
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-55
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-56
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-57
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-58
F1-59
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-60
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-61
 F1 Development
11 Duct development

F1-62
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-63
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-64
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-65
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-66
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-67
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-68
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-69
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-70
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-71
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-72
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-73
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

Duct development

F1-74
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-75
 F1 Development function
11 Duct development

F1-76
 F1 Development function
Section development -
12 Element load

12 Section Element load

Components using are called out via the command "development function . composite extension .
section development. element load," it is used when elements to be registered in are edited before this.
Components which have been edited should be called out via command "development function .
composite extension . section development . element load".

F1-77
 F1 Development function
12 Section development -
Element load

F1-78
 F1 Development function
12 Section development -
Element load

List of error messages

No. Messages Reasons Actions
1 Failure to read file. Failure to find name of specified Please select from the list and
element. input name of element again.
2 Errors in pattern data base Element figure is too complicated, Read figures not complicated.
access figure or attribute data space is not
large enough.

F1-79
 F1 Development function
13 Section development -
Element save

13 Section development Element save

Components using development function are called out via the command "development function .
composite extension . section development . element save."
In "development function . composite extension . section development . element save," registration
object screen is confirmed, execute register after it is judged suitable. If it is judged unsuitable, error
messages will be displayed, end the command.
The following 6 items will be confirmed. Please refer to the list of error messages for details.
(a) Elements are drawn with line segment and corner R
(b) Have additional attributes
(c) Connected
(d) Close form
(e) Endpoints for open form are on a line segment
(f) Arcs are connected

F1-80
 F1 Development function
13 Section development -
Element save

F1-81
 F1 Development function
13 Section development -
Element save

F1-82
 F1 Development function
Section development -
13 Element save

List of error messages

F1-83
 F1 Development function
13 Section development -
Element save

No
Messages Reasons Actions
.
8 Failure to write files. Insufficient hard disk volume. Delete unnecessary files.
10 Errors in pattern data base access Space for figure data or attribute data is Execute figures not too
not large enough because element figure is complicated.
too complicated.

F1-84
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

14. Stretch of section development execution

Organize the elements to perform section stretch instruction. Before creating one stretch figure and
indicating that any element can be used, utilize the command "Stretch of section development
execution."
For stretch element, utilize "Stretch of section development execution" again for registration.

14.1. Stretch pattern designation

Designate the element to be used via section stretch.

F1-85
 F1 Development function
14 Section development -
Development execution

F1-86
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-87
 F1 Development function
14 Section development -
Development execution

14.2. Parameter setting

Set necessary parameters in stretch figure creation according to the following setting screen.
While stretch pattern is created again, parameter setting screen is automatically started to display
the previous setting.
Or, when stretch figure is created and "setting" menu of section stretch screen is started, parameters
can be set / changed.
For details of parameters, refer to parameter description.

Setting screen

F1-88
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-89
 F1 Development function
14 Section development -
Development execution

(3) Parameter description

a) Thickness of board
Specify thickness of board for the material.

b) Material
Specify the material

c) Cling
Perform clinging treatment for stretch.
Specify the margin of welding for thickness of board.
For clinging pattern, you can change the settings individually during three-dimensional figure
confirmation.

d) Coincide
Perform coinciding treatment for stretch.
Designate coincidence pattern
For coincidence pattern, you can change the settings individually during three-dimensional figure
confirmation.

e) Bending corrected value

When doing bending correction, specify the use of bending correction table values, or calculate
with the formula.
For calculation formula, refer to 1.3. Calculation formula.

Smallest bending radius

Designate smallest bending radius
Used for "calculation formula preceding."
Middle axle
Specify the position of middle axle.
The middle axle cannot flex when the board bends, it indicates the middle size position.
Used for "calculation formula preceding."
[Table edit]
Start editing the table which supports current board thickness / material bending corrected
value (see
next page).
When "table corrected value" is 0 and "table preceding," bending corrected values are
registered in. If "thickness of board" is larger than 0, perform "board thickness correction" and
"clinging correction".
When "paper model", without board thickness correction, is created, please set "thickness of
board" to 0.

F1-90
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

f) Creation mode of stretch figure

Specify whether to perform composite creation of one side or separate creation of each side for all
stretch figures.

g) Reference figure creation

Specify the reference line prior to creation of displayed bending correction.
When editing stretch figure (added hole figure, etc), it becomes benchmark.

h) Created coordinates of stretch figure

Specify that stretch figure is CAD screen and coordinates are reference display.
Reference point of stretch figure is the center of four corners of the bottom side (point of
intersection of diagonal lines).

i) Line approximation mode of arc

For stretch figure calculation, designate approximation mode in which arc approximates to line
segments.
Angle approximation
Designate the approximate angle.
Divide the arc into approximate line segments according to designated central angle.

Length approximation
Designate approximate length.
Approximated line segment length should be smaller than the designated length,
approximate line segment.

j) Output mode of curve

Clearance
Specify the clearance between stretch figure outline and created marking line.

k) Output mode of curve

Specify that curve of stretch figure create meander lines or marking lines.
Clearance
Specify the clearance between stretch figure outline and created marking line.
Used for "marking line".

F1-91
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

[Table edit] screen

F1-92
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

Calculation of bending correction

Perform bending correction according to material, thickness of board and bending angle for
creation of
stretch figure.

Stretch parameter [bending correction] = bending correction table preceding, or if there is a

correction table, perform bending correction with bending correction table values.
Stretch parameter [bending correction] = bending correction table preceding, or if there is
not a
correction table, calculate bending corrected value with the following formula to perform bending
correction.

a. When using bending correction table:

Bending correction table is registered in according to material, thickness of board and bending
angle.
For bending correction table, start table edit screen via parameter setting [bending correction]
[table edit]
to perform addition / correction.

b. When using formula:

<Basic calculation formula>
Stretch length L = A inside size + B inside size + Length of bend of middle axle

This is basic calculation.

The following page is about the calculation based on size kind and bending angle.

F1-93
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

b-1. Bending angle = 90 degree:

<Calculation formula>
Stretch length L = A input value + B input value + bending corrected value

Min.
bend (r)
Center axis
Outside size 2

radius (R)
Outside size

Inside size

Inside size

Outside size 2

Outside size

The following table shows bending corrected values.

B
Outside size Outside size 2 Inside size
A

Outside size a a b

Outside size 2 a a b

Inside size b b c

a: - 2 (Thickness of board + R) + ( r) / 2
b: - (Thickness of board + R) + ( r) / 2
c: ( r) / 2

F1-94
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

b-2. Bending angle > 90 degree:

<Calculation formula>
Stretch length L = A input value + B input value + Bending corrected value

Min. Center axis

bend (r) radius (R)

Inside
Out- size
side
size 2
Outside
図変更
size
Inside size

Outside size 2

Outside size

The following table shows bending corrected values.

B
Outside size Outside size 2 Inside size
A

Outside size a a b

Outside size 2 a a b

Inside size b b c

a: - 2 ( (Thickness of board + R) / tan (Bending angle / 2) ) + ( (2 r) (180 - bending angle) /

360)
b: - ( ( (Thickness of board + R) / tan (bending angle / 2) ) + ( 2 r) (180 - bending angle) /
360)
c: (2 r) (180 - bending angle) / 360)

F1-95
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

b-3. Bending angle < 90 degree:

<Calculation formula>
Stretch length L = A input value + B input value + Bending corrected value

Outside
size

Min.
Inside bend (r)
Out-
side size
size 2

Center axis
radius (R)

図変更

Inside size

Outside size 2

Outside size

The following table shows bending corrected values.

B
Outside size Outside size 2 Inside size
A

Outside size a b d

Outside size 2 b c e

Inside size d e f

a: - 2 ( (Thickness of board + R) / tan (Bending angle / 2) ) + ( (2 r) (180 - bending angle) /

360)
b: - (Thickness of board + R) – ( (Thickness of board + R) / tan (Bending angle / 2) )
+ ( (2 r ) (180 - bending angle) / 360)
c: - 2 (Thickness of board + R) + ( (2 r) (180 - bending angle) / 360)
d: - ( ( (Thickness of board + R) / tan (Bending angle / 2) ) + ( (2 r) (180 - bending angle) /
360)
e: - ( Thickness of board + R) + ( (2 r) (180 - bending angle) / 360)
f: (2 r) (180 - bending angle) / 360

F1-96
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

14.3. Input front section size

For stretch pattern designation in 14.1, designate bottom side and size (front size, inside size, size
original point)
on figures designated on front section via section element designation, define front section of figures to
be stretched.

When sizes of front side and inside of front section are different, define continuously forms of changing
sizes according to designated front side and inside sizes, size original point.
When front section size is fixed, designation of inside size and size original point can be neglected.

When sizes of front and inside of front section are different:

F1-97
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-98
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-99
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-100
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

14.4. Input size value of side section

For stretch pattern designation in 14.1, designate bottom side and size (front size, inside size, size
original) on figures designated on front section via section element designation, define front section of
figures to be
stretched.
Complex (up to the number given in 14.1) definition can be done for side section.
You can define one size for a side.

When sizes of front side and inside of front section are different, define continuously forms of changing
sizes according to designated front side and inside sizes, size original.
When front section size is fixed, designation of inside size and size original can be neglected.

When sizes of front and inside of front section are different:

F1-101
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-102
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-103
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-104
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

14.5. Side section Installation

On the side of front section defined in14.3 Front section Size value input, install the defined side
section via 14.4 Side section Size value input.

The former section development function is only used to install vertical (side) section to horizontal
(front) section, however, this function can be used to perform side section installation for all sides of
front section.

F1-105
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-106
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

14.6. Section development Confirmation of three-dimensional figure

Confirm the three-dimensional figure of section stretch figure prior to stretch defined in 14.5 on
screen.
The three-dimensional figure is displayed in wire frame(side) without board thickness change the
direction, position and distance shown.

In clinging, you can confirm / change clinging position and pattern.

In coincidence, you can confirm / change coincidence position and pattern.

Cling, coincide:

<Coincidence pattern>

<Clinging pattern>

F1-107
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-108
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-109
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-110
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-111
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-112
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-113
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

14.7 Stretch of section development figure creation

Clinging and coinciding creation stretch figure designated in 14.6 Three-dimensional figure
confirmation, display CAD screen.
For stretch figure calculation, utilize the parameters set in 14.2.

After stretch figure creation, return to CAD screen, settings below 14.2 disappear.

F1-114
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-115
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

Operation example 1 (Section development Add R)

The following is the operation example of determining stretch figure.

(From section element register to obtaining of stretch figure)

F1-116
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-117
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-118
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-119
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-120
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-121
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-122
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

Operation example 2 (Section development with additional inside size)

The following is the operation example of obtaining stretch figure.

(From section element register, stretch figures are obtained.)

F1-123
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-124
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-125
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-126
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-127
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-128
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-129
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

F1-130
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14 Development execution

List of error messages

a. Section development designation of stretch pattern

NO Messages Reasons Actions

.
1 Designate a front side or In designated front / side of section Please designate a front
a bottom side. element, there is more than one front side, side or a bottom side.
or in designated bottom / side of flange
element, there is more than one bottom
side.
2 Failure to write files. Insufficient hard disk volume Delete unnecessary files.
3 Errors in pattern data Element figure is too complicated, figure or Execute figures not too
base access attribute data space is not large enough complicated
4 Errors in stretch Errors in stretch parameter setting or Please inform our service
treatment. stretch treatment. center.

F1-131
 F1 Development function
Section development -
14
Development execution

NO Messages Reasons Actions

.
1 Errors occur in section Unexpected errors occur. End section stretch.
stretch treatment
2 Bottom side cannot be Stretch calculation is done without Install side on front
created installing side on front reference line reference line.
(usually the error in 39).
3 Errors occur in figure In stretch calculation, the following End section stretch.
creation. deviation occurs.
(due to wrong coordinates) incorrect
calculation
insufficient memory 2
4 Memory cannot be Insufficient memory End section stretch.
guaranteed
5 Failure to open / close Required files cannot be found, read, End section stretch.
files. opened or closed.
6 Failure to read / write Files overflowing disc area cannot be End section stretch.
files written or read.
7 File contents are not File format is not right and the file cannot End section stretch.
correct be read.
8 Section element XXXX The section element appearing in use [Close] to end section
cannot be found cannot be found (it has been deleted), and stretch, and confirm
section stretch cannot be executed. section element files.
9 Coincidence creation Some side may disappear completely due Confirm input size,
cannot be made. to pattern coincidence. prevent the side from
disappearing and
perform correction.
10 Coincidence creation Length of side loop or side may be 0 due to Correct input size,
cannot be made (for a pattern coincidence. calculate again
part) (neglecting alarms).
11 Stretch calculation In three-dimensional condition, the side Correct input size.
cannot be performed which disappears due to the left and right
because sides disappear sides may be extended continuously.
midway
12 A part of stretch sizes (According to inside correction) due to size Correct input size.
are not correct input contradiction, right stretch figure
cannot be created.
13 Failure to open / close Three-dimensional data files End section stretch.
three-dimensional data (/tmp/dan3ddat. TXT) cannot be found to
file read.
14 Errors occur in analysis Three-dimensional data files End section stretch.
of three-dimensional (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) are not correct (like
data file the condition where 5.1.4 No.12 errors
occur).

F1-132
 F1 Development function
Section development
14
Development execution

NO Messages Reasons Actions

.
15 Errors occur in Three-dimensional data files End section stretch.
clinging data creation. (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) are not correct
(usually not occur).
16 Errors occur in Three-dimensional data files End section stretch.
coincidence data (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) are not correct
creation. (usually not occur).
17 Errors occur in Three-dimensional data files End section stretch.
clinging pattern file (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) are not correct
creation. (usually not occur).
18 Errors occur in Three-dimensional data files End section stretch.
coincidence pattern (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) are not correct
file creation. (usually not occur).
19 Failure to open / close Three-dimensional data files End section stretch.
pattern files. (/tmp/dan_kada.TXT,dan_tuki.TXT)
cannot be found to read or opened /
closed.
20 Abnormal ending of The following deviation occurs in Execute
three-dimensional three-dimensional confirmation. . three-dimensional
figure confirmation. Abnormal end of three-dimensional figure confirmation
figure confirmation template . forcibly again.
end from outside
21 Select the line Select the area other than front Select front section
segment on front section line segment (front section line segment with
section. corner R / side section / the place mouse (left button).
where there is nothing) with mouse
(left button).
22 Select the line Select the area other than side section Select side section
segment on side line segment (side section corner R / line segment with
section. side section / the place where there is mouse (left button).
nothing) with mouse (left button).
23 Do not select line Execute [End] without selecting the Execute [End] after
segment on bottom edge of bottom side. selecting the edge of
side. bottom side.
24 Do not install on Select front section line segment Select front section
corner R. corner R (usually the error in 4-22) line segment with
with mouse (left button). mouse (left button).
25 Do not input values. [End] is executed before all size values Execute [End] after
are input. all size values are
input.

F1-133
26 Input mode is not In size value input, besides real Input real numbers.
correct. numbers, characters or marks other
than
"0123456789.-" are input.
’ - ’other than the former is input.
’ . ’Input more than two times.

F1-134
 F1 Development function
Section development
14
Development execution

NO
Messages Reasons Actions
.
27 Please input according In size value input, the following Input values within
to 0 < (vertical size / deviations occur: the range.
horizontal size / Values, beyond the given range, are
length) < 100000. input as vertical size of vertical line.
Values, beyond the given range, are
input as horizontal size of horizontal
line.
Values, beyond the given range, are
input as the length of slanting line.
28 Please input according In size value input, the following Input values within
to -100000 < (vertical deviations occur: the range.
size / horizontal size / Values, beyond the given range, are
length) < 100000. input as vertical size of slanting line.
Values, beyond the given range, are
input as horizontal size of slanting
line.
29 Please input according In size value input, the following Input values within
to -180 ≤ angle ≤ 180 deviations occur: the range.
Values, beyond the given range, are
input as the angle of slanting line
(bottom side).
30 Please input according In size value input, the following Input values within
to -180 angle deviations occur: the range.
180 (≠ 0). Values, beyond the given range, are
input as the angle of slanting line
(outside bottom side).
31 Please input according In size value input, the following Input values within
to 0 radius < deviations occur: the range.
100000. Values, beyond the given range, are
input as the radius of corner R.
32 Corner R is too large, In size value input, the following Diminish corner R.
the two line segments deviations occur: Make the 2 line
are parallel. Radius is too large, and corner R segments of included
cannot be created. angle unparallel, and
Line segments of included angle are correct the size
parallel, and corner R cannot be value.
created.
33 Length of line Due to input sizes, execute [End] in Input correct size
segment is 0, and the following state: values.
coordinates are not Length of line segment is below
correct. 0.(input according to vertical size =
horizontal size = 0)
34 (Some) sizes are Due to input sizes, execute [End] in Not special.
corrected without different states of front and inside (automatic correction
changing the angle. slanting line angle (within modifiable of horizontal size on
range). basis of vertical size)
35 Line directions are Due to input sizes, execute [End] in Front and inside
different for front side different states of front and inside slanting line angles
and inside. slanting line angle (within modifiable are the same.
range).
36 Corner R is 0 only for Execute [End] only when radius of Both front and inside
front side and inside. front and inside corner R is 0. radiuses are above or
equal to 0.

F1-135
37 Size value is not set The side section which is not set is Select size value as
for section. selected as installation side for size the set side. Return
value. to initial operation of
[initial screen], set
size values of the
side where there is
an error, then, select
it as installation
side.

F1-136
 F1 Development function
Section development
14
Development execution

NO Messages Reasons Actions

.
38 Install side on bottom Execute stretch calculation without Execute stretch
side of front section. installation on edge of bottom side of calculation after
front section. installation on edge
of bottom side of
front section.
39 Not execute stretch [End] without [Development [End] after
calculation. execution]. [Development
execution].
40 Not select side. Only front section is designated as [Close] to end section
section element to be used. stretch, add sides of
section element to be
used.

F1-137
 F1 Development function
Flange development
15
Element load
15 Flange development Element load
Before calling out components of development function with the command “development function
composite extension flange development element load”, use them for elements to be edited and
registered.
For edited components, please utilize the command “development function composite extension .
flange development. element load” for registration.

F1-138
 F1 Development function
Flange development
15
Element load

F1-139
 F1 Development function
Flange development
15
Element save

List of error messages

Same with section development.

F1-140
 F1 Development function
Flange development
16
Element save

16 Flange development Element save

Components using flange development function are registered in via the command “development
function . composite extension . flange development . element save”.
In “development function . composite extension flange development . element save”, registration
object screen is checked, execute registration after it is judged suitable, if it is judged unsuitable, error
messages will be displayed, end the command.
The following 5 items will be checked, please refer to the list of error messages for details.
a) Elements are drawn with line segment and corner R?
b) Have additional attributes?
c) Connected?
d) Endpoints for open form are on a line segment?
e) Arcs are connected?

F1-141
 F1 Development function
Flange development
16
Element save

F1-142
 F1 Development function
Flange development
16
Element save

F1-143
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

List of error messages

Same with section development.

17 Flange development Development execution

Organize the elements to perform flange development instruction. Before creating one stretch
figure and indicating that any element can be used, utilize the command “Flange development .
Development
execution”.
For stretch element, utilize “Flange development . Development execution” again for registration.

17.1 Stretch pattern designation

Designate the element to be used in flange development.

F1-144
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-145
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-146
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

17.2 Parameter setting

Same with section development.
Refer to 14.2 Parameter setting.

F1-147
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

17.3 Bottom side size value input

For stretch pattern designation in 17.1, specify direction of returning and size on designated figure of
bottom
side via flange element designation, and define the bottom side of figure for which flange development
will be performed.

F1-148
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-149
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

17.4 Input size value of flange.

For stretch pattern designation in 17.1, specify bottom side and size on designated figure of bottom
side via
flange element designation, and define the bottom side of figure for which flange development will be
performed.
Complex (up to the number given in 17.1) definition can be done for flange.
You can define one size for a flange.

F1-150
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-151
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

17.5 Flange installation

The flange, defined in 17.4 Input size value of flange, is installed on the edge of bottom side defined in
17.3 Bottom side size value input.

According to the returning direction of bottom side designated in 17.3 Bottom side size value input,
change installation direction of flange.

F1-152
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-153
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

17.6 Flange development Three-dimensional figure confirmation

Same with section development.
Please refer to 14.6 Section development Confirmation of three-dimensional figure.

17.7 Flange development Stretch figure creation

Same with section development.
Please refer to 17.7 Section development Stretch figure creation.

F1-154
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

Operation example (flange development)

In order to obtain the stretch figures below, following operation examples are displayed:
(From section Element save to obtaining of stretch figure)

F1-155
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-156
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-157
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-158
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-159
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-160
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-161
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-162
 F1 Development function
Flange development
17
Development execution

F1-163
 F1 Development
Flange development -
17 Development execution

F1-164
 F1 Development
Flange development -
17 Development execution

Error message list

a. Flange development Designate development mode
Same with section development.

F1-165
 F1 Development
Flange development -
17 Development execution

b. Flange development Input size of the underside ~ draw development diagram

No
Messages Reasons Actions
.
1 Errors occur at the time of Unexpected errors End flange development
flange development
2 The underside can not be Development calculation is End flange development.
made executed when the underside can
not be defined (Usually it does not
occur)
3 Errors occur when performing When executing development End flange development.
erection calculation, any of the following
occurs.
Calculation error (caused from
incorrect coordinates)
Insufficient memory 2
4 Memory can not be Insufficient memory End flange development.
guaranteed
5 Errors occur when opening / Since files can not be found to read, End flange development.
closing files opening/closing files is impossible.
6 Errors occur in The disc is full or is in write End flange development.
reading/writing files protection state, writing is not
possible.
7 Incorrect contents Wrong file format, therefore, End flange development.
writing is not possible.
8 Flange (underside) elements X The announced flange (underside) Press [Close] to end flange
X X X can not be found elements (deleted) can not be found development, confirm flange
after usage, therefore, section (underside) element files.
development can not be executed.
9 Coincidence is not allowed Coincidence mode combination will Change until this plane will not
cause some plane to disappear. disappear.
Confirm the input size.
10 (Partial) coincidence is not Coincidence mode combination may Change input sizes to calculate
allowed cause some plane to be loop shaped again or continue (neglecting
or side length to be 0. alarm).
11 The plane disappears during In the condition of three Therefore, the top vertical
the course of operation, and dimensions, the middle vertical plane will be prolonged. Please
development calculation is not plane disappears because there are correct the input sizes.
possible two planes on both sides during the
course of operation,
12 Some development sizes are Contradictions among input sizes Correct input sizes.
not correct caused by (inner side corrections)
cause that correct development
diagram can not be drawn.
13 Opening/closing Three-dimension data files End section development.
three-dimension data files (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) can not be
fails found or written.
14 Errors occur in analyzing Contents of three-dimension data End section development.
three-dimension data files files (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) are not
correct (this may occur when there
are errors in 4-12 above).

F1-166
 F1 Development
Flange development -
17 Development execution

No. Messages Reasons Action

15 Errors occur when butt Three-dimension data file End section development.
joint data is prepared (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) has wrong
contents (generally, this will not
occur)
16 Errors occur when Three-dimension data file End section development.
coincidence data is (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) has wrong
prepared contents (generally, this will not
occur)
17 Errors occur when butt Three-dimension data file End section development.
joint schema files are (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) has wrong
prepared contents (generally, this will not
occur)
18 Errors occur when Three-dimension data file End section development.
coincidence schema files (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT) has wrong
are prepared contents (generally, this will not
occur)
19 Opening/closing schema Schema files End section development.
files fails (/tmp/dan3ddat.TXT,dan-tuki.TXT)
can not be found or read, therefore,
the files can not be opened or closed.
20 Partial three-dimensional Any of the following occurs when Perform
figure confirmation is not performing three-dimensional figure three-dimensional figure
normally ended confirmation. . Three-dimensional confirmation again.
figure confirmation module does not
stop normally. . Forced stop.
21 Designate flange on In elements for designating the flange Press [Close] to end flange
underside or underside on for use, designate underside as flange development, designate
flange or flange as underside. properly underside and
flange.
22 Select the line segment of Use a mouse (left button) to select the Use a mouse (left button)
underside area out of underside line segment to select the underside line
(Corner R flange for side segment.
section/where nothing exists).
23 Select the line segments on Use a mouse (left button) to select the Use a mouse (left button)
both sides of flange area out of the line segments on to select a line segment
underside of flange. from either side of the
flange.
24 Not selecting line Execute [Close] without selecting line After selecting line
segments constituting segments as boundary lines of segments as boundary
underside underside. lines of underside, execute
[End].
25 Not selecting flange For used flange, only designate its Press [Close] to end flange
underside. development, add flange
into used flange elements.
26 Corner R can not be Use a mouse (left button) to select Use a mouse (left button)
installed. Corner R of underside (Errors in 5-23 to select line segment of
above often occur). underside.
27 Not inputting values Execute [End] when inputting all Execute [End] after
sizes. inputting all sizes.

F1-167
 F1 Development
Flange development
17 Executing development

No. Messages Reasons Action

28 Incorrect input format When inputting sizes, input values other Input execute values.
than actual values.
Input characters or symbols other than
"0123456789.-".
'-'is input at the place other than the
starting.
'.' is input for more than twice.
29 Input according to Any of the following occurs when inputting Input values within
0<(height/width/length) sizes. allowed range.
<100000 Values beyond the height range of vertical
line are input.
Values beyond the width range of
horizontal line are input.
Values beyond the length range of
slanting line are input.
30 Input according to Any of the following occurs when inputting Input values within
-100000<(height/width/le sizes. allowed range.
ngth)<100000 Values beyond the height range of
slanting line are input.
Values beyond the width range of slanting
line are input.
31 Input according to When inputting sizes, values beyond the Input values within
-180 angle 180 angle range of slanting line (flange allowed range.
underside boundary line/ underside
boundary line a) are input.
32 . Input according to Values beyond the angle range of . slanting Input values within
-180 angle 180 ( 0), line (out of the boundary line of 32) are allowed range.
The following occur when input.
inputting sizes.
33 Input according to The following occur when inputting desired Input values within
0 radius<100000 sizes, . values beyond the radius range of allowed range.
corner R are input.
34 Corner R is too large, the Caused from input sizes, execute [End] in Shorten the radius of
front and back line any of the following condition corner R.
segments are parallel The radius is too large to make corner R. Modify size until the
with each other The two line segments of corner R are two line segments of
parallel and corner R can not be made. corner R are not
parallel with each
other.
35 Line segment length is 0 Caused from input sizes, execute [End] in Please input correct
and coordinates are not the following condition: sizes.
correct Line segment length is below 0.
(Vertical size and horizontal size are set to
0)
36 The bottom should not be Caused from input sizes, execute [End] when Press [Initial screen] to
close figure the bottom is open figure. return to the previous
step, modifying sizes
until the bottom is close
figure.
37 No size is set for the The flange with no size settings is selected as Select the flange for
flange installation flange. which sizes have been
set or press [Initial
screen] to return to the
initial step. After size
setting of malfunction
flange, select it as
installation flange.
38 Development calculation [End] without running [Development Perform [Development
is not executed any more execution]. execution], then [End].

F1-168
 F2 Erase
Independent erase
1
Element

[F2] Erase
1. Independent erase Element
2. Independent erase Attributes
3. Independent erase Auxiliary lines
4.Erase all Point
5.Erase all Dimension Please refer to 1~9 of [G1] Erase
6.Erase all Note
7.Erase all Line type color
8.Erase all Layer
9.Erase all figures
10.Erase all auxiliary lines
11. Display auxiliary line ON Please refer to 27~31 of [B1] Auxiliary

12. Display auxiliary line OFF lines figures

F2-1
 G1 Erase
IndependentErase
1
Element
[G] Erase
[G1] Erase
1. Independent Erase Element
Erase individual or more than one figure, size line and comment, etc to erase.

2. Independent Erase Attribute

Erase attributes (NC code, BEAM ON and BEAM OFF, etc.)

3. Independent Erase Auxiliary line Please refer to [B1] Auxiliary line Figure
26.

G1-1
 G1 Erase
4 Erase all Point

4. Erase all Point

Erase all points.

5. Erase all Dimensions

Erase all size lines.

6. Erase all Notes

Erase all comments.

G1-2
 G1 Erase
7 Erase all Line type/color

7. Erase all Line type/color

Erase all screen elements of line type and line color same with selected elements.

G1-3
 G1 Erase
8 Erase all Layer

8. Erase all Layer

Erase all layer elements the same with selected elements.

* Display "please select all elements for

deleting layer" in information field.

* Display screen elements of layer in yellow are

the same with selected elements, and display
in information field "Delete all?
(Y/N|Enter=Y)".

* Inputting "delete" will delete elements

displayed yellow, and display "please select to
delete all layer. Or press [ESC] to
UNDO/REDO" in information field.

G1-4
 G1 Erase
9 Erase all Figures

9. Erase all Figures

Erase all figures to return to original state.

10. Erase all auxiliary lines

11. Display auxiliary lines ON Please refer to 27~31 of

12. Display auxiliary lines OFF [B1] Auxiliary line

Figure

G1-5
 H1 Input dimension
Horizontal dimension
1
Element

[H] Dimension / Note

[H1] Input dimension
1. Horizontal dimension Element
7. Vertical dimension Element
Indicate horizontal (vertical) dimension.

2. Horizontal size Total

8. Vertical size Toal

3. Horizontal size Continuous(refercnce)

9. Horizontal size Continuous(refercnce)

Ｈ１－1
 H1 Input dimension
Horizontal dimension
4
Continuous (increment)

4. Horizontal dimension Continuous (increment)

10. Vertical dimension Continuous (increment)
Continuously input increments of horizontal (vertical) dimensions.

5. Horizontal size Increment size

11. Vertical size Incrment size

6. Horizontal size Increment arrow

12. Vertical size Increment arrow

Ｈ１－2
 H1 Input dimension

13 Increment edit

13. Ordinate edit Ordinate edit

14. Ordinate edit Bend point
15. Ordinate edit Bebd width
16. Ordinate edit Interval
17. Ordinate edit Bend line length
Make ordinate offset dimension (arrow) from ordinate dimension (arrow).
Also, change transition bend point of ordinate offset dimension (arrow).

Ｈ１－3
 H1 Input dimension

18 Parallel dimension

18. Parallel dimension

Input dimensions in parallel direction

19. Interval size

20. Radius size Standard Starting from center point

Ｈ１－4
 H1 Input dimension
Radius dimension
21
Random position

21. Radius dimension Standard Random position

Input radius dimension at arbitrary place.

22. Radius size Draw-out type Starting from center point

23. Radius size Draw-out type Arbitrary place

Ｈ１－5
 H1 Input dimension
Diameter dimension
24
Random position
24. Diameter dimension Standard Starting from center point
Input diameter dimension of center point.

25. Diameter size Standard Arbitrary place

26. Diameter size Draw-out type Starting from center point

27. Diameter size Draw-out type Arbitrary place

Ｈ１－6
 H1 Input dimension
Angle dimension
28
Line . arc (center)
28. Angle dimension Line . arc (center)
Input the dimension of included angle of two lines and arc central angle.

29. Angle size Line arc(arbitrary)

30. Angle size Latitude gradient

Ｈ１－7
 H1 Input dimension
Angle expression
31
Decimal point

31. Angle expression Decimal point

Input angle dimensions are now expressed via decimal point instead.

32. Angle expression Degree

33. Angle expression Degree and minute

Input angle sizes are now expressed via degree and minute instead.

Ｈ１－8
 H1 Input dimension
Angle expression
34 Degree, minute and
second

34. Angle expression Degree, minute and second

Input angle dimensions are now expressed via degree, minute and second instead.

35. Angle expression Tangent

36. Angle expression Horizontal

Ｈ１－9
 H1 Input dimension
Arc dimension
37
Tangent

37. Arc dimension Tangent

Input arc dimension at arbitrary place.

38. Arc size Horizontal

Ｈ１－10
 H1 Input dimension

39 Input Chamfer

39. Chamfer
Input chamfer dimension.

40. Single arrow Input

41. Single arrow Input mode With

Ｈ１－11
 H1 Input dimension
Single arrow dimension
42
Input NO

42. Single arrow input mode NO

Set for inputting single arrow dimensions to NO.

Please refer to:

43. Edit Dimension [H2] Dimension setting
44. Edit Position of character 1
45. Edit Position of arrow 3
46. Edit Height of character 4
47. Edit Decimal place 5
48. Dimension mode Tolerance 6
49. Dimension mode Character 13
50. Dimension mode Front character 14
51. Dimension mode Middle character 15
52. Dimension mode Back character 16
53. Dimension mode () 17
54. Dimension mode 18
55. Dimension mode R 19
56. Set Height of character 20
57. Set Number of digits 21
58. Set Tolerance large 22
59. Set Tolerance small 23
24

Ｈ１－12
 H1 Input dimension

60 Length size

60．Linear Dimension
■Function
Write Linear dimension. (You can draw Horizontal, Perpendicular and Parallel with only this
menu)

■Operation

1) Write size graphic specified

1)-a Choose point 2

1)-b Choose segment line

1)-c Choose 2 segment line

2) Specify the write position of size

number

2)-a Specify the up and down

direction position of point２
（become parallel size）

2)-b Specify the left and right

direction position of point２
（become perpendicular size）

2)-c Specify the rectangle interior

position which consider point 2
as apex
（become parallel size）

The relation between the position which need be specified and size created, as the
following graph.

horizonta
l

perpendicular parallel perpendicular

parallel

horizonta
l

Ｈ１－13
 H1 Input dimension
H1 Auto progressive
61 Write size
61 Auto progressive

61．Auto progressive
■Function
Open the menu related to auto progressive（only when parallel・perpendicular）

62．Auto progressive 63．Auto size condition

64．progressive alignment

62．Auto progressive
■Function
Automatically write progressive size

■Operation

1)specify coordinate reference point

（remark１）

1)-a Specify center point

1)-b Input coordinate value

2) Choose graphic

3)-a Specify the divided position of

size line（remark２）

3)-b Input coordinate value

4) Specify the write position of size

value

（remark1）Specify the reference size line of the size line showed（size character is 0,0）
（remark2）Specify the position of the size line showed.
In the case of considering the specified point as center，divide into four direction to show.
In the

case of the specified point being according to bridge changing，it will be showed in the
opposite

direction.

Ｈ１－１４
 H1 Input dimension
63 H1Auto sizeWrite size
condition
63 Auto size condition

63．Auto size condition

■Function
Set the condition of auto size write method

■Explanation
This command，is used in「auto progressive command」，to set the size format created.
Set the default settings as the following table.
After changing setting， before next change，the settings will be reserved.
Even if rebuild the program, the setting still will be reserved.

Size line format Progressive size

Drawer position of the same coordinate Start from near
Auto alignment Undo

■Item
（1）Size line format（progressive size／progressive size arrow）
According to different settings， auto size will do the following shift.

progressive size progressive size

arrow

Ｈ１－１５
 H1
H1 Input dimension
Write size
6363 Auto
Autosize condition
size condition

（2）Drawer position of the same coordinate（from the close end／from the remote end）
When drawing size line，in the case of X direction, Y direction arranging together in the
same coordinate, can set the drawer size line close to division point or the drawer
size line remote to division point.

from the close end from the remote end

（3）auto alignment（do／undo）
Refer to reference position（0,0），open size on two direction，these size of shape overlap，
when users hoping them branching off arranging，
「do」the setting，system will automatically perform.
If you want to arrange reference coordinate（0,0）and other coordinate， please use
progressive alignment command.

Ｈ１－１６
 H1 Write size
H1 64Input dimension
Progressive
64 Progressive alignment
alignment

64．Progressive alignment
■Function
Automatically edit the progressive size which is written by auto progressive.

■Operation

1)Specify the reference point of

progressive alignment

2)Specify next reference point

Ｈ１－１７
 H1H1 Input dimension
Write size
64 Chamfer
Progressive
size・standard
65 alignment
type

65．Chamfer size・standard type

■Function
Write chamfer size

■Operation

1) Choose reference line

2) Choose chamfer line

3) Specify the write position of size

number

66．Chamfer size・drawer type

■Function
Write drawer type chamfer size
■Operation

1) Choose reference line

2) Choose chamfer line

3) specify the write position of size

number

Add character C in the start of size number.

After performing the command， intersection input・arrow highlight can be done.

H1-18
 H2 Dimension setting
1 Edit Dimension value

[H2] Dimension setting

1. Edit Dimension value
Edit the input dimension value . tolerance.

2. Edit Out scale

3. Edit Character position

Ｈ２－１
 H2 Dimension setting
4 Edit Arrow position

4. Edit Arrow position

Move input dimension lines.

5. Edit Height of character

6. Edit Number of digits

Ｈ２－２
 H2 Dimension setting
7 Edit Reader

7. Edit Reader
Change input dimension lines into reader ones.

8. Edit With()

9. Edit Draw out ON/OFF

10. Edit Gap

Ｈ２－３
 H2 Dimension setting
11 Edit Arrange
11. Edit Arranbe intervals intervals
Justify intervals of input dimension indication positions.

12. Edit Center of character

13. Dimension mode Tolerance

1. Select when executing edit of dimensions b.

14. Dimension mode Character

1. Select when executing edit of dimensions a.

Ｈ２－４
 H2 Dimension setting
15 Dimension mode

15. Dimension mode Front character

Any character string can be inserted before dimensions.

16. Dimension mode Middle character

Any character string can be inserted after dimensions and before tolerance.

17. Dimension mode Back character

Any character string can be inserted after dimensions (tolerance).

18. Dimension mode ()

Add () enclosing dimensions.

19. Dimension mode

You can add or delete before diameter dimensions.

20. Dimension mode R

You can add or delete R before radius dimensions.

Ｈ２－５
 H2 Dimension setting
21 Set Height of
character

21. Set Height of character

Set denotable sizes now.

22. Set Number of digits

23. Set Intercross large

24. Set Intercross small

H2 Dimension setting
25 Set 0-suppress

30025．0-suppress
■Function
Change the size value of the showing 0-suppress ON/OFF

■Operation

Ｈ２－６
 1) Input 0-suppress pattern ON/OFF
（０：OFF １：ON）

2) Choose the size line which will be

changed

2) –a Choose a size line

2) –b Rectangle choose several size

lines

Ｈ２－７
 H2 H2Dimension
Sizesetting
setting
25 0-suppress
26 0-suppress ON

26．0-suppress ON
27．0-suppress OFF
■Function
Change the size value of the showing 0-suppress ON/OF

■Operation

0-suppress：ON 1)Click key 0-suppress ON or

0-suppress OFF

2)create size line

Size line creation

0-suppress：OFF

Size line creation

After performing the command， according to the size created to determine whether it
is valid.
The operation of 0-suppress， as the following。
（in the case of after radix point is「３」）

Original data 0-suppress ON 0-suppress OFF

50.00000 50 50.000
50.01000 50.01 50.010
50.00010 50.000 50.000
49.99999 50.000 50.000

H2-8
 H3H2 Note Size setting
input . edit
1 25 Note 0-suppress

[H3] Note
1. Note Input . edit
Input notes. Edit input notes.

Do not use Break except for table input and note input.

2. Note Copy
Copy input notes

H3-1
 H3 Note
H2 Size setting
3-125 Note 0-suppress
Move and rotate

3-1. Note Move and rotate

[K1] Please refer to nesting Freedom 17. Move and rotate

3-2. Note Copy and rotate

[K1] Please refer to nesting Freedom 17. Copy and rotate

The function about the referred-to 「snap argmnt」 cannot be used by 「note move rotation」
and 「note copy rotation」

H3-2
 H3H2 Note Size setting
5 25 Note mode Layout
0-suppress

5. Note mode Layout

Set note to continuous layout.

6. Note mode Input

Cancel continuous layout of notes.

7. Character setting Size

Change size of note character to be input. Change size of note character input.

H3-3
 H3H2 Note Size setting
25 Character
0-suppresssetting
18
Slant

8 Character setting Slant

Change the gradient of note character to be input. Change the gradient of input note character
However, only DBC case characters can be changed in gradient.

9. Character setting Space

Change line space . Character interval of note characters to be input
Change line space . Character interval of note characters input

H3-4
 H3 Note
H2 Size setting
Character setting
10 25 0-suppress
Standard

10. Character setting Standard

Specify standard position of note characters to be input.

11. Character setting Display frame

12. Character setting >Display (1)
13. Character setting >Erase (0)
14. Character setting >Setting (S)
15. Character setting >Fix (CR)

Set whether the box of note characters to be input is displayed or not and the size of box.
Set whether the box of note characters input is displayed or not and the size of box.

H3-5
 H3 Note
H2 Size setting
Mirror
16 25 0-suppress
Up and down

16. Mirror Up and down

19. Mirror >Setting (S)
Set note characters to be input to overturn (up and down). Roll (up and down) note characters
input.

17. Mirror Left and right

19. Mirror >Setting (S)
Set note characters to be input to overturn (left and right). Roll (left and right) note characters
input.

H3-6
 H3 Note
H2 Size setting
Mirror
18 25 0-suppress
Not mirror

18. Mirror Not mirror

19. Mirror > Setting (S)
Cancel the turnover (up and down, left and right) of note characters filled with.
Additionally cancel the note characters (turnover 16 up and down or 17 left and right) filled with.

20. Characters Not specified

"Not specified" means left justification. Please refer to 22. Justifying characters Left justification

21. Characters Centering

Center note characters to be filled with. And center note characters filled with.

H3-7
 H3 Note
H2 Size setting
Characters
22 25 0-suppress
Left justification

22. Characters Left justification

Left justification setting of note characters to be filled with. And left justify note characters filled
with.

23. Characters Right justification

Right justification setting of note characters to be filled with. And right justify note characters
filled with.

H3-8
 H4H2 FinishSize
symbol
setting
1 25 Finish symbol
0-suppress
~

[H4] Finish symbol

1. Finish symbol ~
2. Finish symbol
3. Finish symbol
4. Finish symbol
Select the finish symbol filled with in 5.

5. Finish symbol Draw Movement symbol

You can fill with finish symbols, movement indicates location. And change size of the finish symbol.

H4-1
 H4 Finish symbol
H2 FinishSize setting
symbol
6
25 Setting 0-suppress
height

6. Finish symbol Setting height

Set sizes of finish symbol.

7. Finish symbol Leader

Fill with notes with leader. And move the indication place of leader or arrow direction.

H4-2
 H4 Finish symbol
H2 Size setting
Parts management
8 25 0-suppress
Save

8. Parts management Save [M1] File management

9. Parts management Load please refer to 3, 4.

10. Balloon Input Edit

Input with balloon.
Besides, you can change the balloon while filling with and moving leader.

H4-3
 H4 Finish symbol
H2 Size setting
Mode setting
11 25 0-suppress
Preceding balloon

11. Mode setting Preceding balloon

Set the size of balloon to correspond with characters.

12. Mode setting Cancel preceding setting

Make settings in filling with balloon and character string mode according to specified sizes.

13. Default setting Size of balloon

Set the size of balloon to be filled with.

H4-4
 H4 Finish symbol
H2 Size setting
Hatching
14 25 0-suppress
Hatching

14. Hatching Hatching

Add hatching in the close figure.

H4-5
 H5H2 Group Size
edit setting
1 25 Group edit
0-suppress
Set

[H5] Group edit

1. Group edit Set

Grouping means the treatment of many lines and arcs as a whole.

The sampling figures of sub-button processing hole, free-form curve, ellipse, nesting components,
involutes rack gear, digital converter (optional), the input figures of image scanner (optional),
drawing characters and their character button (optional) are all grouped.

1) Select images to be grouped

2) After selecting or

2. Group edit Cancel Independent

Cancel one level of grouped figures to become a individual lines and circles.
The sampling figures of free-form curve, ellipse, involutes rack gear, digital converter (optional),
the input figures of image scanner (optional), drawing characters and their character button
(optional) are all grouped before adding pierce lines or executing specifying path.

1) Select the group to be cancelled

3. Group edit Cancel All

All ungrouped images.
Cancellation is possible for multi-grouping.

1) Y

H5-1
 H5H2 Group Size
edit setting
4 25 Group 0-suppress
edit Select low
level

4. Group edit Select Low level

Move to selected optional level.
For example, since the blanks called in sub-button are grouped, size lines can not be input in the
this condition. According to this command, size lines can be input after level movement of sub-
button group.

1) Change optional level

Group

5. Group edit Select Top level

In 4. Group edit Select Optional level of next level, when moving from initial root (top level),
return to root.

[Notes]
When the path setting has been performed for the nesting figure, utilize above "lower level"
command to edit the figure.
Before executing "top level" command, perform path setting again to confirm that the path setting
status is correct.
If executing "top level" when path setting is not correct, later NC data creation cannot be
performed.

H5-2
 H5
H2 GroupSize
editsetting
625 Arrangement
0-suppressnumber

show

6．Arrangement number show

■Function
Show the arrangement number of group

■Operation

Group 1 2 3 Group 1 2 3 1)-a Input group name

1)-b Choose group

1)-c ／ ，create a list table，

choose group from dependence
table

1)-a group１

1)-b choose①

1)-c ／ ，create a list table，choose group１F1

※use thick line to show yellow graphic

The group chosen， not only show those which have been arranged in the present group，
but also all the graphic which have been arranged the chosen group will become yellow.

7．List show

■Function
Shoe the list table of group name defined

After clicking list table button， start the list number of group name・attribute・
disassemble・arrangement number

H5-3
 H6 Central line
1 Draw central line

[H6] Central line

1. Draw central line Line / Arc
2. Draw central line Circle
3. Draw central line On circle
4. Draw central line Random [A4] Draw figures Central line
5. Input mode Cross Please refer to 1~9.
6. Input mode Horizontal / arc
7. Input mode Vertical / line
8. Ratio(Circle)
9. Real value

H6-1
 I1 Manual setting

1 Manual setting
Offset

[I] Manual setting

[I1] Manual setting
1. Manual setting Offset
Execute changing OFF SET direction or processing direction.
Customers whose control unit is LC5 . 6 and who set offset via D instruction can change OFF SET
number.
Unless otherwise specified, OFF SET direction is left and the number is 0 (not set).

I1-1
 I1 Manual setting
2 Add NC attribute
Dwell

2. Add NC attribute Dwell

Add dwelled time (waiting time) attribute.

3.Add NC attribute Z movement

I1-2
 I1 Manual setting
4 NC code

4. NC code

Add NC code (G09 . processing condition, etc.) in figures.

5.Add NC code “G09”

I1-3
 I1 Manual setting
NC code excuse display
6
ON

6. NC code excuse display ON

7. NC code excuse display OFF
Select whether to display NC code symbol ( ).

8. NC code attribute Delete

I1-4
 I1 Manual setting
9 NC code attribute
Display

9. NC code attribute Display

NC codes added to figures will not be displayed after executing screen operation.
Utilize this instruction if you want to display them.

10. Automatic condition registration Condition 2 M2

I1-5
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
10 registration
registration Condition 2 M2
M2

M2 processing condition data registration table

1 Select menu 1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Print

Selection method Selection position
Or , press numbered function key.
Contents 1: End Select after table input is completed.
2: Select during interruption of processing condition
Interru registration.
pt
3: Print Select when printing M2 processing condition data
registration table.

2 Input items
a) Condition
PIERCE : indicates piercing condition.
PIERCE. L : indicates pierce line condition.
1~8 : indicates cut condition.
b) L/C
L: represents line (L).
C: represents circle (C).
c) Boundary value (0~999) (mm)
Switch processing condition values. Input line (L) length circle (C) radius.
(Notes) Never set boundary values to 0 in all L, C fields. Processing condition data cannot be
saved.
d) Output: S (0~9999)
Input average output value (W)
e) Power: T (0~100)
Input power for cutting pulse (%).
When cutting CW, please input 99.
f) Frequency: B (0~9999)
Input frequency for cutting pulse (Hz).
When cutting CW, please input 50.
g) Pierce / rate: F (0~9999)

I1-6
PIERCE : Input pierce time (perforation time) (second).
PIERCE. L : Input cutting rate (mm/minute).
1~8 : Input cutting rate (mm/minute).

I1-7
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
10 registration
registrationCondition 2 M2
M2

h) Gas pressure (H: high pressure M: medium pressure L: low pressure)

Input processing gas pressure.
Input M80 for H (high pressure), input M78 for M (medium pressure), Input M79 for L (low
pressure).
However, when the condition is PIERCE, please set gas pressure to L (low pressure).
i) OFF SET: H (1~40)
Input tool diameter offset number.

3) NC data output mode

a) PIERCE condition
For the following variables, PIERCE condition is output before NC data.
Pierce Gas
Output Duty Frequency
time pressure
Variable D20 D30 D40 D50 D60
Example) Output: 300 duty: 300 frequency: 20 pierce time: 1500 gas pressure: L
D20/ 300 D30/30 D40/20 D50/1500 D60/79
b) PIERCE. L condition
Output on the following line of BEAM ON code.
Example) Output: 195 duty: 19 frequency: 30 rate: 500 gas pressure: H OFF SET: 1
G22L9900
S195T19B30F500M80 PIERCE. L condition
G01X_Y_
.
c) Line Arc condition
Output according to ling length and arc radius.
Example) Preceding page

4 Precaution
The following is standard registration condition.
Material Board thickness
SPC(SPH) 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.3 3.2`
SUS 1.0 2.0 3.0
At most eight conditions can be registered for line . arc.
If there is no setting, please input spaces for L/C input and 0 for value input.
Always register common condition of line . arc.

I1-8
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
10 registration
registration Condition 2 M2
M2
M2 edge condition registration table
[L] 1.Parameters in NC data creation parameter list created by NC data Edge treatment When Yes / No
is set to Yes, execute edge treatment.
Edge treatment means the function utilized to switch processing condition of some length for
specified angle.
However, it should be only for line and line edge.

1 Select menu 1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Print

Selection method selected place
Or , press numbered FUNCTION KEY.
Contents 1: End Select after table input is completed.
2: Select during interruption of processing condition
Interrupt registration.
3: Print Select when printing M2 edge condition registration
table.

2 Input items
a) Angle (0~90)
Input included angle.
Always make angle in condition 2 larger than the one in condition 1.
b) Length
Input the length (mm) of switch condition.
c) Output duty frequency pierce / rate gas pressure OFFS SET
Please refer to M2 processing condition data registration table.

3 NC data output mode

Under the above mentioned condition

For angles within 45 degree, a 5mm line is used to divide both sides from the point of intersection,
only the processing condition can be switched.(S155T15B20F300M80H11)
Moreover, for angles larger than 45 degrees but within 90 degrees, a 10mm line is used to divide
both sides from the point of intersection, only the processing condition can be
switched.(S195T19B30F500M80H12)

I1-9
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
11 registration
registration Condition 2
M300
M300

11 Automatic condition registration Condition 2 M300

Execute registration . edit of processing condition of automatically setting processing condition for
M3.

I1-10
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
11 registration
registration Condition 2
M300
M300

M3 processing condition registration table

1 Select menu 1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Print

Selection method Selected place
Or , press numbered FUNCTION KEY.
Contents 1: End Select after table input is completed.
2: Select when interrupting processing condition
Interru registration.
pt
3: Print When printing M3 processing condition registration
table.

2 Input items
a) L/C
L: represents line (L).
C: represents circle (C).
b) Boundary value (0~999) (mm)
Switch processing condition values. Input line (L) length circle (C) radius.
(Notes) Never set boundary values to 0 in all L, C fields. Processing condition data cannot be
saved.
c) Condition code
Input processing condition.
Input methods include M code input and F input.
M code input (M101~M110)
Directly input the ten conditions (#1~#10) registered in control unit.
Input M101 for #1 and M105 for #5
F input (F processing speed)
In F processing speed, select registered processing condition from processing speed set
according to registered processing conditions in control unit.
Provided that the set processing speed does not conform to the processing condition
registered in control unit, make the processing condition corresponding to the speed in two
similar processing conditions.
For example, for F 500, select the processing condition whose processing speed is registered
500mm/minute.
At most 8 conditions can be registered for line . arc.
If there is no setting, please input space for L/C input and 0 for value input.
Always register common condition of line . arc.

I1-11
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
11 registration
registration Condition 2
M300
M300

3 NC data output mode

a) Line . arc condition
Output according to line length and arc radius
Example) Preceding page
Line length When 0< L≤20, set processing condition of M102.
When 20< L≤50, set processing condition of M104.
When 50< L, set processing condition of M105
Radius When 0< C≤10, set processing condition of M102.
When 10< C≤20, set processing condition of M103.
When 20< C, set processing condition of M104.
Set M101 as pierce condition.
When processing condition of pierce line (No.1 processing line is set to create NC data, set
processing condition of #501 = at the beginning of setting ending code file.

M3 edge condition registration table

[L] 1.Parameters in NC data creation parameter list created by NC data edge treatment when
Yes / No is set to Yes, execute edge treatment.
Edge treatment means the function utilized to switch processing condition of some length for
specified angle.
However, it should be only for arc or arc edge.

1 Select menu 1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Print

Selection method Selected place
Or , press numbered FUNCTION KEY.
Contents 1: End Select after table input is completed.
2: Select when interrupting processing condition
Interru registration.
pt
3: Print Select when printing M3 edge condition registration
table.

Notes) During switchback, it is not upward/downward dwell condition. In starting coding of

starting . ending coding, utilize specified delay method according to “#150, #151”
registration

Notes) Registration condition of smallest angle for edge condition registration table is added to
edge condition of smallest corner R value.

I1-12
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
11 registration
registration Condition 2
M300
M300

2 Input item
a) Angle (0~179)
Input included angle.
The included angle of line and arc is the one formed by line and
tangent of arc.
Besides, please ensure No.1<No.2 angle <No.3 angle in input.

b) Length 1 • 2 (0~99.9) (mm)

Switch values of processing condition.
It is the length of line for line (L) or length of arc for circle (C).
For 2-phase mode, input switched processing condition length in length 2.
For switchback mode, input switchback length in length 1 and switched processing condition
length in length 2.

c) Condition code
Input processing condition.
Input method and M3 Processing condition registration 2 Input items c) Condition codes
are same.
d) Output upward
Switch mode of processing condition after setting of corner.
Press Space key, switch 2-phase and switchback.
After set to 2-phase, neglect setting of length 1.

e) Output downward
Set switch mode of processing condition before corner.
Press Space key, switched, no medium speed, not switched.
Switched : When upward output is set to 2-phase, downward output will be also set to
2-phase.
When upward output is set to switchback, downward output will be also set to
Switchback.
No medium speed :Set to 2-phase for downward output.
Not switched : Condition cannot be switched for downward output.
Neglect length 1 • 2 and condition code
f) Upward dwell condition
For upward output, after condition code 2 is output, output dwelled time (waiting time).
It is 0.5 second in G04X0.5.
g) Downward dwell condition
For downward output, output dwelled time (waiting time).
At most three edge conditions can be registered.
When there is no setting input spaces during the input of condition code . upward (downward)
dwell condition, input angle . length 1(2), input 0.

I1-13
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
11 registration
registration Condition 2
M300
M300

3 NC data output mode

a) 2-phase switch mode

I1-14
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
11 registration
registration Condition 2
M300
M300

I1-15
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
11 registration
registration Condition 2
M300
M300

Start/End Processing condition settings list

In order to prevent burning after pierce and lack of BEAM OFF, execute switchback after pierce
and 2-phase switch before BEAM OFF.

1 Select menu 1: End / 2: Interrupt / 3: Print

Selection method Selected place
Or, press numbered FUNCTION KEY.
Contents 1: End Select after table input is completed.
2: Select when interrupting processing condition
Interru registration.
pt
3: Print Select when printing Start/End processing condition
setting table.

2 Input items
a) Processing start condition
1) When processing mode is switchback
After pierce, if upper part length is processed via condition code of upper part, lower part length
will change back.

I1-16
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic
Automatic condition
condition
11
registration M300
registration Condition 2
M300

b) Processing end condition (set 2-phase separately in processing mode)

Set during NC data creation, register as start and end code file number.
When NC data is created, even though start and end code file number is set to be different from
registration number, it still precedes the number set via this command.

When executing the switch of start / end processing condition, please note:

I1-17
Note 1) When NC data is created, please set NC creation parameter: automatic setting of
processing condition: YES, edge condition: ON.
Note 2) For BEAM ON/OFF CORD of start and end code number set in processing start/end
condition setting table, please set it to BEAM ON/OFF CORD for M300. When
BEAM
ON/OFF CORD of other companies is set, processing start/end condition may not be
switched normally.
Note 3) Please register M3 edge condition. When all items in M3 edge condition registration
table are blanks, edge treatment is OFF, and processing start/end condition cannot be
switched.
(Only angles can be input for registration.)

I1-18
 I1 Manual setting
12 Width decision

NC device “Corner processing condition control” function

If laser NC device is of the model later than our LC10BV series, “Corner processing condition
control” function of NC device can be utilized, also, processing condition can be controlled
automatically without using processing condition automatic setting function of CamMagic LA.

In this method, all condition control treatment for all corners can be performed according to
processing figures.
M125: corner control OFF
M124: corner control ON
If the above mentioned 2 codes are useful, “Corner processing control” of any corner OFF/ON
switchback.

[Operation method]
In CamMagic LA “Manual setting” (main menu) → “Manual setting” (tag) → “NC code” (menu),
after inputting M124 or M125 code, add attributes near the corner of code to be inserted.

12. Width decision

Use upright side left button to change search range for figure selection.

(can input
1-50)

I1-19
 I1 Manual setting

OFF SET code D and processing condition switch code M

In M3 NC data, although tool diameter is used to offset instruction code D for setting offset, when
calling processing condition data selection code M101~M110, each selection code of the processing
condition data can be switched to specified offset.

1. When the instruction code D offset via tool diameter is only one kind
For example, when using only D1 to specify offset, set the offset of used materials • gas types •
board thickness processing condition (M101~110) as the same number specified in D1.

2. In other situation
Edit NC data as follows

After using processing condition to select code M101~M110, set offset in the same way according to
the following D code again.

I1-20
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic condition
13 registration Condition 1

13 Automatic conditions registration Condition 1

◼ Function
Registers and edits the processing conditions required in order to use the "Automatic hole
diameter recognition processing conditions setting".

◼ Explanation
1.The automatic setting of hole diameter recognition processing conditions
This function automatically specifies processing condition codes in the NC program in
accordance with the hole processing (round hole, irregular hole) size (diameter or rectangle
area) when NC data is created.
The parameter-specified processing conditions selection code is adopted regardless of the outer
perimeter size.

Hole
Hole type Size Processing condition used
No.
A ø1.6
B ø2.0 M105
C Round hole ø3.0
D ø3.5 M106
E ø20.5 M107
a 577mm2 M107
Irregular hole
b 23.5mm2 M105

I1-21
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic condition
13 registration Condition 1

２．The automatic setting of stilettoing hole conditions

The automatic setting function of stilettoing hole conditions estimate whether have the
processing line of specifying stilettoing hole range or not and set proper beam ON code function
in the NC program when NC data is created.

The stilettoing hole conditions showed in the right graph,

refer to the four length in the following graph.
Different pierce, which piece is appealed to which
condition expmale.

Hole No Pierce length In point processing Indicial colour

conditions

Ａ 0.5mm Beam ON1 code Null

Ｂ 2.5mm M98P9012 Purple

Ｃ 4.5mm M98P9080 Purple

Ｄ 4.5mm M98P9012 Purple

But also exists
below 3.5mm radius
processing line

Even if setting radius and not inputting procesisng conditions code, also output beam ON1
code.

After not accommodate beforehand perforation cutting, beam ON2、beam ON3、Scribing、

Scrap point line.

The indicial colour of the first beam ON code is purple. The indicial colour of the second beam
ON code is green. The indicial colour of the third beam ON code is blue.

I1-22
When the [PROG NO.] of [PIERCE PROGRAM] of a processing machine is changed, it is
necessary to unite and to change a setup of CamMagic LA.
The [PROG NO.] of [PIERCE PROGRAM] of CamMagic LA is registered into "[CamMagic LA
installation folder]¥FSsysp¥PierceCodeTable.ini".
Please refer to the following procedure and change a setup of CamMagic LA.

<Procedure>
1. "[CamMagic LA installation folder]¥FSsysp¥PierceCodeTable.ini" is opened by a text
editor.
2. The part where a setup of the number machine to change is written is displayed.
Example ) In the case of machine No.1, it is [Machine1].
In the case of machine No.2, it is [Machine2].
:
3. No.1~No.20 is changed and saved to compensate for a setup of [PROG NO.] of a processing
machine.

No.5 or
Processing machine screen
subsequent
ones is
displayed by
scrolling.

PierceCodeTable.ini

I1-23
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic condition
13 registration Condition 1

◼ Operation
Click the Manual Set | Manual Set Auto Condition Registration | Condition 1 menu to open the
setting dialog box. The currently registered processing conditions display at the left side of the
screen (sorted in ascending order from the left).

If it right-clicks on a processing-conditions list, processing conditions can be colored. (It can cancel
by selection 「no color」.) It is useful when you want to choose the frequently used processing

Sub
Main item Setting content Range
item
Machine Select machine No. of process machine. 1～10
No. The machine No. registered in 「【L1】 25.process machine
information manage edit」can be selected.
Machine Display machine name and NC equipment name of process
name machine which has been selected.
NC
equipment
name
conditions.

I1-24
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic condition
13 registration Condition 1

Conditio Materia Specifies the material to be processed. M2/M3 is

n setting l Key-in the material at the selection column, then click the max. of 4
[Add] button to add it to the selection item list. In subsequent chars. (5
operations, this material can then be selected from the chars. or
drop-down list. Click the [Delete] button to delete the material less for
from the selection item list. material
Settingvalue The material name of early stage and gas
setting type)
M700 is
M2 1SPC,1SUS,2SPC,2SUS,ESPC,ES
max of 8
US,PSPC,PSUS
chars
M3 A50,MS,SEC,SP,SPC,SS,SUS,SUX
M700 A5052,SECC,SPCC,SS400,SUS304

Gas Specifies the gas type to be processed. M2/M3 is

type The [Add] and [Delete] buttons function in the same manner max. of 3
as at the "Material" item. chars. (5
Settin The Gas type of early stage setting chars. or
gvalue less for
M2 A,N,O material
and gas
M3 A7,AR,H1,H7,N2,N7,O2,O7,O7S,O7 type)
W M700 is
M700 AIR,N2,O2 max of 3
chars
Lens Only set M700 Up to 3
Focus Please choose the Lens Focus which need be processed. alphanume
The action of the processing button,the deleting button and ric chars.
quality of material are same.
Settingval Lens Focus name of early stage
ue setting
M700 F05,F07

Nozzles Only set M700 Up to 3

Please choose the Nozzle which needs processing alphanume
diamete The action of the processing button,the deleting button and ric chars.
r quality of material are same
Settingval Nozzles diameter of early stage
ue setting
M700 D08,D24,P17,Q08,Q24,S10,S12,S17,
S25,S30,S35,S40

Board Specifies the processing board thickness. M2/M3 is

thickne 0.1 to 99.9
ss M700 is
0.01 to
99.99
Seconda Only set M700 Up to 3
Enters processing condition Secondary number alphanume
ry ric chars.
number

I1-25
 Comme Enters condition setting comments. Up to 32
nt half-angle
chars.
Start/E Specifies the start/end codes used for each NC machine, 1～99
nd material, gas type, and board thickness. I1 Manual setting
coding If the "Priority to automatic conditions registration table
Automatic condition
13 registration Condition 1
settings" checkbox is selected at the NC data creation
parameter, the specified start/end codes are used.
Conditio Round Enters the condition code for a round hole. A condition code Dia. range
n code hole can be specified in accordance with the specified diameter. is 0.1 to 99.
(dia.) Condition
code range
is
up to 19
half-angle
chars.
Irregula Enters the condition code for an irregular hole (other than Area range
r hole round hole). A condition code can be specified in accordance is 0.1 to
(rectang with the specified rectangle area. 99999.
le area) Because rectangles are recognized as being parallel to the Condition
X and Y axes, the rectangle area (and the condition code) code range
of an irregular hole will change if that hole is rotated. is up to 19
half-angle
chars.

Outer Enters the condition code for the outer perimeter. Condition
perimet code range
er is up to 19
half-angle
chars.chars.
Piercing Enters the condition code for the Piercing Area. Radius
Area A condition code can be specified in accordance with the range is
(Radius specified radius. between 0.1
) and 99.9.
code range
is up to 19
half-angle
chars.

I1-26
Length Input the length of pierce ON length 1 of automatic Empty
of pierce pierce/interfering avoidance path. 0～100
The value of pierce ON length 1 of automatic pierce/interfering
avoidance path doesn't change for an empty.
The value of pierce ON length 1 of automatic pierce/interfering
avoidance path changes into this value, except for an empty.
In the case that the process condition which has been inputted
from process machine contains this information, display its
value.
Joint The joint width of end micro joint / micro joint is inputted. Blank
width
When it is a blank, the value of the micro joint width of an -10～100
auto pierce / Avoid interference path does not change.

When it is not a blank, the value of the micro joint width of an

auto pierce / Avoid interference path changes to this value.

That value is displayed when this information is included in

the processing conditions inputted from the processing
machine.

In upgrade, since recommendation joint width is not

displayed, please acquire processing conditions again.

The The value is inputted for adding R value to NC program of a Blank

corner pin angle part automatically at the time of NC creation. 0.1～99.9
R value

When it is a blank, the corner part R value of NC creation does

not change.

When it is not a blank, the corner part R value of NC creation

of NC generation changes to this value.

That value is displayed when this information is included in

the processing conditions inputted from the processing
machine.

In upgrade, since a recommendation corner part R value

is not displayed, please acquire processing conditions
again.

I1-27
 I1 Manual setting
Automatic condition
13 registration Condition 1

Button Explanation
Copy Copy the process condition list of selected machine No. to another machine No..

Please select machine No. for copying and push [OK] button in copy specify screen.
NC equipment name of copy machine No. is the same as origin machine No. and
display only when process condition list is vacant.
In the case that process condition list is not vacant, this button cannot be used.
Clear All-delete the process condition list of machine No. which is selected.
In the case that process condition list is not vacant, this button cannot be used.
Input Input process condition list of machine No. which is selected from CSV file.
In the case that process condition list is not vacant, this button cannot be used.
Please do not input the CSV file of machine No. whose NC equipment name is
different.
Output Output process condition list of machine No. which is selected to CSV file.
In the case that process condition list is not vacant, this button cannot be used.
Select Specify a folder and get all process condition files stored in that folder.
folder

Process condition file is copied to the folder of the machine number in FScnd folder of
CamMagic LA. (Process condition file to be got depends on NC equipment name of
processing machine is different.)
If there are process condition files already in FScnd folder, they are copied
after those files are erased. Please note that if use process condition get tool
and copy process condition file to FScnd folder, it will also be erased.

I1-28
Input from Acquire (transmit) the process condition file of process machine and display it in the
machine process condition list of machine No. which is selected.

If push [Yes] button in check screen, it will acquire (transmit) the process condition
file from process machine and display that in the process condition list by connecting
to network. It is required in advance that communication LA has been installed、IP
and Port is set correctly in 「 【L1】 25.process machine information manage edit」
(The process machine with barcode reader is accommodated).
Processing conditions of board thickness 0.0 registered in the processing
machine are not transmitted.
When the [PROG NO.] of [PIERCE PROGRAM] of a processing machine is
changed, it is necessary to unite and to change a setup of CamMagic LA. Please
refer to I1-21 page for details.
Display progress status at the lower left of CamMagic LA screen in transmitting. It
can be stopped by click [X] button.

If press [No] button on the confirm screen, it will be canceled.

This button can be used if NC equipment name is M700 or M800 and process
condition list is empty.
Filter all Restricting is all canceled when processing conditions are restricted.
reset

I1-29
Restricting filter Explanation
Color restricting filter It can restrict by choosing a color to restrict.
If select the top of blank, color restricting will cancel.
Material restricting In inputting the material to restrict, It can search ambiguously and
filter restrict.
If a filter is emptied, material restricting will be canceled.
Gas restricting filter It can restrict by choosing a gas kind to restrict.
In inputting a gas kind using a keyboard, It can search ambiguously
and restrict.
If select the top of blank, gas restricting will cancel.
Lens restricting filter It can restrict by choosing a lens to restrict.
If select the top of blank, lens restricting will cancel.
Thickness restricting In inputting board thickness to restrict, It can search ambiguously
filter and restrict.
If a filter is emptied, thickness restricting will be canceled.
Subwatch restricting In inputting subwatch to restrict, It can search ambiguously and
filter restrict.
If a filter is emptied, subwatch restricting will be canceled.
Comment restricting In inputting a comment to restrict, It can search ambiguously and
filter restrict.
If a filter is emptied, comment restricting will be canceled.
Start completion code It can restrict by choosing a start completion code to restrict.
restricting filter If select the top of blank, start completion code restricting will cancel.

It restricts during restricting and displays the character “Filter in” on all the cancel
buttons.

Ambiguous search is a search method which searches the processing conditions

containing the inputted language.
For example, if '4' of the keyword is inputted in the column of the material, all the
processing conditions containing which '4' is included in a character string like
SS400.SUS304 will be displayed. The wild card cannot be used.

If a processing conditions dialog is end with restricting, the processing conditions list of
processing conditions tool bars will also becomes restricting.
Moreover, the machine which is restricting by the machine combo box becomes yellow.

Button Explanation

Reg/Update Add or update process conditions selected in condition setting column to process
condition list.
Delete Delete process conditions which are selected in process condition list.
Close Close process condition register screen.

I1-30
 I2 Registration condition
confirmation
Registration condition
1 confirmation

[I2] Registration condition confirmation

1. Registration condition confirmation M2
2. Registration condition confirmation M300
Display • print the list of processing condition registered (for M2/M3) and each item on screen.
However, processing condition cannot be modified.
(If you want to modify processing condition, register again according [I1] Manual setting
Automatic condition registration.)

3. Delete registered condition M2

4. Delete registered condition M300

I2-1
 I3 Manual condition

Operation procedure

[I3] Manual condition

You can add manually processing condition, modify condition after automatic setting of processing
condition.
Never use it in switchback mode. For group data such as sub-pattern, delete them.
For different condition, processing may not be performed normally.

<Operation procedure>

I3-1
1. Specified machine
Specify the model of processor.

I3-2
 I3 Manual condition

2 Confirm/Change
parameter

2. Confirm/Change parameter
Specify all parameters of processing condition.
After modification, NC data creation parameters will change correspondingly.
(Notes) Never change NC device name (for M3) and model.

3. Manual condition setting Pierce condition

I3-3
 I3 Manual condition
Manual condition
4 setting
4. Manual condition setting Path condition Path condition
In automatic condition setting, although corner R condition does not change, corner R can be
changed into any processing condition.

I3-4
 I3 Manual condition
Processing condition
5 attribute Automatic
cancellation

5. Processing condition attribute Automatic cancellation

Specify automation to be invalid after specified element and before BEAM OFF.
After specified element, it is regarded to be same with the previous condition.
(There is red □ mark at the specified part.)

6. Processing condition attribute Automatic reopening

From among elements automatically cancelled, resume automatic setting.
(There is yellow □ mark at the specified part.)

7. Processing condition attribute Manual condition

It is specified condition after specified element and before BEAM OFF.

8. Processing condition attribute Automatic condition

(Automatic setting of processing condition YES is valid) Add specified processing condition to
specified elements, then, automatic setting will be valid.
Condition registered in smallest corner of edge condition registration table is added to edge
condition of smallest corner R value.

9. Processing condition attribute Condition deletion

In manual setting, delete specified condition.

10. Condition excuse display ON

Display processing condition mark (purple or white rectangle for specified condition). Color of
condition for each element disappears.
(If you want to display colors again, path condition after the mode is ON)

11. Condition excuse display OFF

Cancel processing condition mark s, and change colors of each element back into green, the
original color.

12. Additional NC attribute NC code

Please refer to [I1] 4.

13. Color designation example Red (M102)

14. Color designation example Green (M103)
15. Color designation example Yellow (M104)
16. Color designation example Light blue (M105)
17. Color designation example Purple (M106)
18. Color designation example White (M107)
19. Color designation example Red (M108)
20. Color designation example Green (M109)
Use when specifying processing condition.

I3-5
 I4 Group edit

1 Group edit Setting

[I4] Group edit

1. Group edit Set
2. Cancel Independent
3. Cancel Screen all [H5] Group edit
4. Select Low level Please refer to 1~5
5. Select Top level

I4-1
 J1 Path setting
Reference point of
1
processing

[J] Path setting

[J1] Path setting
1. Reference point of processing
Set reference point of processing.

Reference point of processing (0, 0)

You only need to press one menu button to set reference point of processing at coordinates (0, 0).

J1-1
 J1 Path setting

2 Pierce Line

2. Pierce Line
Add pierce of line.

J1-2
 J1 Path setting

2 Pierce Line

 When cutting a board by laser, the cut surface quality may vary depending on the
circumference direction (rightward or leftward), i.e., a right-side or left-side tool dial. offset
direction, which is used at the cut shape's inside hole cutting face and the outer perimeter
cutting face. Be sure to select the optimal "offset direction".

 When the processing conditions tool bar is displayed and the offset direction of the
machine of selected is set to the 「left」 or the 「right」 by setting -
Processing machine information setting, offset direction parameter is used as a default
value it has set in information processing machine, rather than the previous value.

J1-3
 J1 Path setting

3 Pierce Arc

3. Pierce Arc
Add arc pierce.

J1-4
 J1 Path setting

2 Pierce Arc

 When cutting a board by laser, the cut surface quality may vary depending on the
perimeter direction (rightward or leftward), i.e., a right-side or left-side tool dial. offset
direction, which is used at the cut shape's inside hole cutting face and the outer perimeter
cutting face. Be sure to select the optimal "offset direction".

 When the processing conditions tool bar is displayed and the offset direction of the
machine of selected is set to the 「left」 or the 「right」 by setting -
Processing machine information setting, offset direction parameter is used as a default
value it has set in information processing machine, rather than the previous value.

J1-5
 J1 Path setting

4 Pierce Cancel

4. Pierce Cancel
Cancel line pierce. Arc pierce. End micro joint.

Note) If the Beam OFF 2 is used when there is joint, it may not operate correctly.

5.Pierce Add

 When cutting a board by laser, the cut surface quality may vary depending on the
perimeter direction (rightward or leftward), i.e., a right-side or left-side tool dial. offset
direction, which is used at the cut shape's inside hole cutting face and the outer perimeter
cutting face. Be sure to select the optimal "offset direction".
 When the processing conditions tool bar is displayed and the offset direction of the
machine of selected is set to the 「left」 or the 「right」 by setting -
Processing machine information setting, offset direction parameter is used as a default
value it has set in information processing machine, rather than the previous value.

J1-6
 J1 Path setting

6 Pierce Automatic
pierce
6. Pierce Automatic pierce
It is convenient for the shape with many inner Holes. It is convenient for the case that it wants to
install a pierce with the fixed direction to the inner holes.
1) Display onscreen the figures where the batch pierces
are to be added.

2) Pierce | Auto Pierce

 The automatic pierce definition table starts up.
 However, if the "Display parameter table at
startup" item is set to "Note displayed", the table
will not display from the next time, with operation
proceeding instead to step 5 below.
3) Enter the parameter table settings.
 For the automatic pierce definition parameters, see
2) Pierce | Automatic Pierce
page J1-8, 9.
3)-1 0 3)-16 OFF  Specify a "Pierce ON length 1 (L1on) = 0" setting
3)-2 Interrupt 3)-17 OFF for an Arc Pierce.
3)-3 3 3)-18 not input  Specify a "Pierce ON radius (Ron) = 0" setting for a
3)-4 3 3)-19 Not input Line Pierce.
3)-5 0 3)-20 OFF  Specify both a "Pierce ON length 1 (L1on) = 0"
3)-6 0 3)-21 Line arc setting, and a "Pierce radius (Ron) = 0" setting for
3)-22 Long side an On-The-Line Pierce.
3)-7 0
element
3)-8 On1 (red) 3)-23 Not add 4) When table inputs are completed, press F1 or 1:
3)-9 0 3)-24 Adjust END.
3)-10 0 3)-25 0.1  An error may occur, depending on the entered
3)-11 0 3)-26 Contact ref setting values. In such cases, the error dialog box
3)-12 Off1 (white) 3)-27 ON
shown below displays. The table settings should
3)-13 Left 3)-28 100
3)-29 Display then be re-entered in accordance with the error
3)-14 0
message content.
3)-15 0.5

4) F1 or 1: END
5)

5)-1
5)-2

6) or
5) Select the figures to which pierces are to be added.
 The selected figures display in yellow.
6) After selecting the figures, press or .
 Pierces are added to the closed figures, and
element selection is again enabled.
 Figures where pierces could not be added display in
red, and the following message displays: "Pierce
could not be created for some figures. For details,
click the [Automatic pierce message confirmation]
menu item."
This menu item can be clicked to see the reason why
the pierces could not be added.
 The [ESC] key can be used to perform "UNDO"
(return to pre-execution condition) and REDO
(return to post-execution condition) operations.

J1-7
 J1 Path setting

6 Pierce Automatic pierce

1.Line and arc pierces can be added only to 1 closed figure. Moreover, they
cannot be added to figures such as that shown at right, where the outside
shape is closed.
2.New pierces cannot be added to figures where pierces have already been
added.

Input Items (be sure to avoid inputs which result in contradictory parameter settings)

Item Setting content Range

Pierce Ads pierces to the center Installatio -180 to 180
installation point, end point, or n angle
angle intersection point of elements
in the specified angle 0°
direction, with reference to
the center points of the
rectangles which enclose each
figure (figures other than
circles). The positions where
pierces are added are not
specified.
When using the "pierce route" function, this function is
invalid.

J1-8
Position Ads pierce at specified positions (center point, end point, or Center point
intersection point) on the elements determined by the pierce End point
installation angle. An end point pierce is added at the end point Intersection
nearest to the installation angle, and an intersection pierce is point
added at the intersection with the pierce installation angle.

Center point End point Intersection point

30 * Pierces are * Pierces are * Pierces are
added at the added at the end added at the
center points of points of intersection
elements in the elements in the points of
30 direction. 30 direction. elements in the
30 direction.

When using the "pierce route" function, this function's

"intersection point" mode is adopted.

J1-9
 J1 Path setting

6 Pierce Automatic
pierce
Item Setting content Range
Distance from This setting is used to specify a desired distance from the 0 to 100
end point where end point vicinity when installing a pierce at the
pierce is possible intersection point position.
The processing that occurs depends on the distance from the
end point of the element where the pierce is being added:
• If the distance from the end point to the intersection
point is equal to or greater than the setting value, the
pierce is added at the intersection point position without
a shift.
• If the distance from the end point to the intersection
point is less than the setting value, the pierce position is
shifted to the distance specified by the setting value, and
is added there.
* However, in cases where a shift moves the pierce
position too close to another end point (distance of less
than setting value), the pierce is added at the center
point of the element.
alb : Distance between end point
d and intersection point
a
d : Setting value
a  d and b  d
→ Pierce is added at the
b intersection point.
(a < d or b <d) and a+b > 2d
→ Pierce position is shifted to a
position which is d-distance
from the end point.
a < d or b < d and a+b  2d

The pierce installation position is valid only for

intersection points.
Pierce ON length This setting specifies the normal figure's inside pierce line 0 to 100
1 length.

Beam
Beam ON OFF

Beam ON Beam OFF

Processing
direction

When the value is being set by head pierce on the processing

condition registration screen (【I1】 13.automatic condition
registration condition 1), the value is displayed as the first
stage value.
Pierce ON length This setting specifies the outside portion's length when the 0 to 100

J1-10
2 pierce line is to extend to the figure's outer side.
(See the "Pierce ON length 1" explanatory illustration.)
Pierce ON angle This setting specifies the deflection angle when the pierce 0 to "less than
line is to have an angle. 90"
(See the "Pierce ON length 1" explanatory illustration.)
Position = End point Position = Center point or
Angle = 30° intersection point
Direction = Left Angle = 30°
Direction = Left

J1-11
 J1 Path setting

6 Pierce Automatic
pierce
Item Setting content Range
Pierce ON radius Specifies the arc radius when designating an arc path at the 0 to 100
pierce installation site.
(See the "Pierce ON length 1" explanatory illustration.)
Beam ON type Specifies the beam ON attribute type when adding a beam ON 1
ON to the pierce line. The beam ON attribute colors are as ON 2
follows: ON1: Red, ON2: White, ON3: Purple. ON 3
* A yellow color is used for inside whole designations. In this
case, too, the beam ON type specified here is used. When
the inside hole designation is canceled, the yellow color
reverts to original color.
Pierce OFF Specifies the length to the beam OFF (when a figure's inside 0 to 100
length beam OFF is desired) after a figure has been processed 1
time around its perimeter.
(See the "Pierce ON length 1" explanatory illustration.)
Pierce OFF angle Specifies the angle value when an angle is desired at the 0 to "less than
pierce line of the pierce OFF end point. 90"
(See the "Pierce ON length 1" explanatory illustration.)
Pierce OFF Specifies the arc radius when arc path (arc pierce) is desired 0 to 100
radius at the end point pierce.
(See the "Pierce ON length 1" explanatory illustration.)
Beam OFF type Specifies the attribute type for the beam OFF which is OFF 1
added to the pierce line at the pierce OFF length end point. OFF 2
The beam OFF attribute colors are as follows: OFF1: White, OFF 3
OFF2: Light blue, OFF3: Yellow.
Offset direction In order to apply offsets to the figure's inner side, the Right
"Right/Left" offset direction becomes the Left
"Rightward/Leftward" processing path direction.
* When cutting a board by laser, the cut surface
quality may vary depending on the circumference direction
(rightward or leftward) (i.e., the right-side or left-side tool
dial. offset direction) which is used at the cut shape's inside
hole cutting face and the outer perimeter cutting face. Be
sure to select the optimal "offset direction".
* When the processing conditions tool bar is displayed and
the offset direction of the machine of selected is set to the
「left」 or the 「right」 by setting -Processing machine
information setting, offset direction parameter is used as a
default value it has set in information processing machine,
rather than the previous value.
Offset No. Specifies the offset No. for customers using LC5 and LC6 0 to 100
controllers and in cases where the offset amount is specified
by the D-command. Normally, a setting of "0" should be
entered.
End joint width The width to uncut is set to attach an uncut portion to the -10～100
last of a path.
*When a negative value is set, processes overlap.

Outside add It is set whether end joint is added to the outside. OFF／ON
Inside add It is set whether end joint is added to the inside. OFF／ON

J1-9-2
Hole size(lower The upper limit of the hole size when attaching end joint to 0～
limit) the inside is set. (「Hole size」 becomes the length of the
diagonal line of a circumscription rectangle.)
Hole size(upper The lower limit of the hole size when attaching end joint to 0～
limit) the inside is set. (「The size of a hole」 becomes the length of
the diagonal line of a circumscription rectangle.)
Micro joint auto It is set whether end micro joint is automatically added to a OFF／ON
add diagonal when adding joint.
*Micro joint width becomes the same as end joint width.
However, as for the case of zero or less, only a pierce line is
added.
*If the Beam ON position of micro joint overlaps with a
pierce in a big hole, the accuracy of a hole may worsen. In
that case, please set pierce length somewhat short and keep
a Beam ON position from overlapping.
Kind of Outside When an outer perimeter pierce is added, a line arc pierce or LineCircle/
pierce an attaching pierce can be chosen. It is added to the inside Added
point of the drawing element of the object in case as a line
arc pierce. An offset direction (G41/G42) is added in the case
as an attaching pierce.
Location of Either of the specifying can be chosen in the longest thing in Angle(INSIDE)/
Outside P. the drawing element which configures an angle or an outer Long element/
perimeter or a mouse or the coordinate value input the Arbitrary
outer perimeter element which an outer perimeter pierce is
added to.
The attach angle of the inner hole pierce is referred to for
the case that an angle was chosen.
[Arbitrary] is effective only at "Interference
avoidance path". It operates assuming that
[Angle(INSIDE)] is set at "Automatic pierce".
An outer perimeter pierce is added to the thing
found in the First when there is a drawing element
of the same length in the multiple as to the case
that [Long side Element] was chosen in the outer
perimeter shape.
Even if you choose added pierce for outer perimeter
pierce, a line arc pierce is to be used in case that
outer perimeter is a circle that has no broken point.
Inside hole An "Added" setting should be specified when an inside holes Added
designation are designated at the pierce beam ON. When inside holes Not added to
are registered as nesting parts, nesting parts can also be perimeter
configured at inside holes. Moreover, when calculating the
weights of individual parts, the inside hole surface area can
be subtracted to obtain more accurate calculation results.
* For inside whole designations, a yellow beam ON attribute
is used. In this case, the beam ON type specified at the
"Pierce ON type" setting is used. When the inside hole
designation is canceled, the yellow color reverts to original
color.
Automatic pierce For small holes, the pierce length is automatically Adjust
length shortened so that the piercing position is close to the center Not adjust
adjustment of the whole shape.
* Even if the length of a pierce line created by the "Pierce
installation angle" to "Pierce On type" parameter settings

J1-9-3
 is extended by a factor of 2, no adjustment is performed if
there is no interference (intersections) with the closed
figure, and the shape is used as it is.
If interference (intersections) occurs, the pierce length is
shortened to a position which is half the distance to the
intersection point. However, if the shortened amount
violates the "Shortest pierce length adjustment" setting
value, or if it is shorter than the arc radius of an arc pierce,
no adjustment is made, and an error occurs.
Shortest pierce Specifies the shortest adjustment allowed for the automatic 0 to 100
length pierce length adjustment function. If the pierce length is
adjustment shorter than this setting value, no adjustment is made, and
an error occurs.

J1-9-4
 J1 Path setting

6 Pierce Automatic
pierce
Item Setting content Range
Arc pierce Specifies the arc pierce shape. At the arc pierce command; Joint reference
reference this is normally the "joint reference" shape. For small holes, piercing point
position specify a "Piercing point reference" setting to move the
piercing position close to the center of the whole shape.
Auto pierce length adjustment Auto pierce length adjustment
= Not adjust = Not adjust
Arc pierce reference position = Joint Arc pierce reference position
= Piercing point

Auto pierce length adjustment Auto pierce length adjustment

= Adjust = Adjust
Arc pierce reference position = Arc pierce reference position
Joint = Piercing point

Small hole prty It is set whether it is previously processed from a small hole. on
proc In the case of on, while the interference avoidance path was
set to the near order of distance in the group judged to be a
small hole and then the order of processing was judged to be
a large hole, an interference avoidance path is set to small
order.
This parameter isn't used, and it uses for 「 Auto
avoidance」「Range avoidance」in 「Auto pierce」.

Small hole judge The size of a hole to consider a small hole to process it from ０～
the small hole first is set.
value The hole of the size below a boundary value judges a small
hole and the hole of the other size to be a large hole.
（「The size of a hole」used for a judgment becomes the
length of the diagonal line of a circumscription rectangle.）
This parameter isn't used, and it uses for 「 Auto
avoidance」 「Range avoidance」in 「Auto pierce」.

Display Specify a "Display" setting if automatic pierce definition Display

parameter table table confirmation/changes are desired when the automatic Not display
at start pierce command is started. If no confirmation/changes are
required because the same table content is always used,
specify a "Not display" setting. In this case, the automatic
pierce definition table can be displayed by entering the [/]

J1-9-5
(slash) + [Enter] command.

J1-9-6
 Automatic pierce parameter (default settings)
The automatic pierce parameters use the same settings as the pierce path settings.
Following a version upgrade (overwrite installation), the recommended settings will be
cleared, and must therefore be specified again. These settings are shown below.

Item Recommended setting

Pierce installation angle 0
Pierce installation position Interrupt
Distance from end point where pierce is 3
possible
Pierce ON length 1 3
Pierce ON length 2 0
Pierce ON angle 0
Pierce ON radius 0
Pierce ON type ON1 (red)
Pierce OFF length 0
Pierce OFF angle 0
Pierce OFF radius 0
Pierce OFF type OFF1 (white)
Offset direction Left
Offset No. 0
End joint width 0.5
Outside add OFF
Inside add OFF
Hole size(lower limit) 0(Grayout）
Hole size(upper limit) 0(Grayout)
Micro joint auto add OFF
Kind of Outside pierce LineCircle
Location of Outside P. Angle(INSIDE)
Designate inside holes Not add
Auto pierce length adjustment Adjust
Shortest pierce length 0.1
Arc pierce reference position Std pint
Small hole prty proc ON
Small hole judge value 100
Display parameter table at startup Dip

A set value of the automatic pierce parameter can be loaded/saved by "3:Load" and "4:Save"
of the selection menu.

6-2. Pierce Automatic Pierce Message Confirmation

Following execution of the automatic pierce command, figures display in red, and the following
message displays: "Pierce could not be created for some figures. For details, click the
[Automatic pierce message confirmation] menu item."
This menu item can be clicked to see the reason why the pierces could not be added.

J1-9-7
 J Path setting
7 Pierce BEAM ON1

7. Pierce BEAM ON1

Add BEAM ON attributes (BEAM ON1) to endpoints of line . Arc.
Utilize when executing crack processing.

8. Pierce BEAM OFF1

9. Switch of BEAM ON·OFF

10. Path setting Periphery designation

J1-10
 J1 Path setting
Path setting
11
Automatic check

11. Path setting Automatic check

Automatically set processing path in order, check processing order (direction).

12. Path setting Manual

When reference point of reference has been set, make the Rapid feed line (yellow dotted line)
starting from reference point of processing.
When path is continuous, it turns purple.
When it is not continuous or after path other than BEAM OFF has been set, display
confirmation messages whether to add BEAM OFF or not.
Y continue to execute BEAM OFF attributes after addition
N interruption command
When it is not continuous, delete excessive lines or reconnect the starting points of interrupted
lines.

J1-11
 J1 Path setting
Path setting
13
Automatic
13. Path setting Automatic
Automatically set processing path in order.

From reference point of processing to the closest BEAM ON, automatically connect Rapid feed
line (yellow dotted line).
Add Rapid feed lines in order, set processing path.
When all figures turn purple, it is normal.
When it is not continuous in path setting or after path other than BEAM OFF has been set,
display confirmation message whether to add BEAM OFF or not.
Y continue to execute BEAM OFF attributes after addition.
N interruption command.
When it is not continuous, delete excessive lines or reconnect the starting points of interrupted
lines.

14. Path setting Arrange order

Nesting can be utilized only in condition of configuration, set configured order path by nesting.
After nesting configuration, note that path is not set according to configuration order for
movement. Copy.

When all figures turn purple, it is normal. When it is not continuous in path setting or after
path other than BEAM OFF has been set, display confirmation message whether to add BEAM
OFF or not.
Y continue to execute BEAM OFF attributes after addition.
N interruption command
When it is not continuous, delete excessive lines or reconnect the starting points of interrupted
lines.

15. Path setting Check

Check processing order (direction).

There is no problem if all the figures change into the tracing color (part: Yellow, rapid feed line:
White, cutting line (offset direction right): Pink, cutting line (offset direction left): Red, cutting
line (no offset direction: Light purple).
If there is a figure which does not change to a trace color, since there is a problem in the
processing direction etc., please correct.
When yellow × is displayed, it indicates repetition of figures; this will not affect NC data
creation.

J1-12
 J1 Path setting
Path setting
16
Range arrange order

16. Path setting Range arrange order

Utilized in condition of configured figure nesting.
For figures whose ranges have been specified, set path via nesting in configured order.
However, after configuration nesting, order of figures has been replaced when executing
movement or copy, therefore, path cannot be set in configured order.

When all figures turn purple, it is normal.

When it is not continuous in path setting or after path other than BEAM OFF has been set,
display confirmation message whether to add BEAM OFF or not.
Y continue to execute BEAM OFF attributes after addition.
N interruption command (end)
When it is not continuous, end the command delete excessive lines or reconnect the starting
points of interrupted lines.

J1-13
 J1 Path setting
Path setting
17
Range automatic

17. Path setting Range automatic

For figures whose ranges have been specified, automatically set processing path in order?

From reference point of processing to the closest BEAM ON, automatically connect Rapid feed
line (yellow dotted line).
Add Rapid feed lines in order, set processing path.
When all figures turn red from purple, it is normal. When it is not continuous in path setting or
after path other than BEAM OFF has been set, display confirmation message whether to add
BEAM OFF or not.
Y continue to execute BEAM OFF attributes after addition.
N interruption command
When it is not continuous, end the command delete excessive lines or reconnect the starting
points of interrupted lines.

J1-14
 J1 Path setting

Path setting
Summary

J1-15
 J1 Path setting

18 Rapid feed Erase all

18. Rapid feed Erase all

Erase all Rapid feed lines

19. Fast forward Cancel

20. Cut
Please refer to [A2] Corner. Cut / OFF SET 5. Corner cut.

21. 2-point line segment

Please refer to [A1] Figure 11. 2 lines two-point line (two-point line segment).

22. Corner R
Please refer to [A2] Corner. cut / OFF SET 1. Corner circle.

J1-16
 J1 Path setting

23 Micro joint

23. Micro joint

Micro joint creation.

Offset No. 0

The start and end code you are using includes “BEAM OFF1” and “BEAM OFF2” as well, do not
forget to register proper BEAM OFF codes.

J1-17
 J1 Path setting

24 End joint setting

BEAM ON1 (red) is added to BEAM ON attributes and BEAM OFF2 (light blue) is added to
BEAM OFF attributes. Please register proper BEAM OFF codes in “BEAM OFF2” field.
After path setting, please make micro joint. If micro joint has been added before path setting, it
will cause abnormal processing direction.
There is micro joint of very small width which cannot be added in arc of very large radius.
This command should not be used here, indicate the figure of desired width via drawing
Edit Element partially delete add BEAM ON . OFF attributes.

24. Width display / change

IF there was end micro joint attribute (uncut by Beam OFF),it displayed the value, and chose
the value of a micro joint attribute is changed.
If the beam-off without end micro joint attribute is chosen, end micro joint attribute can be
added.

After end joint has been set, there is symbol ( ). Length of line does not change.
End joint distance will disappear during screen operation.
In sub-pattern call out processing pierce, please cancel group (G. cancellation) before setting
end joint.
Please set end joint amount to 0mm before cancellation of end joint settings.
When NC data to which end micro joint has been added has been created, please set NC data
creation parameter table parameter end micro joint valid (0) / invalid (1) of NC input and
output
NC data creation to be valid.

J1-18
２５．Delete path
Delete machining path attribute elements such as pierce line, processing reference point, rapid
feed line, etc. at once. In the case of a nesting drawing, leave the parts as a group and delete the
path.
1) Display the object drawing with NC
inversion or drawing reading
2) Start delete path .
Path setting1｜Nesting
Rapid feed｜ Delete path
Pierce line and open shape start are
distinguished by presence or absence of
offset direction.
Please use drawing editing if it becomes
an open shape due to error during NC
inversion
Example of nesting drawing You can also operate from the laser CAM

toolbar .

The delete path objects are as follows.

Processing reference points, notes,
dimensions, worksheets, rapid feed
lines, pierce, scribe path, pre-pierce,
scrap
Adjust the NC inversion item of the laser
CAM setting if the drawing becomes an
open shape when the NC program
generated by the end joint is inversely
transformed, or when it can’t be converted
back to the scribe line (See page 2-21-8).
When performing from path setting to
NC generation, please use one click

individual item execution .

J1-10
Message list of delete path command
Message Reason Treatment method
Can’t abort because there are Occur when deleting the path to Delete the worksheet
groups more than 2 hierarchy the drawing of clamp avoidance manually
nesting.
Can’t work because there is not The number of drawings / Please increase the
enough drawing area. Please attributes required for number of drawings /
widen the area using LA's processing is insufficient. attributes using LA's
environmental setting and then environment setting
try again

J1-11
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Add BEAM ON/OFF
1
BEAM ON1

[J2] BEAM ON/OFF

1. Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON1
Please refer to [J1] Path setting 7. BEAM ON1.

2. Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON2

Add BEAM ON attribute (BEAM ON2) at endpoints of line . arc.

3. Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON3

Purple BEAM ON attributes are added.

When BEAM ON2 or BEAM ON3 has been used, it is BEAM ON1 during reversion
even for created NC data.

J2-1
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Add BEAM ON/OFF
4
BEAM/OFF1

4 Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF1

Please refer to [J1] Path setting 8. BEAM OFF1.

5. Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF2

Add BEAM OFF attribute (BEAM OFF2) at endpoints of line . arc.

6. Add BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF3

Yellow BEAM OFF attributes are added.

When BEAM OFF2 or BEAM OFF3 has been used, it is BEAM OFF1 during reversion
even for created NC data.

J2-2
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Change BEAM ON/OFF
7
BEAM ON1

7. Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON1

Changed into BEAM ON1 (red) after individual or range designation of BEAM ON attributes.

8. Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON2

After pierce type of BEAM ON attribute of periphery designation and inside pierce designation
has
been changed, periphery designation and inside hole designation will be cancelled.
At most 500 pierce lines can be changed for each time.
When BEAM ON2 or BEAM ON3 has been used, it is BEAM ON1 during reversion even for
created NC data.

J2-3
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Change BEAM ON/OFF
9
BEAM ON1

9. Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM ON3

Changed into BEAM ON3 (purple) after individual or range designation of BEAM ON attributes.

10. Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF1

At most 500 pierce lines can be changed for each time.

J2-4
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Change BEAM ON/OFF
11
BEAM OFF1

11. Change BEAM ON/OFF BEAM OFF2

Changed into BEAM OFF2 (light blue) after individual or range designation of BEAM ON
attributes.

12. Change BEAM ON OFF BEAM OFF3

At most 500 pierce lines can be changed for each time.

When BEAM OFF2 or BEAM OFF3 has been used, it is BEAM OFF1 during reversion
even for created NC data.

13. Switch BEAM ON/OFF

Please refer to [J1] Path setting 9. BEAM ON . OFF switch.

J2-5
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF

Precede pierce

Precede pierce (Pre-pierce)

Pre-pierce is not processed according to normal cut order [pre-pierce] [cut] [pre-pierce]
[cut] … , it is processed in the order [pre-pierce] [pre-pierce] … [cut] [cut] after
complete pre-pierce.
For example, in processing stainless materials, utilize “oxygen” for pre-pierce and then “nitrogen”
for cut and so on. When different types of assist gases are used for processing during “piecing” and
“cut”, this function will help reduce waste of gases during gas charging.
Besides, in processing of soft steel (SS) thick board, although assist gas (oxygen) is not
switched, and only execute [piecing], this function will apply in the course of [cut] performed
later.

J2-6
J2-7
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF

14 Pre-pierce Add (all)

14. Pre-pierce Add (all)

Only add pre-pierces in addition object elements (introduced later) of pre-pierces.

﹡Add Pre-pierce to the beam ON

in the range set by [Pre-pierce]
item of pierce place of all object
element.

[Pre-pierce BEAM ON], [pre-pierce BEAM OFF] and [BEAM ON used after cut] can be
modified in pre-pierce setting] (introduced later).
The following are added and selected objects of pre-pierce / elements other than objects.
Object Other than objects
BEAM ON1, BEAM ON2, BEAM ON3 Drawn line BEAM ON
Line pierce, Arc pierce, Added pierce Scrap line BEAM ON
Periphery designation, Inside hole designation Laser macro
Micro joint Pre-pierce BEAM ON
Zi mode, User mode BEAM ON used after cutting of pre-pierce
Nesting parts (there are pre-pierces at pierce place)
Common line components (only for initial BEAM Elements or groups other than objects
ON)
Never group pre-pierces.
For elements or groups to which pre-pierces have been added, do not forget to select
pre-pierce (points) during execution of [cancellation], [movement] or [copy].
For pre-pierce, [periphery designation] or [inside hole designation] cannot be set.
Names of group figure to which nesting components, etc of pre-pierce have been added
become [#?original parts name] (?: number). (same groups have the same name)
In the condition of adding Pre-pierce to the graph of setting path, please delete the next
Rapid feed line before the Pre-pierce set..
Therefore, for the function of “processing instructions creation” performed on the basis of
name of each group after nesting configuration, this pre-pierce function applies. When NC
data is created, processing time or processing distance, etc cannot be output for some part.
If information of some part is needed, earlier cut function does not apply. Generally, in NC
data creation, function of “processing instructions creation” will apply.

J2-8
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Pre-pierce Add
15
(manual)

15. Pre-pierce Add (manual)

Add pre-pierces to object elements of pre-pierce addition.

﹡Add Pre-pierce to the beam ON

in the range set by [Pre-pierce]
item of pierce place of all object
element.
Rapid feed lines for connection of pre-pierce hole for which path setting has been completed
cannot be cancelled.
Names of group are [#?original parts name] (?: number) same during processing same groups at
the same time.
In the condition of adding Pre-pierce to the graph of setting path, please delete the next Rapid
feed line before the Pre-pierce set.
Therefore, for the function of “processing instructions creation” performed on the basis of name
of each
group after nesting configuration, this pre-pierce function applies. When NC data is created,
processing time or processing distance, etc cannot be output for some part.
If information of some part is needed, earlier cut function does not apply. Generally, in NC data
creation, function of “processing instructions creation” will apply.

J2-9
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF

16 Pre-pierce Cancel

16. Pre-pierce Cancel

Cancel pre-pierce to which elements of pre-pierces are added.

Pierces for which pre-pierce elements are cancelled must become [BEAM ON1].
[Periphery designation] or [inside hole designation] remains in the original state.
The following is the example of executing the cancellation of pre-pierces.

The following are added and selected objects of pre-pierce / elements other than objects.
Object Other than objects
Pre-pierce BEAM on
Element or group other than other objects of BEAM Elements or groups other than objects
ON used after cutting of pre-pierce
(there are pre-pierce place)
Rapid feed lines for connection of pre-pierce for which path setting has been completed cannot
be cancelled.
Names of group are [#?original parts name ] (?: number) same during processing same groups
at the same time.
Therefore, for the function of “processing instructions creation” performed on the basis of name
of each group after nesting configuration, this earlier-cut hole function applies. When NC data
is created, processing time or processing distance, etc cannot be output for some part.
If information of some part is needed, earlier cut function does not apply. Generally, in NC data
creation, function of “processing instructions creation” will apply.

J2-10
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF

17 Pre-pierce Setting

17. Pre-pierces Setting

The pre-pierce area setting of added pre-pierces.

a. Piercing area set

＊when [no], add pre-pierce to all the hole
selected by pre-pierce adding command.
＊when [yes], set the pre-pierce radius can
be input max value and min value. The
range is 0.1~99.9 and eliminate two bit
after radix point.
＊the early stage of pre-pierce area setting
is [no].

＊Not doing the setting of pre-pierce area, after doing pre-pierce adding for parts, BEAM ON will
add pre-pierce, but by doing area setting, add pre-pierce to the BEAM ON of proper area setting.

The example of pre-pierce setting

For the three graph of which hole
length is different
The example of pierce adding judgment
when changing the setting range of
pierce area setting are showed in the left
graph.

Setting range between 1mm and Setting range above 1mm Setting range below 5mm
5mm A: not add A: add
A: not add B: add B: add
B: add C: add C: not add
C: not add

J2-11
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
18
Path (automatic)

18. Pre-pierce Path (automatic)

All pre-Pierces are path set.

1) the pre-Pierce vicinity which starts

processing

*The case that processing reference point is set

is omitted.
*All pre-Pierces are path set.

A Rapid feed line (the broken line of the pale blue) is united automatically in the most nearest
pre-Pierce from the processing reference point.
As following, A Rapid feed Line is added to the order, and a pre-Pierce processing path (in near
of the order) is set.
There is no problem if all pre-Pierces change into the purple.
A pre-Pierce path selected object/object outside element is shown in the following.
Object Outside object
The pre-Pierce Beam ON that a path is not set The pre-Pierce that grouping is done
Beam ON for the cut after the pre-Pierce The element and group except having
mentioned to other objects
(There is a Shown above pre-Pierce in the Pierce
Position.)

The Rapid feed Line of the Broken line of the Pale blue can be deleted with [Rapid feed All
Delete] and [Rapid feed Delete], too.
In this case that Path sets a pre-Pierce (Point), please must use [pre-Pierce Path (Automatic)]
or [pre-Pierce Path (Range)] (mentioning later) or [Pierce Route | Auto Avoid]
A Path can't be set normally when a Path sets pre-Pierce with [Path Set Automatic] and [Path
Set Manual] and so on.
After the pre-Pierce Path set, In this case that a Path sets Element which a pre-Pierce is
added to, and part is to use [Path Set Automatic] and [Path Set Manual] or [Pierce Route |
Auto Avoid] and so on.

If it is [Pierce Route｜Auto Avoid], Path can be set at the same time as Precede Pierce Path.
When this time execute PrecedePierce Add After Pierce was added to by using [Auto Pierce]
and [Pierce Route], and execute [Pierce Route｜Auto Avoid] again.

J2-12
 J2 Beam ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
19
Path (Range)

19. Pre-pierce Path (Range)

Set pre-pierce passage

Connect pre-feed line (water-color dotted line) from processing reference point to closest and
nearest pre-pierce. Add pre-feed lines in order as below and set pre-pierce processing passage
(according to order of distance).
When all pre-pierce selected become purple, it indicates OK.
Please refer to precautions on [pre-pierce passage (auto)].

J2-13
 J2 Beam ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
20 Processing reference
point

Please refer to:

20. Processing reference point [J1] 1
21. Reference (0, 0) [J1] 1
22. Path setting Automatic check [J1] 11
23. Path setting Manual [J1] 12
24. Path setting Automatic [J1] 13
25. Path setting Arrange order [J1] 14
26. Path setting Check [J1] 15
27. Path setting Range arrange order [J1] 16
28. Path setting Range automatic [J1] 17
29. Rapid feed Erase all [J1] 18
30. Rapid feed Erase [J1] 19

J2-14
 J2 Beam ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation
Pre-pierce Procedure of operation

NC data creating example

１）the condition Pre-pierce＝oxygen―cut＝nitrogren

When creating NC, if start end code is specified as 1, please create NC as the following table.

Start Beam on 1(red) Beam off Scribing on Scribing off Pre-pierce

1(white) start
#501=105 M98P9010 M121 S0 M87 #503=101
#502=110 M199 M#502 M199
M66 M80
M198
M86
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce After End
Beam on Beam off pre-pierce,
end close the
cut
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010 G01G40
M74 M199 M30
M120
M75

Please specify processing condition to oxygen in #503 and nitrogen in #501.

In the condition of not having P9060,P9061 registering processing machine,

please start to add M#503M78G04X#509M81 to Pre-pierce start，
and start to add M#501M78G04X#509M81 to Pre-pierce end。
※HV,LVP,NX，registering P9060,P9061
，because of having the function of gas automatical cleanse, pre-pierce start and end do not
need gas cleanse code.

请增 Please set the value of “processing gas” “M78 middle pressure” in processing machine side
control equipment “processing ” parameters higher. Through setting them higher, can
shorten the time used to abandon gas when switch processing gas.

Proceed the rapid feed moving when doing pre-pierce processing by the code of pre-pierce
beam off, and when set the gas as OFF, please set M87 as M121.

Proceed the rapid feed moving when doing pre-pierce processing by the code of pre-pierce
beam off, and in the condition of not improving emulating, please delete M199.（adding
M199 is safer in the condition that rapid feed moving length is longer）

J2-15
 J2 Beam ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

Please use the start end code by the last page, the NC data example after NC creating are
following.

line ＮＣ program Comment （↓）

contents G01X45.Y30.
1 #501=105 ← Start code 32
2 #502=110 33 G01X45.Y20.
3 M66 34 G01X55.Y20.
4 G90 35 G01X55.Y25.
5 G92X10.Y10. 36 M121 ← beamoffcode
6 G00X25.Y25.G40 37 M199
7 #503=104 ← pre-pierce 38 G00X25.Y25.G40
8 #509=15. start code 39 M98P9010 ← pre-pierce
9 M#503M80M198 ← pre-piercebea 40 G01G41X30.Y25. later cut
0 M74 moncode 41 G03X30.Y25.I-5. oncode
11 M120 42 M121 ←
12 M75 43 M199 beamoffcode
13 M87 ← pre-piercebea 44 G00X37.5Y38.G40
14 M199 moffcode 45 M98P9010 ←
15 G00X37.5Y38.G40 46 G01G41X37.5Y35. pre-pierce
16 M#503M80M198 ← 47 G01X60.Y35. later cut
17 M74 pre-piercebea 48 G01X60.Y15. oncode
18 M120 moncode 49 G01X15.Y15.
19 M75 50 G01X15.Y35.
20 M87 ← pre-piercebea 51 G01X37.5Y35.
21 M199 moffcode 52 M121 ←
22 G00X50.Y25.G40 53 M199
23 M#503M80M198 ← pre-piercebea 54 G01G40 ← Beam off code
24 M74 moncode 55 M30
25 M120 End code
26 M75
27 M87 ← pre-piercebea
28 M199 moffcode
29 M98P9010 ← pre-pierce
30 G01G41X55.Y25. later cut
31 G01X55.Y30. oncode
（↓）

Program No.: 9051: SUS oxygen Pre-piercing

J2-16
 J2 Beam ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

２）the condition Pre-pierce＝oxygen―cut＝oxygen

１）start end code，if substituting, can realize pre-pierce：oxygen―cut：the cut of oxygen.

Start Beam on 1(red) Beam off Scribing on Scribing off Pre-pierce

1(white) start
#501=105 M98P9010 M121 S0 M87 #503=104
#502=110 M199 M#502 M199 #504=0.03
M66 M80
M198
M86
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce After End
Beam on Beam off pre-pierce,
end close the
cut
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010 G01G40
G4X#504 M199 M30
M120

Please set the processing condition of oxygen input to #503.

Please adjust the pause time specified in #504.

In the condition of the gas of pre-pierce and after cut being same, pre-pierce start and end
do not need gas cleanse code.

Using pre-pierce beam off code, when preceding the rapid feed moving when doing
pre-pierce processing, please set M87 as M121 in the condition of closing the gas.

Proceed the rapid feed moving when doing pre-pierce processing by the code of pre-pierce
beam off, and in the condition of not improving emulating, please delete M199.（adding
M199 is safer in the condition that rapid feed moving length is longer）

J2-17
 J2 Beam ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

３）the condition Pre-pierce＝nitrogren―cut＝nitrogren

１）start end code，if substituting, can realize pre-pierce：nitrogren―cut：the cut of cut.

Start Beam on 1(red) Beam off Scribing on Scribing off Pre-pierce

1(white) start
#501=105 M98P9010 M121 S0 M87 #503=105
#502=110 M199 M#502 M199 #504=0.03
M66 M80
M198
M86
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce After End
Beam on Beam off pre-pierce,
end close the
cut
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010 G01G40
G4X#504 M199 M30
M120

Please set the processing condition of nitrogen input to #503.

Please adjust the pause time specified in #504.

In the condition of the gas of pre-pierce and after cut being same, pre-pierce start and end
do not need gas cleanse code.

Using pre-pierce beam off code, when preceding the rapid feed moving when doing
pre-pierce processing, please set M87 as M121 in the condition of closing the gas.

Proceed the rapid feed moving when doing pre-pierce processing by the code of pre-pierce
beam off, and in the condition of not improving emulating, please delete M199.（adding
M199 is safer in the condition that rapid feed moving length is longer）

J2-18
 J2 Beam ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

Pre-pierce function Pre-pierce adding the operation example when NC creating nesting graph）
1. in the condition of doing pre-pierce in the pierce location of the following 2 type 4 graph

Add
“process Ref”
The path
which has
not set
pre-pierce.
Please do
precede
pierce
“add（all）
For the graph having finished nesting arrangement，please add“processing ”
Ref”，and do precede
pierce
“add（all）”.

Please do
precede pierce
“path（auto）”
or“path（range）
”
set
pre-pierce
path.
Please do pre-pierce “path（auto）”or“path（range）”.
Firstly set path if those description only for pre-pierce.

J2-19
 J2 Beam ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

Please
carry out
normal
path menu
After setting “ arrange
pre-pierce order ” or
path, also “ auto
set normal （ check ）”
cut path. or“manual”

Set proper cut path by normal path menu “arrange order”or“auto check”or“manual”etc.

For the whole processing area, in the condition of carrying out pre-pierce cut, will take place
heat distortion refer to the heat in cut, and then lead to process bad product. Please refer to
Ｊ２－２２ about the controlling heat distortion effect operation example.

J2-20
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

2. When executing pre-piercing at a part of pre-pierce positions on the following two kinds of
four figures:

Execute pre-pierce “path (automatic)” or “path (range)”.

As shown below, for pre-pierce of only part A, set the path first.

J2-21
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

For “configuration sequence” or “automatic (confirmation)” or “manual”, etc of usual path setting
menu, set the path for cut-off.
Then, utilize the former “start and complete code” to create NC data, which becomes a command of
executing pre-pierce at only a specified place, compared with the NC data for pre-pierce at all
former piercing positions.
Under such circumstances, nitrogen cut-off can be performed for part B during usual nitrogen
piercing without oxygen pre-pierce. This is possible when it is not necessary to perform pre-pierce.

J2-22
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

3. When executing pre-piercing twice at a part of pre-pierce positions of the following two kinds of
four figures:
After carrying out pre-pierce processing for processing area integer，after cut，will take place
heat distortion, and become the cause of processing badness.
Carving up by each fixed area, after carrying out pre-pierce and cut, can avoid the effect of heat
distortion.
Note the operation example

Execute desired pre-pierce path range in “path (range)”.

J2-23
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

In pre-pierce “path (automatic)” and “path (range)”, execute the setting of pre-pierce path for the
part of
pre-pierce of preset remaining pre-pierce path.

J2-24
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

Then, for remaining cut figures, set the path for cut-off from “configuration
sequence ”and“ automatic (confirmation)” and “manual”, etc of usual path setting.

After that, utilize the former “start and complete code” to create NC data.
NC data can be created in path order of
“(Part: part A above) pre-pierce”
“(Part: part A above) cut”
“(Remaining part: part B above) pre-pierce”
“(Remaining part: part B above) cut”.

J2-25
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

SS-“Oxygen pre-pierce +usual oxygen cut-off” NC data creation example

1. When executing pre-pierce at all pre-pierce positions:
Do the following changes for pre-pierce start and pre-pierce end set by“start end code”item in the
table of page Ｊ２－１４.
pre-pierce pre-pierce pre-pierce pre-pierce pre-pierce
laser bean laser bean cut ON
start end ON OFF
M#503 M#501 M#503M80 M87 M#501
M34 M34 M198 M199 M98P9010
M78 M78 M98P9010
G04X#509 G04X#509
M81 M81 SS-pre-pierce
laser bean ON
SS- oxygen pre-pierce

pre-pierce pre-pierce pre-pierce pre-pierce pre-pierce

laser bean ON laser bean cut ON
start end OFF
M#503 M#503 M#503M80 M87 M#503
M198 M199 M98P9010
M98P9010

After creating NC data by the steps on page J2-16， can carry out” oxygen pre-pierce” in all the
pre-pierce location, and can create the NC data which can be cut by oxygen. As shown on page
J2-20,

2. If you want to perform “air cut-off” at the pre-processed part:

As shown on page J2-20, after executing pre-pierce at all pre-pierce positions.

Only parts of An are used for the “BEAM ON1”, and group edit is executed for A parts when
performing air cut-off.

J2-26
 J2 BEAM ON/OFF
Pre-pierce
Procedure of operation

Edit execution

In the added “ laser

bean opening 3 ”
tribute, choose the
“laser bean opening
1”wanted to change.

When selecting additional “beam ON3” attribute, change the item to be changed into “beam ON1”.
Then, return to “top level” via “group edit”. If usual NC data is created, if applies to “BEAM ON1”
air cut-off at specified BEAM ON positions.

J2-27
 J3 Interference avoidance

1 Processing reference
point

[J3] Interference avoidance

1. Processing reference point
2. Reference (0,0)
3. Pierce Line
4. Pierce Arc
5. Pierce Cancel
6. Pierce Addition
7. Pierce Automatic pierce
8. Pierce Message confirmation
9. Beam ON1
Refer to [J1] Path settings
10. Beam OFF1
11. Path setting Perimeter designation
12. Path setting Automatic check
13. Path setting Manual
14. Path setting Automatic
15. Path setting Configuration order
16. Path setting Trace check
17. Path setting Range configuration order
18. Path setting Range automatic

19. Pierce path setting…

Refer to [J1] 6 Automatic pierce

J3-1
 J3 Interference avoidance
Pierce Path
20 Automatic avoidance

20. Pierce Path Automatic avoidance

◼ Function
There are cases where the head may collide with a tilted work piece or processed holes when
passing through processing-completed areas. The interference avoidance path function allows
even a novice to create a processing program which prevents the head from passing through
completed areas. This function reduces program creation times, and enables continuous
machine operation.
Automatic pierce path settings are keyed to the general CAD drawing.
◼ Operation
1) A drawing with no added pierces is created
or read.
Before executing the automatic pierce
path function, specify the path without
changing the pierces, rapid feeds, and
groups that have been added. When
re-specifying to the interference
avoidance path, use the [cancel groups],
4)
[delete all rapid feeds], and [delete
pierces] commands.
To specify the pierce orientation, use the
[line pierce], [arc pierce], [pierce
addition], [sub-pattern]and [Auto Pierce]
commands, etc. to add the pierces before
executing the automatic pierce path
2) function.

2) For individual-piece processing, add the

processing reference point. This is not
required for parts.

3) Specify the perimeter pierce position or end 3) Press Path Set | Interference Avoidance,
position. then press Pierce Route | Auto Avoid .

4) If no pierces are added at the outer

perimeter, perimeter pierces are added at
the specified positions or directions.
Depending on the interference check
parameter settings, an error may display
(with path setting interrupted). Or, a
rapid feed may display in purple,
indicating a warning (insufficient rapid
feed output angle from beam OFF).
The [ESC] key can be used to perform
"UNDO" (return to pre-execution
condition) and REDO (return to
post-execution condition) operations.
Perform a trace check before creating NC
data.
After the path is set, an interference
check is performed, and the rapid feed

J3-2
 line color changes to red or purple. For
details regarding the interference check
function, see page J3-9. When small hole
priority is processed, a route is set by
small hole (order of distance) -> large hole
(small order).

In [Pierce Route｜Auto Avoid], Marking Path and Precede Pierce Path also execute
simultaneously. A processing order in this case becomes the order of Marking→Precede
Pierce→ cutting.
In addition, since Precede Pierce cannot be added unless the pierce position is decided, Please
advance in order of the operation [Pierce Route｜Auto Avoid] →[Precede Pierce Add]→[Pierce
Route｜Auto Avoid].

J3-3
 J3 Interference avoidance
Pierce Path
21 Range avoidance

21. Pierce Path Range avoidance

◼ Function
The pierce path range avoidance function sets the pierce path with reference to the locations
specified by the CAD drawing's range item. This function is used when multiple parts are drawn
from a single CAD drawing, and when the drawing contains shapes (drawing frame, etc.) which
are unrelated to laser processing.
A path setting can also be specified for only some of the inside holes.

◼ Operation

1) A drawing with no added pierces is created

4)
or read.
Before executing the automatic pierce
path function, specify the path without
changing the pierces, rapid feeds, and
groups that have been added. When
re-specifying to the interference
avoidance path, use the [cancel groups],
[delete all rapid feeds], and [delete
5) pierces] commands.
To specify the pierce orientation, use the
[line pierce], [arc pierce], [pierce
addition], [sub-pattern]and [Auto Pierce]
commands, etc. to add the pierces before
executing the automatic pierce path
4) function.

2) For individual-piece processing, add the

processing reference point. This is not
required for parts.

3) Select the path and pierce creation element. 3) Press Path Set | Interference Avoidance
then press. Pierce Route | Range Avoid

4) Specify the perimeter pierce position or end 4) Use the mouse's right-side button to select
position. the part range. If the range selection content
is correct, press or [Enter].

5) If the selected figure does not include an

outer perimeter, or if no pierces have been
added at the outer perimeter, specify the
perimeter pierce position or the path's end
position (direction).
Depending on the interference check
parameter settings, an error may display
(with path setting interrupted). Or, a
rapid feed may display in purple,
indicating a warning (insufficient rapid
feed output angle from beam OFF).
The [ESC] key can be used to perform

J3-4
 "UNDO" (return to pre-execution
condition) and REDO (return to
post-execution condition) operations.

J3-5
 J3 Interference avoidance
Pierce Path
21 Range avoidance

6) 6) To continue with path setting for another

part, repeat steps 3) to 5) above.

For parts, select the nesting menu's

Part | Range Registration item to register
each part.

To execute processing with the current

conditions, select
Interference Avoidance | Auto Check to set
the path from the processing reference
point.

Perform a trace check before creating NC

data.

After the path is set, an interference

check is performed, and the rapid feed
line color changes to red or purple. For
details regarding the interference check
function, see page J3-9.

When small hole priority is processed, a

route is set by small hole (order of
distance) -> large hole (small order).

It restricts to auto pierce path (auto avoidance path) and becomes the following order of a path.
However, when a path is already setting settled by a rapid feed line, it may not become the
intended order of processing.
(1) Processing base point
(2) Scriber
(3) Pre-pierce
(4) Open-shape cutting (A point is also included.Offset is canceled. It is displayed by a line
color (purple) that it was recognized as open-shape cutting. A beam-on attribute is
attached to decide the processing direction in advance.)
(5) Hole shape（When small hole priority is processed, small hole -> large hole.）
(6) Outer perimeter or Edge-Cut process
In the case of [pierce avoidance | auto avoidance], a scribing path and a pre-pierce path setting
are also performed simultaneously. The processing sequence in this case becomes the order of
scribing -> pre-pierce -> cutting. In addition, since pre-pierce cannot be added unless the pierce
position is decided, proceed with the operation in order of [pierce avoidance | auto avoidance]
-> [pre-pierce addition] -> [pierce avoidance | auto avoidance].
About the order of processing of range avoidance, it is only small hole priority processing.
If you have made to delete attribute open-shape cutting, wire colors will remain purple.

J3-6
 J3 Interference avoidance

22 Rapid Feed Setting

22. Rapid Feed Setting

◼ Function
Specifies the parameter settings for the interference check and avoidance path creation functions.

◼ Operation
Interference check parameters

Item Setting Content Range

Check width An interference check error occurs if a processing-completed 0 to 99.9
cut line exists within the rapid-feed line's specified check width
area.

J3-7
 J3 Interference avoidance

22 Rapid Feed Setting

Item Setting Content Range

Rapid-feed output angle An interference check occurs if the angle of the 0 to 45
from beam off rapid-feed line from the beam OFF point is smaller than
the limit angle .

A purple rapid-feed line indicates a smaller angle

than limit angle , though no interference occurs.

Detour path creation parameters

Main Item Sub Item Setting Content Range
Detour Avoidance Specifies the maximum permissible avoidance width 0 to 99.9
path width when creating the detour path.

Avoidance width

Avoidance width

When avoidance is not possible, a "Could not

create detour path" message displays.

J3-8
 J3 Interference avoidance

22 Rapid Feed Setting

Main Item Sub Item Setting Content Range

Rapid-feed When a detour is adopted for an interference rapid-feed 0 to 45
output line, this setting specifies the limit angle  when
angle from separation from beam OFF occurs.
beam off
point

If a detour path cannot be created, an "Alternate

route could not created" message displays.

Max. Specifies the max. number of permissible path bends 1 to 5

number of when creating a detour path. For example, when
bends creating a detour path for the rapid-feed line shown in
the left illustration below, a max. number of bends
setting of "2 or more" will allow the detour path shown
at right to be created.

J3-9
Automatic control of Set to ON when outputting interference avoidance NC ON
rapid-feed line retract data. OFF
code
<When set to ON>
When creating NC data, the retract code output (just
before the rapid-feed line) is performed automatically
according to the rapid-feed line color and length. This
setting is not required if retract codes (M199, etc.)
have been specified at the start/end code beam OFF.
In such cases, this setting should be deleted.
Moreover, because a retract code will be required at
the end code, add the retract code at the beginning of
the end code.
For start/end codes 1 to 7, 31, 32: Numbers 71 to 79
have been prepared to accommodate the above
changes.

<When set to OFF>

Operation is unchanged from previous NC data
output operations. Specify the rapid-feed lines retract
codes at the start/end code's beam OFF code.

J3-10
 J3 Interference avoidance

22 Rapid Feed Setting

Main Item Sub Item Setting Content Range

No- Creation Specifies the manner in which a no-interference rapid-feed
interference method (rapid-feed line assigned a yellow color by the interference check) is
rapid-feed moved.
(yellow) Creation method Operation
With Z-axis Head retract code (M199) is output just
upward retract prior to rapid-feed.
(M199)
Without Z-axis Head retract code (M199) is not output
upward retract just prior to rapid-feed.

At scribing processing, a retract code (M199) is not output just

prior to a rapid-feed where there scribes do not interfere with
each other.
Z-axis A Z-axis origin return code (M199; G28Z) is output just 100 to 999
origin prior to a rapid-feed at a long no-interference rapid-feed
return for line (exceeding the criterion distance). Deselect the
long rapid- checkbox to disable this function.
feed line
Without Z- Rapid-feed occurs without a retract code (M199) output 0 to 99.9
axis at a short no-interference rapid-feed line (shorter than
upward the criterion distance). Deselect the checkbox to disable
retract for this function.
short rapid-
feed line
Interference Creation Specifies the manner in which an interference rapid-feed (rapid-feed
rapid-feed method line assigned a red or purple color by the interference check) is
(red or moved.
purple) Creation method Operation
With Z-axis origin Head Z-axis origin return (M199; G28Z)
return (M199; is output just prior to rapid-feed.
G28Z)
With Z-axis upward Head retract code (M199) is output just
retract prior to rapid-feed.

Z-axis A Z-axis origin return code (M199; G28Z) is output just 100 to 999
origin prior to a rapid-feed at a long interference rapid-feed
return for line (exceeding the criterion distance). Deselect the
long rapid- checkbox to disable this function.
feed line

A set value of interference check & avoidance route creation parameter can be saved/loaded
with "Save" and "Load" button.

When end joint width is set, please app end joint width to the width of an interference check.

J3-11
 J3 Interference avoidance
Rapid Feed
23 Interference check

23. Rapid-Feed Interference check

◼ Function
Checks for interference (condition where a rapid-feed line passes over or near a
processing-completed cut line). The outer perimeter processing line interference check is different
for individual-piece processing and nesting parts.

◼ Operation

1) Open the drawing which contains the

specified path settings for which an
interference check is to occur.

2) Click Rapid Feed | Interfere Chk .

The check results display in the message area.

Messages:
"No interference found"
Indicates that there is no interference.
"Interference found ( locations)"
Indicates that interference exists. The
interference rapid-feed line displays in red.
"Insufficient output angle from beam OFF (
locations)"
Indicates that the output angle from beam
OFF is insufficient. This rapid-feed line
displays in purple.

2) Interference found (7 locations) To use a detour to avoid the interference,

click Rapid Feed | Detour Create .

The interference check function can be

adjusted by parameter settings. To do
this, click Pierce Route | Set .

An "individual processing" judgment

Processing reference point
exists
occurs if the drawing contains a
processing reference point. Otherwise, a
"nesting part" judgment occurs.
Individual-piece processing
At individual processing, interference is
not recognized even if the rapid-feed line
passes over an outer perimeter
processing area.

For nesting parts, interference is

No processing reference recognized if the rapid-feed line passes
point through an outer perimeter processing
area. This check interference detection
occurs, because a separate part is present
Nesting part within the area of an enclosed figure part.

J3-12
 J3 Interference avoidance
Rapid Feed
24 Detour creation
24. Rapid-Feed Detour creation

◼ Function
Following an interference check, this function creates a detour path in accordance with the
avoidance path parameter settings.

◼ Operation

* When interference can be avoided 1) Open the drawing which contains the
specified path settings.
4)
2) Click Path Set | Interference Avoidance
Rapid Feed | Detour Create .

3) The current interference check results

display in accordance with the interference
check parameter settings.
The displayed results are the same as
those which display for the interference
check command.
4) Select the rapid-feed line for which a detour
is desired.
Only interference rapid-feed lines (red or
purple) can be selected.

4) 5) The detour execution results display.

Messages:

"Detour path created ( locations)"

An interference avoidance path was created in
accordance with the detour path parameter
settings, and the new path is free of interference.
This rapid-feed line displays in yellow.

"Detour path could not be created ( locations)"

An interference avoidance path could not be
created in accordance with the detour path
parameter settings. This interference path
displays in red or purple.
Adjust the interference check & interference
avoidance path creation parameter settings (see
section 4), then execute the "create detour"
operation again.

"Partial detour path was created ( locations). Some

parts ( locations) of the detour path could not be
created."
Indicates that avoidance path creation was
possible for some rapid-feed lines but not for
others. The interference paths display in red or
purple.

J3-13
 J3 Interference avoidance
Rapid Feed
25 Clear all

5) "Created detour paths (7 locations)" Adjust the interference check & interference
avoidance path creation parameter settings (see
section 4), then execute the "create detour"
operation again.

25. Rapid-Feed Erase all See [J1] 18 "Clear All Rapid-Feeds"

26. Rapid-Feed Remove See [J1] 19 "Clear Rapid-Feed"

27. Rapid-Feed Change Rapid-Feed 1

◼ Function
Changes red or purple rapid-feed lines (interference lines) to "rapid-feed line 1" (yellow) lines.

If the "automatic rapid-feed line retract code control" function is ON, an NC code output
(specified by the no-interference rapid-feed line / creation method parameter) is output
for yellow rapid-feed lines.

Changing interference rapid-feed lines may result in collisions between the processing
head and the work because no interference avoidance occurs. Use care when changing
interference rapid-feed lines.

If an interference check and detour creation occurs, the rapid-feed line reverts to its
pre-change status.

◼ Operation

1) Click Path Set | Interference Avoidance

Rapid Feed Change | Rapid Feed 1

2 2) Select the rapid-feed line which is to be

)
changed to "Rapid-Feed Line 1" (yellow).
2 Click .
)

When is clicked, only 1 line may be

selected. The change is executed when
the line is selected (line changes to yellow
rapid-feed line).

A change range (multiple lines) can also

be selected.
Click to select multiple rapid-feed
lines for a single change operation. Press
the key to register the selections.
The change is executed at this time (lines
change to yellow rapid-feed line).

J3-14
 J3 Interference avoidance
Rapid Feed Change
28 Rapid-Feed 2

28. Rapid-Feed Change Rapid-Feed 2

◼ Function
Changes a yellow rapid-feed line (no-interference line) to a "Rapid-Feed Line 2" (red) line.

If the "automatic rapid-feed line retract code control" function is ON, an NC code output
(specified by the interference rapid-feed line / creation method parameter) is output for
red rapid-feed lines.

If an interference check and detour creation occurs, the rapid-feed line reverts to its
pre-change status.
◼ Operation
(See section 27 "Rapid-Feed Change Rapid-Feed 1")

29. Joint Micro Joint See [J1] 23. Micro Joint

30. End Joint Settings See [J1] 24. End Joint

Settings
31. End Joint Display See [J1] 25. End Joint
Display
32. Overlaid cutting check

◼ Function
Check for machining defects caused by overlapping of graphic elements in advance.
◼ Operation
The command displays a CAD drawing (red cutting element) and a message field (There are
(numbers) places where the processing form crosses).

If the number of graphic elements is large, it will take longer to process.

If you want to abort the process, press the "Break" key.

When you find are detect, the color is red, but if you move the screen or change the scale,
the color is yellow. The color is then turned back to green when you activate the CAD
command. Execute command Overlaid cutting check again to locate the detect.

J3-15
33. Message List

Message Cause Corrective measure

No shape found An interference check was Open or create the drawing for
performed for a non-existent which an interference check is to
drawing. occur, then execute the check.
Interference found An interference rapid-feed line If a detour path is to be created,
( location) was found. The "n-locations" click the Detour Path menu item.
number of rapid-feed lines To specify a Z-axis upward
display in red. retract instead of a detour path,
Interference found ( A rapid-feed line with or to adjust the interference
location) Insufficient interference or with an check parameters, use the
output angle from beam-off insufficient output angle exists. interference check & retract path
( location) The "n-locations" number of creation parameter setting
interference rapid-feed lines dialog box.
display in red, and the
insufficient output angle
rapid-feed lines display in
purple.
Found insufficient output A rapid-feed line with an
angle from beam-off ( insufficient output angle exists.
location) The "n-locations" number of
insufficient output angle
rapid-feed lines display in
purple.
Alternate route created ( A detour path was created. The
location) "n-locations" number indicates
the number of detour paths
created.

J3-16
 J3 Interference avoidance
Rapid Feed Change
32 Rapid-Feed 2

Message Cause Corrective measure

Alternate route could not A detour path could not be To adjust the interference check
created ( location) created. The "n-locations" parameters, use the interference
number indicates the number of check & retract path creation
interference rapid-feed lines for parameter setting dialog box.
which detour paths could not be
created.
Some alternate routes were A detour path was created. The
created ( location), others "n-locations" number indicates
couldn't be created ( the number of detour paths
location). created. And, a detour path could
not be created. The "n-locations"
number indicates the number of
interference rapid-feed lines for
which detour paths could not be
created.
Error occurred during file The file cannot be read correctly. There may be a computer
reading. malfunction. Contact the
computer manufacturer.
There is the path where There is no beam OFF at the Move to a lower-ranking group
beam ON/OFF is not set part or sub-pattern, etc., group and specify the correct path
definitely. figure paths. settings.
File writing failed File writing cannot be performed Insufficient free space on the
correctly. hard disk. Delete unnecessary
files. There may also be a
computer malfunction. In this
case, contact the computer
manufacturer.
Revision not possible for Detour creation is not possible Do not select rapid-feed lines
the selected alternate route for rapid-feed lines where where detours have already been
or multiple rapid feed lines. detours have already been created, or created by the [path
created. And, detour creation is setting / manual] functions.
not possible for rapid-feed lines
where multiple paths have been
created by the [path setting /
manual] functions.
Either there is no rapid An attempt was made to create a No-interference rapid-feed lines
feed line, or the route is detour for a no-interference cannot be selected for detour
incorrect. rapid-feed line. creation operations. Select an
Incorrect route interference rapid-feed line.
No-interference rapid feed An interference check or detour Click the Path Settings menu
line is selected. creation is not possible at item, then create a correct path.
drawings with incorrect path
settings.
Error occurred:  A message output occurred at the Save the drawing in question
interference check and detour (drawing in current use), then
path creation engine. restart the computer. If the error
persists, contact your Mitsubishi
representative and relate the
problem details.

J3-17
 J3 Interference avoidance
Rapid Feed Change
32 Rapid-Feed 2

Nesting drawing is A pierce path execution was Execute the command at an

irrelevant. attempted at a nesting drawing. individual-piece drawing. For
individual parts, cancel the
group setting. In addition to
displaying at nesting drawings,
this message also displays if a
work sheet is opened.
No element selected Element Selection has not been Execute an element selection
selected. again.

Message Cause Corrective measure

The laser macro The menu of carrying out Please cancel the group of laser
synchronization interference check for laser macro link arrangement.
arrangement is included. macro link arrangement.
The crach check cannot be
done.
Check the red route pierce The pierce is interfering with the A pierce has been added. Check
(length). A shape exists path. This interference occurs if the pierce length and manually
which prevents normal a "2 pierce length" is specified add the pierce again if necessary.
pierce creation. [/ = together with an "Automatic
Message confirmation] pierce length adjustment = YES"
setting in the [Pierce Path /
Settings] dialog box.
End position setting Unexpected error occurred Save the drawing in question
operation error during command execution. (drawing in current use), then
Stack operation error restart the computer. If the error
persists, contact your Mitsubishi
Rapid feed shape creation
representative and relate the
error
problem details.
Rotation direction
processing error
CLD file error
Closed-shape data error
Open-shape list error
Pierce cancel error
Error at interference check.
Press [ESC] key to enable
UNDO/REDO.
Pierce position detection
error at route switching

J3-18
 J4 Marking
Marking ON/OFF
1 add/delete
Add (element)

[J4] Marking

Notice
Please don’t mark on the material which has high reflectance(such as Al and
Cu )
1. marking ON / OFF add / delete. Add (element)
According to figures designated for marking (sign) processing, add marking ON / OFF (BEAM ON /
OFF for markings), specify processing line of markings.

Precautions
1. Never select auxiliary figures or group ones.
2. Never add lines, or half lines. (Points, lines and arc can be added).
3. Never add figures with path setting. (Addition is not possible even for some figures without path setting).
4. For figures in “2.” and “3.”, perform the range setting in “2) b” above. Press or and figures turn red; do
not add (Pressing F5 to turn the original color).
5. Only (ESC) key works.

J4-1
 J4 J4 Marking
Marking ON/OFF
2 add/delete
Add (line type)

2. marking ON / OFF add / delete Add (line type)

According to figures designated for marking (sign) processing, add marking ON / OFF (BEAM ON /
OFF
for markings), specify processing line of markings.

Precautions are same with Add (element) on the preceding page.

J4-2
 J4 Marking
Marking ON/OFF
3 add/delete
Delete

3. marking ON / OFF add / delete

According to specified marking ON (ON for sign) element, cancel marking ON / OFF (BEAM ON /
OFF for markings).

Precautions
1. Never specify group figures (“note marking character“conversion) figures, etc.]
2. For DXF input function figure, green real lines do not change in color.
3. Only (ESC) key works.

J4-3
 J4 Marking
Marking ON/OFF
4 add/delete
Delete all

4. marking ON / OFF add / delete all

Delete all markings ON / OFF (BEAM ON / OFF for markings)

Precautions
1. Group figure (“note marking character “conversion) pattern, etc. never delete marking ON / OFF.
2. Figures inserted via DXF manual conversion function, green real lines may not be changed.
3. Figure with path setting (Esc) execute this command; please confirm path setting when piercing.
4. Undo (Esc) valid just once.

5. Automatic path setting of marking

Set processing path of marking in the shortest distance automatically.

* In this case that a Rapid feed Line is

continuing from the Processing reference
point ,that Rapid feed Line is deleted, and
starts a Path Setting from the Nearest
marking Element most.

J4-4
 J4 Marking
Automatic path setting
5
of marking

2) If marking Element which starts

marking Processing execute , marking
Path Setting is started without replacing
Beam on and off.
If marking Vicinity execute , marking
Path Setting is started from Nearest
marking (When marking beam-off is near,
direction is reversed automatically.)

When all processing lines of marking turn purple, it is OK.

Interrupt this command when path setting is not continuous or path settings other than BEAM OFF are end.
Only when group BEAM ON are all marking ON (BEAM ON for marking), paths are created for figures
(“note marked character” conversion).
(See the left figure :) unnecessary marking ON/OFF is automatically deleted.

* If [Pierce Route | Auto Avoid] command is used, Cutting Path can be simultaneously execute with Marking Path.
Even if the cutting path is already ending with a setting, it classifies in order of marking -> cutting.
* An Undo (ESC) is to use that it isn't effective.

6. Erase all rapid feed lines

Refer to [J1] for path setting 18. Delete all rapid feed.

7. Erase rapid feed line

Refer to [J1] for path setting 19. Delete rapid feed.

8. BEAM ON / OFF switch

Refer to [J1] for path setting 9. BEAM ON / OFF switch.
*Beam ON/OFF switch is automatically executed at the time of Marking Automatic Path Set
after CamMagic LA ver.4

J4-5
 J4 Marking
Automatic path setting of
marking

* When marking near marking beam-off is

beam-off, direction is replaced
automatically.

5) Cutting path (pierce and rapid feed) is

added by using [Pierce Route|Auto Avoid].

＊Complete！

J4-6
 J4 Marking
Automatic path setting
of marking

Message list
Very important message processing.
Command Messages Processing method
Marking ON/OFF. Please select the point, line and arc Delete all rapid feed lines and
add/delete add (element) without path setting. attributes with elements, and
execute this command once more.
Marking ON/OFF. There are figures to which BEAM The figure which becomes red
add/delete add ON/OFF. Cannot be added. cannot be added. When there is no
(element), add (type of red figure on the screen, perform
line) automatic magnification and
execute this command once again.
Marking ON/OFF. Figure or attribute data area is not Utilize path setting command
add/delete delete, delete sufficient, change path setting. (automatic), etc
all
Marking ON/OFF. (Note) Set the path again after Utilize path setting command
add/delete delete all UNDO. (automatic), etc.
Marking Automatic Path An element in the intermediate Please click yes when you want to
Set point of marking path was chosen. execute marking processing from
Is it OK? the intermediate point of the
marking path with a single stroke.
Click no when you want to choose
marking starting position again.

J4-7
 J4 Marking

9 Marking path Setting

9. Marking path setting

After designating processing figures of marking, NC data of BEAM ON/OFF for marking is created.
Auxiliary processing. Yellow.

J4-8
 J4 Marking

10 Marking path Cancel

10. Marking path Cancel

Figures for which marking setting is cancelled

11. Comment → marked character conversion Conversion execution

Comments not including group are regarded as the object of conversion.

The column of characters other than comments does not change.
* The note displayed by the Font Char is changed into the Vector Char.
* Marking can't convert into the second level kanji. A Character Only except for that is converted.

J4-9
 J4 Marking
Marking character
12
Upper case

12. Marking character Upper case

Marking character should be upper case

13. marked characters Lower case

14. Marked character Number

J4-10
 J4 Marking
Marking path
Operation

J4-11
 J4 Marking
Marking path
Operation

J4-12
 J4 Marking
Marking path
Operation

J4-13
 J4 Marking
Marking path
Operation

J4-14
 J4 Marking

15 Move and rotate

15. Move and rotate

16. Move Parallel
17. Move Return
18. Move Mirror
19. Move Scale
20. Move Scale (Including Note)
Refer to [D1] Figure
21. Copy and rotate
edit
22. Copy Parallel
1 ~ 12.
23. Copy Rotate
24. Copy Mirror
25. Copy Scale
26. Copy Scale (Including Note)

J4-15
 J5 Scrap
Scrap treatment
1 Setting Condition
setting
[J5] Scrap
Scrap treatment means that small pieces of NC data are simply created from big blocks of
materials with multiple holes after nesting cut.
Since products are cut off completely, the processing head of soft restriction on stroke on the side
of processor cannot be used for the model of machine which cannot be moved to edge of products.
For precautions, refer to page J5-11.
In order to prevent the processing head from collision, confirm the right size of product actually
used beforehand.
Before processing, confirm that edges of product will not be impacted during processing.
1. Scrap treatment Setting Condition setting
Among parts or inside the parts, problems may occur to the scrap line due to its position. When
creating scrap lines or scrap paths and processing scraps, set the normal condition.
When starting complex CamMagic LA or other function screens of CamMagic LA, execute
this function after completion.

J5-1
 J5 Scrap
Scrap treatment
1 Setting Condition
setting

b) Path setting
When creating scrap paths, set the creation
path for the following item values:

b-1) Micro-joint piercing length, joint width

Scrap line is joint width and piercing
length of the added micro-joints when
passing through a part.
Piercing length of micro-joint:
When confirmed to be ON in a-2)
The setting in a-2) is the above values.
b-2) Extrusion length outside a part
Inner side in Y axle direction / right side
in X axle direction Front in Y axle
direction / left side in X axle direction
Starting and completing positions of a
scrap line is of the length of extrusion
outside a part.
When the setting is a negative value, it is
recommended to set piercing code of
M98P9010 in c-2).
B-3) Height control position.
Position of a part end when height control
is ON
If check to be ON, height control is ON
while scrap line is cut.
When cutting a thin plate, it is
recommended to check it to be ON (height
control).
Note that alarm messages will appear for
NC creation when starting / completing
line of scrap line processing is shorter
than the height control position.
By this operation “ON / OFF”, determine
“height control: YES / NO” on page J5-9.
B-4) Delete attributes of NC code of
additional element to micro-joints.
When check to be ON, delete attributes of
NC code of additional element to
micro-joints; when to be OFF, do not pull
the scrap line to the element with NC
code attribute.

J5-2
 J5 Scrap
Scrap treatment
1 Setting Condition
setting

CamMagic LA.

J5-3
 J5 Scrap
Scrap line Make
2
Complement display

2. Scrap line Make Complement display

When making a scrap line, display the correct scrap line as a complement according to
requirements.

J5-4
 J5 Scrap
Scrap line Make
3 Voluntary designation
(vertical)

3. Scrap line Make Voluntary designation (vertical)

4. Scrap line Make Voluntary designation (horizontal)
Create complement of scrap line at any place.

J5-5
 J5 Scrap
Scrap line Make
5
Delete all complements

5. Scrap line Make Delete all complements

Delete all scrap line complements.

J5-6
 J5 Scrap
Scrap path
6
Path creation

6. Scrap path creation

Scrap line complement is scrap processing line.

c) When confirmed ON, press [OK], this

screen will not be displayed until
CamMagic LA is started again.

J5-7
 J5 Scrap
Scrap path
6
Path creation

Addition example of micro-joint

J5-8
 J5 Scrap
Scrap path
6
Path creation

Starting and completing outside a part, midway scrap path figure and NC data.

( 1) The real line is working end, and dotted line is edge processing margin.
( 2) “Height control YES” is to perform height control below height control position, “Height
controls NO” is only to perform height control above height control position.
”Height control: YES/NO” is replaced with parameters in b-3) on page J5-2.

J5-9
 J5 Scrap
Scrap path
7
Cancel

7. Scrap path Cancel

Cancel path creation scrap line, and restore the complementary line.

J5-10
 J5 Scrap
Processing reference
8
point

8. Processing reference point [J1]1

9. Reference (0, 0) [J1]1
10. Path setting Automatic check [J1]11
11. Path setting Manual [J1]12
12. Path setting Automatic [J1]13
13. Path setting Arrange order [J1]14
14. Path setting Check [J1]15
15. Rapid feed Erase all [J1]18
16. Rapid feed Erase [J1]19
17. Pierce Line [J1]2
18. Pierce Arc [J1]3
19. Pierce Cancel [J1]4
20. Pierce Addition [J1]5
21. Joint Micro-joint [J1]23
For your reference.

J5-11
 J5 Scrap

Scrap procedure

Scrap procedure
Display the procedure of utilizing scrap treatment function.

J5-12
 J5 Scrap

Scrap procedure

J5-13
 J6 Common line cutting

Common line cutting

[J6] Common line cutting

For juxtaposition cutting of complex figures, it is not processing of individual parts. Connect same
sides and juxtapose the cutting lines, thus, processing time is shortened.

[Contents]
1. Common line cutting Summary
2. Common line cutting Registration of a part
3. Common line cutting Call out of a part
4. Common line cutting Composite of parts
5. Common line cutting BEAM ON/OFF added
6. Common line cutting Path setting
List of messages

[Restrictions]
1. Compared with processing of individual parts, precision of cutting size tends to decline.
For size precision processing, please utilize the usual individual part processing method.
2. Configuration method for horizontally placing.
Common line cutting method of horizontally placed figures, adjacent figures are connected at
the
same place.
3. for the reason of figures, parts registration / parts callout / parts composition / path setting,
etc. may not be executed normally.
4. for the reason of figures, “shortening processing time” “stop upward” cannot reach desired
effects.
Perform trial processing prior to processing while confirming created processing path and NC
data are normal.

J6-1
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
1
Summary

1. Common line cutting Summary

In order enhance processing precision, set automatically the processing path in order as follows:

J6-2
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
1
Summary

BEAM ON. OFF added

According to processing path for common line cutting of composite figures, distinguish periphery
1 / common cut lines / periphery 2, add BEAM ON. OFF.

J6-3
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
1
Summary

Diameter tool correction for common line cutting

After common line cutting, create the figure according to necessary sizes, perform diameter tool
correction for figures on both sides of the common line, size of each cut figure is only reduced to half
of beam diameter.

For common line cutting of this function, diameter tool correction instruction (G41, G42) for
creating processing data cannot be utilized, designates a cancellation command (G40) of diameter
tool correction. Diameter tool correction will be reconsidered for cut figures, and size is
automatically changed.

Registration of parts of a common line

Figures drawn via CAD cannot be directly utilized as the cut parts of a common line. Parts should
be registered via menu “common line cutting parts registration”, in which part figures to be
registered are confirmed. When judged inappropriate, error messages will appear, and registration
is not possible under such circumstances.
Check the following nine items, corresponding error messages will be displayed in any condition
below:
(a) No additional periphery attributes
(b) Periphery is of close-form
(c) Periphery is completed in one time
(d) Periphery is not interfered
(e) No dot figures on periphery
(f) No contradiction on periphery
(g) Not including laser macro
(h) Area of part is not 0
(I) Periphery is not only arc

J6-4
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
1
Summary

Creation sequence of common line cut data

Pay attention to the 5 menus for common line cut function.

(a) Common line cutting. Registration of a part
(b) Common line cutting. Callout of a part
(c) Common line cutting. Composition of parts
(d) Common line cutting. BEAM ON/OFF added
(e) Common line cutting. Path setting
Display creation sequence of common line cut data used in the menu.

J6-5
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
2
Path Save

2. Common line cutting Path Save

Check the figure of the object of registration, only perform registration when appropriate. When
judged inappropriate, error message ending instructions are displayed.
Check the following nine items. For details, refer to the list of error messages.
(a) No additional periphery attributes (f) No contradiction on periphery
(b) Periphery is of close-form (g) Not including laser macro
(c) Periphery is completed in one time (h) Area of part is not 0
(d) Periphery is not interfered (I) Periphery is not only arc
(e) No dot figures on periphery

Common line cutting. Registration of a part Sequence of operations

J6-6
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
2
Path Save

Precautions
(a) Slit-shaped figures cannot be registered.
(Judged as contradiction on periphery)

(b) Composite outspread figures cannot be registered.

(Judged as contradiction on periphery or that there are dotted lines on periphery)

(c) In the range of rectangle of periphery recognition figure, if there are figures
Outside periphery, they can be registered as inside holes.

J6-7
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
3
Path Load

3. Common line cutting Path Load

Check the figure to be called out, execute callout when appropriate.

Diameter tool correction for common line cutting
After common line cutting, create the figure according to necessary sizes, perform diameter tool
Correction for figures on both sides of the common line, size of each cut figure is only reduced to
Half of beam diameter.

For common line cutting of this function, diameter tool correction instruction (G41, G42) for
creating processing data cannot be utilized, designates a cancellation command (G40) of
diameter tool correction. Diameter tool correction will be reconsidered for cut figures, and size is
automatically changed.

Precautions
When calling out cut figure containing common line on periphery, in order to make periphery
and
Outside OFF SET figure close form (arc intersects peripheral OFF SET figures), input OFF SET
value.

J6-8
J6-9
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
3
Path Load

. Common line cutting. Call out of a part Sequence of operation.

J6-10
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
3
Path Load

J6-11
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cut
4 cutting Part
composition

4. Common line cutting Part composition

Common line cut part composed and called out via command “common line cutting. Call out of a
part”
Check the condition of composition of common line cutting part via “common line cutting.
Composition of parts”, perform composition when judged appropriate, and error or alarm messages
will be displayed when judged inappropriate.

Check the following four items. For details, refer to the list of error messages
(a) Additional reference line marking positions do not contradict composed common line cut
part direction
(b) Common line cut parts cannot form a loop
(c) Composed common line cut part and common line cut part do not interfere with each other
(d) Composed common line cut parts do not overlap

Common line cutting. Composition of parts Sequence of operations

J6-12
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
4
Part composition

J6-13
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
4
Part composition

About common line cutting part composition direction and additional place of marking on
reference line.
When common line cut. Part composition contradicts composition direction at additional place of
marking
on reference line, perform the following operations, display alarm messages.

Display the following warning messages.

J6-14
“Common lines for inside parts composition do not exist. Please confirm composition
direction and direction of marking.”

J6-15
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
4
Part composition

The following are reasons for composition results mentioned on the preceding page:

Positions of markings below signs

Results are the same with the last figure on preceding page.

J6-16
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
4
Part composition

About warning display

For common line cut. part composition, warning messages are displayed in following composition
tests:
Or, although warning messages do not appear in common line cutting part composition, do not
execute the following tests in “common line cutting. BEAM ON/OFF added” and “common line
cutting. Path setting” due to. Warning display:

(a) Loop-shaped composition of common line cut parts:

J6-17
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
4
Part composition

(c) Grid-shaped composition of common line cut parts.

Warning messages are displayed as follows.

Composition parts contradict with each other, wrong composition methods
are used, please confirm.

J6-18
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
4
Part composition

Restrictions
As for common line cut data creation function, in order to enhance precision and stability in
processing, place horizontally and find the methods of realization.
Cut data of grid-shaped configuration cannot be created as below.

J6-19
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
5 Pierce
BEAM ON/OFF added

5. Common line cutting Pierce BEAM ON/OFF added

Add BEAM ON/OFF to common line figures and periphery of composed common line cut parts via
command “common line cutting part composition”. Perform processing of addition when necessary
with the additional conditions of common line cut part BEAM ON/OFF confirmed via “common line
cut. BEAM ON/ OFF added”, and error messages or alarm messages will appear when
inappropriate.
Check the following 5 items. For details, refer to the list of error messages:
(a) Non-loop composition common line cut parts
(b) Non-interference part overlap composition common line cut parts
(c) Non-multi segment (not horizontally configured) composition common line cut parts
(d) Designated places of starting elements on periphery are correct
(e) Designated places of dividing points on periphery are correct

J6-20
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
6 Pierce
BEAM ON/OFF added
Common line cutting Pierce. BEAM ON/OFF added Sequence of operations

J6-21
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
5 Pierce
BEAM ON/OFF added

About warning display

Common line cutting. BEAM ON/OFF addition processing is that warning messages are displayed
for common line cut. Parts composition in the following common line cut parts composition:
Or, although warning messages do not appear in common line cut. BEAM ON/OFF, do not execute
the following tests in “common line cutting path setting” due to warning display:

(a) Loop-shaped composition of common line cut parts

J6-22
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
5 Pierce
BEAM ON/OFF added

(c) Grid-shaped composition of common line cut parts

Warning messages are displayed as follows.

Wrong parts composition methods will cause that dividing points on
periphery are not designated normally, please confirm.

J6-23
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
6
Path setting

6. Common line cutting Path setting

In order to enhance precision and stability in processing, automatically set according to following
processing paths.

Since warning may occur to common line cutting. Call out of a part, common line cutting. Parts
composition and common line cutting. BEAM ON/OFF added, confirm common line cutting. Path
setting.
Check the following 12 items.
Please confirm that the figure is light blue at the time of alarm.

(a)Periphery 1/periphery 2/common line cutting (b) one periphery 1 and one BEAM ON/OFF
(c) One periphery 2 and one BEAM ON/OFF (d) Common line cutting starts with BEAM
ON
(e) No BEAM ON in midway of common line cutting (f) No BEAM ON in midway of periphery 2
(g) The completing place of periphery 1 in BEAM OFF is the starting point of periphery 2
(h) No BEAM ON for periphery 1 before BEAM OFF finishes
(I) Common line cutting finishes at BEAM OFF, connected figure is periphery 2
(j) The starting point of periphery 2 is the completing point of periphery 1 (there are dividing
points on periphery), starting with BEAM ON
(k) The starting point of periphery 2 is the completing point of periphery 1 (starting from
periphery), finishing at BEAM OFF
(l) Not perform path setting after that of periphery 2, no remaining periphery 1/ periphery
2/common line cutting

J6-24
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
6
Path setting

Common line cutting. Path setting Sequence of operations

J6-25
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
6
Path setting

About warning display

The following common line cut parts and warning messages are displayed in common line
cutting. Path setting:
(a) When adding BEAM ON/OFF if common line cut parts are loop-shaped:

J6-26
 J6 Common line cutting
Common line cutting
5
Path setting

(c) When adding BEAM ON/OFF if common line cut parts are composition grid-shaped.

Warning messages are displayed as follows:

It is warning; please confirm light blue figures and BEAM ON/OFF
number and position.

J6-27
 J6 Common line cutting
List of common line
cutting messages

List of messages
(1) Common line cut Part registration

Messages Reasons Actions

Process is interrupted because Register without drawing parts (figure) Draw parts with the CAD
parts are not drawn function of LA
Do not add attributes to Additional beam ON/OFF or micro Delete beam ON/OFF, micro
periphery (pierce / micro joint, joint, etc on periphery joint, etc on periphery
etc.)

Complete the periphery at one There is another figure outside Delete figures outside
stroke periphery periphery

Periphery is "close form" It becomes open form Periphery is close form

Prevent periphery Periphery interference Correct the interference

"interference" part

Failure to call out periphery Periphery becomes round. Draw periphery again
Dotted lines should not exist on Periphery is drawn with dotted lines Delete dotted lines on
periphery periphery. (Inner holes can
be drawn with dotted lines)

J6-28
 J6 Common line cutting
List of common line
cutting messages

Messages Reasons Actions

Do not draw periphery via Draw arc on periphery Draw with line segments
"only arcs" again

Periphery is "open form" "not Caused by peripheral edge modification Draw periphery again
completed at one stroke" (divide by intersecting, divide, connect, without using edge
"interference" (errors cannot be restore, line length correction, partially modification menu.
located via periphery edge delete), and becomes unsuitable figure.
modification). But it cannot be determined how and
where it is unsuitable.
Delete laser macro. Include laser macro, which cannot be Delete laser macro.
used for periphery or inner holes.
Area of the part is too small, Area of the part is 0. Draw periphery with area
draw again. again.

Errors occur in accessing files. Insufficient hard disc space. Delete unnecessary files.

Errors occur in accessing Part figure is too complicated, space for Execute uncomplicated
pattern database. pattern data or attribute data is not figures.
enough.
Comments, size lines, There are comments, size lines, No special treatment, delete
auxiliary lines, markings auxiliary lines, markings and bubbles comments, size lines,
and bubbles are not for the part. auxiliary lines, markings
registered. and bubbles of original
figure to perform
registration.

J6-29
 J6 Common line cutting
List of common line
cutting messages

(2) Common line cut. Part callout

Messages Reasons Actions

Input name of part registered. The input part name cannot be Please input the name of
registered. part registered in common
line cutting part
registration. Display the list
of parts after inputting
name of part.
And select from the list.
Input correct value of offset The input offset value is a negative Input value should be over
width. value. 0.
Configuration position Input coordinates are not correct. Input again.
coordinates cannot be Coordinates are (X coordinate, Y
determined, please execute coordinate) or polar coordinate (R<A).
designation again.
Periphery causes interference; Figure of the part after interference Interference parts are
confirm offset value and offset treatment called out directly.
periphery figure. Interference is caused by
offset value, confirm figure
of the part. When offset
value may be resulted in,
handle the name of part
called out again after
undoing.
When figure of the part may
be the cause, register again
and perform part figure
correction via group edit.
(confirm it is a normal part
after group edit)
Call out the part registered in Not the registered parts in common line Input name of part again,
common line cut. Part cut. Part registration. the CAD screen other than
registration. the callout parts may be
ended forcibly in common
line cut part registration.
Errors occur in accessing files. Insufficient hard disc space Delete unnecessary files.

Errors occur in accessing Part figure is too complicated, space for Execute uncomplicated
pattern database. pattern data or attribute data is not figures.
enough.

Offset figure of arc cannot be Offset amount is too large, there is no Reduce input offset amount
created, confirm offset amount offset figure in arc, and close figures and create offset figure.
and periphery figure cannot be created

J6-30
 J6 Common line cutting
List of common line
cutting messages

(3) Common line cut. Part composition

Messages Reasons Actions

Do not select the common line Common line cut parts with additional Select common line cut
parts with additional beam ON beam ON/OFF are selected via the parts without additional
/ OFF command "common line cut beam beam ON/OFF.
ON/OFF addition"
Select periphery figure of Select figures other than periphery Select periphery figures of
common line figures of common line cut parts common line cut parts.
Select reference line as line Select arc figures of periphery figures of Select the line type of
type common line cut parts periphery figure of common
line cut parts.
Markings cannot be created Errors occur in the treatment of Select reference line of
marking additional place of reference common line cut parts again
line obtained (It may be because (Operate again)
selected reference line is line type of
Unlimited length).
Input data is outside the Distance from the composite side is Input the distance from the
range, input again outside the range. composite side again.
Coordinates which cannot Errors occur in the treatment of Select reference line of
obtain markings marking additional place of reference common line cut parts again
line obtained (It may be because (Operate again)
selected reference line is line type of
Unlimited length).
Arrows which cannot create Errors occur in treatment of retrieving Select reference line of
composite direction the figure connecting reference figure or common line cut parts again
of creating arrow figure in composition (Operate again).
direction.
Input via proper format Instruction of starting composition is Direct the operation of
not appropriate. starting composition
properly.
No space for pattern or Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
attribute data space for pattern data or attribute data figures.
is not sufficient.
No reference line Errors occur in retrieving reference Select reference line of
lines. common line cut parts again
(Operate again)
Matrix conversion is not Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
possible space for pattern data or attribute data figures.
is not sufficient.
Reference line endpoint data Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
cannot be created space for pattern data or attribute data figures.
is not sufficient.
Reference line cannot be Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
divided space for pattern data or attribute data figures.
is not sufficient.
Common line form cannot be Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
created space for pattern data or attribute data figures.
is not sufficient.

J6-31
 J6 Common line cutting
List of common line
cutting messages

Messages Reasons Actions

There is no common line part Because the position of markings added Perform composition of
for parts composition, please to reference line contradicts with common line cut parts
confirm composition direction composition direction of common line again.
and marking orientation. parts, composition of common line cut
parts cannot be performed normally
(See page "J5-13 for composition
direction of common line cut parts and
additional position of marking of
reference line").
Do not interfere with Composition method of common line cut Perform composition of
composite parts, composition parts is not proper common line cut parts
method is improper. Please (See page "J5-15 for alarm message again.
confirm. indication").
Do not execute division Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
treatment of other figures. space for pattern data or attribute data figures.
is not sufficient.
Errors occur in retrieving other Figure of the part is too Execute uncomplicated
common line. complicated, figures.
space for pattern data or attribute
data
Is not sufficient.
Composite parts coincide, Composition method of common line cut Perform composition of
please confirm. parts is not proper common line cut parts
(Common line parts coincide). again.

J6-32
 J6 Common line cutting
List of common line
cutting messages

(4) Common line cut. Beam ON/OFF addition

Messages Reasons Actions

Do not select the common line Common line cut parts with additional Select common line cut
parts with additional beam ON beam ON/OFF are selected via the parts without additional
/ OFF. command "common line cut beam beam ON/OFF.
ON/OFF addition".
Select common line parts of Do not select the common line cut parts Select the common line cut
composition. of composition via the command parts of composition via the
"common line cut parts composition". command "common line cut
parts composition".
Select periphery figure of Select figures other than periphery Select periphery figures of
common line. figures of common line cut parts. common line cut parts.
Input data is outside the Complementary beam ON length is Input complementary beam
range, input again. Beyond the range. ON length again.
Select the periphery of Select the periphery figure of common Select the periphery figure
common line parts with line cut part different from the one with of common line cut part
periphery starting elements. periphery starting element. with periphery starting
element.
Select the periphery figure Select the periphery figure same with Select the periphery figure
other than periphery starting periphery starting element for other than periphery
elements. periphery dividing points. starting element.
No space for pattern or Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
attribute data space for pattern data or attribute data figures.
is not sufficient.
Periphery starting elements or Errors occur in retrieving periphery Select periphery starting
periphery dividing point starting elements and periphery element and periphery
figures cannot be retrieved. dividing point figure. dividing points
again.(Operate again)
No space for pattern data Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
Space for pattern data is not sufficient. figures.
No space for attribute data Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
Space for attribute data is not figures.
sufficient.
Complementary beam Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
ON/OFF cannot be added. space for pattern data or attribute data figures.
Is not sufficient.
Periphery starting elements or Selected place of either periphery Select periphery starting
periphery dividing points are starting element or periphery dividing element and periphery
not specified properly, please points are not proper. dividing points figure again
select again. (Operate again).
Specified positions of Selected place of periphery dividing Select periphery starting
periphery dividing points are points are not proper. element and periphery
not proper. dividing points figure again
(Operate again).
Because there is no enough Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
space for attribute data, Space for attribute data is not figures.
addition of beam ON to sufficient.
periphery figure and common
line figure is not possible.
Composition direction of parts Either composition method of common Perform composition of
is not right, and periphery line cut parts or designated position of common line cut parts
dividing points are improper. periphery dividing point is not proper again.
Please confirm. (See page "J5-20 for alarm message
indication").

J6-33
 J6 Common line cutting
List of common line
cutting messages

(5) Common line cutting. Path setting

Messages Reasons Actions

Path setting is interrupted The figure whose path should be set is Input the figure of called
because parts are not drawn. not drawn. out common line cut parts
after beam ON/OFF
addition again.
Path is set. Select the part with path setting. Select the part without path
setting.
Perform "common line cut Do not select the part without Input again after beam
beam ON/OFF addition". additional common line cut beam ON/OFF addition for
ON/OFF. common line cut parts.
Alarm! Please confirm position Select the part for group edit or of Figures judged unqualified
and numbers of beam ON/OFF alarm in beam ON/OFF addition. are displayed light blue,
or light blue figure. Composition. callout of common please confirm. Or confirm
Line cut parts. the number and position of
beam ON/OFF. For common
line cut parts registered
again, execute correction
via group edit.
Failure to access pattern Figure of the part is too complicated, Execute uncomplicated
database. space for pattern data or attribute data figures.
Is not sufficient.

J6-34
 J6 Common line cutting
7 Group edit Low level

7 Group edit Low level [H5] 4

8 Group edit Top level [H5] 5
9 Joint Micro joint [JI] 23
10 End-joint Setting [J1] 24
11 End-joint Display [J1] 25
12 Manual setting Offset [J1] 1
13 Outer specify [J1] 10
14 Processing reference point [J1] 1
15 Reference (0, 0) [J1] 1
16 Path setting Automatic confirmation [J1] 11
17 Path setting Manual [J1] 12
18 Path setting Check [J1] 15
For your reference.

J6-35
 J７ POSITIONING
Summary

[J7] POSITIONING
It is a function for the Mitsubishi laser processing machine in which POSITIONING is
possible.
When performing laser processing of the processed workpiece at a previous process (for
example, turret punch press processing), if positioning job is not done with sufficient accuracy,
a processing path will shift and it will make inferior goods. In order to prevent this, the base
hole for positioning can be used and it can be made to position automatically (processing
program) to a laser processing machine (program priority of POSITIONING).

In order to perform POSITIONING using a drawing, there are limitations of the following
table.

No Limitation
1 There is a layer which drew only the laser-processing-machining drawing.
2 A base hole is drawing to another layer.
3 A base hole is an arc (no division, no attribute).
4 That limitation of the laser processing machine, the base hole number is two or
three.

1) One click parameter (parts execution) is set to

POSITIONING as pre-preparation. The processing
which should be performed is shown in the following.

Item Setting
Parts number ON (recommendation)
checking
Processing base OFF (indispensable)
point
Auto scribing Please put in a check if needed.
specification
Path setting Indispensable
An interference avoidance path
setting is recommended.
NC generation OFF (indispensable)
and registration
Result ON (indispensable)
indication

2) A drawing is read. Or, drawing is done.

At this time, please draw laser processing and base

hole in the separate layer.

If the layer name of a base hole is made into

"REF-H", the base hole attribute can be added
automatically.

If the laser-processing-machining drawing is drawn

on the layer of a name called "CADLFO",
"CADLFI", and "LASER", it can process easily by
one click layer operation of POSITIONING pop up
menu.

Ｊ７－１
 J７ POSITIONING
Summary

3) POSITIONING-related pop up menu is opened.

Path setting２ POSITIONING...

4) An attribute is added to a base hole.

POSITIONING Base hole attribute

5) A base hole (arc figure) is chosen.

Please be not divided and also choose the arc which

does not attach an attribute.

If there is a layer name of "REF-H", a maximum of

three pieces will be added automatically to the
perfect arc in the layer.

Base hole attribute is displayed on the arc central

point by a pale-blue cross.
Layer list tool bar

6) Only a laser-processing-machining layer is made the

Layer catalog display display O. It is operated using a layer list tool bar or a
layer catalog.

Please also give me the layer describing a base hole

as the display x.

The job layer should choose a

laser-processing-machining layer.

If a laser-processing-machining layer name is

"CADLFO", "CADLFI", or "LASER", it can prepare
only by click one click layer operation /
Job layer preprocessing. However, when you change the layer
for edit, please specify by a job layer combo box.

Ｊ７－２
 J７ POSITIONING
Summary

7) A path setting is perfomed at each part using one click

parts execution.

If a normal end is perfomed, all the layers will once

become the display O.

When an error occurs, please grasp the contents of

an error, and rerun after correcting the drawing in
front of one click parts execution.

8) In order that a layer name may make only the thing of

NoErr "the display O", one click layer operation /
post-processing is clicked.

9) A processing base point is attached.

Click Path setting｜Path setting１―Processing base
point.

10) Between parts is connected with a rapid feed path

using an auto path setting command.
Click Path setting｜Path setting１ ―Path setting ／
Auto check.

11) NC generation is performed.

Click NC input and output｜NC generation―NC data
generation／NC generation.
When you measure with the created POSITIONING NC program using this function, please
set to 「hole detect program valid」in the laser processing machine screen. Please refer
to the operation manual of a laser processing machine for details.

About the process limitations such as hole diameter, spatial relationship of base holes
for POSITIONING, etc., please set with the specification of laser processing machine.
Please refer to the operation manual of a laser processing machine for details.

In order to perform the cutting program for POSITIONING, it needs option in a laser
processing machine.

Ｊ７－３
 J8 Edge-Cut
Add ON, Add OFF

[J8] Edge-Cut
If the Edge-Cut is used, edge material process after sketch material process and nesting
process, etc. can be performed. Cutting processing can be performed from the edge side of a
workpiece to the edge side of a workpiece.
If the Edge-Cut does not insert a suitable height control code for processing near a
workpiece edge side, a head will fall. Moreover, since the size of a workpiece and the
workpiece position on a table are not exact, please perform careful cautions. Please confirm
drawing the machining path which meant by performing NC inversion etc.

１．Add ON, Add OFF

1) The parameter of Edge-Cut attribute is set as
1) pre-preparation. Please refer to three clauses for
details.
Path setting｜Path setting２―Edge-Cut attribute
｜ setting
2) A workpiece edge side is drawn.It is the straight
line broken line, the straight line auxiliary
conductor, or the worksheet which can be specified
as an edge side of a workpiece.
2) In the case of a worksheet, edge material
process can be performed using edge side
process after nesting drawing process.Although
Workpiece edge side (Examples scrap handling is only 1 main line of the length
of auxiliary line) or the horizontal, free processing using a line
segment arc is possible for the case of edge side
process.
However, the parts after processing cannot be
passed like scrap handling.
3) An Edge-Cut is drawn in the drawn workpiece.
3)
Please put the end point of Edge-Cut process on
a workpiece edge side (intersection is
Trim and edit
impossible).It is convenient if you use
trimming.
4) An offset direction is added, and it is decided which
of the Edge-Cut should turn ON/off.
5) Start the Edge-Cut attribute addition command.
There are two types of ON and OFF
Edge-Cut attribute｜Add ON
Edge-Cut attribute｜Add OFF
6) An Edge-Cut is chosen.
7) A workpiece edge side is chosen.

Beam-on or beam-off is attached to the end

point of an Edge-Cut figure. A beam
turning-on-and-off position ( ) and the
position of hight controll ( ) are displayed by
a marker in the size position specified with the
parameter.
7) At the time of the red beam on the marker,
white shows off the attributes of the beam.

6)

Ｊ８－１
 J8 Edge-Cut
Change

２．Change
It uses when it is individual and the parameter values of the already added Edge-Cut
attribute are changed. Refer to three clauses for the details about the item for change.
1) A change command is started.
Path setting｜Path setting２―Edge-Cut attribute
｜Change

2) Edge-Cut beam-on or Edge-Cut beam-off is chosen.

3) An item name and the current value are displayed

on the message column.

4) When changing, key operation of the number

2) [Enter] is performed.Only the [Enter] key is
operated when using the current value.

5) Since a change item is asked in order, it is operated

to the last.

6) If it finishes operating the last item, according to

the changed parameter, Edge-Cut beam
turning-on-and-off and a position of hight controll
will be updated.

Use F10” Att Del” if you want to delete Edge-Cut attribute

３．Setting
Edge-Cut attribute parameter can be set in advance. In the case of Edge-Cut attribute
addition, an attribute can be added unishapely. A parameter table can be opened by Path
setting｜Path setting２―Edge-Cut attribute｜Setting .

Item Setting content Range

Protruding An outside position is specified from a workpiece edge 1～9999
length side.It becomes a position of beam-on or beam-off. (Add L/R is exceeded.)
Please set the value exceeding Add L/R.
Add L/R In order not to reduce the quality of processed goods, it 1～9999
separates from a workpiece edge side by the extension (It is less than protruding
added to the Edge-Cut. length.)
When the angle of an Edge-Cut and a workpiece edge
side is shallow, it changes to arc interpolation
Automatically.
Position of hight A height control code is outputted to the position which １～9999
controll went into the specification width part inner side from
the workpiece edge side. For the sensor to measure the
height correctly, please put it on the inside more than
20mm from the work end face.
When an edge side cutting line cannot separate with a
workpiece edge side, a position of hight controll is put
on the position of the line taken down in the vertical
direction from the edge side process end point to the
edge side of the workpiece. Hight control during
processing isn't done in this case.
Offset direction Offset is used /is not used at the time of Edge-Cut left / right / none / processing
process. When using, it is specified in which direction machine information
it offsets.

Ｊ８－１
 J8 Edge-Cut
Change

Explanation of Edge-Cut attribute parameter

Protruding length

Add Ｌ／Ｒ

Position of hight controll

Workpiec
e

The example of edge side process The example of edge side processThe example of edge side
of a deep incidence angle of a shallow incidence angle process of the corner R
Add L/R serves as an extension Add L/R serves as an arc. Add L/R serves as an arc.
(straight line) of edge side process. The point serves as aAt this time, direction of an arc
The point serves as a perpendicular line of aserves as reverse of an
perpendicular line of a workpiece workpiece edge side from Add Edge-Cut.
edge side from Add L/R to the L/R to the position which The point serves as a
position which reaches protruding reaches protruding length. perpendicular line of a
length. workpiece edge side from Add
L/R to the position which
The example which reaches
doesprotruding
not have length.
an
Edge-Cut to a position of hight controll
The position at which an altitude with
the workpiece edge side which passes
along edge side beam-on, and a position
of hight controll cross is set to a position
For your reference “L1-25 The NC creation exampleofofhight controll.
Edge-Cut process”

Notes for Edge-Cut attribute

・In the path that begins and ends with the Edge-Cut beam off the normal beam-on, NC code
for Edge-Cut is not output to the NC code of the beam is off.

・Edge-Cut attribute will disappear when you add the attributes of the end face cutting
attribute and other non-joint in shape with a Edge-Cut attribute.
Please do not add the attributes of the Edge-Cut attribute other than to shape with a
Edge-Cut attribute.

・Please it so that it is in the same shape end material that is automatically registered by
editing If you have made the processing of the Edge-Cut edge materials to.

Ｊ８－２
 J8 Edge-Cut
Change

The message list of Edge-Cut attribute addition related commands

Message Reason Recovery method
It is unsuitable as a workpiece edge It is the straight line broken line, the Please rechoose the workpiece edge
side line.Please re-choose. straight line auxiliary conductor, or side in alignment with specification.
the worksheet which can be specified
as a workpiece edge side.
Please visually check the position of A position of hight controll was not Please visually check and consider not
hight control. able to set on the Edge-Cut.Since a coming dangerous to process.
position of hight controll is located in a Please consider change of a position of
position perpendicular to a workpiece hight controll parameter, and change
edge side, please check visually. When of an Edge-Cut together, too.
through hole is near a position of hight
control, there is danger of a head
crash.
The Edge-Cut attribute is not Since the Edge-Cut attribute is not Please choose the figure to which the
attached. Please re-choose. added, change operation cannot be Edge-Cut attribute is added.
performed.
An Edge-Cut attribute or beam Since the edge side, the beam-on 1-3, If it is a selection mistake, please
turning-on-and-off is already attached. or the beam-off 1-3 is already added to choose again.
the figure for Edge-Cut attribute Please operate it again after
addition, processing cannot be eliminating an attribute.
continued.
An Edge-Cut attribute cannot be The figure in the middle of a picture When you attach an attribute to an
attached in the middle of the drawn without lifting the brush from Edge-Cut, please choose a figure of the
connected figure. the paper was chosen. end.
The Edge-Cut attribute addition The tip of the cutting line to which an Please use a suitable drawing using a
element is not in contact with this Edge-Cut attribute is attached needs figure edit command.
workpiece edge side line.Please to be on workpiece edge side figure. It
re-choose. can't be accepted even if it crosses, or
there is a clearance.
Edge-Cut parameter reading failed. Reading of an Edge-Cut attribute The bad condition of a computer can be
parameter failed. considered. Please consult with the
Error occurred Edge Cut(Primitive I will be possible malfunction of the maker of a computer.
library) computer environment
Edge-Cut attribute addition failed. The error unexpected during command Please reboot a computer after saving
Edge-Cut attribute modification failed. execution has occurred. the drawing under work. Please
contact us for more details when not
still improved.
Please start with end face cutting There is a processing shape Please add an end face cutting
beam on and end with (end face starting with end face cutting beam off or beam-off at the end of
cutting) beam off beam on but not ending with end the end face cutting process. Or it
face cutting beam off. is possible that the processed
shape is finely divided. Please
correct it so that the shape
becomes one stroke with endpoint
connection.
There is an attribute except for the Attributes, such as beam-on, beam-off Please eliminate an unnecessary
Edge-Cut attribute. and joint, were found in the middle of attribute.
edge side process shape.
The location of changed "Height-On" It is in the end face cutting processing Please adjust the height position
and "Height-Off". Please edit Edge-Cut line, height control positions are control using the (L8-3 page) end face
attributes. swapped ON / OFF cutting attribute change command
Does not exists "Height-OFF" on the On the end face cutting processing
cutting line. Please edit Edge-Cut line, there is no height control in the
attributes. off position side.
Please choose the figure to which the The straight line, the half line, or the Please choose a line segment or an arc.
end point is set. arc was chosen.

Ｊ８－３
 J8 Edge-Cut
Change

Please choose the point, line, and arc The selected figure is grouped. If it is a selection mistake, please
which are not contained in a group. choose again.
Please cancel, if it is necessary to
cancel group.
There is no vacancy of the graphic data The space areas which can be used are Please start a configuration tool from
area. insufficient. setting/environment, and increase
There is no vacancy of the attribute drawing and the free capacity of the
data area. attribute.
NC data for end face cutting An NC post for processing Open the processing machine
process can’t be generated because machine information setting is information setting and set the
NC post processing is specified. specified (see page 2 - 21 - 6) NC post to something other than
"NC - CHANGER" and "F - CUT"
or "SORTNC + F - CUT".
If there is an element of end face One click individual item Please generate NC by manual
cutting process, one click execution was performed on the operation without using single
individual item can’t be executed. drawing in which the element of click individual item execution.
end-face cutting process was
present.
The end joint attribute can’t be The end face cutting element has Please delete the end joint
output while end face cutting is an end joint. attribute.
being processed. NC was generated assuming that
the end joint attribute was not
added.

Ｊ８－４
 J9 CutOffRoute

[J9] CutOffRoute
If do inner hole processing, sometimes scrap rose from the positional relationship between
slat support and scrap size. In order to avoid collision of processing head, prevent the rise by
cutting off inner hole and dropping down, support the safe continuous processing.

In cut off processing, please not the following in order to get the safe processing.
１．The material and thickness to be applied are following.
Iron：1.0～6.0mm, Stainless：1.0～2.0mm
Other material and thickness, please go after trial processing.
２．Thin plate, sometimes cut off material is blown off by processing gas, ride on top of
worksheet.
If cut off many grid pattern in horizontal and vertical directions, chip will be large
amount.
３．When cut off many in horizontal and vertical directions, processing time will take
longer.
As rising prevention, please consider joint addition.
４．It will contain damage to the cutting surface of inner hole in portion of cut off route.

１．Create cut off route

1)Start cut off route command.
PATH SET｜Path set 2
―CutOffRoute｜CutOffRoute

2)Select the elements of inner hole to cut off.

2) ＊The selected inner hole is displayed in yellow.

＊The shape that balance is bad and may tilts is

suitable for the inner hole to cut off (L-shaped, long
hole, triangular shape, etc.).
Small hole (fall after cutting) and large hole (the
shape that not tilt and is stable to remain on the
slat support after cutting), it is recommended to be
added only if necessary.

＊The following shapes cannot be selected because

they are improper as cut off processing.

The shape except circle, line (point, group,

dimension, note, auxiliary line)
The shape except inner hole (Open shape, when
outline designation is added, marking and
Edge-Cut shape)
When end joint, micro-joint, inside specify is added
* When added pierce after creating cut off line, the
above check isn’t done

＊When it is the hole added pierce, it judges whether

the shape except for pierce is closed shape.
However, the following cases are judged to open
shape.
Display in
yellow ・When there is length of ON2 (pierce without navel)
・The shape that has arc of off side by arc piercing
with minus joint

3) Specify the passage point (the beam on side) of cut off

route.
3)
＊The cut off route through the specified point is created.
＊When there is no crossing in the inner hole and the
straight line through the specified point, error will occur.

Ｊ9－１
 J9 CutOffRoute

＊Portion in contact with the inner hole modify the line

length to shorten offset amount (*1).

(*1) Offset amount is calculated by the setting value

of [CutOffRoute] and thickness of processing
conditions of toolbar. When offset amount calculation
method is thickness coefficient, if toolbar is hidden or
processing condition isn’t selected (there is no
processing condition list), error will occur. When cut
off line is not a right angle with the inner hole, the
vertical distance between the inner hole will be closer
than
＊On theoffset
pointamount
where the offset amount cannot be secured,
the cyan × marking is displayed.
＊The direction of cut off line is set the end point close to the
specified position of the line (*2) created by splitting to the
starting side.
(*2) When multiple lines have been created, it becomes
the outside end point of the line that close to the
specified position.

When the specified position is close to A

＊Cut off routeB is added beam on 1 (without offset direction),
beam off 1 and becomes purple.
＊When type is “Center”, 2 cut off routes will be created
with the direction from center to inner hole. The rapid
line to connect 2 routes is also created.
＊Continuous designation of cut off line is possible.
Change of inner hole and change of parameter are also
possible.
4) Change the setting value of cut off route.
Input /(slash)
＊Cut off route set dialog starts.
＊This operation can be performed at any time during the
command.
5) The route of inner hole and outline can be set route by
auto avoid command or one click single item execution
command.
＊Route is set by the order of cut off→・・・→cut off→inner
hole→・・・→inner hole→outline.
＊Please do not add end/micro joint, inner designation to
inner hole in cut off route.
When want to add joint to each hole diameter, please add
pierce without joint to inner hole on cut off route
beforehand.
＊Description of Cut Off Setting dialog

Ｊ9－２
 J9 CutOffRoute

Def Data
No Input item Input range Description / Action Overview
ault type

It is the angle of cut off line.

1 Angle 90 Real 0～180
Default setting is 90 degrees of slat support direction.
When input directly, select “Offset width”.
Thic
Offset width When calculate by multiplying coefficient to plate thickness,
Offset Calc kne
2 List / Thickness select ”Thickness coef”.
Method ss
coef (Calculation formula：Offset amount = Thickness * Thickness coef)
coef
Fix the line length of both ends of cut off line by offset amount.
Offset
3 width 0.1 Real 0.01～9.99 Input offset amount directly.
(＊1)
Thickness Input the thickness coef to be used by the calculation formula of
4 0.1 Real 0.01～9.99
coef No.2.
When emphasizing processing time more than quality, select “Edge”.
When emphasizing quality more than processing time, select “Center”.

(A)When Edge
Cen Edge ／
5 Type List Set the both ends of cut off route to beam on, beam off.
ter Center
(B)When Center
Split cut off route from center and set center side to beam on, set end side to
beam off. The rapid line to connect 2 routes is also created.
(*1) Estimated offset amount
Offset amount is estimated to 1/2 of beam diameter (joint width of processing conditions)

(*2) The difference of pierce marks by type

SS t=6.0mm SUS t=1.0mm

Edge Center Edge Center

Ｊ9－３
 K1 Free nesting
1 Part material Save
[K] Nesting
[K1] Free (high-speed free) nesting
Nesting is to automatically return multi-unit part and adjust its position in order to perform
configuration in high-efficiency workpieces (matrix).
Or, automatically add workpieces when configuration in a workpiece (matrix) cannot be
performed.
This function is to execute edge material nesting function for using edge material work more
efficiently.
Arrange parts for random edge material work besides rectangle work.
Though in the case that parts have been arranged for anyone of rectangle・edge material,
register the shape of space which is not arranged of part as edge material work and part can be
arranged again.
1. Part material Save
When registering with free (automatic) nesting configuration parts, note the following:
Create processed figure, execute part registration from additional pierce line path
settings.
For addition of reference point of processing, delete the reference point of processing and
its pre-feed line.
Delete the figures not related to processing, such as folding lines, points, size lines,
comments and auxiliary drawings.
(The auxiliary line and the linear without the end point (horizontal line etc.) are
automatically deleted at the start of part registration)
Laser macro is not suitable for nesting.
Because a folder is not suitable for nesting, do not register it.
It is recommended to utilize micro joints for parts registration.

a-1)
a Register from dialog input
1) Fill in information in the part registration
dialog
* The details of the dialogue are listed at the
end of this chapter

2) When same file name has already been

registered on the hard disk, it will be asked
to overwrite or not. Click "Yes" to overwrite.
Click "No" if want to abort the part
Parts without overwriting.
registration
list

K1-1
 K1 Free nesting
1 Part material Save

K1-2
 K1 Free nesting
1 Part material Save

For detailed list of parts, please refer to 2-3-3-1 File management of basic operation procedure
2.
With this function, the figure displayed before use will be automatically saved.
For figures automatically saved,
@. / WORK / BUZAI It can be called out.

Precautions of name of file

Can not use space、：、，
、；、＊、？、”、＜、＞、｜、＃、’.
For designation of material and thickness of board, (for details, see 13. Arrangement demand
nesting Execution) designate material and thickness of board for configuration requirements
registration, a message will be displayed when you have confirmed that the workpiece
material and thickness of board meet the requirements.
(Do not confirm without designation, or confirm that free nesting can be executed even if results do not
accord)
Only material and thickness of board can be designated, which however may not be
designated.
If parentheses (,) is used as the part name, the rearrangement function can’t be used.
If half-angle katakana is used as the part name, the part name barcode of the processing instruction manual
is not displayed.

K1-3
 K1 Free nesting
1 Part material Save
* Path check is done automatically at the time as the part registering.

The case that path check result is incorrect displays warning.

Push NO to revise part in this case that part is revised.
When part is registered please push YES.

＊Explanation of part registration setting dialog

Input Data Initial Input

No Explanation／Processing outline
item Type value range

Characte Up to 24 Input the part name to register.

1 Part （＊１）
r characters If it is blank, it will be an error when registering part.
Checkbo When on, materials are also registered at the time of part
2-1 On On/Off
x registration. Material name is described in No. 2-2.
List Up to 8
Material Materials currently in the process conditions that are registered
( Charact characters/
are displayed in the list. It can specify material names that are
2-2 er input （＊１） registered
not on the list from key input. It can't input unless the check box
is also material
No. 2-1 is checked.
possible) name
When ON, thickness is also registered at the time of part
Checkbo
3-1 On On/Off registration.
x
The value of thickness is described in No. 3-2.
thickness
Input thickness value.
Characte If input character other than numeric value or decimal point, an
3-2 （＊１） 0.1～99.9
r error will occur at the time of part registration. It can't input
unless the No. 3-2 check box is checked.
When on, comments are registered at the time of part
Checkbo
4-1 On On/Off
x registration.
comment The value of thickness is described in No. 4-2.
Characte Up to 25 Input comment.
4-2 Blank
r characters It can't input unless the No. 4-2 check box is checked.
Display
overwrite
confirma Checkbo On/Off （ ＊ If the check box is checked, a confirmation dialog will be
5 Off
tion of x ２） displayed when overwriting the part.
part
name
（＊１）Initial values of part name, material and thickness can be got from the notes contained in
the part or the information displayed on one-click toolbar. It can also leave it blank
instead of getting initial value. These settings can be changed by one click parameter.
For details, refer to "⑪-6 One-Click Parameter Setting" in chapter 2-4-2.
（＊２）If "All" is selected for overwrite confirmation of drawing registration at one click parts
execution, No. 5 will remain off of initial value and cannot operate.

K1-3-1
 K1 Free nesting
Part material Range
1-2
save
1-2 Part material Range save
When there are more than one processed figure on screen, each of which is registered as the
nesting part separately, designate the scope for registration. The figure of part should conform
to part registration, see K1-1 Part registration.

1)

3) 3) Fill in information in the part registration

setting dialog
* Details of the dialog are listed at the end of
【K1】 1 chapter

4) When the same file name has already been

registered on the hard disk, it will be asked
to overwrite or not. Click "Yes" to overwrite.
Click "No" if want to abort the part
registration without overwriting.

K1-3-2
 K1 Free nesting
1 Part material Save

When utilizing free nesting, please note.

1 When multi-component part is registered

Circle the periphery with green real line via dialogue or drawing to perform automatic path setting,
after part registration, you can register multi-component parts.

2 Inverse conversion of figures in parts registration

a Periphery contains micro joint figure
When shape whose width of micro collaboration is larger than [Nc Rev conv:Micro joint judg val]
of [Set] -> [Change the setting] -> [Laser CAM] is reversely converted for shape that micro
collaboration has been added to outer, and the material registration is executed, outer might not
be correctly covered.
Micro joint Beam ON position will become loop circuit due to inverse conversion.
(Periphery last Beam ON and Beam OFF positions coincide to form loop circuit.)
Please enlarge the value of [Nc Rev conv:Micro joint judg val], reverse-convert again or do the
following methods and register the material.

1) Method of reinstalling micro joint

Remove the micro joint, reinstall it and perform part registration.
However, you the pierce when removing micro joint.

K1-4
 K1 Free nesting
1 Part material Save

2) Method of circling periphery

Circle the periphery with green real line via dialogue or drawing, perform automatic path
setting and part registration.

b End-joint figure with periphery round pierce

Perform inverse conversion of end-joint figure with periphery additional arc pierce and part
registration.

K1-5
 K1 Free nesting
1 Part material Save

c Including periphery complementary pierce figure

For additional periphery complementary pierce figure in inverse conversion, perform part
registration, it may not be overwritten normally.

K1-6
d Including periphery complementary pierce figure
For additional periphery complementary pierce figure in inverse conversion, perform part
registration, it may not be overwritten normally.

When four-angle treatment cannot be performed normally, circle periphery via dialogue or
drawing and perform automatic path setting and part registration.

Precautions
The line circling periphery should not have additional pierce line, etc.
After circling periphery, always execute part registration after automatic path setting.
During periphery circling and part registration, line circling periphery will be displayed, and
there is no problem in NC data creation.

K1-7
 K1 Free nesting
1 Part material Save

3 Execute part registration when periphery contains loops:

When executing part registration if periphery contains loops, "because the outmost periphery
constituent curve is interfered with, periphery will be registered as rectangle" is displayed
because close loop treatment cannot be performed for periphery, rectangle (four angles) is
recognized, and results are displayed in a red box.

When four-angle treatment cannot be performed normally, circle periphery via dialogue or
drawing and perform automatic path setting for part registration.

4 Execute part registration when beam OFF line coincides processed figure
When executing part registration if additional beam OFF line coincides processed figure,
"because the outmost periphery constituent curve is interfered with, periphery will be
registered as rectangle" is displayed because close loop treatment cannot be performed for
periphery, rectangle (four angles) is recognized, and results are displayed in a red box.

5 Other special figure

When periphery constituent arcs and line segments joint adjacent arcs and line segments, they
approximate to lines. In recognizing periphery, in order to prevent the returning lines from
coinciding, periphery will be recognized as a rectangle.

In this condition, usual part registration can be performed by installing small corner R at the
corner. However, in order to install R at inner corner, the R value should be larger than
"corrected value" of processor NC on the side of control device.

K1-8
 K1 Free nesting
1 Part material Save

6 Change the view and edit settings of the layer

When changing the view and edit setting of the layer, Shapes exclude from in “Edit OFF” and
“Disp OFF” layer.

If the figure above, will be subject to registration only member shape was drawn to Layer 2 and
Layer 0

K1-7-2
 K1 Free nesting
2 Part material Load

2 Part material Load

Call out with free (automatic) callout edit configuration parts.

K1 Free
For details, please refer to 2-3-3-1 File management of basic operation nesting 2.
procedure
Group the parts called out. Part material Inner hole
3 specify
Ungroup before edit.

K1-7-3
3 Part Inner hole specify
Part inner hole setting for parts pre-configuration.

Perform inner hole designation, beam ON attribute color becomes yellow.

In the condition of having performed inner hole designation, the

direction of the angle of set part. Despite everything are setted to
[ALL], it is impossible to adjust in a small ragne of angle

K1-7-4
 K1 Free nesting
4 Part Inner hole cancel
4. Part Inner hole cancel
Cancel inner hole designation, and return to original beam ON attributes.

Cancel inner hole designation, and return to original beam ON attribute colors.

K1-9-2
 K1 Free nesting
5 Work sheet Load (Save)

5. Work sheet Load (Save)

Register (call out) the work via free (automatic) nesting.
Register the work for automatic nesting again.
Work for free nesting is designated for use during configuration requirements edit.
(For configuration requirements edit method, see 10. Arrangement demand nesting
Execution.)

K1-10
 K1 Free nesting
5 Work sheet Load (Save)

K1-11
 K1 Free nesting
5 Work sheet Load (Save)

For detailed work list, please refer to 2-3-3-1. File management in 2. Basic operation
procedure.
Group the callout work.
Register 3 6 4 8 5 10 and psdemo work according to standard fixed size.
For designation of material and thickness of board, (for details, see 10 Arrangement demand
nesting Execution). Designate material and thickness of board for configuration
requirements registration, a message will be displayed when you have confirmed that the
part for which configuration parts have been designated, work material designated with
work and thickness of board meet the requirements.
(Do not confirm without designation. Or confirm that free nesting can be executed even if
results do not accord)
Only material and thickness of board can be designated, which however may not be
designated.

(Notes) About work table registered size (vertical size, horizontal size)
For different kinds of controllers, dead zone directions . sizes are different.
Register according to dead zone shorter X, Y vertical sizes and horizontal size as follows.

K1-11-2
 K1 Free nesting
5 Work sheet Load (Save)

[J5] Path setting For utilizing scrap treatment function, it is recommended to set the
reticular work table for clearance. procedure of setting the reticular work table for clearance
is indicated as follows.

K1-11-3
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract

In order to use clamp avoidance nesting function safely

This product clamp avoidance nesting function, from the viewpoint of fail safe on processing
machine system including CAD/CAM, as a principle, HVⅡ, HSseries which has clamp retract
function in processing machine itself should be regard as appropriate object.
When performing clamp avoidance accommodate nesting, next 2 operation orders are necessary.
①nesting
Please set clamp area, positioning block area and head interference area, the areas
accommodate to processing machine, then execute clamp avoidance accommodated nesting.
②rapid feed interference avoidance
In order to avoid interference of clamp, positioning block and processing head, when
interfering, please perform rapid feed avoidance（There are 2 avoidance methods）.
(1)nesting
①When perform nesting, clamp position, clamp dimension, positioning block position,
positioning block dimension, and interference area with processing head should choose from
processing machine type.
After performing please execute nesting.
Input check method details, please refer to 「K1-9 clamp avoidance set」.
(note1)About HVⅡ, HSseries, coordinate value, dimension value that relate to interference
by each model, is inputted as default setting. But when processing machine clamp
position change is performed, please align related setting items to processing machine
then change.
(note2)This nesting executing, means interfere clamp area, escape positioning block area
and head, then do blank layout. Interference avoidance setting of processing head and
clamp on rapid feeding, because it has not been performed in this stage, should
perform according to next (2) item operation.
(2) interference avoidance on rapid feeding
This method includes 2 methods.
①Please change to ensure rapid feed path will not interfere on XY plane.
Please revise interfered rapid feed line to ensure it will not interference.
Detail operation, please refer to 「J3-24rapid feed detour create」item.
②By moving processing head to original point position (around top), to avoid rapid feed path
interference.
In order to raise processing head to do interfering avoidance, it is necessary to Z axis
original point position.
Operation on this product, when has interference, please choose code （M199;G28Z）that is
choose at first. By this setting, Z axis will able to create NCdata that is retracted to original
point. Detail operation, please refer to「J3-2 2 rapid feed set 」item.
(note1)Because retracting on imitate off code(M199), could not prevent Z direction
interference, should retract to axis original point position.
＜notes＞
The appropriation of this function to processing machine（besides HVⅡ, HSseries ）in which
clamp retract function does not exist in processing machine itself, is not regarded as object from
fail safe viewpoint, but if it is processing machine of specifications which could include processing
head（please refer to processing machine operation manual）to clamp position material end area as
processing machine specifications, by executing the above setting （interference area between
clamp position, clamp dimension, processing head）, clamp avoidance nesting which is regarded as
this product is usable. But, because clamp avoidance function itself doesn’t exist in processing
machine itself, if clamp position /area that is different from goods on product is set, processing
head on real processing in some cases will collide to clamp. For this reason, user should
understand the risk and perform it on user’s responsibility.

K1-4
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract

6.Clamp Position Setting

Set processing machine clamp and positioning block number, position, size, Enter impossible
area size and etc.
Setting values，should check processing machine screen, then align with processing machine
setting.
Please use clamp retract function when soft limit setting within clamp shape on processing
machine is possible.
You can use this function on HVⅡseries, HSseries.
Although default setting is being inputted in HVⅡseries model, please get it only as a reference
value. By accommodating to processing machine clamp specifications, while execute, you should
check if it is accommodating to processing machine before use it.

K1-5
 1) Start clamp position setting table.
Click .

Default setting, will display

「ML3015HVII」(without pallet changer,
without automatic clamp, without clamp
increase) clamp information.

2) Choose by aligning with processing machine

type then display it on screen.
Setting of various type processing
machine are logged in at beginning.
(Please refer to 「 ＊ log in completed
setting values 」)

Click .
Display read in file name input column.

Click .
Display file list.

Choose file that appropriate to processing

machine type from file list, then double
click it.

Choosed file setting values will display.

K1-6
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract

3) Set clamp number and position. Check

processing machine screen, then set values
that is same as processing machine. (Please
refer to 「 ＊ processing machine screen
explanation 」)

When set clamp number, please click table

value portion.

Every time you click, values will change

from 「 no 」 → ｢ １ ｣ → ｢ ２ ｣ → ｢ ３ ｣ →
｢no ｣・・・.

when you set clamp position set, please click

table value portion, then input values.

When digits behide decimal point are

inputted, it will be rounded off in 3digits.

Inappropriate range as clamp position

（ outside of processing machine table
area ）setting values, becomes error.
Because cursor will be moved error line,
please input again.

4) when setting table is created ／changed

again, should add name then log in.
Click .
Display log in file name input column. Input
file name.

When same file name exists, will display

overwrite check screen. When overwrite
please click YES.

5) Save setting table, then end.

Click .

K1-7
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract
＊Processing machine screen explanation

When clamp position setting screen is displaying on processing machine 「parameter」「shaft

parameter」screen.

Read in clamp position for Ｘshaft，clamp position for Ｙshaft, Enter impossible area size, set
CamMaglc LA setting screen.
Choose table
size.
Input
加工機の valuesthat
values よ
When -99999.999,
same as processing
り少し大きくするこ
without clamp
machine.
と。
→clamp number of
加工機 LA
pieces is 1
-2645.00 45.000 -> 45.1 加工
-99999.99
0 機の values より、
-99999.99
9 少し大きくするこ
-99999.99
9 と。
9
175.00
0 725.00
0 1375.00
099999.99
9
45.00
When 99999.999, 0 45.00 > processing machine
without clamp 0 values（about 5.0）a
→clamp number of little bit.
pieces is ３

Enter impossible area size，by >processing

machine values a little bit，could prevent Simple substance
part that is arranged on boundary, from machine：no
becoming soft limit error. With pallet：with

K1-8
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract
Explanation of the input item, please refer to the following.

(1) clamp information setting

① X axis clamp number
Used X direction clamp number. Max setting is 4.
② X axis clamp position
Input X coordinate of X clamp center position which is seen from machine original point.
Please input several minutes that accommodate to X axis clamp
③ Y axis clamp number
Used Y direction clamp number. Max setting is 4.
④ Y axis clamp position
Input Y coordinate of Y clamp center position which is seen from machine original point.
Please input several minutes that accommodate to Y axis clamp.
⑤ Input impossible area size （X，Y）
X：Please set half value of processing head X size as target.
Y：Please set half value of processing head Y size as target.
⑥ X axis clamp size
X：Please input X direction dimension value of X axis clamp.
Y：Please input Y direction dimension value of X axis clamp.
⑦ Y axis clamp size
X：Please input X direction dimension value of Y axis clamp.
Y：Please input Y direction dimension value of Y axis clamp.
(2) positioning block information set
① Xaxis positioning block size
X：Please input X direction dimension value of X axis positioning block.
Y：Please input Y direction dimension value of X axis positioning block.
② Yaxis positioning block size
X：Please input X direction dimension value of Y axis positioning block.
Y：Please input Y direction dimension value of Y axis positioning block.
③ X axis positioning block number
Please input X axis positioning block number. Max setting is 3.
④ X axis positioning block position
Input X coordinate of X axis positioning block center position that is seen from machine
original point. Please input several minutes that accommodate to X axis positioning block.
⑤ Y axis positioning block number
Please input Y axis positioning block number. Max setting is 3.
⑥ Y axis positioning block position
Input Y axis positioning block center position where is seenK1
fromFree
Y coordinate
nesting machine
6 to YClamp
original point. Please input several minutes that accommodate25 axis positioning
retract block.
⑦ base positioning block avoidance area （X，Y）

K1-9
 You should set this setting only when pallet changer is added.
Because this positioning block position is fixed, please input X，Y dimension value of the
total value of this positioning block and processing head Enter impossible area separately.

From above setting, when nesting, next area will become arrange prohibit area.
1）X axis clamp
X direction ：X axis clamp size X＋Enter impossible area size X＋Enter impossible area size X
Y direction ：X axis clamp size Y＋Enter impossible area size Y
2）Y axis clamp
X direction ：Y axis clamp size X＋Enter impossible area size X
Y direction ：Y axis clamp size Y＋Enter impossible area size Y＋Enter impossible area size Y
3）X axis positioning block
X direction ：X axis positioning block size X＋Enter impossible area size X＋Enter impossible
area size X
Y direction ：X axis positioning block size Y＋Enter impossible area size Y
4）Y axis positioning block
X direction ：Y axis positioning block size X＋Enter impossible area size X
Y direction ：Y axis positioning block size Y＋Enter impossible area size Y＋Enter impossible
area size Y
5）base positioning block avoidance area
X direction ：base positioning block avoidance area X
Y direction ：base positioning block avoidance area Y

K1-10
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract

＊Log in completed setting values

The following setting values is logged in CamMagic LA at beginning.

file name processing machine explanation
ML1212HVII ML1212HVIIstandard
ML1212HVII_X ML1212HVII, with clamp increase
ML2512HS ML2512HSstandard
ML2512HVII ML2512HVIIstandard
ML2512HVII_P ML2512HVII, with pallet changer
ML2512HVII_P_A ML2512HVII, with pallet changer, with automatic clamp
ML2512HVII_P_A_X ML2512HVII, with pallet changer, with automatic clamp, with
clamp increase
ML2512HVII_P_X ML2512HVII, with pallet changer, with clamp increase
ML2512HVII_X ML2512HVII, with clamp increase
ML3015HVII ML3015HVIIstandard
ML3015HVII_P ML3015HVII，with pallet changer
ML3015HVII_P_A ML3015HVII, with pallet changer, with automatic clamp
ML3015HVII_P_A_X ML3015HVII, with pallet changer, with automatic clamp, with
clamp increase
ML3015HVII_P_X ML3015HVII, with pallet changer, with clamp increase
ML3015HVII_X ML3015HVII, with clamp increase

_Clampinfofile, in which current setting values is saved. Please don’t delete this file. When
deleted, please don’t read in, set from list.

Clamp position, in which default settings is setted. Please refresh processing machine setting
values before the using of this function. When this setting is different from the processing machine,
normal processing data is not made.

When change clamp position on processing machine, setting is changed, should change CamMagic
LA setting table as well.

Default settings of very log in completed setting values, please refer to the following page.
Please reflect a set value of the processing machine before this function is used because this initial
value is a reference.

K1-11
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract
＊Default settings of log in completed setting values

ML1212HVI ML1212HVII_
I X

ML2512HS ML2512HVI
I

K1-12
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract

ML2512HVII_ ML2512HVII_P
P _A

ML2512HVII_P_A_ ML2512HVII_P_
X X

K1-13
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract

ML2512HVII_
X

ML3015HVII ML3015HVII_P

K1-14
 K1 Free nesting
6
25 Clamp retract

ML3015HVII_P ML3015HVII_P_A_
_A X

ML3015HVII_P_X ML3015HVII_X

K1-15
 K1 Free nesting
7 Edge Material Save

7.Edge Material Save

Save peripheral shapes of the figure on screen as edge materials.
* Shapes on screen will be displayed in automatic
magnification.
a. Input the name of edge materials directly.
1) Save the name of edge materials
* The name of edge materials contains 24
characters at most.
* When a work sheet (including edge materials
and rectangle) of the same name has been
saved, it will ask whether to overwrite.
To overwrite, Y
Not to N
overwrite,
* On the screen which displays [Registration
has been completed.], registered figures will
be displayed in red.

b. Perform new registration via the list.

1) Edge Material Worksheet | Save
2) / or /
* The edge material loading list will be
opened.
3) F1 or / 1: Execute
4) Save the name of edge materials
* For whether to overwrite, refer to a1) above.

c. Perform overwriting registration via the list.

1) Edge Material Worksheet | Save
2) / or /
* The edge material loading list will be opened.
3) Perform for the overwritten edge
materials.
* For whether to overwrite, refer to a1) above.

* When using this function, figures displayed before using will be saved automatically.
Figures saved automatically can be loaded via FILE MANAGE | Load
@./WORK/ZANZAI.

K1-16
 K1 Free nesting
7 Edge Material Save

<Precautions on edge material registration>

* After registration is completed, registered figures will be displayed in red

(The part of arc will be displayed as a polygon).

* About the method of addition of file name for edge material registration
(same with that for parts registration, please note the following)

Same with parts registration, the registration name of edge materials contains up to 24
characters (DBC case) of English letters, digits and [ - ] (minus), [ _ ] (underline), etc.
However, the file name should not contain [ - ] or [ _ ].
Besides, blanks, special characters (#$%*, etc), Chinese characters, hiragana, katakana, etc
cannot be used.
⇒ Malfunction may occur to edge material management nesting, etc.

Example) AB_CD_EF ⇒
-ABCDEFG ⇒ (because the sign - is used at the beginning)
Chinese characters ⇒ (because not ANSI character)
ABCD *EF ⇒ (because blanks and asterisk * are used)

* When registering edge materials, add notes [Grnt edg mtrl wrk].
For the list of work (it can be opened via instructions of [Use Work List] [Use Work…] of
arrangement demand setting screen and [Work Sheet Registration] [Edge Material Registration]
[Edge Material Load] of CamMagic LA), [Edge Material Work Sheet] and [Rectangle Work
Sheet] of free nesting will be displayed in the list.
[Edge Material] can be distinguished from [Rectangle] by notes.

* For edge material registration, figure data on screen before registration

The figure data will be automatically overwritten for registration in the name of "zanzai" in the
file of "work" in CamMagic LA installation folder (usually under C: LA700W).
If you need the data, you can load it by [<external drawing> reading] function of [File
Management].

* In the list of work (it can be opened via instructions of [Use Work List] [Use Work…] of
arrangement demand setting screen and [Work Sheet Registration] of CamMagic LA), numbers
in columns of [Height (mm)][Width (mm)] of edge material work are [Width][Height] of the
rectangle enclosing edge material figures.

K1-17
 K1 Free nesting
7 Edge Material Save
*About figures registered as edge materials
1) It is a connected figure.
However, for an open figure of which only one part is isolated, perform registration after making
connection with straight lines.

Figure open at only one place

2) Inside holes cannot be registered. Even if there are figures outside the periphery, they will be
neglected in registration.

Several figures

* Do not perform registration when figures (piercing lines, attributes, dimension lines, marks and
auxiliary lines, etc), not related to nesting, are added.

With pierce With dimension lines

* Figures of outer interference and those of no area (only points, line segments, etc.) cannot be
registered.

Outer interference No area

* Circles cannot be registered. In order to register a circle, after creating a circle, split at a figure
and then perform registration.

Split
at

Circle (unchanged) Circle (split at a place)

K1-18
 K1 Free nesting
8 Edge Material Load

8. Edge Material Load

Load edge materials in order to edit edge materials used in edge material management nesting.
a Input name of the edge material to be loaded.
1) Name of the edge material to be loaded
2) Rotation angle
* When not rotated (rotation angle is 0 degree),
3) Specify the arrangement place.
At the arrangement place, perform or
or X, Y

b) Load from the list.

1) Edge Material Worksheet | Load
2) / or /
* The edge material loading list will be opened.
3) Perform for the loaded edge
materials.
4) Operations below are same with those following
a2) above.

K1-19
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting
9. Group Nesting
You can discriminate parts through their’s material and board thickness,and then finish set the file.
You can import CSV data from other system(part name,material,board thickness,number, deadline). You
also can export the result in the form of CSV.

Part number deadline material board Setting

name thickness requirement
JOB_01 Part ps1 ps7
ps1 77 2007/06/15 SS 9.0
name
ps2 82 2007/06/15 SPC 1.6 (SS 9.0)
number 175 26
ps3 2 2007/06/15 SPC 1.6
JOB_02 Part ps2 ps3 ps8
ps4 47 2007/06/15 SUS 3.2
name
(SPC 1.6)
ps5 3 2007/06/15 SS 19.0
number 145
ps6 35 2007/06/15 SUS 3.2
JOB_03 Part ps4 ps6
ps7 26 2007/06/15 SS 9.0 name
(SUS 3.2)
ps8 15 2007/06/15 SPC 1.6
number 99 105
ps2 63 2007/06/30 SPC 1.6
JOB_04 Part ps5
ps4 52 2007/06/30 SUS 3.2 name
(SS 19.0)
ps6 70 2007/06/30 SUS 3.2 number 3
ps8 17 2007/06/30 SPC 1.6
ps1 98 2007/06/30 SS 9.0

Gragh K1-12-1 Group Nesting function summary

When plannig to use Group Nesting function，please set file system’s/data base’s Check-box
ON.
Please refer to the first chapter the file coded BDP-CD-8045 from new file management(DB).

when using Group Nesting, prepare for the work sheet about the set of Dimension and
Material.
If you establish the data base by work sheet management, you can use.
Dimension Material Board thickness mm
3x6 A50 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0
3x8 SPC 0.5, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.3, 3.2
4x8
5x10 SS 4.5, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 14.0, 16.0, 19.0, 22.0
SUS 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 12.0
SECC 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.3, 3.2
SPCC 0.5, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.3, 3.2
SS400 4.5, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 14.0, 16.0, 19.0, 22.0
SUS304 0.3, 0.8, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 12.0, 14.0

K1-20
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting

（１）Screen

After performing Group Nesting ，show the Fig K1-12-2。

Menu

Table

Fig K1-12-2 Group Nesting

K1-21
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting

（２）Menu

Group Nesting funtion’s menu Table K1-12-1.

Table K1-12-1 Group Nesting funtion’s menu

Code Main menu submenu

１ Ｆ１：Position demand Ｆ１：Execute

Ｆ２：Cancel

Ｆ４：Clear

wok page choice

２ Ｆ２：Finish

３ Ｆ３：Add

Ｆ４：Delete

４ Ｆ５：Sort（deadline）

５ Ｆ６：Import

６ Setting Environment set

７ Help Version information

８ Position demand file name

９ Part table Check

Amount

Deadline

All choice

Cancel all choice

K1-22
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting

（３）Menu in detail

１ Arrangement requirements

According to material and sheet thickness, sum up the parts and repare arrangement
requirements

1)In advance，set the check-box of the object

parts which need do arrangement
requirements to ON.
In the condition of all choose，click

2)click to sum up the parts chosen

according to material and sheet thickness,and
then show the result in dialog box.
3) You can change the arrangement request
file name by selecting arrangement request
4) file name column and key entering.
4) Show after decideing work sheet bar. Click
then you can open wok page file
management.
Work sheet can restrict by material
and sheet thickness.In the condition of
relevant work sheet is not
registered,Please interrupt Group
Nesting to register work sheet.
When doing restricting，the show of
search menu will change. arrangement
requirement
You can select multiple worksheets.
Summary Up to 100 types can be
specified for nesting.
Please choose work sheet for all the
Now is not "Search" mode. arrangement requirements
5) Click to delete the selected worksheet
column
6) Click to creat arrangement
Now is "Search" mode. requirements
After ending normally，Please delete
the parts which are finshed from
table.
7)Click ,then can interrupt the creation
of arrangement requirements

K1-23
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting

２ Finish

Finish Group Nesting.

1)Click

You can end by × button.

Automatically store the table of parts

at present.Next time,you can start
Group Nesting at the present
condition.

When starting the arrangement

requirement table of high free and
Edge material,
Group Nesting will end automatically.

３ Part add／delete

For Group Nesting, add or delete parts.

1)After click ,part file management

will start.

2)Choose nesting object part from part file

management.The operation is same as
nesting.

Part,will be added to the last of the

table.

The check-boxes of the added parts

show OFF.In the condition of Group
Nesting. Please set check-box in ON.

3)After click ,delete the parts you

chose from the table.

The object of deleting are parts.

K1-24
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting
４ Sort

Sort the parts in the order of deadline from the first to the last.

1)Click

Sort at the top when not filling in

deadline content.

Can not return the condition before

sorting.

５ Import
Input part table from text. Transfer the data which come from other systems to Group Nesting
for use file, in the form of ＣＳＶ（Comma-Separated Values), the meaning of every row are
showed according to Table K1-12-2.
Table K1-12-2 The form input file
No. Project Meaning The range of value
name
１ Check Instruct the object as TRUE is as object
Group Nesting/not Group
FALSE is not as object
Nesting

２ Material file Instruct the part name The part name up to Semiangle 24
name which is as unified char.
nestng object
３ Ammount Instruct the number of １～３００００
part.
(The same part and unifying in the
condition of the same sheet
thickness,please limit the total
number below 30000）
When formatting CSV file by
calculation software,please do
not use 「bit breakpoint」in the
font of unit
４ Deadline Instruct deadline. Decide by MM/DD/YYYY(Shading is
used to distinguish year month an
day)notation.
Formatting CSV file from
calculation software,please notice
the font of unit

K1-25
５ Material Instruct the material of The material name up to 8 Semiangle
part chars
６ Thickness Instruct the sheet 0.1～99.9
thickness of part

K1-26
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting

1)Click

2)Appoint input file name by opening the

dialog box of file.

Input are at the last of the table

The CSV file name will be the

arrangement request file name as it is.

６ Setting

Doing every kinds of settings of Group Nesting. Appoint the target folder when doing
arrangement requirements part information in the form of CSV file.

1) Operation settings ／ environment setting

menu

2) Appoint store target folder of file

Click on the right of the target

which is used to store file,and then will
popup

The reference dailog box.From the

dialog box, you can appoint store
target.

3) Set the check-box of file having done

arrangement requirements part information
to ON

4)Click

Output file，in the form of CSV（Comma-Separated Values)，the meaning of every row are

K1-27
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting
according to the Table K1-12-3

Table K1-12-3 the form of output file

No. Project name Meaning

1 Check Displaying having became Group Nesting object

2 Material name As the part name of Group Nesting object

3 Amount As the number of Group Nesting

4 Deadline Deadline

5 Part material The material of part

name

6 Part sheet The sheet thickness of part(mm)

thickness

7 Work sheet name The work sheet name assigned

8 Work sheet The material of work sheet

material name

9 Work sheet sheet The sheet thickness of work

thickness sheet(mm) output 100 types of
used worksheets
10 Work sheet Ｙ direction size of work (if we have only one
worksheet, output 99
vertical size sheet(mm) blanks = fixed
length)
11 Work sheet Ｘ direction size of work
horizontal size sheet(mm)

７ Version information

1) Help/version information menu is operated.

Please inform me of the version when

inquiring by group nesting.

K1-28
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting
８ Arrangement requirement file name

Arrangement requirement file name can be appointed

When blank column,use DATA/TIME to create file name.

When importing, the CSV file name is automatically entered.

English number up to semiangle 20 char can be used.The nesting arrangement

requirement name of CamMagic LA is 20 char,but in the end of Group Nesting continuous
number will be added（＿００１～＿９９９）,therefore,20 chars are the maximum.

If the file name contains illegal characters, when clicking ,dialog box will popup.

９ Part table

Part table,appoint the object the number and the deadline which is regarded as Group
Nesting/not Group Nesting

1) The part which will be used as Group

Nesting object,set its check-box to ON.

Click ,and then you can set all

the part as object.

Click ,and then you can set all

the part not as object.

K1-29
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting

2) Key input the number of parts

Recieve１～３００００

3) Input deadline

After operating Drop-down list,

calendar will be showed.You can input
Date/Time from here

After pushing Ｄ Ｅ Ｌ key ， you can

cancel deadline.

After choosing blank bar, you can set

the day as deadline.

K1-30
 K1 Free nesting
9 Group Nesting

（４）Message table
The message table of Group Nesting function are showed in Table K1-12-4
Table K1-12-4 Group Nesting main function
No. Message Processing way
1 Please use "Group Nesting" If file management having not be set 「using
function after switching the File database 」 ,please doing environment
Manager DataBase edition. setting.You can refer to 「 New file
management(database) Operation Manual
BLD-CD-8045」
2 Choice the material The part which does not choose any
arrangement requirement
3 Set an amount Number column is blank.Please input
necessary number.
4 Failed to add ○ files because it When adding parts ,will appoint
was not set material or the parts having not set material and sheet
thickness. thickness.As Group Nesting does not set
material,sheet thickness,you need not add
relevant parts.Please use part file
management to set material,sheet thickness.
5 Failed to import ○ files because When inputting parts ,in CSV files
it was not set material or exist files having not setting.Because of
thickness. unifeid nesting does not process the part
which have not set material and sheet
thickness,you need not add relevant
parts.Please format correct CSV file.
6 Cannot register more than 30000 Please adjust the number of parts by the
position demand files. same way of nesting function limit(One
file ,part number is not over 30000) in order
to make it not be over limit
7 There is different material or In the parts and the work sheets choosed,
thickness between material and material and sheet thickness are different.
work sheet. Is it OK? After clicking 「Yes」,format arrangement
requirements directly. Please push 「No」to
choose correct work sheet. When registering
work sheet,please end unifeid nesting to
cancel the restructing of work sheet
management.
The menu button of work sheet
management are showed as the left
Now is "Search" mode gragh, explaning that it is restrucing. In
the condition of being restructed, please
do not use work sheet to register.
8 Arrangement request file name, The imported CSV file name has at least 20
please set in less than 20 characters. Please change the arrangement
characters request file name coulmn to 20 characters or
less.

K1-31
 K1 Free nesting
Arrangement demand
10 nesting Execution
10．Arrangement request
Enter the worksheet to be used, the parts to be arranged, the arrangement method, etc.
If the material thickness is specified, check whether the material thickness of the work to be
used and the arranged part match at the time of registration.
After registering the arrangement request, perform nesting, result display, occurrence edge
material registration, and individual registration.

① Menu You can change the size of the screen.

③
② Various Arrangement You can change each area in the
settings result
(Preview) screen.

Various parameters are switched by

④
Arrangement tab.１ ２ ３
report

Schematic operation flow

10-1 Open arrangement request (JOB)

10-2 Set various parameters

No
Preview ?

Yes

10-3 Preview

Use the preview Yes

result ?

No

10-2 Adjust various parameters F1 Register

K1-32
 １０－１ Arrangement request (JOB)
2) Existing file 1) Open the arrangement request (JOB) file.
Nesting｜Nesting
Arrangement request ｜ Arrangement
request｜／
2) When calling an existing arrangement
2)-b) request
a) Double-click the arrangement request
name
b) Select the arrangement request name,
2)-a) F1:Edit
If there are no parts or worksheets at the
time of the call, a dialog is displayed and
3) New file the file name is copied to the clipboard.

3)-b) 3) When creating a new arrangement request

a) Double-click a blank arrangement
request name
b) Select [..] in the first line, F1:Edit
Enter the arrangement request name
3)-a) with the key and click the OK button.

① Menu
Operate with mouse click or function key

Save the edited arrangement request and nest it in CamMagicLA.

If just after the preview, the preview result is displayed on CamMagicLA.
Suspend the arrangement request. If there are any changes to the parameters, you
will be prompted to save them.
Output the data in the arrangement report field in TXT or CSV format.
Administrative processing can be reduced by inputting the application (for
example, spreadsheet software) used by the user.
(This cannot be operated for the arrangement request parameter.)
Delete the selected row in the part list / worksheet list
(This cannot be operated for the arrangement request parameter.)
Delete all lines in the part list / worksheet list
(Can be operated only for the arrangement part parameter)
You can indicate whether to display thumbnails for parts. When not displayed, you
can increase the number of rows displayed in the part list. You can also sort by
part name.
Perform nesting based on various parameters and display arrangement results
(preview).
Click during preview execution to interrupt.

K1-33
 １０－２ Various parameters
②-1 Arrangement request

Item Description Input range

Material thickness A drawing for each material thickness cannot be Material Up to
specification created with one arrangement request. If you specify 8 characters
the material thickness explicitly, you can warn of an Thickness
input error. 0.1-99.9
Check the material thickness only when registering
F1.
※This parameter is not stored. Set as necessary at
the time of the next arrangement request.
Edge allowance Specify the edge allowance (the area not to be 0.0 to upper
(clamp prohibited arranged from the edge of the work). limit is
area) determined by
worksheet size
and edge
allowance
value set for
opposite side
Arrangement Arrange the parts between the clamps. ON/OFF
between clamps ※ Use this hole when the soft limit can be set in the
clamp shape on the processing machine.
※ Refer to K1-6 for clamp setting
Hole Effective when skeleton edge materials are specified More than the
in the worksheet. Specify the area not to be arranged gap value
around the hole. between
arranged parts

Gap between Specify the gap between parts. 0～99999

arranged parts ※ Common line cutting is not performed even if gap = 0.0～999.9
0.
Automatic staggered Arrange in a staggered pattern ON/OFF
Edge material Set the minimum area ratio (%) to be output as edge 1～100
output lower limit materials
area parameter
Yield priority mode Attempt to combine the part arrangement order for ON/OFF
all arrangement methods and output arrangement
results with the highest yield.

K1-34
Mode Rotate and arrange so that the width or height is Width
minimized in consideration of the arrangement start minimum
position and arrangement order Minimum
height
Arrangement Select with radio buttons and checkboxes. Selection
method Auto The system automatically determines ON/OFF
the size of the part and arranges it.
Area Arrange from parts with large area.
Length Arrange from long parts.
Total Arrange from parts with large part area
area x number of parts.
Quantity Arrange from the part with the largest
number of arrangement.
Margin Arrange from parts with large margin
area.
※If you select normal and clear all check boxes, they
will be arranged in the order specified in the part
list.
Arrange start Specify the position and direction to start the Selection
position order arrangement.
Zigzag When ON, the arrangement direction is bidirectional, ON/OFF
and when OFF, it is one-direction.

Not check ZIGZAG ZIGZAG is cheked

Base material best Select a worksheet that will increase the yield when Selection
nest multiple sizes of work are specified in the worksheet
list.
Invalid Disable base material best nest.
1 sheet All parts can be arranged with one
sheet, and the workpiece with the
highest yield rate is automatically
selected and arranged.
Multiple When all parts are arranged on one type
sheets of workpiece (multiple pieces can be
arranged), the workpiece with the
highest yield rate is automatically
selected and arranged.

K1-35
Free space Select the free space definition Selection
allocation All areas Allocate in free space.
All areas, the All but the last one are arranged
last one is an in all available areas. The last
arranged one is arranged in the arranged
rectangular rectangular area.
area
Arranged Arrange in the arranged
rectangular rectangular area.
area
Between Arrange only between arranged
arranged parts parts.

Parts support limit Specify this when you do not want to drop parts Selection
without joints from the part support (slat support) 0～99999
after machining. 0.0～999.9
If the width of the short side of the part is less than
the set minimum width, rotate the long side width of
the part in the specified direction and arrange it.
※Does not drop, but may risk jumping and hitting
the head.
※The limit function can be disabled by setting the
minimum width to 0.

K1-36
 ②-2 Arrangement part

Item Description Input range

Display the part file management and select the part. ----
For details on file management, refer to "2-3-3 File
Management."

・ Use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple ranges or

multiple selections. F1 key or click .
・For one type, specify the part name by double-clicking.
Type Display the line number of the part list. (Cannot input)
Part file name Display and edit the nesting target part name (file name). 1 to 500 types
(row)
Material Display the material name set for the part. (Cannot input)
Thickness Display the thickness set for the part. (Cannot input)
Comment Display the comment set for the part. (Cannot input)
Quantity Enter the nesting quantity. 1～30000
The number that can be handled by one arrangement
request is up to 30000.

K1-37
Initial angle You can specify the initial angle by rotating the specified Selection
angle from the part registration state. or
AUTO Find the angle at which the circumscribed 0.1～359.9
rectangle width (shorter) of the part is the
minimum and use this as the initial angle.
0.0 The state at the time of part registration is
set as the initial angle.
90.0 The initial angle is the state rotated 90 °
counterclockwise from the state at the time
of part registration.
180.0 The initial angle is the state rotated 180 °
counterclockwise from the state at the time
of part registration.
270.0 The initial angle is the state rotated 270 °
counterclockwise from the state at the time
of part registration.
Pierce The initial angle is the angle at which the
forward outer perimeter pierce faces the
arrangement direction.
Pierce The angle at which the outer perimeter
side pierce is inclined 90 ° from the arrangement
direction is the initial angle.
Pierce The angle at which the outer perimeter
oblique pierce is inclined 45 ° from the arrangement
direction is the initial angle.
(Input…) Specify the initial angle.

Placemen Placemen
t direction Area to be t
placed later direction

Forward Forward
Oblique Oblique

Part Side Side Part

Direction Specify a selectable direction at the part initial angle and Selection
arrange it.
AUTO Depending on the size of the part in addition
to the initial angle of the part, arrange it at
an angle rotated in 2, 4, or 8 directions.
None Arrange only at the initial angle of the part.
2directions Arrange in one of two directions (the initial
angle of the part or the angle rotated 180 °
from there).
4directions Arrange in one of four directions (the initial
angle of the part or an angle rotated 90 ° /
180 ° / 270 ° from there).

K1-38
Pairing Specify when the yield is improved by combining and Selection
arranging the same parts.
YES Arrange a pair that minimizes the
circumscribed rectangle width (shorter) with
the combination of the part angles allowed in
the initial angle and direction settings.
NO Do not pair.
Stagger Arrange them in a staggered pattern.
Special Arrange four in a set.
staggered
Priority Specify the arrangement priority. Specify this if you want to -99～99
give priority to the delivery date by processing the parts
first, or if the yield is better when arranged first (or later).
０ Set arrangement (For details, refer to K1-50).
1～99 Priority arrangement. The lower the number,
the higher the priority. If they have the same
priority, they are arranged in the specified
order according to the arrangement method.
Not available when set arrangement is set.
-99～-1 Free space allocation. The smaller the absolute
value, the higher the priority. If the absolute
values are the same, arrange them in order of
area (they are arranged in gaps while
arranging a set or a part set with a positive
number. The position of the part to be arranged
afterwards may change).
Part Clicking a part file name in the part list displays the part shape before and
thumbnail after the selected line. Click the mouse on the part thumbnail to select the
display corresponding line in the part list.

※Work to display the selected part in the center of

the thumbnail.

K1-39
 ②-3 Use work

Item Description Input range

Display the worksheet file management and select a ----
worksheet.
For details on file management, refer to "2-3-3 File
Management."

・ Use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple ranges or

multiple selections. F1 key or click .
・ For one type, specify the worksheet name by
double-clicking.
Type Display the row number of the worksheet list. (Cannot input)
Work file name Display and edit the nesting target worksheet name (file 1 to 100 types
name). (row)
If you want to use it temporarily without registering it in
worksheet file management (for example, edge materials),
specify "***" for the work file name and set the vertical and
horizontal dimensions.
Material Display the material name set in the worksheet. (Cannot input)
Thickness Display the thickness set in the worksheet. (Cannot input)
Vertical Display the size of the worksheet in the Y direction. (Cannot input)
dimension mm
Horizontal Display the worksheet X size. (Cannot input)
dimension mm
Division Display settings for nesting with a gap (refer to page (Cannot input)
direction/number K1-11-3).
Gap
Range
Number Specify this when there is a limit on the number of 1～100
worksheets in stock. Usually use the default value (100).
If the generated edge material is specified for the work file
name, the initial value will be 1. Please adjust the number
of sheets according to the number of stock.

K1-40
Priority Enter the numbers in the order of the work to be used. If 0 is 0～99
entered, the display will be AUTO and the work will be
arranged in ascending order of size.

In the PARTS LIST, the operation of aligning all values at once.

In the PARTS LIST, the values of the currently selected cells in the Numbers, the Initial Angle,
the Direction, the Pairing, the Arrnge priority columns can be aligned at once.

(a)Select cell.
(b)Select the Item.
(c)It is processed by the content of the dialog display. Please click the OK button if there is no
error in the processing content.
b

K1-41
１０－３ Ｆ７ Preview
③ Arrangement result (Preview)

Item Description
Change Specify the number of layout result display columns. The left end is displayed
layout display in 5 columns, "|" is displayed in 1 column, and the right end is displayed in
column 1/3 column.
number (Display example)
5 columns 2 columns １ columns 1/3 columns
display display display display

When checked, the display magnification changes automatically to maintain

the number of columns even if the screen size is changed. Not related to
screen size when checked.
Reduce size Original Wider size
Check
ON

Check
OFF

Interrupt a running preview.

Arrangement Display the arrangement result in color. It is linked with the arrangement
result part parameter and arrangement report. Click on the part name to see where
and how it was arranged.
(Scaling) Place the mouse cursor on the arrangement result (preview) and operate the
mouse wheel while pressing the Ctrl key to enlarge / reduce.
(Emphasis) Highlight when hovering over a part or worksheet with the mouse cursor.
The edge material displayed in the preview may be different from the displayed after F1:REGIST.

K1-42
 ④ Arrangement report

The preview result is displayed in a table format such as use work, yield rate, and total number
of parts arranged. This table can be extracted to a file with F3 Output.
Item Description
Work file name Display the name of the work file where the parts are arranged.
Work size [mm] Display the dimensions (length x width) of the work.
Number Display the number of sheets required for processing.
Yield (whole Display the yield rate calculated from the work size.
board)
Yield (within Display the yield rate calculated from the area (circumscribed rectangle)
rectangle) where the parts are arranged.
Part～ Display the part name set in the arranged part list.
Total Display how many worksheets are required and how many parts have been arranged.
The numerator denominator is used, and the number of arranged parts is shown in the
denominator, and the number that can be arranged is shown in the numerator.
If the worksheet cannot be arranged due to insufficient worksheet size, number of sheets, or large
number of parts, a warning is displayed in red in the dialog display and arrangement report.
Please decide whether to adjust various parameters so that all numbers can be arranged, or to
accept the results and shift to CAM work.

Indicate that the specified number of part ps2 and

ps3 could not be arranged.
In addition, ps3 indicates SP material (free area
allocation).

Warning in red in the arrangement report field

You can't check if it is SP material here, but please
check if there is a negative value in the priority
column of the arrangement part

～ This is a layout where the top left of the arrangement result (preview)
display is 1 and they are lined up to the right. In CamMagicLA, it is the
order in which it is arranged in the X direction from the origin.

K1-43
 １０－４ Linkage of arrangement part list-arrangement result-arrangement report

Menu
Click on the part list to display the
Part list Arrangemen corresponding thumbnail and preview in
t result conjunction.
(Preview)
Click a part thumbnail to display the
Part thumbnail corresponding part list and preview in
Arrangement conjunction.
report
Click on the arrangement report to display the
corresponding part list, thumbnail and
preview.

For the linkage between the part list and the part thumbnail, refer to ②-2.

Selecting a part name in the part list or part thumbnail highlights the corresponding part in
the preview display. Click again to return to the original display (click a cell that cannot be
entered with the key in the case of a part list).

In the case of an arrangement report, the operation differs depending on the click area (① to
④).

① Reset highlighting
② Highlight the part you clicked
③ Highlight the layout you clicked
④ Highlight the part of the layout you clicked

K1-44
１０－５ Edge material occurrence type-specific

Version 11 can output three types of edge materials. Specify

which type is to be output in Laser CAM Setting / Occurrence
edge material type-specific (page 2-21-8).
This section describes the shape of each edge material when
five demo parts (ps11) are arranged.

＃３Occurrence edge Description

material
type-specific
Skeleton Create edge materials like a
worksheet after actual machining
of parts.

Contour It is the same as the edge material

shape up to Version 10. Create edge
materials along the contour of the
part shape.

Steps Replace the part with a

circumscribed rectangle and create
an edge material with a step shape.

Line Create the edge materials in a

rectangular shape.

Edge materials occurred after arranging parts against edge materials (after nesting and
relocation) may not match exactly.
Skeleton and line cannot be used as nesting edge material before Version10. Use contours
or steps.

１０－６ Edge material cutting path generation

For the end materials of the line type-specific, you can use the
end face cutting function to cut off as rectangular end materials
at the end of machining. It can be specified in laser CAM setting
/ edge material path generation. Please refer to "J8 Edge Cut"
for the end face cutting function.

Unable to generate edge material cutting path for edge materials.

K1-45
 K1 Free nesting
Arrangement demand
10 nesting Execution

Generated Edge Material Regist

When executing arrangement results display, register the displayed number of sheets of
generated edge materials as edge material work.
* When edge material management nesting
results are displayed, if edge materials are
generated, the number of sheets of generated
edge materials will be displayed in the
column of information.
* Generated edge material shape displays in
purple.
* Generated edge materials are registered
using an Arrangement requirement name +
serial No..
[The drawing of arrangement result has
completed. Edge material is generating. (one * "Grnt edg mtrl wrk" comments are appended
piece) ] to generated edge materials.
* If an Arrangement requirement name +
1) serial No. already exists, it is overwritten by
the current generated edge material (same
processing as for individual registration).
[Edge material register has completed. (1 -
psdemo????)] 1) When the arrangement result is OK,
Y or YES
* Display pieces number and edge material
2) name which are registered in parentheses.
Ex.) 1 - psdemo????
Registered edge material：psdemo0004

2) When generated edge materials figures are

confirmed:
Free Nesting | Edge Material Worksheet | Load
/ or /

* The edge material loading list will be opened.

3) After performing for the column of

generated edge materials,

a. Display figure confirmation screen by

F9 or
9: Confirm

b. Load figures onto screen byF1 or

1: Execute

* When figures are enclosed with rectangle, the

lower left point of rectangle will become the
basic point.

K1-46
 K1 Free nesting
Arrangement demand
10 nesting Execution
When used work is designated, in order to designate worksheet of nesting with clearance and
execute nesting, nesting with clearance
This function will be valid when the scrap treatment function is utilized in [J5] Path setting.
Please do not use it together with the clamping arrangement nesting function.

Precautions
When parts configuration direction is [ ][ ], if worksheet division direction is [vertical], or
configuration direction is [ ] [ ], if division direction is [horizontal], the following
information screen will be displayed in registration.
When registered in this condition, OK

End configuration requirement screen.

Cancel when not registering
End configuration requirement screen.
Confirm changed designation again before
registration.
For instance, very small parts will be OK after 5. Division setting. Larger parts of [bearing]
configuration in worksheet may often be extruded.

K1-47
 K1 Free nesting
Arrangement demand
10 nesting Execution

Set configuration
With the set configuration method, the maximum number of configuration parts which can be
paired is automatically calculated. Configuration occurs without the trial & error processing
required by the conventional method in which a total number is specified. (See [Ex1])
Moreover, parts can also be configured in vacant areas. (See [Ex2])
To perform a set configuration, "0" must be specified for those parts at the "configuration
priority" column of the configuration requirement table. And "-1" must be specified for parts to
be configured in vacant areas.
At set configuration operations, it is not possible to specify positive-number settings at the
"configuration priority" column.

[Ex1]
Only the set configuration is checked. Settings
ps3 ps5 ps7 ps9 1000 
Work size
1500
Configuration
Length L
method
Nesting Some testing
11 7 9 3

8 pairs can be configured per

sheet
Vacant areas occur

[Ex2]
Settings
Set configurations and vacant area configurations can be combined.
Work size 1000  1500
ps3 ps5 ps7 ps9 ps8
Configuration
Length L
method
Vacant
position All areas
configuration
11 7 9 3 100 Nesting Some testing
8 pairs can be configured per
sheet
Although there are 100 ps8 settings, 100
configurations may not be possible.
 If a "Some parts could not be configured"
message displays, check the nesting
message.
A nesting messageK1check reveals
Free that 10 ps8
nesting
configurations were performed.
Arrangement demand
10 nesting Execution

Set configuration Procedure for Ex.1

1) Open the nest configuration requirement table

again.

K1-48
2)  Refer to page K1-38, step 1).

2) Specify the configuration parts.

 Refer to page K1-39, step 3).

a) Specify the ps3 part.

Specify "11" as the quantity.
Specify "0" as the configuration precedence.

b) Specify the ps5 part.

Specify "7" as the quantity.
Specify "0" as the configuration precedence.

c) Specify the ps7 part.

Fig. With configuration parts specified Specify "9" as the quantity.
Specify "0" as the configuration precedence.
3)
d) Specify the ps9 part.
Specify "3" as the quantity.
Specify "0" as the configuration precedence.

3) Specify the work to be used.

 Refer to page K1-41, step 10).
a) Specify "" as the work sheet name.
b) Specify "1000" as the vertical size.
c) Specify "1500" as the horizontal size.
d) Specify "1" as the quantity (number).
Fig. With work specified

4) 4) Specify the configuration requirements.

 Refer to page K1-43, step 15).
a) Specify "Length" as the configuration
method.
 Refer to page K1-44, step 21).

5) Register the settings.

Press [F1] or [F1: Register] when preview for
Fig. With configuration method specified the Set arrange.(displayed information dialog)

After previewing the Set arrange, perform the

F1:RESIST.
 Refer to page K1-46, step 26).

K1-49
 K1 Free nesting
Arrangement demand
10 nesting Execution

Set configuration Procedure for Ex.2

1) Open the nest configuration requirement table

2)
again.
 Refer to page K1-38, step 1).

2) Specify the configuration parts.

 Refer to page K1-39, step 3).

a) Specify the ps3 part.

Specify "11" as the quantity.
Specify "0" as the configuration precedence.

b) Specify the ps5 part.

Specify "7" as the quantity.
Specify "0" as the configuration precedence.

c) Specify the ps7 part.

Fig. With configuration parts specified Specify "9" as the quantity.
Specify "0" as the configuration precedence.
3)
d) Specify the ps9 part.
Specify "3" as the quantity.
Specify "0" as the configuration precedence.

e) Specify the ps8 part.

Specify "100" as the quantity.
Specify "-1" as the configuration precedence.

3) Specify the work to be used.

 Refer to page K1-41, step 10).
Fig. With work specified a) Specify "" as the work sheet name.
b) Specify "1000" as the vertical size.
c) Specify "1500" as the horizontal size.
d) Specify "1" as the quantity (number).

4) Specify the configuration requirements

 Refer to page K1-43, step 15).
a) Specify "Length" as the configuration
method.
 Refer to page K1-44, step 21).
b) Specify "All areas" as the vacant area
configuration.
 Refer to page K1-45, step 25).
Fig. With configuration method specified
Fig. With vacant area configuration specified
5) Register the settings.
Press [F1] or [F1: Register] to register the
settings.
 Refer to page K1-46, step 26).

K1-50
 K1 Free nesting
Arrangement demand
10 nesting Execution

Argmnt parts list

A list shows part information to arrange after nesting execution in case of nesting result editing.
The type and the argmnt num of a part which are performing nesting can be grasped easily.
A part can be added in double-clicking the thumbnail on a dialog.
1 2
9
3 8

4
5 10
6 7

Number Item Explanation

1 Part number A part number is displayed.

2 Part name A part name is displayed.
3 Thumbnail The thumbnail of a part is displayed by auto magnification.
4 Part size Part size is displayed.
5 Argmnt dmd num Argmnt dmd num for every part set to the arrangement
demand table of nesting is displayed.
6 Part initial argmnt num The part number which is indicating by the arrangement result
is displayed after nesting execution or rearrangement
execution.
When rearrangement is performed by LA, the argmnt num is
updated.
7 Part present argmnt num The argmnt num for every part displayed now is displayed.
When there is a change in a part by LA, the argmnt num is
updated.
It draws by red when more than the number of initial
arrangement. When there are a few, it draws by blue.
8 Parts list The list of parts currently used for nesting is displayed on
numerical order.
9 PageUp button It changes at a time 5/10 part of parts currently displayed by
the same behavior as the PageUp key in the forward direction.
10 PageDown button It changes at a time 5/10 part of parts currently displayed by
the same behavior as the PageDown key in the following
direction.

You may member number changes each time of relocation for the member you did not register
the placement request table.

K1-51
 K1 Free nesting
Arrangement demand
10 nesting Execution

Operating procedure of argmnt parts list

1) In order to edit the nesting result manually, 「NO」is

１） chosen on the confirmation screen after nesting
execution/re-argmnt execution to 「Is it OK as a result
of argmnt?」.

２） 2) The list of the parts currently used for nesting is

displayed.
It is the numerical order of the argmnt parts list at the
time of an argmnt dmd. A part name, a thumbnail,
size, and the number of parts are displayed.

３） 3) The part currently displayed to push an arrow button

changes per five pieces.
（When 10 is chosen with the part confirm num of
laser CAM, it changes per ten pieces.）

４） 4) The part clicked when the part number on a list was

double-clicked is displayed on the leftmost.

５）
5) A double click of the thumbnail currently displayed
will padd parts (refer to Chapter K-21).

6) Snap move・Snap copy・Add parts・Move rotation・

６） Copy rotation・When the number of parts fluctuates by
deletion, the argmnt num and the relevant line of the
part list change into red in case of increase. The
argmnt num and the relevant line of the part list
change into blue in case of decrease.

The number of parts decreases when a part is

moved to a position to interfere in the outside of
the workpiece and the workpiece.
The number of parts varies even according to the
movement between the workpiece that QTY of the
workpiece is different.

Placed the number of members does not increase

or decrease in the undo redo button.

K1-52
 K1 Free nesting
Many-kind small
11. Free nesting Many-kind small quantity 11
quantity
12. Free nesting Few-kind large quantity
13. Free nesting Try of size of kinds and quantity
Execute free nesting. After executing 13. arrangement request nesting execute, execute anyone of
many types less amount / less types much amount / some test when want to change the method of
nesting execute.
There is subtle difference in arrangement result, please select suitable command.

[Multi-kind small quantity]

When work width in configuration direction is not above 2 columns, it is valid when number of
each one is small. During A/T/L/Q configuration designation and part configuration sequence
selection, always consider material utilization of adjacent figures for configuration.
[Few-kind large quantity]
It is valid when there are more than two columns in work width direction for the same part. In
order to enhance material utilization rate in width and length directions for returning adjustment
configuration, you should designate for no configuration first like A/T/L/Q configuration, or,
configuration designation of part configuration order is not executed as the method of facilitating
material utilization like F or A.
[Test of size of kinds and quantity]
Multi-kind small quantity and few-kind large quantity, two calculation methods, are used, and the
one having a higher material utilization rate as the configuration result will be employed. When
there is more than one work, execute calculation one by one. When the number is below 2, remove
used works and parts, perform calculation on basis of multi-kind small quantity and few-kind large
quantity, and adopt the one with higher material utilization rate.

Precautions
It takes time to execute nesting in matrix bestnest.

If you run the nesting in the zero value of the arrangement between members gap
It does not check overlap to be rearranged.

K1-53
 K1 Free nesting
Nesting Error
14
confirmation

14 Nesting Error confirmation

When high-speed free nesting is [abnormal ended], confirm the message of results.

Error
Confirm

Error
Confirm

List of main messages

No. Message Reason / action

1 Product continuous number is not registered. Nesting code is not registered.

2 CPU-ID is not suitable. Use the installation CD ROM to perform an overwrite

installation. For details, refer to the installation manual.

3 Job indicating: default, job open error. When configuration requirement list cannot be
registered, perform registration in [configuration
requirements registration].

4 Not all part sheets can be configured. There is no work which can meet matrix alternation
condition in matrix best nest (all parts can be
configured). Designate the matrix which can be
configured for alternation, please set matrix best nest
designation to be invalid.

5 Best nest should be invalid in this module. Best nest is valid in edge material management nesting,
please set it to be invalid in edge material management
nesting.

6 Remaining materials cannot be used for Designate edge material work in work designation,
configuration in this module. execute multi-kind small quantity or few-kind large
quantity or test of size of kinds and quantity. Only
designate rectangle work. Edge materials should be used
for a special purpose.

K1-54
 K1 Free nesting
15 Report

15-1. Free nesting Report

Display the report of free nesting results.

Configuration results report

WorkSheetName Total
psdemo 1 （WorkSheet total number）

K1-55
 K1 Free nesting
15 Report

15-2. Set arrangement Report (without SP material)

The report of the set arrangement execution result is displayed. (without SP material)

There are two kinds about in the set arrangement, it is the SP material (material arranged in the
space) and none.
It explains the report without the SP material.
When nesting is completed

Set arrangement completed Number of pairs = 8

The message is displayed. *The number of pairs changes.

Explanation of report
Configuration results report
Job name: DEFAULT

Worksheet Stock #1 type and name of configured

Name of sheet *** worksheet and number
Number 1 indicated
Size of work(vertical size x horizontal size) 1000.00x1500.00 (Display configured worksheet vertical size x horizontal
size).
Actual configured rectangle size 1000.00x1385.17 (Display actual configuration area vertical size x horizontal size).

Configuration parts total area 826824.09 / (Display total area of configuration parts)
Worksheet area 1500000.00 (Display configured worksheet area)
55.12% (Display the proportion of worksheet area to total area
of
configuration parts)
Configuration parts total area 826824.09 / (Display total area of configuration parts)
Actual configured rectangle size 1385173.55 (Display the proportion of actual configured
part area
59.69% of configuration parts)
Name of part (Name of configuration part, configured number / required number)
ps3 88/11000 Number actually arranged
ps5 56/7000 / The maximum number that can be arranged by number of maximum
pairs
ps7 72/9000
ps9 24/3000

Subtotal 240/30000 Number actually arranged

/ The maximum number that can be arranged by number of maximum
pairs
Total configuration (List of nesting)

Name of part Total

ps3 88/11000 (@11x8) Number actually arranged
ps5 56/7000 (@7x8) / The maximum number that can be arranged by number of maximum
pairs
ps7 72/9000 (@9x8) (@NumberofsetsxNumberofpairsthatwasabletobearrangedactually
ps9 24/3000 (@3x8)

Final total 240/30000 Number actually arranged

/ The maximum number that can be arranged by number of maximum
pairs K1-56
 K1 Free nesting
15 Report

15-3. Set arrangement Report (with the SP material)

The report of the set arrangement execution result is displayed. (with SP material)
There are two kinds about in the set arrangement, it is the SP material (material arranged in the
space) and none.
It explains the report with the SP material.
When nesting is completed

Set arrangement completed Number of pairs = 8

The message is displayed.

*The number of pairs changes.
Moreover, when you cannot arrange all SP materials

Set arrangement completed Number of pairs = 8 (some components could not be arranged. Please

check.)
The message is displayed.
In that case, the message is confirmed pushing [Error Confirm]
unable to arrange a part of the parts

ps8 10/100 : SP material

It is understood to be able to arrange only ten materials named ps8.

Explanation of report *Please refer to K1-56 for the explanation to the material name.
Name of part
ps3 88/11000 Number actually arranged
ps5 56/7000 / The maximum number that can be arranged by number of maximum
pairs
ps7 72/9000
ps9 24/3000
ps8 10/100 : SP material Number that was able to be actually
arranged
/ Demanded number
:It is shown that it is SP material.

Subtotal 240/30000 Number actually arranged

10/100 : SP material / The maximum number that can be arranged by number of
maximumpairs
Number where SP material was able to be arranged
Total configuration (List of nesting)

Name of part Total

ps3 88/11000 (@11x8) Number actually arranged
ps5 56/7000 (@7x8) / The maximum number that can be arranged by number of maximum
pairs
ps7 72/9000 (@9x8) (@NumberofsetsxNumberofpairsthatwasabletobearrangedactually
ps9 24/3000 (@3x8)
ps8 10/100 : SP material Number of SP materials

Final total 240/30000 Number actually arranged

10/100 : SP material / The maximum number that can be arranged by number of
maximumpairs K1-57
Total including SP material 250/30000 Number of totals including SP material
 K1 Free nesting
16 Snap move(Move and rotate)

16. Snap move(Move and rotate)

17. Snap copy(Move and rotate)
18. Gap width
Tracking movement of configuration parts and figures of gap width is performed at the same time,
press arrow key ( , , , ) to return.

When using this function after nesting, since gap width inherits and uses the value of the gap between

argmnt parts used by nesting, the gap width input of 3) is unnecessary.

Please replace 「move」in an upper table as「copy」in the case of snap copy (rotation copy).

It can be copied continuously in the case of snap copy (rotation copy) by pushing an Enter key after a

keyboard inputs the number of continuous copying after a copying point is decided by 5)

K1-58
 K1 Free nesting
16 Snap move(Move and rotate)

The following operations are possible only by the command of「snap move」and「snap copy」.

It cannot be used in「move rotation」and「copy rotation」.

(1) The menu of「snap move」or「snap copy」is pushed, and a part which it wants to copy move is chosen. It is

also possible to choose several parts by rectangle selection and additional selection.

(2) Snap argmnt begins when a choice is confirmed.

When parallel translation by a mouse and rotation by the keyboard every direction key are performed, and when an

arranged part and a workpiece are contacted, a part will not move.

On this occasion, the default value of the gap between parts becomes a gap between parts at the time of nesting.

Position which
can arrange a
(3)
part without
interfering
Mouse position

(3) A part is arranged in the position which can arrange a part without interfering by right-click.

The interval of parts opens and arranges the interval of gap width.

It arranges at a part and a workpiece, without opening the interval of gap width.

It can be moved by the snap argmnt as well between the workpiece.

Edge allowance clamp・positioning block・division line judges a snap as well as the workpiece, too.

It can arrange also in an inner hole.

Moreover, also between an inner hole and an outside hole, although argmnt is possible, when it pushes
「re-argmnt」, it judges with those with an overlap.

When the arranged position is outside, a part is desplayed by purple.

You can view the status of the interference of member When it is set to ON, the laser CAM set the "snap drag

display".

K1-59
 K1 Free nesting
16 Snap move(Move and rotate)

It is the list of error messages and solutions.

Error message Solution
Too many parts are selected.
Please reduce the number of the selected parts.
Please reduce select parts.
Snap move and snap copy cannot be used to the drawing
There are not nesting results. and nesting result which is not the drawing called after
individual part registration.
In parts display mode, layer list cannot
Please push a layer list after closing an argmnt parts list.
display.

Notes for Snap Arrangement

・You may afterimage If you view the screen of the deployment member other than those listed.
Please refresh the screen with the F5 key when afterimage remained.

・This is done only with respect to the outer circumferential shape gap width display.
Gap shape respect to the inner hole will not be displayed.

• If the value of the member division angle of member registration is large,

If you determined that there is no interference in the snap-snap move copy,
It may be determined that there is interference in the re-arrangement.

Or re-member registration by reducing the member division angle,

Please to the placement result is OK if there are no problems with visual confirmation.

K1-60
 K1 Free nesting
19 Re-arrangement

19. Re-arrangement
When manually changing the position of the additional part to edit configuration results, edit
configuration results report contents and material utilization rate are reflected.

Arrangement demand nesting

Execution Execution

＊Please select [NO] on the arrangement

result confirmation screen when you want
to edit the arrangement result.

Re-Arran
ge

＊ When [YES] is selected on the arrangement result

Report confirmation screen, individual registration and the
generation edge material registration are done by the
automatic operation.
＊When the argmnt parts list is displayed, a dialog closes.

When there is an overlap of parts, a warning message is displayed and an interference part is desplayed in
red.
The judgment of an overlap performs not only an overlap of appearance but the judgment of whether the
interval of the gap between argmnt parts set between parts in the argmnt demand table is open.
When「YES」is pushed, interference is disregarded and individual registration of a nesting result is
performed.
When「NO」is pushed, the argmnt parts list is displayed and it returns to argmnt result edit.
When there is an overlap of a workpiece and a part / a protrusion of a part, a warning message is displayed
and an overlap / the protruding portion are desplayed in yellow.
When「YES」is pushed, a protruding part is deleted and individual registration of a nesting result is
performed.

K1-61
When「NO」is pushed, it isn't deleted and returned to argmnt result edit.

K1-62
 K1 Free nesting
Free nesting Flow

20. Free nesting Flow

4 8
Number of parts in 4. of above table is specified, perform psdemo work configuration.
Gap between parts is 5mm, and edge allowance is 10mm when direction is as shown in 4.
In part registration, inner hole of demo3 part is specified.

Arrangement demand nesting Arrangement demand nesting

Execution Execution

K1-63
 K1 Free nesting
Free nesting Flow

K1-64
 K1 Free nesting
Free nesting Flow

11)

＊「The drawing of arrangement result has completed.

Edge material is generating. (one piece) 」 is
displayed.
＊ In the case that edge materials has generated,
display the piece number of the generated edge
material. (In the case that the rate of space of part
which has not been arranged is bigger than the value
which is set in edge material output parameter,
display the rate as edge material.)

12) Check the arrangement result.

YES
12) YES
＊If 「Edge material register has completed. (1 -
demo????) 」 has been displayed, register has
completed.
＊The arrangement result is registered with file being
named as「demo001」.
13) ＊The generated edge material is registered with file
being named as「demo001」.

13) Then, perform path setting via file management,

nesting results should be adjusted beforehand.
Free nesting｜report
F
1
14) Configuration results indicate the end, or
F
F1: End 3
＊ When report is printed, or F3: Print

K1-65
 K1 Free nesting
Free nesting Flow

15) 15)

16) 16)

18)

17) 17)

18)

19) 19)

20)

K1-66
 K1 Free nesting
21 Add parts

21．Add parts

When the「part load type」is set as「Auto」by laser CAM setting and the parts can be added during
nesting result indication.
It becomes the same operation as a part load in case of the one except for that. Please refer to
K1-2.

a) File name input load

1) Load file name
2) Argmnt position is specified.
Argmnt position ,
Or argmnt coordinate value Ｘ ， Ｙ

b) Call from the list

1) ／
*Parts list rises.
*A part of a taskbar is clicked
when the part list has already risen.
2) The part name to call is double-clicked.
（ It is 2 times quickly.）
3) An argmnt position is specified.
Argmnt position ,
Or an argmnt coordinate value Ｘ ， Ｙ

* To except for the above-mentioned method

2) It unites with the part name which calls a cursor.
（ Or an arrow key）
3) F1 Or F1:Call
4) An argmnt position is specified.

*Or
2) It unites with the part name which calls a cursor.
（ Or an arrow key）
3) When the outline figure is displayed on the right
side of the list, the outline figure of the part name
to call is double-clicked.
（ It is 2 times quickly.）
4) An argmnt position is specified.

c) Call from an argmnt parts list

Please refer to chapter K1-10 「argmnt parts list」.

The specification by the drag of an argmnt position and

mouse click is operated similarly to「snap move」and
「snap copy」.
Please refer to portions of 「The following operation is
possible only by the command of the 「snap move」 and
「snap copy」.」 of K1-16 snap move (rotation move).

K1-68
 K2 Automatic nesting
1 Part material Save

[K2] Automatic nesting

Automatic nesting means that a necessary number of plural parts in work sheet are configured
efficiently.
Note) When the part for automatic nesting has four angles, automatic returning is not possible.
Or, small parts cannot be configured in larger holes (part in part).

1. Part material Save [K1] 1

2. Part material Load [K1] 2

3. Work sheet Load (Save) [K1] 8

For your reference.

K2-1
 K2 Automatic nesting
4 Automatic nesting

4. Automatic nesting
Input configuration parts and number.

K2-2
 K2 Automatic nesting
5 Report

5. Report [K1]18
6. Move and rotate [K1]19
7. Copy and rotate [K1]20
8. Gap width [K1]21
9. Processing reference point [J1]1
10. Path setting Manual [J1]12
11. Path setting Automatic [J1]13
12. Path setting Arrange order [J1]14
13. Path setting Check [J1]15
14. Interference check path Automatic [J3]1
15. Interference check path Arrange order [J3]2
16. Interference avoidance setting [J3]3
17. Rapid feed Erase all [J1]18
18. Rapid feed Erase [J1]19
19. Rapid feed change Rapid feed 1 [J3]27
20. Rapid feed change Rapid feed 2 [J3]28
For your reference.

21. Yield recalculation Whole of board

22. Yield recalculation In real rectangle
When manually adding parts or changing position of part, perform material utilization
calculation again.
Material utilization whole of indicates configuration part area / work sheet
recalculation board area.
Material utilization in real indicates configuration part area / real
recalculation rectangle configuration
rectangle area.

Please do not edit or move notes described the yield.

K2-3
 K2 Automatic nesting
20 Yield recalculation

Real configuration rectangle area is that of rectangles which border the configuration part
from outside.

[Precautions on recalculation]
1. Area of the part is calculated according to red line figure displayed in registration of parts.
When the part has
a hole in which inner holes are designated, take out their area. If the following figures are used
for registration of a part, big circle in inner hole designation is shown in Fig.2, area of the part
used in material utilization calculation is that of slanting line part in Fig.3

2. Work sheet is valid in work sheet callout or that of screen displayed in free nesting. After
ungrouping, work sheet is extruded, please note.
3. When plural works exist on the screen in executing this command, errors occur.
4. In executing this command, errors occur to work sheet on screen or when there is no part.
Recalculation of material utilization for figures, etc in blanks of configuration results can be
neglected.

K2-4
 K2 Automatic nesting
Automatic nesting flow

Automatic nesting flow

In the right table, 3 is the number
designated in parts configuration,
psdemo work.
Gap between parts is 5mm, and Edge
allowance X, Y is 10mm for parts
configuration.

K2-5
 K2 Automatic nesting
Automatic nesting flow

K2-6
 K2 Automatic nesting
Automatic nesting flow

K2-7
 K2 Automatic nesting
Automatic nesting flow

Configure empty work via free nesting, you can perform automatic nesting configuration.

K2-8
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

[L] NC input/output
[L1] NC Creation
1. NC Data Creation NC Creation
◼ Function
This function creates NC data from a CAD drawing where the path has been set.

◼ Operation

1) 1) Press NC I/O | NC Create

NC Data Create | NC Create .

The NC Data Creation Parameter Table

then displays. The table content is shown
on the following page.

2) After specifying the settings, press [OK].

3) The NC data is created. NC data creation is

complete when the color of all figures
changes to red.

When processing time calculate was

set to “use processing conditions” by
Setting - Laser CAM setting, but the
set processing conditions cannot be
found in NC data creation parameter
table, the follow dialog will be
displayed.When you want to execute
processing time calculate roughly,
please select “YES”,When you want to
set parameter again, please select
“NO”.

About the method that input

processing conditions from processing
machine, Please refer to L2-1
processing conditions calculate
parameter processing conditions FD
Input(NC machine name is M3)or
I1-19 Auto condition register condition
１ (NC machine name is M700 or
M800).

When processing time calculation was set to

“High Acc” by Set－Change The Setting－
Laser CAM, High Acc Prcs Time Cal is

L1- 1
 executed after creating NC data.
It does not mean having changed the
machine only by changing the machine of NC
creation dialog.
The machine change should change the
machine of a processing conditions tool bar
surely.

L1- 2
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

NC Data Creation Parameter Table

Main item Sub item Setting content Range
Program name Set registering program name (NC file name)
when in NC formation.
「/」and「¥」can be used to specify folders too. In
the case that there are over 20 characters in the
file name, the barcode of NC file name of process
instruction manual with barcode will not be
displayed.
Machine setting Cutting Specifies the NC machine name.
machine
Setting
Corresponding machine models
value
M2 H, H2
HB, HC, HD, HD2, HV, LB, LX,
M3
LZ, LV
M700 NX, HV Ⅱ , HS,
eX,HV2-R,eX-S,RX,
XL, NX-F, eX-F, RX-F, XL-F,
SR-F,
SR-32XP
M800 eX-F[D-CUBES],
GX-F[D-CUBES]
Machine No. Specifies the machine No. which was specified at 1 to 10
[L2] 2. Processing Time Parameter | Process
Condition FLD Input.
Machining Material Specifies the material to be processed. M2/M3 is
conditions Specify the same material name as that which max. of 4
settings was specified at [I1] MANUAL SET / chars. (5
10.Automatic condition registration Condition2 chars. or
M2, or 11.Automatic condition registration less for
Condition2 M300, or 13.please set the material material
same as input material by aperture and gas
identification processing conditions automatical type)
setting. Option, 13. add/delete can done by M700/M800
aperture identification processing automatic is max of 8
setting. chars
Please refer to I1-21 about the material name of
early stage arrangement.
Gas type selects the gas type to be processed. M2/M3 is
Specify the same gas type as that which was max. of 3
specified at [I1] MANUAL SET / 10.Automatic chars. (5
condition registration Condition2 M2, or chars. or
11.Automatic condition registration Condition2 less for
M300, or 13.please set the gas type same as material
input gas by aperture identification processing and gas
conditions automatical setting. Option, 13. type)
add/delete can done by aperture identification M700/M800
processing automatic setting. is max of 3
Please refer to I1-22 about the gas type of early chars
stage arrangement.

L1- 2-1
 Lens Focus Only set M700 or M800 Max of 3
Please choose the Lens Focus which need be chars.
processed.
Chose, through [I1]13, diameter of aperture
processing condition setting can be
added/deleted automatically.

Nozzles Only set M700 or M800 Max of 3

diameter Please choose the Nozzles diameter which need chars.
be processed.
Choice, through [I1]13, diameter of aperture
processing condition setting can be
added/deleted automatically.
Please refer to I1-22 about the Len focus of early
stage arrangement.
Secondary Only set M700 or M800 Max of 3
number Enters processing condition Secondary number chars.
Please refer to I1-22 about the nozzle diameter of
early stage arrangement.
Thickness Specifies the board thickness of the material to M2/M3 is
be processed. 0.1 to 99.9
M700/M800
is 0.01 to
99.99
Start end code Use condition 1 and display the start end code 1 to 99
number when prioritizing the setting of
「automatic condition register table」.
Automatic Not used Disables the automatic processing conditions
machining setting function.
conditions Use Condition Performs automatic hole dia. recognition
setting 1 processing conditions setting and pierce
conditions automatic setting.
Aperture identification processing
conditions automatical setting enabled on
processing machines equipped with DR
control.
When the cutting condition display check
box is turned on, the result of recognizing
the hole dia. is displayed.
When the piercing condition display check
box is turned on, the result of setting the
piercing condition automatically is
displayed.

Use Condition Automatically specifies the same processing

2 conditions as those used in the J-version or
earlier.
Enabled on processing machines without
DR control.
When M700 or M800,you cannot choose
condition 2

L1- 2-2
Detailed These settings are enabled only when
settings "Conditions 2"
is selected.
Edge If edge conditions have been registered at [I1]
treatment Manual Settings, 11.Automatic condition
registration Condition2 M300, this setting
enables/disables those edge conditions.
Macro offset Selects the laser macro offset amount when a
No. has hole
priority has been created at the laser macro. When the
check-box is selected (enabled), the specified
offset No. is selected. When the check-box is
deselected (disabled), the offset amount
registered at the suitable processing conditions
for the hole in question is selected.

L1- 3-2
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

Main item Sub item Setting content Range

Details
settings
Condition Although the processing conditions are
switching registered according to the line length and arc
corner-R diameter specified at [I1] MANUAL SET /
value 10.Automatic condition registration
Condition2 M2, or 11.Automatic condition
registration Condition2
M300, processing conditions switching does not
occur at the portion of the corner-R (connected
at both R ends) or semi-corner-R (connected at
either
R end) which connects to the R. However, at
connections with small arcs, the circle may
become too large if the processing speed is fast.
Therefore, when edge treatment is set to "NO",
the condition switch corner R value switches
the connected-arc processing conditions for
arcs which are smaller
than the specified R setting value.
* When the processing conditions tool bar is displayed and the processing conditions automatic
setting of selected is set to the 「not used」 or the 「use thecondition 1」or the 「use the
condition 2」 by setting -Processing machine information setting, offset direction parameter is
used as a default value it has set in information processing machine, rather than the previous
value.

← Line(short)
← Line(long)
← Arc(small)
← Arc(large)

Condition switch corner R value: 5 ( R Condition switch corner R value: 20 (>R

radius) radius)
→ Switching does not occur. → Switching occurs
Front end: : :
Connected M106 M106 M106 M106
Back end: G01X20. M103 G01X20.
Connected G02Y-10.R10. M103
G01Y-10. G02Y-10.R10.
: M105 M105
G01Y-10.
:

:
:
Front end: M106
M106
Connected M106 M106 G01X20.
G01X20.
Back end: M103 M103
G02Y-10.R10.
Not connected G02Y-10.R10.
M105 M105 M105 M105
G01X10.
G01X10.
:
:
:
:L1- 3
M105 M105
M105 M105 G01X20.
G01X20.
M103 M103
M103 M103 G03X10.R10.
G03X10.R10. M106
Front end:
Not connected
Back end:
Connected

Sizes are as follows: Radius = R10; Line = 10 or 20

L1- 4
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

Condition switch corner Condition switch corner Condition switch corner

R value: 3 ( R1, R2 radius) R value: 20 R value: 20 (>R1, R2 radius)
→ Switching does not occur. ( R1 radius, >R2 radius) → Switching occurs
→ Switching does not occur.
Switching occurs
Line – Arc:
M105
Connected M105 R1
M103 M105
Arc – Arc: M103
Connected
R2
Arc – Line: M104()
Connected M104

M106
: : :
M105 M105 M105
G01X5. G01X5. G01X5.
G02Y-5.R5. M103 M103
G03X20.R20. G02Y-5.R5. G02Y-5.R5.
G01X20. M104 () M104
: G03X20.R20. G03X20.R20.
G01X20. M106
: G01X20.
:
:
() When there is an R2
(Switching does not
occur) that connects to
both the front and back
ends of R1 (switches
conditions), condition
switching occurs because
R2 immediately follows
R1.

Sizes are as follows: R1 radius = R5; R2 radius = R15; Line = 5 or 20

Cautions
1. Combined use with the edge treatment function is not possible. This function is only
enabled when the edge treatment function is OFF. If the edge treatment function is
ON, the condition switching corner R value setting is always processed as "0".
2. If low-speed corner R processing occurs, followed by a long line (or large-radius arc),
the condition switching corner R function may cause a processing error (burning,
etc.) due to the abrupt transition to high-speed conditions.
3. Arcs with angles larger than 180 are not recognized as a corner R. Therefore,
condition switching does not occur.

L1- 5
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

Main item Sub item Setting content Range

NC output Output code Specifies the NC data's position command. ABC
setting ABS ... NC data is created with absolute INC
coordinates (G90).
INC ... NC data is created with relative
coordinates (G91).

When creating NC data for figures

configured by the automatic (free)
nesting function, always specify the
"ABS" setting.

When figures include a laser macro,

always specify the "ABS" setting.

Circle code Specifies the circle code format. IJ

IJ ....... Specifies the "circle code as center" R
format.
R ........ Specifies the "circle code radius"
format.

The IJ format is always adopted for

circles, even if the R-format is specified.

The IJ mode should be specified for

circles with micro joints or end joints
because there is less center coordinate
deviation during reverse conversions.

<Circle code IJ> <Circle code R>

G00X10.Y10. G00X10.Y10.
G01Xa1Yb1 G01Xa1Yb1
G02Xa2Yb2I30-a1J30-b1 G02X a2Yb2R10.
G01X50.Y10. G01X50.Y10.

L1- 6
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

Main item Sub item Setting content Range

NC output Part rotation Set the location for outputting part rotation Main
setting information information. sub
output
Main ･ ･ ･ Output part rotation information
(G68R_,G69) to main program of NC data. In the case
that the same part is rotating, sub program become
only one.
Sub ･ ･ ･ Output part rotation information (the
program whose sub program has rotated itself) to sub
program
of NC data. In the case that the same part is rotating,
sub program become multiple.

<Part rotation <Part rotation

information output information output sub>
main> M66
M66 G90
G90 G92X0.Y0.
G92X0.Y0. G00X13.Y5.G40
G00X13.Y5.G40 M98H10
G68R0. G00X30.728Y10.657G40
M98H10 M98H20
G69 G01G40
G00X30.728Y10.657G40 M30
G68R45. N10
M98H10 (A / 13.0 X 10.0)
G69 G91
G01G40 M98P9010
M30 G01G41X-3.Y0.
N10 G01X0.Y-5.
(A / 13.0 X 10.0) G01X-10.Y0.
G91 G01X0.Y10.
M98P9010 G01X10.Y0.
G01G41X-3.Y0. G01X0.Y-5.
G01X0.Y-5. M121
G01X-10.Y0. M199
G01X0.Y10. G90
G01X10.Y0. M99
G01X0.Y-5. N20
M121 (A / 13.0 X 10.0)
M199 G91
G90 M98P9010
M99 G01G41X-2.121Y-2.121
G01X3.536Y-3.536
G01X-7.071Y-7.071
G01X-7.071Y7.071
G01X7.071Y7.071
G01X3.536Y-3.536
M121
M199
G90
M99

L1- 7
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

Main item Sub item Setting content Range

NC output Condition When selected (ON), the M100 code is added even if
setting selection the automatic condition switching function is not
(M100) output used.
joint width It is set whether the width of created end micro -10～
change joint is changed collectively. 100
ON ... It changes into the value inputted into the
edit box collectively.
OFF ... It does not change.
*The joint width of a figure of end micro joint
attribute is not changed. The joint width of NC data
outputted is changed.
When it is set as -10～0, micro joint width is set to 0
and an uncut is nothing and becomes NC data in
which only the pierce was added.
The joint width of NC creation dialog is not
reflected in the joint width of condition 1
dialog.
Decimal point Specifies the NC data output format.
output ON ..... NC data is output in the decimal point
format (mm units).
OFF ... NC data is output in the integer format
(micron units)

<Decimal point <Decimal point

output ON> output OFF>
G01X10.Y10. G01X10000Y10000
G01X10.Y30. G01X10000Y30000
G01X50.Y30. G01X50000Y30000
G01X50.Y10. G01X50000Y10000
G01X10.Y10. G01X10000Y10000

Offset Enables/disables the tool diameter offset.

direction Yes ..... The tool diameter offset (G41 & G42) is
output specified.
No ...... The tool diameter offset (G41 & G42) is not
specified.

L1- 8
Offset enable Specifies the tool diameter offset No. when there is Invalid
an offset direction. -1 to 100
NC
No. Explanation
machine
Deletes the original NC
M3, M2
-1 offset No. from the NC
M700
(OFF) reverse conversion
M800
CAD data.
Offset No. is not output
to newly created CAD
M3 data. The original NC
M700 0 offset amount remains
M800 as it is in the NC
reverse conversion
CAD data.
M3 The offset amount is
1 to 100
M700,M800 the amount registered
at the specified offset
M2 1 to 40 No.

Always specify a 1 to 40 offset No. when

using an M2 NC machine with the
offset direction set to YES.

L1- 9
 Sequence No. Enables/disables the sequence No. No numbers
over 10000 are recognized.

Sequence SP
Operation
No. enable
Sequence No. is added
ON ON
with a space.
Sequence No. is added
– OFF
without a space.
Sequence No. is not
OFF –
added.

<Sequence No. ON> <Sequence No. ON>

<SP valid ON> <SP valid OFF>
N1 G01X10.Y10. N1G01X10.Y10.
N2 G01X10.Y30. N2G01X10.Y30.
N3 G01X50.Y30. N3G01X50.Y30.
N4 G01X50.Y10. N4G01X50.Y10.
N5 G01X10.Y10. N5G01X10.Y10.

<Sequence No.
OFF>
<SP valid OFF>
G01X10.Y10.
G01X10.Y30.
G01X50.Y30.
G01X50.Y10.
G01X10.Y10.

L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation
Main item Sub item Setting content Range
NC output NC data CRT Enables/disables NC data display during NC
settings display data creation.
YES ... NC data displays in the message area.
NO..... NC data does not display in the
message area.

L1- 10
Process length Enables/disables the processing length display
etc. comment output.
add YES ... Processing length，Beam ON numbers
comment is added at the end of the
NC data.
NO..... Processing length，Beam ON numbers
comment is not added at the end of
the
NC data.
※When M2 / M3, it is attached at the end of NC data.

※ When M700 / M800, when [NC generate: Comment

beginning display] is ON in laser CAM setting, it is added to
the beginning of NC data.
And this comment can be referenced in the dashboard
function of iQ Care Remote 4U.

<Processing length comment added ON>

:
(CUTTING_LENGTH=120.0 MM
RAPID_LENGTH=0.00MM)
(TOTAL_LENGTH120.0MM)
(BEAM_ON = 12 MARKING_ON = 0
PREPIERCE_ON = 0)
(#_)％(#_)
:
<Processing length comment added OFF>
:
(#_)％(#_)

L1- 11
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

Main item Sub item Setting content Range

NC output Modal length Turns modal processing of X/Y coordinate ON
settings output commands ON/OFF at NC data creation. OFF
Automatic Enables/disables automatic deceleration at ON
deceleration corner areas. OFF
processing ON..... Automatic deceleration occurs at all
corner areas.
OFF ... Automatic deceleration occurs only at
areas specified by the G09 NC code.

G09G01X_Y_
Automatic G02X_Y_I_J_
deceleration
processing

G09G01X_Y_
G01X_Y_

Automatic deceleration processing

indicates an exact stop check (G09).

This function cannot be used at

connecting circles and corner R.

The corner It is set whether the NC code which added the 0.1
part R Addition R code to the pin angle corner part is ～99.9
outputted.
When outputting, a check is put in and a value
is inputted.
*The corner part form of a figure is not
changed. The R code is added to the corner part
of NC data outputted.
* The shape with the outer perimeter pierce
attribute is the target.
* It is not set to the additional part of the
linear pierce.
Priority is given to automatic deceleration
processing when the check is contained in
both automatic deceleration processing
and add pin angle corner part R.

L1- 10-1
 R code does not appear in the bent portion
of the Edge-Cut operation

Inside add It is set whether the R code is outputted also to ON

the pin angle corner part of the inside. OFF

L1- 10-1
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

START/END START/END Specify start/end code Nos. when NC data is 1 to 99

code code created. These codes can be edited to conform
to
the customer's processing conditions. Start/end
codes may also be added. For details, refer to
the following pages.

For details regarding the start/end code

factory settings, refer to the following
pages.
( See the "Start/End Codes" section.)

"Automatic When selected (ON), NC data is created using ON

conditions the start/end codes specified at [I1] 13. OFF
registration Automatic Hole Dia. Recognition Processing
table" settings Conditions Settings.
have priority
When this function is used, either the
"Conditions 1" or "Conditions 2" may be
used.

＊ About processing performance collection code （ M750、 M751 ） of individual part of nesting
program

When [NC Generate: Part Performance Code Output (M750)] is set to ON in laser CAM setting,
in the nesting program for M700 / M800, M code for collecting processing performance is
automatically output at the beginning and end of the sub program.

With the dashboard function of iQ Care Remote4U, processing performances of individual parts
can be referenced.

※When "Scribe priority processing" is ON in laser CAM setting, the sub-Pro for scribe and the
sub-Pro for cutting are separated and output. To collect performances only sub-Pro for cutting,
sub-Pro for scribe does not output sub-pro comment line, M750 line, and M751 line.

L1-10-2
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

 Start/End Code List Display

As shown below, each of the Start/End Code Table display screens shows 17 of the 4 items. Use
the [→] (right arrow) key to proceed from one screen to the next until all the required codes have
been entered.

Use no more than 150 chars. per item when registering the following: START, Beam ON
(1,2,3),
Beam OFF (1,2,3), Marking ON, Marking OFF, Nesting Sub Pro START, Nesting Sub Pro
END, and END, pre-pierce start, pre-pierce end, pre-pierce beam ON, pre-pierce beam OFF,
pre-pierce cut ON,
In all the items ended, please set registering char number as 150 at most each item.

"Beam ON 2" and "Beam ON3" settings in the created NC data are processed as "Beam ON
1" when reverse conversion occurs.

"Beam OFF 2" and "Beam OFF3" settings in the created NC data are processed as "Beam
OFF 1" when reverse conversion occurs.

The "Beam OFF 2" attribute is automatically added at the "Add micro joint" function.

When creating NC data which uses "Beam ON (OFF) 2" and "Beam ON (OFF) 3" settings,
the "Beam ON (OFF) 2" and "Beam ON (OFF) 3" codes must be registered. If not
registered, the Beam ON
(OFF) 1"code will automatically be added

After upgrade, when you perform NC generation of the edge side process drawing for the
first time, please use after setting the suitable code for the applicable column of Start/End
code in advance.

L1-11
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

Start/End Codes
1. Start/End Codes

For the start/end code file editing procedure, refer to item 24. "Setting Start/End Codes".

Use no more than 150 chars. per item when registering the following: START, Beam ON
(1,2,3), Beam OFF (1,2,3), Marking ON, Marking OFF, Nesting Sub Pro START,
Nesting Sub Pro END,
and END,pre-pierce start, pre-pierce end, pre-pierce beam ON, pre-pierce beam OFF,
pre-pierce cut ON, Height ON/OFF(EgCt), Edge side beam on, Height ON（Cutting）,
Height OFF（cutting）, Edge side beam off,
In all the items ended, please set registering char number as 150 at most each item.

2. Standard Start/End Codes

NC
No. Explanation
machine
1 General-purpose start/end code for thin-board to thick-board cutting.
Start/end code (conditions setting) for high-speed cutting of boards with
2
M3 thicknesses of less than 4mm (SPC, SUS).
71 No.1, changed for interference avoidance function code.
72 No.2, changed for interference avoidance function code.
11 General-purpose start/end code for thin-board to thick-board cutting.
Start/end code for high-speed cutting of boards with thicknesses of less
12
than 4mm (SPC, SUS).
M2
13 Start/end code for cutting irregular (concave/convex) material.
14 Start/end code for aluminum, SUS non-acid, and air cutting.
15 Start/end code for automatic M2 processing conditions setting.
21 No.1 changed for the code of M700
22 No.2 changed for the code of M700
81 No.21, changed for interference avoidance function code.
M700
82 No.22, changed for interference avoidance function code.
For F-CUT processing *Refer to F-CUT processing option operation
91
manual for details.

Please don’t mark on the material which has high reflectance(such as Al and Cu )

In the standard start end, code pre-pierce start, pre-pierce end, pre-pierce beam ON,
pre-pierce beam OFF, the five code pre-pierce is oxygen and cut is nitrogen.
pre-pierce and cut，in the condition of using oxygen, please refer to the example [J2
pre-pierce procedure of operation]

L1-12
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

3. Start/End Code Descriptions

No.1 .... M3 general-purpose start/end code for thin-board to thick-board cutting.
Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 pre-pierce
Start Scribing ON Scribing OFF
(Red) (White) start
#501=105 M98P9010 M121 S0 M87 #503=101
#502=110 M199 M#502 M199
M66 M80
M198
M86
Edge side
Pre-pierce beam Pre-pierce Pre-pierce For Edge side
Pre-pierce end ON/OFF
ON beam OFF Cutting beam on
(EgCt)
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010
M74 M199
M120
M75
Height ON Height OFF Edge side
End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
G01G40
M30

Processing at condition No.5 of the processing conditions registered on the NC machine.

Specify processing condition No. 101 to 110 for variable #501.
Beam ON code is registered NC machine program No.9010.
For Marking details, refer to the "Marking NC Data" (L1-21). In the setting shown
above, processing condition No.110 is assigned for variable #502, and the Marking
condition should therefore be registered at the NC machine's processing condition No.10.
The Beam OFF 2 attribute is automatically added at the micro joint addition function.
Be sure to register the appropriate Beam OFF code (for the start/end code being used) in
the "Beam OFF 2" column as well as in the "Beam OFF 1" column.
When using pre-pierce beam OFF code, carrying out rapid feed moving of pre-pierce
processing please set M87 as M121 in the condition of setting gas as ON.
When using pre-pierce beam OFF code, carrying out rapid feed moving of pre-pierce
processing, please delete M191 in the condition of not improving emulating（adding
M199 is safer in the condition that rapid feed moving distance is longer）

L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

L1-13
No.2 .... M3 start/end code (conditions setting) for high-speed cutting of boards with
thicknesses of less than 4mm (SPC, SUS).
Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 Scribing pre-pierce
Start Scribing ON
(Red) (White) OFF start
#501=105 M198M101 M121 S0 M87 #503=101
#502=110 M120 M74 M#502 M199
M66M101 M#501G4X200 M80
M198
M86
Edge side
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce beam Pre-pierce Pre-pierce For Edge side
end ON beam OFF Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010
M74 M199
M120
M75
Height ON Height OFF Edge side
End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
G01G40
M75
M199
M30

Processing at condition No.5 of the processing conditions registered on the NC machine.

Specify processing condition No. 101 to 110 for variable #501.
Beam ON code is registered NC machine program No.9010.
For Marking details, refer to the "Marking NC Data" (L1-21). In the setting shown
above, processing condition No.110 is assigned for variable #502, and the Marking
condition should therefore be registered at the NC machine's processing condition No.10.
The Beam OFF 2 attribute is automatically added at the micro joint addition function.
Be sure to register the appropriate Beam OFF code (for the start/end code being used) in
the "Beam OFF 2" column as well as in the "Beam OFF 1" column.

When using pre-pierce beam OFF code, carrying out rapid feed moving of pre-pierce
processing please set M87 as M121 in the condition of setting gas as ON.
When using pre-pierce beam OFF code, carrying out rapid feed moving of pre-pierce
processing, please delete M191 in the condition of not improving emulating.（adding
M199 is safer in the condition that rapid feed moving distance is longer）

L1-14
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation
Switching To HSC Processing Conditions In Mid-Processing Of CamMagic LA NC
Data

[Overview]
The NC data for Mitsubishi laser processing machines normally begins with a condition search code like that
shown below.
M100[SPCO2, 2.3]
A mid-processing switch to HSC processing conditions is possible by inserting a 1-line switching code
(see below) at the switching position.
M100[SSHS, 2.3]
This procedure is shown below, using the CamMagic LA operation as an example.

[Operation Example (For Nesting)]

R e g i s t e r t h e f o l low i n g s t art / e n d c ode s e t t i ngs .
Beam OFF Nesting sub pro
Start Beam ON 1 Beam ON 2 End
1 starting
#501=105 M98P9010 M100[SSHS, M121 M100 [SPC02, 2.3] G01G40
#502=109 2.3] M199 M30
M66 #501=106
M98P9010
At the "Nesting Sub Pro Start" item shown above, specify the condition search code which is not
used by HSC processing. Also, the "#501 = 105" and "#501 = 106" items should be changed to the
appropriate codes.

At the part data to be registered for nesting, add the "Beam ON 1"
attribute to the hole figure portion not used by HSC, and add the "Beam
ON 2" attribute perimeter processing figure portion used by HSC.

Beam ON 1 Beam ON 2
[Note]
Regarding the path setting order, be sure to specify all the "Beam
ON 1" settings first, followed by the "Beam ON 2" settings.
When "Beam ON 1" and "Beam ON 2" are mixed in an
alternating manner, "M100 [SPC02, 2.3]" should also be specified
for the "Beam ON 1" items.

After item parts have been configured in a nesting format, the start/end
codes at item are used to create the NC data. "Beam ON 1" codes will be used at the
hole figure data portion of each part in the usual manner, with the 1-line "M100 [SSH, 2.3]"
being inserted only before the part's perimeter processing data. Moreover, when moving to
the next part after a previous part has been cut, the data reverts to the usual condition
search code "M100 [SPC02, 2.3]" just before the next part's Sub Pro processing start.

[When Nesting Is Not Used]

If nesting is not used, no registration is required at the "Nesting Sub Pro Start" data described in item
above. At the processing figure, however, be sure to add a final "Beam OFF 2" at the perimeter
processing where switching to HSC is desired.

L1-15-1
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1 NC creation

[Example of created nesting NC data]

(#_)%(#_)
(AAA001 / 800.0 X 500.0)
#501=105
#502=110
M66
G90
G92X0.Y0.
G00X25.Y25.G40
M98H10
G00X25.Y70.G40
M98H10
G00X25.Y115.G40
M98H10
G00X25.Y160.G40
M98H10
G00X25.Y205.G40
M98H10
G01G40
M30
N10
(AAA / 65.0 X 40.0)
M100[SPCO2,2.3]
G91
M98P9010 (Beam ON 1)
G01G41X5.
G03I-10.
M121
M199
G00X20.Y-10.G40
M98P9010 (Beam ON 1)
G01G41X5.
Y5.
X-20.
Y-10.
X20.
Y5.
M121
M199
G00X15.Y5.G40
M100[SSHS,2.3] (Beam ON 2)
#501=106
M98P9010 (Beam ON 2)
G01G41X-5.
Y-15.
X-60.
Y40.
X30.
Y-20.
X30.
Y-5.
M121
M199
G90
M99
(CUTTING_LENGTH = 1689.2MM RAPID_LENGTH = 482.3MM)
(TOTAL_LENGTH = 2171.5MM)
(BEAM_ON = 3 MARKING_ON = 0 PREPIERCE_ON = 0)
(#_)%(#_)

L1-15-2
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1 NC creation

No.11 .. M2 general-purpose start/end code for thin-board to thick-board cutting.

Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 pre-pierce
Start Scribing ON Scribing OFF
(Red) (White) start
D10/ G22L9010 M87M81 M98 M87M81
M66 M74 S50T30 M99
F1000 B70F2000
M86M79
Edge side
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Edge side
end beam ON beam OFF For Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)

Height ON Height OFF Edge side

End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
G01G40
M75
M99
M30

Specify the piercing time after D10/. M75M98;

[Ex] For a piercing time of 0.5 seconds: D10/0.5 M59G4X500;
M74;
For Marking details, refer to the "Marking NC Data" (L1-21).
M79G4X200;
Register the content shown at right as program No.9010 M86G4XD10;
on the NC machine. Creation is performed at the MDI M57G4X500;
screen. M80G4X500;
M75;
The Beam OFF 2 attribute is automatically added at the G23;
micro joint addition function. Be sure to register the
appropriate Beam OFF code (for the start/end code being
used) in the "Beam OFF 2" column as well as in the
"Beam OFF 1" column.

L1-16-1
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1 NC creation

No.12 .. M2 start/end code for high-speed cutting of boards with thicknesses of less than
4mm (SPC, SUS).
Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 pre-pierce
Start Scribing ON Scribing OFF
(Red) (White) start
D10/ M75M98 M87M59M79 M98 M87M81
M66M59M79 M86G4XD10 M74 S50T30 M99
F1000 M57 B70F2000
M80G4X200 M86M79
Edge side
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Edge side
end beam ON beam OFF For Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)

Height ON Height OFF Edge side

End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
G01G40
M75M81
M99
M30
Specify the piercing time after D10/.
[Ex] For a piercing time of 0.5 seconds: D10/0.5

For Marking details, refer to the "Marking NC Data" (L1-21).

The Beam OFF 2 attribute is automatically added at the micro joint addition function. Be
sure to register the appropriate Beam OFF code (for the start/end code being used) in the
"Beam OFF 2" column as well as in the "Beam OFF 1" column.
No.13 M2 start/end code for cutting irregular
(concave/convex) material.
Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 pre-pierce
Start Scribing ON Scribing OFF
(Red) (White) start
D10/ G22L9030 M87M81 M98 M87M81
M66 M99 S50T30 M99
F1000 B70F2000
M86M79
Edge side
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Edge side
end beam ON beam OFF For Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)

Height ON Height OFF Edge side

End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
G01G40
M30
Specify the piercing time after D10/.
[Ex] For a piercing time of 0.5 seconds: D10/0.5 M98;
M59G4X500;
For Marking details, refer to the "Marking NC Data" (L1-21).
M74;
M79G4X200;
Register the content shown at right as program No.9030
on the NC machine. Creation is performed at the MDI M86G4XD10;
screen. M57G4X500;
M80G4X500;
The Beam OFF 2 attribute is automatically added at the M75;
micro joint addition function. Be sure to register the G23;

L1-16-2
appropriate Beam OFF code (for the start/end code being
used) in the "Beam OFF 2" column as well as in the
"Beam OFF 1" column.

L1-16-3
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1 NC creation

No.14 .. M2 start/end code for aluminum, SUS non-acid, and air cutting.
Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 pre-pierce
Start Scribing ON Scribing OFF
(Red) (White) start
D10/ G22L9020 G22L9021 M98 M87M81
D15/ S50T30 M99
M66 B70F2000
F1000 M86M79
Edge side
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Edge side
end beam ON beam OFF For Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)

Height ON Height OFF Edge side

End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
G01G40
M75
M99
M30

Specify the piercing time after D10/.

[Ex] For a piercing time of 0.5 seconds: D10/0.5

Specify the Z-axis retract amount after D15/.

[Ex] For a Z-axis retract amount of 3mm: D15/3

For Marking details, refer to the "Marking NC Data" (L1-21).

Register the content shown below as program Nos. 9020 and 9030 at the NC machine.
Creation is performed at the MDI screen.

[Program No.9020][Program No.9021]

M75M98; M74;
M59G4X500; M99;
M74; M87M81;
M99; G91G00Z4.0;
G91G00ZD15; G90; <Note>
M79G4X200; G23;
M86G4XD10;
M57G4X500;
M80G4X500;
M75; <Note>
M98; When creating NC data with INC output codes,
G4X500;
delete G90.
G90; <Note>
G23;

The Beam OFF 2 attribute is automatically added at the micro joint addition function. Be
sure to register the appropriate Beam OFF code (for the start/end code being used) in the
"Beam OFF 2" column as well as in the "Beam OFF 1" column.

L1-16-4
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1 NC creation

No.15 .. Start/end code for automatic M2 processing conditions setting.

Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 pre-pierce
Start Scribing ON Scribing OFF
(Red) (White) start
M66M76 G22L9900 M81M87 M98 M87M81
D12/1 S50T30 M99
B70F2000
M86M79
Edge side
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Pre-pierce For Edge side
end beam ON beam OFF Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)

Height ON Height OFF Edge side

End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
M67G22L9902
G01G40
M30

Specify copy operations at D12. For details, refer to the "*Processing By Automatic M2
Processing Conditions Setting" section.

For Marking details, refer to the "Marking NC Data" (L1-21).

Register the content shown below as program Nos. 9900 and 9902 at the NC machine.
Creation is performed at the MDI screen.

[Program No.9900][Program No.9902]

SD20TD30BD40 G201A20BD12C0
G201A20BD12C0
M75M99G23
G201A30BD12C2
M75M98 N20G23
N20MD60M86G4
XD50
M74G23
N30M75M98
MD60M86G4XD50
G23

The Beam OFF 2 attribute is automatically added at the micro joint addition function. Be
sure to register the appropriate Beam OFF code (for the start/end code being used) in the
"Beam OFF 2" column as well as in the "Beam OFF 1" column.

L1-16-5
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1 NC creation

Indicates the interference avoidance function's start/end code.

Not used by M2 Series (LC5, LC6 controllers) laser processing machines.

No.71 .. M3 general-purpose start/end code for thin-board to thick-board cutting (for

interference avoidance function)
Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 Scribing pre-pierce
Start Scribing ON
(Red) (White) OFF start
#501=105 M98P9010 M121 S0 M87 #503=101
#502=110 M#502
M66 M80
M198
M86
Edge side
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce beam Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Edge side
end ON beam OFF For Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010
M74
M120
M75
Height ON Height OFF Edge side
End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
M199
G01G40
M30

For details, refer to start/end code No.1.

No.72 .. M3 start/end code for high-speed cutting of boards with thicknesses of less than
4mm (SPC, SUS) (for condition setting & interference avoidance functions)

Start Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 Scribing ON Scribing pre-pierce

(Red) (White) OFF start
#501=105 M198M101 M121 S0 M87 #503=101
#502=110 M120 M74 M#502
M66M101 M#501G4X200 M80
M198
M86
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce beam Pre-pierce Pre-pierce For Edge side Edge side
end ON beam OFF Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010
M74
M120
M75
Height ON Height OFF Edge side End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
G01G40
M75
M199
M30

For details, refer to start/end code No.2.

L1-16-6
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1 NC creation

Diplay Start/end code for M700

Start/end code for M700, as a result of No.3 changed for the code of M700, Please refer to
Start/end code page for M3.
No.21 .. No.1 changed for the code of M700
Beam ON 1 Beam ON2 Beam OFF1 Scribing
Start Scribing ON
(Red) (White) (White) OFF
#501=108 M98P9010 M98P9023 M121 M98P9019 M121
#502=112 M199 M199
M66
pre-pierce Pre-pierce beam Pre-pierce Pre-pierce
Nest Start Nest End
start ON beam OFF For Cutting
#503=101 M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010
M74 M199
M120
M75
Edge side Height ON Height OFF Edge side
Edge side （Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
ON/OFF End
beam on
(EgCt)
M714M198M80 M125 M121 M714 M121 G01G40
G04X1.0 M120 M124 M74 M199 M30
M74 M#501 G28Z
M75
M120

For details, refer to start/end code No.1.

M98P9023 is ponch code.

No.22 .. No.1 changed for the code of M700

Start Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 Scribing ON Scribing OFF pre-pierce

(Red) (White) start
#501=108 M101 M121 M98P9019 M121 #503=101
#502=112 M198M120 M74 M199
M66M101 M#501G4X200
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce beam Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Edge side Edge side
end ON beam OFF For Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010 M101M198M80 M#501
M74 M199 G04X1.0 M120
M120 M74
M75
Height ON Height OFF Edge side End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
M75 M74 M121 G01G40
M199 M75
G28Z M199
M30

For details, refer to start/end code No.2.

L1-16-7
 L1 NC input/output
NC data creation
1
NC creation

Display the Start/end code for interference avoidance function of M700

You can not use it in M2(control device LC5,LC6)laser processing machine

No.81 .... No.71 changed for the code of M700

Beam ON 1 Beam ON2 Beam OFF1 Scribing
Start Scribing ON
(Red) (White) (White) OFF
#501=108 M98P9010 M98P9023 M121 M98P9019 M121
#502=112
M66
pre-pierce Pre-pierce beam Pre-pierce Pre-pierce
Nest Start Nest End
start ON beam OFF For Cutting
#503=101 M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010
M74
M120
M75
Edge side Height ON Height OFF Edge side
Edge side （Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
ON/OFF End
beam on
(EgCt)
M714M198M80 M125 M121 M714 M121M199 M199
G04X1.0 M120 M124 M74 G28Z G01G40
M74 M#501 M30
M75
M120
For details, refer to start/end code No.71.
M98P9023 is ponch code.

No.82 .... No.72 changed for the code of M700

Start Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 Scribing ON Scribing OFF pre-pierce

(Red) (White) start
#501=108 M101 M121 M98P9019 M121 #503=101
#502=112 M198M120 M74
M66M101 M#501G4X200
Pre-pierce Pre-pierce beam Pre-pierce Pre-pierce Edge side Edge side
end ON beam OFF For Cutting ON/OFF beam on
(EgCt)
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010 M101M198M80 M#501M120
M74 G04X1.0
M120 M74
M75
Height ON Height OFF Edge side End
（Cutting） （Cutting） beam off
M75 M74 M121 G01G40
M199 M75
G28Z M199
M30

For details, refer to start/end code No.72.

No.91 For F-CUT processing

Please refer to "NC Output for F-CUT option" operation manual for details.

L1-16-7
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1 NC creation

4 NC Data Output Example (Using Start/End Code No.1)

Beam ON 1 Beam OFF1 pre-pierce
Start Scribing ON Scribing OFF
(Red) (White) start
#501=105 M98P9010 M121 S0 M87 #503=101
#502=110 M199 M#502 M199
M66 M80
M198
M86
Pre-pierce beam Pre-pierce Pre-pierce For
Pre-pierce end End
ON beam OFF Cutting
M#503M80M198 M87 M98P9010 G01G40
M74 M199 M30
M120
M75

Start code

#503=101 pre-pierce start

code

pre-pierce Beam on
code

pre-pierce cut off code

pre-pierce Beam off
code
Beam off 1 code
The Beam OFF 2 attribute is
automatically added at the micro
Beam on 1 code joint addition function. Be sure to
register the appropriate Beam
OFF code (for the start/end code
being used) in the "Beam OFF 2"
column as well as in
the "Beam OFF 1" column.

Beam off 1 code

L1 NC input/output
End code NC data creation
1
NC creation

About start/end code content

Notes:
1) At the "Beam ON (1, 2, 3)" and "Marking ON Code" columns, specify settings that
include codes which can be recognizedL1-17-1
as "Beam ON" at the M2/M300.
2 At the "Beam OFF (1, 2, 3)" and "Marking OFF Code" columns, specify settings that
include
codes which can be recognized as "Beam OFF" at the M2/M300.
L1-17-2
 L1
NC input/output
NC data creation
About process set automatically in M2 processing condition 1
NC creation
When NC data is created on basis of CAD data, there is additional processing condition
(S.T.B.F) automatically registered.
No.15 start and end code is registered according to the following codes:
Please register NC device program number 9900 9902 again.
Beam ON1 Beam ON2 Beam ON3 Beam OFF1 Beam OFF2
Start
(red) (white) (purple) (white) (light blue)
M66M76 G22L9900 M81M87
D12/

Beam OFF3 Nesting sub Nesting sub

Lesion ON Lesion OFF End
(yellow) pro starting pro ending
M98 M87M81 M67G22L9902
S50T30 M99 G01G40
B70F2000 M30
M86M79
D12/0…not justified D12/1…justified presently D12/2…justified occasionally

L1-18
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1
NC creation

Processing condition automatic setting M2/M3 comparison

L1-19
(CUTTING_LENGTH = 607.2MM RAPID_LENGTH = 102.9MM)
(TOTAL_LENGTH = 710.1MM)
(BEAM_ON = 3 MARKING_ON = 0 PREPIERCE_ON = 0)
(#_)%(#_)

L1-20
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1
NC creation

About marking line NC data

Add marking line ON, marking line OFF codes to only figures with marking line setting
s.
Marking line ON, marking line OFF codes are registered according to the following start and
end codes.

L1-21
L1-22
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1
NC creation

When control device of LC10BV series are used, in order to register marking line processing
condition data
in control device, select in this condition.

Example) When marking line processing condition is registered in #9 (control device screen):

SOM#502M80M1 M87
98 M199
M86

It gives priority to the Mark processing when NC is generated when First Mark On NC of
the LASER CAM setting is turned ON. The processing conditions switch frequency can be
suppressed to the minimum by bringing the Mark processing together.
When First Mark On NC result is visual observation, NC inversion or NC data
checker is executed.
The subject of First Mark On NC is only registed nesting figure.

L1-23
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1
NC creation

 Example of M3 Marking NC data output

Start

A: Scribing
ON
B: Scribing
OFF

Beam ON

Beam
OFF
End

 Tool dia. offsets (G41, G42) cannot be set for figures with Marking settings.

L1-24
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1
NC creation

About head marking line processing

When output is low, there is not much time for beam ON command, therefore, no beam
will be sent,
and head marking line processing cannot be performed.
In this condition, insert DO WELL time (waiting time) in marking line ON codes.

L1-25
 SOM#502M80M198
M86
G04X0.2

105
110

L1-26
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
2
Edit
2. Edit
Display created or input NC data to edit.

1. Selection menu 1: End /2:Interrupt /3:Print /4:Description of operation

Selection method ...at the selection place, press or numbered function key.
. Contents 1: End Command ends after registering the edited NC
data.
2: Interrupt Command ends without registering the edited NC
data
3: Print Print NC data
4: Description of Display operation method for edit.
operation
2. List of edit keys Ctrl + T is to press key T while pressing Ctrl

L1-27
 L1 NC creation
NC data creation
1
Edit
Operation of edit key

L1-28
 L1 NC creation
Print
3
Print output execution

3 Print Print output execution

Created or input NC data is output from a printer.

4. Space deletion
Delete created or input spaces in NC data.

5. NC data clear
Delete the data edited in “NC data edit”.
Read NC data, in the condition where creation is not possible, press the key to input NC d
ata when
recording the creation again.

6. NC data FD management List input

Display the list of registered floppy files, and call out this list.

Only NC data on hard disc can be handled in this operation.

Please utilize inverse conversion command for drawing.
The list in this operation is only for NC data. For instance, when the registered CAD dat
a is stored on
a wrong floppy, do not set up the list, see “when floppy is not installed in the device, flop
py is empty.” displayed.
To enter the previous page . following page, press or key while pressing Shift key.
For selection menu, please refer to 3: Retrieve [M1] File management List of figures ca
lled out.
When the lamp of floppy disc is on, do not take down the floppy.
Otherwise, not only floppy, but also CAD/CAM software will be influenced badly.
Errors of floppy disc may occur due to dust. When output/input of floppy cannot be perfor
med, utilize Windows standard function [disc scanning] to confirm there is no error in the
floppy.

L1-29
 L1 NC creation
NC data FD
7 management
List delete

7 NC data FD management List delete

Display the list of registered files on floppy, and delete them from the list.

1) Delete files stored or registered on flopp

y.
Set up a list of registered files on flopp
y.
2) Move box cursor in deleted files
( or , )
In order to set up the list, place box cu
rsor
at the top of the file.
When calling out the first file, 2) can be ig
nored.
3) OK ( F1 or )
4) Set up confirmation table.
. Delete: F1 or YES
. Not delete: F2 or NO
The list in this operation is only for NC data. For instance, when the registered CAD da
ta is stored
on a wrong floppy, do not set up the list, see “when floppy is not installed in the device,
floppy is
empty.” displayed.
To enter the previous page . following page, press or key while pressing Shift ke
y.
For selection menu, please refer to 3: Retrieve [M1] File management List of figures c
alled out.
When the lamp of floppy disc is on, do not take down the floppy.
Otherwise, not only floppy, but also CAD/CAM software will be influenced badly.

8. NC data FD management Input

10. NC data FD input and output Output NC data input for registration.
1) Call out the file stored and registered o
n
floppy.
2) Name of file called out
Name of file has 8 characters at most.
Only NC data on hard disc can be handled in this operation.

L1-30
Please utilize inverse conversion command for drawing.
When the lamp of floppy disc is on, do not take down the floppy.
Otherwise, not only floppy, but also CAD/CAM software will be influenced badly.

L1-31
 L1 NC creation
NC data FD
9 management
Extension name
9. NC data FD management Extension name
In order to register NC data on the floppy of this automatic program device, there is additi
onal extension
name “NC” of “File name” for registration.
NC data registered on floppy of other company’s CAD/CAM device has no extension name
“NC”, in this
condition, please use “NC data FD management Extension name” for reading.
1) Call out files stored or registered on floppy.
2) Name of file called out . Extension name
(Enter)
Only NC data on floppy can be handled on hard disc in this operation.
Please utilize [inverse conversion] command to create figure screen.
When the lamp of floppy disc is on, do not take down the floppy

10. NC data FD management Output

NC data floppy output (read).
1) Installation and registration of floppy
2) Name of registered file (Enter)
Name of file has 8 English words and digits
at
most.
According to the kind of processing machine, only limited to reading of floppy of 2DD: 72
0KB,
2HD: 1. 23MB, 2HD: 1. 44MB.
Only 56 NC data can be registered on 2DD floppy according to Windows restrictions.
After purchase of a floppy, please format it before the first use.
When the lamp of floppy disc is on, do not take down the floppy.

11. NC data FD management Delete

Delete NC data on the floppy.
1) Delete files stored or registered on floppy.
2) Delete name of file (Enter)
When the lamp of floppy disc is on, do not take down the floppy.

12. NC data FD management FD list

NC data registered on floppy is displayed on screen.
Update time, display sides (bytes), number of files, all file sides, all disc area, available dis
c area.

When the lamp of floppy disc is on, do not take down the floppy.

L1-32
Errors of floppy disc may occur due to dust. When output/input of floppy cannot be perfo
rmed, utilize Windows standard function “disc scanning” to confirm there is no error in t
he floppy.

L1-33
 L1 NC creation
NC file management
13
Load

13. NC file management Load

NC file management is to manage NC data on hard disc.
Call out NC data registered on hard disc.

For list of detailed NC data, please refer to 2-3-3-1 File management of basic operation
procedure.
Only NC data on hard disc can be handled in this operation.
Please utilize inverse conversion command for drawing.
When connecting to complex NC data to use as one NC data, please utilize “13. NC data
management merge”.

L1-34
 L1 NC creation
NC file management
14
Save

14. NC file management Save

NC data is registered on hard disc.

L1-35
 L1 NC creation
NC file management
14
Save

For list of detailed NC data, please refer to 2-3-3-1 File management of basic operation
procedure.2.
About precautions on file name
Precautions on naming of files
. Do not use spaces : , ; ? ” < > .

L1-36
 L1 NC creation
NC file management
15
Merge

15. NC file management Merge

Call out other NC data after NC data called out.
There is only one complex NC data as the result.
This function only accords with NC data created for registration.
Whether NC data in conformity has errors or not cannot be confirmed, therefore, users should
confirm
before use.
For instance, one piece of NC data contains complex coordinate setting codes, when increment
value command NC data conforms to absolute value command NC data, normal operation may
not be performed without proper editing.

For list of detailed NC date. :lease refer to 2-3-3-1.File management of basic operation procedure
2.

L1-37
 L1 NC creation
NC file management
15
merge

Display an example of merging.

1) File system . / FSnc has MASTER and SLAVE,
SLAVE merging in master is performed as below:

2) Call out the MASTER in [L1]13. NC file

management.
Callout, overwrite the MASTER / tmp /
DEFAULT.NC.

3) Merge [L1]15. SLAVE in NC file management

merging. SLAVE is called out for / tmp /
DEFAULT. NC end.

Precautions
1. Execute “13. NC file management Callout” again to call out head NC data, execute “15. NC
file management Merge”. When head NC data cannot be called out after executing “5. NC data”
deletion, execute “15. NC file management Merge”, NC data called out for merging become the
head.
For NC data called out, you can select “2 Edit” menu for confirmation. After selection,
head NC
data is in callout status when NC data screen is displayed.
2. When inputting name of merged file for callout, NC data of the name must be registered.
3. When there is M30 code in NC data for inverse conversion function, end conversion on this
line. Note M30 code in merged file.

L1-38
 L1 NC creation
NC file management
16
Input from outside

16. NC file management Input from outside . . .

Read NC data from other folders and other trouble of hard disc, other outside media, etc.
Input from outside

L1-39
 L1 NC creation
NC file management
17
Output from outside

17. NC file management Output from outside

Output NC data from other folders and other trouble of hard disc, other Outside media, et
c..

L1-40
 L1 NC creation

18 NC data Checker

18. NC data Checker

Created or input NC data is displayed line by line, and the figures will be displayed in the same
order.
Or, since NC data is edited line by line, displayed figure will change accordingly.

L1-41
 L1 NC creation

18 NC data Checker

Line edit

L1-42
 L1 NC creation

18 NC data Checker

Laser micro edit

L1-43
 L1 NC creation

18 NC data Checker

Sub program edit

Sub program is used to display program number or series number callout of the main program
same with nesting NC data.

The same sub program can only be edited once. When the same sub program line callout is
below
twice,you cannot edit even after pressing F4 key.

L1-44
 L1 NC creation

18 NC data Checker

Error messages
When errors occur, the following messages will be displayed, get to the next line for NC data
analysis.
According to the situation, end this command.
No. Error messages Contents Actions
1 Comment format error Comment format is not right Get to next line for analysis
2 NC data format error NC data format is not right Get to next line for analysis
3 NC data error NC data value is wrong, and figures Get to next line for analysis
are created
4 Processing rate range over Processing rate range over Get to next line for
analysis, and ignone
5 Sub program number over Call out sub program, there are more Get to next line for
than 99 sorts of sub programs analysis, and ignore wrong
designated sub program callout
6 Sub program nesting over Sub program nest depth is over 8 Get to next line for
segments analysis, and ignore wrong
sub program callout.
7 Micro format files are not Micro format files are not registered Get to next line for analysis
registered.
8 Confirm that the file is not Confirm that the file is not registered Get to next line for analysis
registered
9 Micro not registered Micro format analysis files are not Get to next line for analysis
registered.
10 Micro format error Analysis micro format in micro format Get to next line for analysis
file is different from NC data format
11 No NC data NC data is not created or called out Interrupt this command

12 Figures cannot be registered CAD screen empty area is not enough. Interrupt this command

13 File line has errors currently When NC data file is updated, errors Interrupt this command,
occur in reading and NC data may be
destroyed
14 NC data file line error When test NC data file is updated, Interrupt this command,
errors occur in reading and NC data may be
destroyed
When figures are displayed red it indicates wrong data.

L1-45
 L1 NC creation

19 Inversion

19. Inversion
Created or input NC data is converted to CAD data.

1) Input NC data to be converted.

There are the following input methods.
NC sheet input
(6. NC data FD management List input
or 8. NC data FD management Input)
Callout from hard disc
(14. NC file management Callout)
Lead reading (optional)
Link input (optional)
2) Inverse conversion
When created NC data is converted to CAD
data
1) Can be neglected.
Do not utilize the NC data with processing condition automatic settings :condition 2 created via
inverse conversion,create NC data via processing condition automatic setting. Since the figure is
separated, proper
processing condition cannot be added.
Additional diameter tool correction is not performed for NC data before conversion, after inverse
conversion, when NC data is created in offset direction, add pierce lines, set offset direction via
[I1]
Manual setting 1. offset.
When there are automatic deceleration codes for NC data before conversion, after conversion,
the figure
has additional (G09) attributes.
Because NC data is in the unit of (micrometer), after inverse conversion, deviation may occur
and the
precision may not meet the requirements dependent on the figure.
As an action, when there are additional micro joints and end joint (endpoint micro joint) in the
circle, coordinates of arc center will not deviate too much after inverse conversion, please create
NC data in “IJ mode”. (In “R mode”, draw the arc in unit of micrometer according to endpoint
and radius, as a result,
center of arc may deviate. In “IJ mode”, center of arc deviates to the smallest extent after
inverse
conversion.)
NC data created using beam-on 2 and beam-on 3 becomes beam-on 2, beam-on 3 when reverse
converted.NC data created using beam off 2 and beam off 3 will be beam-on 2, beam off 3 when
reverse converted.However, beam off of the micro joint will be beam off 2.
In the case of created NC data which carried out a mark setting, a mark setting of the same code
as the
"NC inverse transform:marking judging code" of [setting] ->[setting change] -> [laser CAM] is
carried out at the time of inverse transform.
If micro joint width reverse-changes larger form than the "NC reverse conversion:micro joint
judging value"
of [setting] ->[setting change] -> [Laser CAM] and performs component registration when it is
the form by which micro joint is added to the perimeter, the perimeter may not be covered
correctly. Micro joint Beam
ON position will become loop circuit due to inverse conversion.( Please refer to “2 Inverse
conversion of figures in parts registration” in [K1-4])
When executing NC data confirmation (inverse conversion), NC data confirmation “inverse
conversion” can be performed for at most 99 sorts of sub pro numbers which are called out via
M98 “sub pro callout” command. When there are more than 100 sorts of sub pro including beam
ON sub pro codes, some or all figures are ungrouped and cannot become sub pro.
If joint width > micro joint judging value when joint is added to the form which inverse
transformed, it will not be correctly judged as joint. Please adjust a micro joint judging value.

Since LA does not correspond to an inch, when an inch output to FRG, the LA cannot be inverse

L1-46
 transformed normally.

When inverse transform the F-CUT data, please use the inverse transform drawing only in
order to check a path with eyes.
When this inverse transform drawing performs NC creation, NC data does not turn into the
right data.

Displayed figures are automatically saved with this function.

Figures automatically saved can be called out via file management callout
@.Work/Back

L1-47
 L1 NC creation
Start/End code
20 management
List screen

20. Start/End Code Management List Screen

A list of registered start/end codes and their content can be displayed and printed out at this
screen.

The start/end code content cannot be edited at this screen. To edit start/end code content,
refer to the procedure described in section 24 (Setting Start/End Codes).

In this example, the start/end code list will be

displayed, and start/end code No.1 will be printed
out.
The content of each start/end
code displays after the list.
1) Click Start/End Code Management | List Screen .

The list displays, beginning with the

registered start/end codes, and continuing
with their corresponding content.

2-1) Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to line

from which printing is to begin.

2-2) Click F3 or 3: Print.

2-3) Double-click 2 Partial Data Print.

2-4) Enter the number of lines to be printed.

There are 9 lines per start/end code item. To

determine the total number of printed lines,
multiple the number of start/end codes to be
printed by 9.

21. Start/End Code Management Deletion

Deletes registered start/end codes.

1) Enter the file name. 1) Click [Start/End Code Management | Deletion]

2) Enter [99] 2) Enter the start/end code No. to be deleted.

3) If deletion is completed without error 3) The deletion result displays.

 Successful Deletion
If deletion ends in error  Deletion
Failed

L1-48
 L1 NC creation

22 FD format

22. FD format
2DD or 2HD floppy is formatted.

PC98 (earlier than NX series) 1.2MB of NEC Corp. cannot be formatted.

When starting floppy format screen in CamMagic LA, above-mentioned Windows floppy f
ormat screen
will be started accordingly.
In a computer with Windows, when Windows standard floppy format screen cannot be sta
rted, it can
not be started from CamMagic LA either.
Or, when there are restrictions on operation of Windows standard floppy format screen, t
hey are also applicable to starting from CamMagic LA.

L1-49
 L1 NC creation

22 FD format

Format of floppy “3.5 in. 2DD” in Windows XP

Floppy (3.5 in. 2DD) in WindowsXP cannot be formatted, however.

It can be formatted in following condition, please try it, moreover.
It may not be formatted since the format method is not recommended for Windows and the
computer.

[Sequence of operation]
1. Select “Start” “All programs” “Accessories” “Command prompt” to start “Command
prompt”
screen.
2. (When computer floppy trouble is “a” Trouble)
format a: /q /v: / t:80 /n:9 (Enter)
Input in DBC case. Above mentioned is displayed as space.
Or: display “colon”, q as q in alphabet in fast format.
a: prevent wrong input according to displayed floppy trouble.
3. When “Please insert a new floppy into drive A, then press Enter...” is displayed, install 2
DD
floppy to be formatted, press Enter to start formatting.
When the floppy cannot be formatted normally in 3) above, “This floppy cannot be format
ted,
will you format it unconditionally (Y/N) ?” press Yes to format it.]
4. Format ends. When “Will you format other drives (Y/N) ?” is displayed, press key n.(Ent
er)

5. Select “Start” “All programs” “Accessories” “Notepad”, input all format commands
mentioned in “2” above in the notepad.
6. End notepad operation directly, the extension name of files such as 2dd-fmt.bat on deskto
p is bat,
which is saved in text format.
When bat files, with names such as 2dd-fmt.bat, have been created on desktop, in order
to format
2DD floppy, double-click on the key to start, repeat “3”, “4” above to format 2DD floppy.

L1-50
 L1 NC creation

23 Second cutoff processing

23 Second cutoff processing data creation

For “surface treatment materials” such as “paints and zinc primer for corrosion washing”, m
ainly “sheet infiltration materials”, even including “scale unstable materials” and “rust-surfa
ce materials”, display the following NC data creation method for “second cutoff processing”.
Start and end codes used in “second cutoff processing” can be registered again on the side
of laser
processor according to settings (beam ON sub pro), not only for CamMagic LA, but LA serie
s.
“For single part processing data” (Display the following after nesting data)

(1) Display the example of start and end codes used. Please register at vacant numbers.

(Note 1) In the above example, comment variable “#100” is used. When the same “#100”
is used
in other condition, please change for a suitable number.
Or, “beam OFF sub pro” is used for the comment variable as shown on next pag
e, and
the same number should be set, please note.
(Note 2) In the above examples, number “9888” is used for sub program of beam ON, si
milarly,
change this number for a suitable one in other condition.
(Note 3) Character set “DO1” of above “start” codes is composed of “D” and “O” of alpha
bet as well as digit “1”, it is not “d, 0, 1”, please note. Similarly, “END1” of “En
d” codes is a
combination of “END” of alphabet and digit “1”.
(Note 4) “M#503” condition in “start code” field can be designated for a (weak) laser out
put
processing. When it is used in other occasions, please change for a suitable num
ber and
usage condition.

[Example of figure cutting]

L1-51
L1-52
 L1 NC creation

23 Second cutoff processing

(2) Then, register “beam ON sub pro 98888” for “second cutoff” displayed with NC device.
Program Explanation of input characters
O (o) of alphabet and digits 9888, (comment character
SHEET).
IF of alphabet, brackets, NE and GOTO of alphabet, digits 0
and 100
N of alphabet for continuous numbers, digits 010, (same below)
“continuous number after N left”
(Height control OFF = only the head returns, and two Z axles
go up.)
(Beam ON)
N of alphabet, digits 050, GOTO of alphabet and digits 200
N of alphabet, digits 100, usual beam ON sub pro number after
P
(Note 1) In above example, beam ON sub pro number “98888” is used for “second cuttin
g”. When
this number is used in other condition, change it for a suitable one for registrati
on. Or
merge into the registration contents (M98P9888) of “beam ON” of “start and end
codes” on the previous page.
(Note 2) In above “N030M199” line of pro, utilize “height control OFF” command to lift
Z axle within
the set allowance on screen on the side of NC device, use “M86” code on N40 li
ne to turn on the beam, and process according to (weak) laser output. Therefore,
“allowance” for the
side of control device should be set to a proper value according to the process.
(Note 3) In “N100” line of above program, display designated “number 9010” example for usi
ng of
beam ON code in second usual cutting. Users can change usual beam ON sub pro n
umber.
Besides, in processing for weak output, if setting is too low, output laser may become
unstable. Close oscillator again and let it oscillate for a few seconds in shutter status until
it is stable, beam ON sub pro is as follows.

Program Explanation of input

characters

L1-53
Beam shutter close
Beam ON
Continue for 0.5s
Beam OFF
Shutter open

L1-54
 L1 NC creation
23 Second cutoff processing

(3) When drawing with pattern data via [second cutoff], draw like usual cutoff data creation. The
following is to draw for path setting as usual:

However, after above-mentioned usual path setting, an unnecessary “pre-feed line” is created
between path setting beam OFF position and former “processing reference point” at the end of
figure single part processing
as shown below, including the completion path setting.

The last pre-feed line is added according to the following procedure.

First, add one pre-feed line when the last beam ON element of this figure is deleted, press “path
setting manual” menu, select “last beam ON element” with mouse left button. After deletion of
the former, add the
same “pre-feed line” again, then proceed to next step.

L1-55
 L1 NC creation
23 Second cutoff processing

Press “element endpoint” button of above “selection place” menu.

On the initial “pre-feed line” set for “processing reference point”, click the left button around
“processing reference point”.
Set an additional “pre-feed line” starting from the last “beam OFF” position of the figure and
returning at initial “processing reference point”, including path setting for all pre-feed lines.

When the figure on the previous page is to be displayed via drawing, NC data created and
operations are as follows, repeat twice after using suitable condition “second cutoff”.
Number NC data created Description of actions
1 #100=0 Start
#501=102 Specify condition at the end of usual beam ON program
2 Start
“9010”.
3 #502=109 Start Specify condition for marking line processing as required
4 #503=103 Start In second cutoff, selection condition for the first processing
5 M66 Start Oscillator beam shutter open
WHILE[#100LE 1]D01 Start Perform operation from No.24 line (the first processing), then,
6
repeat this operation from this line
7 G90
8 G92X0.Y0
9 G00X50.Y30.G40
M98P9888 ON Circular aperture figure beam ON. M103 for the first
10 processing
and 9010 for the second
11 G01G41X60.Y30.
12 G03X60.Y30.I-20.
13 M121 OFF
14 M199 OFF
15 G00X105.Y0.G40
M98P9888 ON Periphery figure beam ON, beam ON conversion is the same
16
in the first processing and the second
17 G01G41X100.Y0.
18 G01X0.Y0.
19 G01X0.Y60.
20 G01X100.Y60.
21 G01X100.Y0.
22 M121 OFF
23 M191 OFF
G00X0.Y0.G40 Returning pre-feed line of initial processing reference point of
24
this figure
25 #100=#100+1 End
END1 End Repeated returning via Line6 WHILE command, Pass
26
through 27 lines for the second processing
27 G01G40 End
28 M30 End

L1-56
 L1 NC creation
23 Second cutoff processing

[Data nesting: 1]
After all parts have been processed individually, execute second processing from the initial part
Even in data nesting, start and end code setting is as shown in above "single part data
processing", using usual nesting pattern data. Moreover, it accords with "single part
processing", a returning "pre-feed line" is created between the last cut part and initial
"processing reference point". If the
usual NC data is created after figure completion path setting, end one-time processing of
all part data, return to the initial part to change the condition, and execute the second
cutoff in the same sequence
to perform "second cutoff" processing.
Before "second cutoff" of nesting data, please read carefully above "single part data
processing" descriptions.
Moreover, it is not necessary to set a returning "pre-feed line" between part last beam OFF
position and initial beam ON position for each "part data", usually, the nesting path can be
used for "part
data" setting.

For instance, for above figures, the created NC data is as follows.

No. NC data created Code Description of actions
1 #100=0 Start
2 #501=102 Start
3 #502=109 Start
4 #503=103 Start
5 M66 Start
WHILE[#100
6 Start
LE1]D01
7 G90
8 G92X0.Y0
9 G00X50.Y30.G40
10 M98H10 Sub program N10 callout

L1-57
 L1 NC creation
23 Second cutoff processing

11 G0050.Y95.G40
12 M98H10 Sub program N10 callout
G00X161.035Y30.G4
13
0
14 M98H20 Sub program N20 callout
G00X0.Y0.G40 The pre-feed line returns from the initial processing reference
15
point of the nesting figure
16 #100=#100+1 End
17 END1 End Repeated returning via Line6 WHILE command, pass
through 18 lines for the second processing
18 G01G40 End
19 M30 End
20 N10 Sub program N20 head
21 G91
22 M98P9888 ON
23 G01G41X10.Y0.
24 G03X0.Y0.I-20
25 M121 OFF
26 M199 OFF
27 G00X45.Y-30.G40
28 M98P9888 ON
29 G01G41X-5.Y0.
30 G01X-100.Y0.
31 G01X0.Y60.
32 G01X100.Y0.
33 G01X0.Y-60.
34 M121 OFF
35 M199 OFF
36 G90
37 M99 Sub program N10 end
38 N20 Sub program N20 head
39 G91
40 M98P9888 ON
41 G01G41X-10.Y0.
42 G03X0.Y0.I20.
43 M121 OFF
44 M199 OFF
45 G00X-45.Y30.G40
46 M98P9888 ON
47 G01G41X5.Y0.
48 G01X100.Y0.
49 G01X0.Y-60.
50 G01X-100.Y0.
51 G01X0.Y60.
52 M121 OFF
53 M199 OFF
54 G90
55 M99 Sub program N20 end

L1-58
 L1 NC creation
23 Second cutoff processing

[Data nesting: 2]
When completing the second processing of a part and proceeding to the next one:
For an individual part, after the first processing, change immediately the condition to
perform the
second cutoff of this part. If you want to move the next part for operation after completing
[second
cutoff] of one part, the start and end codes can be set as follows.
Start Beam ON Beam OFF Nest sub pro start Nest sub pro end End
#501=102 M98P9888 M121 #100=0 #100=#100+1 G01G40
#502=109 M199 WHILE[#100 LE 1] END1 M30
#503=103 D01
M66
Even during processing, read carefully descriptions of "single part data processing" and
"data nesting: 1" again.
In this condition, data of each part starts from part last beam OFF position and returns
from initial
beam ON position (pre-feed line), set again to perform part registration as shown below.

L1-59
 L1 NC creation
23 Second cutoff processing

For the nesting figure mentioned on the previous page, NC data created is as follows.
No. NC data created Code Description of actions
1 #501=102 Start
2 #502=109 Start
3 #503=103 Start
4 M66 Start
5 G90
6 G92X0.Y0.
7 G00X50.Y30.G40
8 M98H10 Sub program N10 callout
9 G00X50.Y95.G40
10 M98H10 Sub program N10 callout
G00X161.035Y30.G4
11
0
12 M98H20 Sub program N20 callout
13 G01G40 End

L1-60
14 M30 End
15 N10 Sub program N10 head
16 #100=0 Sub ON
WHILE[#100 LE
17 Sub ON
1]D01
18 G91
19 M98P9888 ON
20 G01G41X10.Y0.
21 G03X0.Y0.I-20.
22 M121 OFF
23 M199 OFF
24 G00X45.Y-30.G40
25 M98P9888 ON
26 G01G41X-5.Y0.
27 G01X-100.Y0.
28 G01X0.Y60.
29 G01X100.Y0.
30 G01X0.Y-60.
31 M121 OFF
32 M199 OFF
33 G00X-50.Y30.G40 The pre-feed line returns at the initial beam ON position of
this part
34 G90
#100=#100+1 Sub
35
OFF
36 END1 Sub Repeated returning via Line17 WHILE command, pass
OFF through 37 lines for the second processing
37 M99 Sub program N10 end
38 N20 Sub program N20 head
39 #100=0 Sub ON
WHILE[#100 LE
40 Sub ON
1]D01
41 G91
42 M98P9888 ON
43 G01G41X-10.Y0.
44 G03X0.Y0.I20.
45 M121 OFF
46 M199 OFF L1 NC creation
47 G00X-45.Y30.G40
48 M98P9888 ON 23 Second cutoff processing
49 G01G41X5.Y0.
50 G01X100.Y0.
51 G01X0.Y-60.
52 G01X-100.Y0.
53 G01X0.Y60.
54 M121 OFF
55 M199 OFF
56 G00X50.Y-30.G40 The pre-feed line returns at the initial beam ON position of
this part.
57 G90
#100=#100+1 Sub
58
OFF
59 END1 Sub Repeated returning via Line40 WHILE command, pass
OFF through 60 lines for the second processing
60 M99 Sub program N20 end

L1-61
[Precautions on the second cutoff]
1. Switch back processing, start from the side of laser processor and corner condition replacement
functions, etc do not apply here. Please set these functions to inactive status beforehand.
2. Please take actions against reflected light, etc.
3. According to the kind of polyethylene sheet and clinging status in the first processing, it is
necessary to change processing status. Confirm that processing can be performed normally via
trial processing with
these functions.
Or, poisoning accidents may occur depending on the kind of sheet, please note.
4. Thicker than the usual cut, and poor quality condition may occur.

L1-62
 L1 NC creation
24 Setting Start/End Code
24. Setting Start/End Code

◼ Function
Adds and edits start/end code.

◼ Procedure

1) Code No. (Enter=5) 1) Click the

Start/End Code Management | Set Start/End Code
menu.

2) 1 2) Enter the start/end code No. to be added or

edited.

If [Enter] is pressed without entering a No.,

the number indicated in parentheses is
adopted. In this example, "No.5" is entered.

3) 3) The start/end code list for the specified No. is

opened.

Code No.1 displays.

4) For the editing procedure refer to the

explanation which begins on page L1-8.

5) Code No. (Enter=1) 5) To register the edited content, click F1: End.
To abandon the edited content, click F2: Abort.

After registering the edited content, other

start/end codes can then be added/edited.

L1-63
 L1 NC creation
The NC creation
25 example of Edge-Cut
process
25．The NC creation example of Edge-Cut process

The example of use of the edge side process function in sketch material process, and the edge
material process after nesting process and rectangular cutting process using a common line is
shown.In using an edge side function, please check having set the suitable NC code for the edge
side column of Start/End code.

Since a processing head is moved to the outside of a workpiece, please fully use the edge
side after understanding operation.

(1) The example of sketch material process

Edge side beam off

Edge side beam on

Edge side beam on

Processing base

point
Edge side beam off

ＮＣ Code Explanation of operation ＮＣ Code Explanation of operation

#501=105 Cutting condition number G00X647.678Y364.242G40 It moves to a height position.
#502=110 Scribing condition number M101M198 Height on pierce conditions.
#504=114 Edge side logging condition G04X1.0 Waiting for sensor stable
number time
M66 M#504 Height on edge side
conditions.
G90 G04X0.5 Waiting for sensor stable
time
G92X30.Y30. Processing base point M74G04X0.5 Height stop ON
G00X20.Y115.049G40 It moves to a height position. G00X743.011Y380.242G40 It moves out of a workpiece.
M101M198 Height on pierce conditions. M120 Beam-on
G04X1.0 Waiting for sensor stable G01G42X731.011Y364.242 It approaches to Add L/R.
time
M#504 Height on edge side G01X714.344Y364.242 A workpiece edge side is
conditions. approached.
G04X0.5 Waiting for sensor stable G01X647.678Y364.242 It begins to cut workpiece.
time
M74G04X0.5 Height stop ON M75 Height stop OFF
G00X-30.Y212.887G40 It moves out of a workpiece. M#501 Cutting conditions
M120 Beam-on G01X471.237Y364.242 Edge side cutting processing
G01G42X-10.Y212.887 It approaches to Add L/R. G01X471.237Y496.572
G02X0.Y202.887J-10. A workpiece edge side is M74 Height stop ON
approached.
G03X20.Y115.049I202.887 It begins to cut workpiece. G01X471.237Y546.572 It cuts to a workpiece edge
side.
M75 Height stop OFF G01X471.237Y559.072 It evacuates to Add L/R.
M#501 Cutting conditions G01X483.237Y575.072 It evacuates to protruding
length.
G03X115.049Y20.I182.887J87.838 Edge side cutting processing M121M199 Beam-off
M74 Height stop ON M75 Height stop OFF

L1-64
G03X202.887Y0.I87.838J182.887 It cuts to a workpiece edge G28Z Z-axis StPnt return
side.
G02X212.887Y-10.J-10. It evacuates to Add L/R. G01G40 End code
G01X212.887Y-30. It evacuates to protruding M30 Program end
length.
M121M199 Beam-off
M75 Height stop OFF
G28Z Z-axis StPnt return

L1-65
 L1 NC creation
The NC creation
25 example of Edge-Cut
(2) The example after nesting process process
Edge side beam off

Processing base point

Edge side beam on

ＮＣ code Explanation of operation ＮＣ code Explanation of operation

#501=105 Cutting condition number M75 Height stop OFF
#502=110 Scribing condition M#501 Cutting conditions
number
#504=114 Edge side logging G01X501.383Y143.781 （ A continuation of edge
condition number side process）
M66 G01X380.956Y406.108
G90 G01X170.907Y406.108
G92X20.Y20. Processing base point G01X170.907Y460.
G00X39.135Y58.992G40 It moves to a part M74 Height stop ON
processing position.
G68R-178.213 G01X170.907Y500. It cuts to a workpiece edge
side.
M98H10 Subpro call G01X170.907Y510. It evacuates to Add L/R.
G69 G01X170.907Y530. It evacuates to protruding
length.
： ： M121M199 It evacuates to protruding
： ： length.
M75 Height stop OFF
G00X27.458Y419.393G40 The last part subpro is G28Z Z-axis StPnt return
G68R0. called. G01G40 End code
M98H30 M30 Program end
G69 N10 Part processing
G00X501.383Y40.G40 It moves to a height G91 subprogram
position.
M101M198 Height on pierce M98P9010
conditions.
G04X1.0 Waiting for sensor stable ：
time ：
M#504 Height on edge side
conditions.
G04X0.5 Waiting for sensor stable M191
time
M74G04X0.5 Height stop ON M99
G00X501.383Y-30.G40 It moves out of a
workpiece.
M120 Beam-on
G01G42X501.383Y-10. It approaches to Add L/R.
G01X501.383Y0. A workpiece edge side is
approached.
G01X501.383Y40. It begins to cut workpiece.

L1-66
 L1 NC creation
The NC creation
25 example of Edge-Cut
process
(3) The example of common line rectangular cutting process

Edge side beam on

Edge side beam on

Beam off

Beam off
Edge side beam on
Since it is common line process, the offset

direction is set as 「no」. Processing base point

Edge side beam off

ＮＣ code Explanation of operation ＮＣ code Explanation of operation

#502=105 Cutting condition number G00X400.Y560.G40 It moves to a height position.
#502=110 Scribing condition number M101M198 Height on pierce conditions.
#504=114 Edge side logging condition G04X1.0 Waiting for sensor stable time
number
M66 M#504 Height on edge side conditions.
G90 G04X0.5 Waiting for sensor stable time
G92X30.Y30. Processing base point M74G04X0.5 Height stop ON
G00X40.Y200.G40 It moves to a height position. G00X400.Y630.G40 It moves out of a workpiece.
M101M198 Height on pierce conditions. M120 Beam-on
G04X1.0 Waiting for sensor stable G01X400.Y610. It approaches to Add L/R.
time
M#504 Height on edge side G01X400.Y600. A workpiece edge side is
conditions. approached.
G04X0.5 Waiting for sensor stable G01X400.Y560. It begins to cut workpiece.
time
M74G04X0.5 Height stop ON M75 Height stop OFF
G00X-30.Y200.G40 It moves out of a workpiece. M#501 Cutting conditions
M120 Beam-on G01X400.Y40. Edge side cutting processing
G01X-10.Y200. It approaches to Add L/R. M74 Height stop ON
G01X0.Y200. A workpiece edge side is G01X400.Y0. It cuts to a workpiece edge
approached. side.
G01X40.Y200. It begins to cut workpiece. G01X400.Y-10. It evacuates to Add L/R.
M75 Height stop OFF G01X400.Y-30. It evacuates to protruding
length.
M#501 Cutting conditions M121M199 Beam-off, height control OFF
G01X400.Y200. Edge side cutting processing M75 Height stop OFF
M121 Beam-off G28Z Z-axis StPnt return
M199 G01G40 End code
G00X40.Y400.G40 It moves to a height position. M30 Program end
M101M198 Height on pierce conditions.
G04X1.0 Waiting for sensor stable
time
M#504 Height on edge side
conditions.
G04X0.5 Waiting for sensor stable
time
M74G04X0.5 Height stop ON
G00X-30.Y400.G40 It moves out of a workpiece.
M120 Beam-on
G01X-10.Y400. It approaches to Add L/R.
G01X0.Y400. A workpiece edge side is
approached.
G01X40.Y400. It begins to cut workpiece.
M75 Height stop OFF
M#501 Cutting conditions
G01X400.Y400. Edge side cutting processing
M121 Beam-off
M199

L1-67
 L1 NC creation
The NC creation
25 example of Edge-Cut
process
(4) The example which does not have a position of hight
controll in an Edge-Cut

There is no position of hight

controll marker on an Edge-Cut.

Edge side beam-on

Processing base point

Edge side beam-off

ＮＣ code Explanation of operation ＮＣ code Explanation of operation

#502=105 Cutting condition number M120 Beam-on
#502=110 Scribing condition G01G42X-5.Y65. It approaches to Add L/R.
number
#504=114 Edge side logging G02X0.Y60.J-5. A workpiece edge side is
condition number approached.
M66 G01X34.641Y0. Edge side cutting
processing
G90 G01X37.528Y-5. It evacuates to Add L/R.
G92X50.Y50. Processing base point G01X37.528Y-15. It evacuates to protruding
length.
G00X40.Y60.G40 It moves to a height M121M199 Beam-off, height control
position. OFF
M101M198 Height on pierce M75 Height stop OFF
conditions.
G04X1.0 Height on pierce G28Z Z-axis StPnt return
conditions.
M#504 Height on edge side G01G40 End code
conditions.
G04X0.5 Waiting for sensor stable M30 Program end
time
M74G04X0.5 Height stop ON
G00X-15.Y65.G40 It moves out of a
workpiece.

When there is no position of hight controll on the edge side beam-on side on an Edge-Cut,
height control under cutting process is not performed.Therefore, even if the position of
hight controll on the edge side beam-off side is on an Edge-Cut, a height control code does
not come out. When the cutting processing length to a workpiece edge side is long, there is a
risk of the collision of a head occurring.

L1-68
 L1 NC creation
NC data example of High
26 Acc Prcs Time Cal
executing

26．NC data example of High Acc Prcs Time Cal executing

It shows the NC data example after executing High Acc Prcs Time Cal. After High Acc Prcs Time
Cal, NC data can be displayed by “Edit” command and if scroll to the bottom, it can confirm
comments like example are added at the beginning of NC data.

Comment name Explanation

CUTTING_LENGTH Cut path length
RAPID_LENGTH Rapid path length
TOTAL_LENGTH Total length （Cut path length + Rapid path length）
BEAM_ON Number of beam on
KEGAKI_ON Number of marking on
PREPIERCE_ON Number of prepierce on
HIGH_ACC_PRCS_TIME Calculation time of High Acc Prcs Time Cal

L1-69
 L2 Processing instructions
1 Parameter setting

[L2] Processing instruction

1. Processing time parameter Parameter setting
Calculate an approximate time and set the parameters.
However, in order to register the material and thickness of board and process the processing gas
on the side of automatic program device, you can calculate an approximate processing time
without executing this command according to "2. Parameter calculation according to processing
time Processing condition FLD input".

1:End / 2:Brk / 3:Load / 4:Save /

5:Prnt

A set value of the calculation parameter of the processing time can be loaded/saved by "3:Load"
and "4:Save" of the selection menu.

2. Processing time parameter Processing condition FLD input

Floppy of processing condition registered in automatic program device.
(The process conditions can be registered on the floppy from NC equipment only from LC10B4～
LC20B.
Register the processing machine of LC30B (M700), LC40B (M800) to USB and register from
Condition 1 dialog or processing machine information setting.)
Processing condition which can be input into up to Top No.10 machine.
In order to register NC device processing condition on a floppy, you can register all processing
condition
at one time or designated processing condition, please use the former registration method.
If you want to register the designated processing condition only in the machine of the same
number,
former processing condition data will be deleted or become the input processing condition.
After automatic program device registration, you cannot confirm . edit processing condition
data on automatic program device.

L2-1
L2-2
 L2 Processing instructions
Beam ON/OFF time
3
setting

3. Processing time parameter Beam ON/OFF time setting

When NC data contains codes registered in the table, calculate the processing time.
When using beam ON/OFF codes not registered or changing the time, execute this command.
The time setting is for pre-feed over light, 100% and Z axle allowance, 50%. If you want to change
over light
or Z axle allowance, please change the time because the time setting is different.
(When different codes are registered and the time is changed.)

 Beam ON/OFF Time Setting Table

Beam ON/OFF time setting
1: End / 2: Abort / 3: Print
Beam ON codes Secs. Beam OFF codes Secs.
M98P9010 3.0 M121;M199 1.0
M198M101;M120;M#501G4X200 1.5 M74;M121 0.5
M98P9020 8.8 M87;M199 1.0
M98P9030 9.0 Total of 15 lines
M198M101;M120;F#501G4X200 1.5
M#502;M80;M198;M86 0.1

Random char. string 0.1 to 99.9

with max. of 30 chars.

Selection menu 1: End/2: Interrupt/3: Print

Selection method The selection place
Or, press numbered function key.
Contents 1: End Select to end table input.
2: Select to interrupt table input
Interrupt
3: Print Select to print beam ON/OFF time setting
table.

Notes:
In principle, do not input codes other than beam ON/OFF.
However, in order to set "G09", "G9" code and time, calculate the processing time, considering
automatic deceleration (exact stop check) time.

L2-3
(When "G09", "G9" code and time are set, you cannot calculate automatic deceleration
processing time separately.)

L2-4
 L2 Processing instructions
4 FLD input condition
confirmation display of
the list of screens

4. FLD input condition confirmation Display of the list of screens

Processing condition input in NC device floppy can be confirmed on screen in "processing
condition FLD input".

5. FLD input condition deletion Delete execution

For example, if you want to delete No.4 machine, press the key to enter 4 (return) after menu
selection.

6. Processing instruction NC data creation

Please refer to [L] NC input/output 1. NC data creation

L2-5
 L2 Processing instructions
7 Format setting

7. Format setting
■Function Select format of the processing instruction manual and
perform detailed setting.

■Operation Start processing instruction manual setting screen.

Format Select the format of the instruction manual. (You can select from the list by right click)
Explanation An explanation of the format is displayed.
If you are using a customized format, please select "custom" in the format and select the
Customize
format name in "customize". (You can select from the list by right click)
Available type The available file types (DWG/HTML/Excel) are displayed in the specified format.
If there are multiple available types, select the type to use.
Choice Explanation
DWG Generate processing instruction manual in drawing file format.
HTML Generate processing instruction manual in HTML file format.
Type The output destination is "~ ¥ FSreport ¥ HTML (¥ drawing subfolder ¥)
drawing name ¥ report.html".
Excel Generate processing instruction manual in Excel file format.
The output destination is "~ ¥ FSreport ¥ XLS (¥ drawing subfolder ¥) drawing
name.xls".
Set display ON / OFF of various barcodes.

Choice Explanation
Do not show Hide all barcodes.
barcode NC Display only the barcode of the NC.
NC+ process condition Display NC and barcode of process condition.
NC+ process condition +part Display all barcodes.
name

Part number Set display ON / OFF of part number.

Set fill color matching pattern of part color. (You can select from the list by right click)

Choice Explanation
color_15 15 types of color coding (details are below)
Part color grayscale_15 15 stages of gray scale (light → dark)
hatch_15 15 types of hatching patterns (black and white)
nofill No fill
The color of parts after the 16th type will be repeated from the first color.
＊｢LA-X：CamMagic LA standard" can determine individual part weight, while "LA-X2: part weight
× 100 / yield ratio" is to obtain "Weight of the material required to process the part" by
multiplying the reciprocal of "yield rate" to individual part weight.｡
＊The color scheme of color_15 is as follows.
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14 #15

Yellow Blue Red Purple Orange Green Brown Gray Yellow / Blue / Red / Purple / Orange / Green / Brown /

White White White White White White White

L2-3-2
 L2 Processing instructions
Processing instruction
8 creation

8. Processing instruction processing instruction manual creation

■Function
Create processing path drawing （include nesting drawing）processing instruction manual
which is displayed on screen, then display is to screen。Please input by laser printer.

＊Operation flow

drawing display

path setting

＊This is unnecessary when logged in.

material gravity log in When log in has not been done yet,
「 calculation error 」 message will

displayed, or material information

NC data
will not display.
generation

High Acc Prcs Time ＊It’s unnecessary when using processing time outline.
Cal

processing
instruction manual
creation
print
■operation

Before execute this command,

1) 2) please log in material gravity.
（Please refer toＬ２－１２page）
When log in has not been done yet,
「calculation error」message will display.

Nesting drawing processing instruction

manual creation order please refer to following.

1) Display nesting result to screen.

Please don’t mind if the drawing

displaying on screen is not nesting result.

2) When displayed drawing has not been path

set, please set processing reference point,
then execute path setting.

L2-4
 L2 Processing instructions
Processing instruction
8 creation

3) 3) processing instruction manual creation｜NC

data generation

Execute normal NC data generation.

4) 4) Processing directions doc create｜High Acc

Prcs Time Cal

Execute High Acc Prcs Time Cal.

High Acc Prcs Time Cal is unnecessary

when using processing time outline.

When processing time calculation was set

to “High Acc” by Set－Change The Setting
－Laser CAM, High Acc Prcs Time Cal
Tool starts automatically after creating
NC data.

If NC alarm occurred at the time of High

Acc Prcs Time Cal, alarm information is
displayed.

L2-5
5)

5) processing instruction manual creation

｜processing instruction manual generation

Processing instruction manual will be

generated, then display to screen.

When the type is DWG processing

instruction manual, Character is written
in notes. And editable. Processing path
drawing and frame is draw by drawing.
Processing instruction manual can be
logged in as drawing data.

Before execute this command, please log in

material gravity. When has not been
logged in, ｢calculation error｣message will
display, or part information will not
display.

5) Print processing instruction manual which

is displaying on screen.

Because the accuracy of ink-jet type

printer is rough, it is not suitable for the
printing of processing instruction manual.
You ‘d better to print by laser printer.

L2-6
 L2 Processing instructions
Processing instruction
8 creation
＊Processing instruction manual(type=DWG)

１
２
３

６
４ ５

１．creation date ・・・Display processing instruction manual creation date.

２．drawing name ・・・Display drawing name.
３．NCfile name ・・・Display NC file name.
＊ After NCgeneration, when NC file management log in has not
been done, will not display.
４．Display nesting arrange result contents
<<work information>>
１）work dimension ・・・Work vertical dimension （mm）×work beside dimension
（mm）
２）work material ・・・Display material that is specified by NC data generation
parameter.
３）work thickness ・・・Display sheet thickness（mm）that is specified by NC data
generation parameter.
４）work weight ・・・Work dimension ×work thickness ×gravity
５）gravity ・・・Display work material gravity （ｇ／ｃｍ3）.
＊ Please log in gravity at beginning. When log in has not been done,
「calculation error」message will display, or part information will not display.

L2-7
 L2 Processing instructions
Processing instruction
8 creation

６）real arrange rectangle dimension ・・・Display processing path drawing （part arrange
area ） circumscription rectangle vertical
dimension（max vertical direction dimension）
（ｍｍ）×beside dimension（max beside direction
dimension）（ｍｍ）.
７）real arrange rectangle weight ・・・Real arrange rectangle dimension ×work thickness
×gravity
８）processing piece number ・・・Display same arrange work piece number by nesting.
<<Yield information>>
９）work whole yield ・・・Arrange part total surface area ／work dimension
10）real arrange rectangle yield ・・・Arrange part total surface area ／real arrange
rectangle dimension
５．Display contents that is specified by NC data generation parameter.
<<Processing machine information>>
１）processing machine name ・・・Display machine number and processing machine
name.
２）gas type ・・・Display gas type.
３）lens focus ・・・Display lens focus.
４）nozzle diameter ・・・Display nozzle diameter.
５）sub No. ・・・Display sub No..

６ ． Display processing condition FLD inputted processing condition file, or outline

processing time that is calculated by processing time calculation parameter.
<<processing length>>
１）processing path length ・・・Display cutting path length. （include pierce
length）
２）rapid feed path length ・・・Display rapid feed path length.
３）total processing length ・・・ processing path length ＋ rapid feed path length
(include pierce length)
<<Processing time>>
４）outing time ・・・Display cutting time.
５）rapid feed time ・・・Display rapid feed time.
６）total processing time ・・・cutting time ＋rapid feed time

７．Display processing path drawing.

１）processing path drawing ・・・Display processing path drawing into frame。Part No.
(by each part type）will display in the part in drawing.
Some attribute display will be removed.
２）outer shape dimension ・・・Display processing path drawing circumscription
rectangle vertical dimension （ ｍ ｍ ） and beside
dimension （ｍｍ）.

８．Display part information in processing path drawing （nesting drawing）.

１）No. ・・・Part identification for No.. Display in processing path drawing.
２）part name ・・・Display part log in name.
３）dimension （beside Ｘvertical） ・・・Display part circumscription rectangle vertical
dimension （ｍｍ）Ｘbeside dimension（ｍｍ）.
４）processing distance ・・・Display part total cutting processing distance (mm）. (include
pierce length)
５）processing time ・・・Display part total processing time.
６）subprogram No. ・・・Display subprogram No. in NC data.
７）number of pieces ・・・Display arrange number of pieces.
８）unit weight Kg ・・・Calculate unit weight of 1part, then display.
（Because arc part is similar to linear, and with pierce line part surface area,
by various shapes the 「weight」will be calculated more than actual.）
９）part drawing ・・・Display part drawing.
９．page ・・・Display processing instruction manual total number and page.

L2-8
 L2 Processing instructions
Processing instruction
8 creation

＊HTML/Excel process instruction manual with barcode

When HTML/Excel is selected as the type in the processing instruction manual setting, it
is possible to create a processing instruction manual with barcode.
Also, there are the following differences depending on the processing instruction manual
format.
[Case of LA_A4T format] [Case of LA_A4T_color/LA_A4Y_color format]
・HTML or Excel can be selected as the type. ・The type is HTML only.
・Barcodes are always displayed. ・Display / non-display of barcode can be switched. (The drawing below
shows a display example of only the barcode with the NC file name)
・ The part number is not displayed in the ・It is possible to display the part number on the arrangement
arrangement drawing. drawing.
・Parts are not filled in. ・Color coding fill display of the part is possible.
· When the processing reference point is outside the · When the processing reference point is outside the workpiece, the
workpiece, the layout diagram including the processing reference point may not be displayed in the layout
processing reference point is displayed. drawing.
・In case of HTML type, click on the arrangement
drawing / part drawing to enlarge it. ・Even if you click the arrangement drawing / part drawing, it will not
be enlarged.

１ １

When HTML / XLS extend name is not associated with Web browser / Excel, HTML / Excel processing
instruction manual will not be displayed.
Please install web browser / Excel in advance and make association.
It is possible for the process machine attached with barcode reader to transmit · search NC program
and process condition by using barcode reader to read the barcode of process instruction manual in
process machine.
1．barcode of NC file name ・・・It’s possible to transmit·search NC program.
However, a barcode is not displayed when the NC file name is more than 20 characters.
2．barcode of process condition ・・・It’s possible to transmit·search process condition.
3．barcode of part name ・・・It’s possible to transmit·search part NC program.

※ about (width) is longer length of the bar code, I will be difficult to read the bar code reader.
※ hoarse and dirt of the bar code label portion, reflected on the back of paper, printer accuracy, by print
size,
There are times when it can not read.
※ Please clean if there is a smudge on the bar code reader reading opening.
※ There is a case not to be able to read by the orientation of the bar code label and room light and bar
code reader illumination light
There. Please try changing the distance and angle of the bar code reader and bar code label in this case.
※ If Internet Explorer's "Shrink-to-fit" function is enabled, printing at 100% magnification may not be
possible. For the workaround, refer to 9. (13) of the installation manual.

L2-7-2
 L2 Processing instructions
Processing instruction
＊Notes on part log in 8 creation

In order to create processing instruction manual correctly, parts that is being used on
nesting should log in while pay attention on the following notes.

（１）Part inside perimeter （inner hole ）length, outside perimeter length and real
materiel, are calculated basing on the shape that had imitated part arc part to polygon. In
order to make the
calculated result closer to actual value（only few errors）, should reduce part distribute
angle setting value on part registering（mini time１）, and, specify processing hole as inner
hole.
（２）In order to calculate <<processing length>>value correctly, please try to change
processing condition which is logged in NC control equipment to ２．log into automatic
programming equipment by processing time calculation parameter processing condition
ＦＬＤinput
（ ３ ） Pease log in material gravity at beginning. When has not been logged in,
「calculation error」message will display, or part information will not display.

9. Processing instruction manual creation Delete processing attribute

Delete attribute and rapid feed line display of beam on／off, from drawing that is displayed
in
processing instruction manual(DWG).

＊ By part copy, drawing will

become clearer.

Ｌ２－３
 L2 Processing instructions
Processing instructions
10
edit
10. Processing instructions Processing instructions edit
Display processing instructions.

(*1)

(*2)
(*1)

<< Beam On Num>>

Beam On : 12
Marking On :0 (※1) For high precision process time
Prepierce On :0 calculation, it becomes hyphen display
because it is not calculated value.
(*2) When executed High Acc Prcs Time Cal,
“Overall processing time (High Acc)” is
displayed.

Ｌ２－４
 L2
Processing instructions
Processing instructions
10
Processing time calculation method edit
a) When calculating approximate processing time according to file of processing condition
input via automatic program device in 2. Parameter calculation according to processing time
Processing condition FLD input:
Time of cutting Processing time + beam ON/OFF time
Processing time is calculated according to processing rate obtained from
processing condition file.
Beam ON time:
(Pierce time registered in processing condition file + beam ON time set in 5.
Beam ON/OFF) number of beam ONs.
Beam OFF time:
Beam OFF time set in 5. beam ON/OFF number of beam OFFs.
Pre-feed time Calculate pre-feed time, considering time limit.

Overall processing Time of cutting + pre-feed time

time
Average processing Cut path length processing time
time
Average pre-feed rate Pre-feed time pre-feed path length
b) When calculating processing time according to 1. Parameter calculation according to
processing time processing time parameter setting:
Time of cutting Processing time + beam ON/OFF time
Processing time is calculated according to average processing rate set in 4.
Processing time parameter.
Beam ON time:
Beam ON time is calculated via (pierce time set in 4. Processing time
parameters + beam ON time in 5. Beam ON/OFF time setting) times of
beam ON.
Beam OFF time:
Beam OFF time set in 5. Beam ON/OFF number of beam OFFs.
Pre-feed time Calculate pre-feed time, considering the largest pre-feed rate set in 4.
Processing time parameter.
Overall processing Time of cutting + pre-feed time
time
Average processing Cut path length processing time
time
Average pre-feed rate Pre-feed time pre-feed path length

c) When set to “High Acc” in 19. Processing time calculate of Set－Change setting－Laser
CAM
Time of cutting It will not be calculated.
Pre-feed time It will not be calculated.
Overall processing time(High It conforms to the calculating method of processing time
Acc) estimate as same as the software that mounted on the laser
processing machine.
Average processing time It will not be calculated.
Average pre-feed rate It will not be calculated.

Ｌ２－５
 L2 Processing instructions
Retry change codes
11 Retry M202 NO

11. Retry . change codes Retry M202 NO

The aligning device alarm sounds immediately for a short time only when work is touched and
plasma is
being processed.
Retry to perform processing automatically again when alarm sounds.
Usually, stop processing the nesting NC data when the aligning device works, this command can
be used for control retrying. When alarm sounds, you can start processing again. Therefore,
change NC data when this part is being processed.

Note1) Before retrying M202 in the device, change the position for sensing confirmation on the
processor to determine whether the sensor has M code indicating an error. When errors
occur to sensor,
processing will be suspended, and it is not necessary to M202, in this condition, do not
add M202
code, please utilize "Retry M202 NO" menu.
Note2) M200 is the code of spatter place designated for alarm when the processing is started
again.
Note3) It is necessary to register number of NC processing (ex. initial processing) for alarm
on the device, for more information, please refer to 3. Parameter screen 3.7 Height control
parameters for CRT screen usage instructions of the control device.
Note4) When retried codes cannot be used due to different type of machine on the side of
processor.
Please refer to usage instructions on the side of processor before use.
Note5) When retried codes are changed "M202; #501….", add "; (semicolon)" after M202 code of
NC codes, when NC control device on the side of laser processor is LC20B, errors will
occur if characters before the semicolon are not put in another line.
In this condition, utilize "Retry M202, NO" menu, delete "; (semicolon)" after NC data
creation and arrange these two parts in different lines.

Ｌ２－６
 L2 Processing instructions
12 NC data edit

12. NC data edit

[L1] Please refer to NC input/output NC creation in 2.4.

13. Material specific gravity setting Specific gravity registration

Name, comment and specific gravity of registered material
Necessary parameters for creation of processing instructions

Ｌ２－７
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

14. High Acc Prcs Time Cal

It is same as the software that mounted on laser processing machine, processing time estimation
function is used. At that time, if there is incorrect place in NC program, it will output the same
alarm as processing machine and a white “田” mark is displayed in the alarm occurrence location.
In addition, the calculated time is described in comment of NC program and process direction
statement.

Note1) It needs M700 processing machine. This function cannot be used when it isn’t M700 processing machine.
Note2) Please perform NC Create before execute High Acc Prcs Time Cal. If has not performed NC Create, there
is a possibility that execution result is incorrect.
Note3) If not perform NC Create and execute this command after NC reading, machine and processing conditions
will be the setting at the time of NC Create last time. However, when there is M100 code in NC program,
processing conditions will use the setting of M100 code. Calculated time is not added to the original NC
program, but added to WORK¥Default.NC. (However only the program created by LA) processing
directions doc is incorrect information because the information at the time of NC Create last time was
remained.
Note4) This function takes time to start and calculate. It depends on PC performance and state, it takes about
10 seconds to start as a guide, it takes several seconds to calculate.
Note5) During processing time calculation, if close window by task bar or task manager, the operation will
become unstable, please be careful.

The display format is different between M700

and M800.

High Acc Prcs Time Cal function Start

Item
screen Description
Machining program The following shows the NC program for which processing time is calculated.
name DEFAULT.NC is fixed.
Process condition Process conditions used to calculate processing time.
name
Machine No. Machine No. number used to calculate processing time.
Module Version Also acquire the time prediction module operating on the processing machine from
Ver11. When inquiring about the high-precision processing time calculation function,
please also send the module version information.
(1) Processing time prediction is also module A version information.
(2) Processing time prediction is also module B version information.
(3) Processing time prediction is also module C version information.
(4) Year / month / day / hour / minute / second acquired as data by the
processing machine file acquisition tool.
(5) Product number of processing machine.
The module version is displayed as "??????????" until the information
is updated using the processing machine file acquisition tool after the
version upgrade.

Ｌ２－８
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

Item Description
Message The execution result of processing time calculation is displayed.
Processing time The calculated processing time is displayed.
Alarm Indicates the content of the alarm when an NC alarm occurs.
(It will be the same alarm content as the processing machine.)
Program execution When an NC alarm occurs, the line number of the NC program where the alarm
line number occurred is shown.
Note) The display of the alarm location is the position that the processing machine is
stopped by an alarm, and there is a look-ahead function of the NC program,
so there may be a difference of several lines from the actual incorrect location.
Program execution When an NC alarm occurs, the content of the NC program written on the line where
line contents the alarm occurred is shown.
Alarm occurrence Indicate the coordinate at which the alarm occurred when the NC alarm occurred.
position

Execution end message

Code Message Description Treatment
000010 Processing time Processing time calculation has been completed ――――
calculation end successfully.
000011 Alarm occurrence An alarm was generated due to an illegal NC ・ Refer to alarm
program. troubleshooting (page
※ By executing the "alarm position" command L2-18)
after an alarm has occurred, information about
the alarm is attached to the guide message. By
searching the NC data for the program
execution line number and the contents of the
program execution line, the location where the
alarm occurred can be confirmed.
000012 Interrupted The stop button was pressed during processing time ――――
calculation.
000013 Timed out Processing time calculation timed out. ・ Please restart your
※ A timeout occurs after 15 minutes of calculation computer.
processing. ・Please take out the
data from the
processing machine
and try to overwrite to
CamMagicLA.
000100 Tool start command High-precision processing time calculation function ・ Reinstall
～ is invalid cannot be started normally. CamMagicLA.
000199
000200 FSest folder not When checking the operating environment for the ・ Reinstall
found in installation high-precision processing time calculation function, CamMagicLA.
folder there are some deficiencies.
000201 WORK folder does
not exist in
installation folder
000202 LSR_EST.INI not
found in installation
folder

L2-8
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

000203 Machining program The machining program file specified by the read ・ Retry from NC
does not exist file / machining program name does not exist. generation.
000204 The process The process condition file specified at the time of ・Please take out the
condition file (CNB / NC generation does not exist. data from the
CNF) specified in Or, the process condition file specified by the M100 processing machine
the process command of the machining program does not exist. and try to overwrite to
condition folder CamMagicLA.
(FScnd¥00XX) does
not exist
000301 Process condition There is an error in the format of the process ・Please take out the
name is invalid condition file name determined for each processing data from the
machine. processing machine
and try to overwrite to
CamMagicLA.
000400 A system error has Computer is not working properly. ・ Please correct any
～ occurred problems in the PC
000599 environment.

In addition, when it is the first time to use High Acc Prcs Time Cal, it needs to prepare the
parameters and processing condition file of processing machine. Set processing machine
information and process condition file from "Setting(S) "- "Processing machine information
Setting (P) " on menu bar. For details, refer to page 2-21-6 of this operation manual.

L2-9
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

In addition, usually it is not required, but you want to perform the processing time calculated in
accordance with specially fine also set machine. In this case, please prepare the method to use
“Processing machine file get tool”,. However, when using M700 processing machine, it is
necessary to satisfy both the following conditions (1) and (2).

① EXPECT TIME of processing machine can be used

＜Check method＞
(1) Press “GRAPHIC OPRN” button from [PROC OPERAT]―[e-PROC] of processing machine.
(2) Press the bottom right “CHANGE” button twice from appeared button group of [GRAPHIC
OPRN].
(3) Check whether ”EXPECT TIME” button exists in the upper left buttons of [GRAPHIC OPRN],
and whether display “REMAIN TIME” exists in lower right of screen.
If both exist, time estimate function of processing machine can be used.

② Processing machine version is compatible with machine file get tool

＜Check method＞
(1)Press “NC-SPEC” from [STATUS MONI]―[PLC-I/F] of processing machine.
(2)In “1 NC” and ” 3 PC” column of [Ｓ／Ｗ VERSION] in the appeared dialog,
Check the next 2 characters of last hyphen. Please record this version
(“1 NC” and “3PC” must be both K8 version or later.)

L2-10
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

If it does not meet both ① and ② , It is not available the method to use “Processing machine file
get tool”,

the method to use “Processing machine file get tool”

(1) Set processing machine information and process condition file from "Setting(S) "- "Processing
machine information Setting (P) " on CamMagicLA menu bar.。
For details, refer to page 2-21-6 of this operation manual.

(2) Copy LSREST folder of LsrEst folder of CamMagic LA install folder to USB.

Copy

USB memory

*Sometimes USB memory that mounted password lock function cannot be used in processing
machine.

Since the procedure after step (3) differs between M700 processing machine and M800 processing
machine, please refer to explanation of processing machine you are using.

<1> When is M700 processing machine

(3) Display 2nd page screen of “PARAMETER”―”I/O-PRM2” in processing machine.
(4) Press “RUN” and input “D:¥LSREST¥LSRNCFILEGET.vbs” in name field of
the emerging dialog, press OK button.
Processing machine file get tool is executed and get files in USB.

L2-11
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

①
②

Processing machine file get tool Execute

screen
No Explanation
① The folder which is being copied at present is displayed.
② It shows the whole process.
③ It is cancel button. When pressed it, file get operation is broken.

(5)Copy message folder, ncsys folder, sysdef folder and mmi folder that got in USB to the folder of
machine number corresponding the processing machine in FSest folder of CamMagic LA.
In addition, copy processing conditions that got in USB to the machine number corresponding
the processing machine in FScnd folder of CamMagic LA.

The copy destination will

Copy copy to the folder of machine

number corresponding the

processing machine.
Copy

L2-12
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

<2> When is M800 processing machine

(3) On the processing machine, display "Screen set" - "Basic" screen from "ADMIN MAINTE" on
the upper left
(4) Click "Executable", in name column of the displayed dialog input
「D:\LSREST\CALL_LSRNCFILEGET.exe」and press OK button.
Then, the processing tool file acquisition tool is executed, and file is got to USB memory.

D:¥LSREST¥CALL_LSRNCFILEGET.exe

Please refer to step (4) of <1> When is M700 processing machine for the screen details of
processing tool file get tool.

(5)Copy message folder, ncsys folder, sysdef folder and mmi folder that got in USB to the folder of
machine number corresponding the processing machine in FSest folder of CamMagic LA.
In addition, copy processing conditions that got in USB to the machine number corresponding
the processing machine in FScnd folder of CamMagic LA.

The copy destination will

Copy copy to the folder of machine

number corresponding the

processing machine.
Copy

If update processing machine information setting after performing this work, the
processing file will be overwritten by standard file. When setting processing machine
information, please perform before getting the file from processing machine

L2-13
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

Alarm trouble shooting

Alarm may occur due to illegal NC program when using high-precision processing time calculation
Typical examples of NC alarms and their processing methods are described in the table below.

N
Cause of NC alarm
NC alarm occurrence NC alarm processing
o (Processing machine alarm detail
content method
. HTML content)

1 M10514 processing speed is ＜Cause＞ ①Change pierce part of the part to

0 Processing speed was set to 0. be other than beam on 2 attribute.

＜Treatment＞ ②Change NC code of "beam on

Please set processing speed other than 0. 2" of start/end code "21".

Please select process conditions other

than 0 processing speed.
2 P00012 No program number ＜Cause＞ ※There are two ways to deal with
(P232) When subprogram is loaded, no it.
subprogram is registered. ＜ １ ＞ Change the process
condition file to be used
＜Treatment＞ Change the process condition file
Register the subprogram. to be used during processing and
regenerate NC data.
＜２＞Change the parameter file to
be used
Using the processing machine file
get tool, get parameter file from
processing machine, replace the
parameter file of corresponding
machine no., and re-execute high
precision processing time
calculation.
→ However, the processing
machine version that can get
parameter file using processing
machine file get tool is limited.
Check the contents of release
note and operation manual.
3 P00018 No variable number ＜Cause＞ ①Click "NC generate" - "NC data
(P241) Because the commanded variable number generate " - "NC Edit" menu and
is larger than specification variable search the line corresponding to
number. program execution line number in
NC data edit dialog.
＜Treatment＞ ②Since NC code (# 501, # 502,
Check the specification. etc.) concerning the variable
Check program variable number. command is incorrect, correct it to
the correct NC code.

L2-14
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

4 P00032 No variable definition ＜Cause＞ ①Click "NC generate" - "NC data

＝(242) Because it does not command "=" when generate " - "NC Edit" menu and
defining the variable. search the line corresponding to
program execution line number in
＜Treatment＞ NC data edit dialog.
Set "=" in the program variable definition. ②Since NC code (# 501, # 502,
etc.) concerning the variable
command is incorrect, correct it to
the correct NC code.
5 P00035 No intersection point ＜Cause＞ ※There are two ways to deal with
(P152) Since the intersection point when skipping it.
one block can't be calculated in the ＜ １ ＞ Change the process
interference block processing when condition file to be used
executing tool diameter offset (G41, G42) Change the process condition file
and nose R offset (G41, G42, G46). to be used during processing and
regenerate NC data.
＜Treatment＞ ＜２＞Change drawing (shape)
Review the program. After NC alarm has occurred, edit
the shape (element) of the location
indicated by the marker (alarm
position) displayed on CamMagic
LA and regenerate the NC data.
※Please note that marker display
is not strictly displayed on the line
or arc of the drawing, but is
displayed at the point moved by
the offset amount during
processing.
※Since marker display is affected
by block prefetching process of
the NC control equipment, please
note that it may appear in the
shape (element) of a few blocks
before the shape (element) that
needs to be modified.
6 P00036 Offset Interference ＜Cause＞ ※There are two ways to deal with
(P153) Interference error occurred when executing it.
tool diameter offset (G41, G42) and nose R ＜ １ ＞ Change the process
offset (G41, G42, G46). condition file to be used
Change the process condition file
＜Treatment＞ to be used during processing and
Review the program. regenerate NC data.
＜２＞Change drawing (shape)
After NC alarm has occurred, edit
the shape (element) of the location
indicated by the marker (alarm
position) displayed on CamMagic
LA and regenerate the NC data.
※Please note that marker display
is not strictly displayed on the line
or arc of the drawing, but is
displayed at the point moved by
the offset amount during
processing.
※Since marker display is affected
by block prefetching process of
the NC control equipment, please
note that it may appear in the
shape (element) of a few blocks
before the shape (element) that
needs to be modified.

L2-15
 L2 Processing instruction
14 High Acc Prcs Time Cal

7 P00108 Corner movement is ＜Cause＞ ※There are two ways to deal with
short (P383) In corner chamfer / corner R command, the it.
moving distance of the next block is ＜ １ ＞ When generating NC,
smaller than corner chamfer / corner R. decrease the value of "Pin corner
R add" of NC data generation
＜Treatment＞ parameter. Or it will generate NC
Since the moving distance of the next block without using "Pin corner R add".
is smaller than corner chamfer / corner R, ＜２＞Change drawing (shape)
make corner chamfer / corner R smaller Delete the linear minute line
than the moving distance. segments and perform
interpolation with arcs.
8 P00700 No applicable ＜Cause＞ ※There are two ways to deal with
condition Because the process condition data for the it.
specified M code is not set in the search ＜ A ＞ Change process condition
process condition when selecting process selection command in NC
condition selection command. program
Edit NC program and change the
＜Treatment＞ process condition number to be
Please specify M code corresponding to used during processing.
the process condition data set in the ＜ B ＞ Change the process
search process condition. condition file to be used
Change the process condition file
to be used during processing and
regenerate NC data.

L2-16
 L3 NC input and output
1 NC link

[L3] NC input and output

1. NC link NC link...
This function is optional, please refer to other option instructions.

2. Paper tape unit Reader

This function is optional, please refer to other option instructions.

3. Paper tape unit Puncher

This function is optional, please refer to other option instructions.

L3-1
 M1 File management
1 File management Load

[M] File management

[M1] File management
1. File management Load
Load files registered in from fixed disk.

M1-1
 M1 File management
File management
1
Load

* In F0 VERSION of CamMagic LA, DXF data with additional “Bezier curve” is altered
for partially
reading, which will result in increase of kinds of use attributes of Spring curve.

M1-2
 M1 File management
2 File management Save

2 File management Save

Screen figures are registered in a fixed disk.

M1-3
 M1 File management
2 File management Save

M1-4
 M1 File management
3 Load from outside…

3. Load from outside...

Read screen data from other folder, fixed disk drive and outside media, etc.

M1-5
 M1 File management
3 Load from outside…

M1-5-2
 M1 File management
4 Save from outside…

4. Save from outside…

Save screen data from other folder, fixed disk drive and outside media, etc.

M1-6
 M1 File management
3 Save from outside…

M1-6-2
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

5. Part management Load

Register in part to be called out.

Call-out parts are grouped.

When adding piercing lines or before path setting, perform ungrouping.

M1-7
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

Call-out table of screen

1 Select the menu

1: Execute/2: Interrupt/3: Management/4: Retrieve/5: Print/6: Preceding page/7: Following
page/8: Display again/9: Screen confirmation
Selection method…Selected place
Or, press the number FUNCTION KEY.
2 Operations
Automatically display sides . update time.
Please input screen name (comment) freely.
1: Execute ( F1 )…Call out screen number files indicated by box cursor.
2: Interrupt ( F2 )…Close the list, interrupt the command.
3: Management ( F3 )…Display the following management table.

Selection method…With the selection command, select box cursor (arrow key ,
or )
Select the command of selecting again ( or )
When [. . ] is selected, 2~6 cannot be selected.
When "Input" field has "X" files (cannot be input), menus of 5, 6 cannot be
selected.
Menus which cannot be selected are displayed blue.
Do not create a folder of the same name with an existing file. Otherwise, name of the folder cannot
be displayed. Likewise, you cannot remove a file of the same name or change its name. Utilize
other explorer function, etc to change its name.

M1-8
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

1 New folder…A folder is a management unit for registration of each item (for example: as
user name and order etc.), a new folder is a new management unit.
And folders can be created in a folder.
This kind of structural management is very convenient.

M1-9
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

M1-10
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

M1-11
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

M1-12
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

M1-13
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

4: Retrieve ( F4 ) …Register screen number retrieval.

5: Print ( F5 ) …Output a list of screens from printer.

For more information of operations, refer to 2. Basic
operation
sequence 2-3-3-2. Table input.
6: Preceding page ( F6 ) …Display preceding page of the existing list.
7: Next page ( F7 ) …Display next page of the existing list.

M1-14
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

8: Display again ( F8 ) …Arrange according to specified order of the list of screens and
display again.
Display the following display table:

Selection method…With the selection command, move box cursor (arrow key , or )
Select the command of selecting again ( or )
1 Display again … Display the list with existing display method again.
2 Display according to time order …Arrange according to time order (new time) and
display the list.
3 Display according to opposite time order …Arrange according to opposite time order (old time)
and display the list.
4 Display according to name order …Arrange according to name order (alphabet order) and
display the list.
5 Display according to opposite name order …Arrange according to name order (opposite alphabet
order) and display the list.
6 Interrupt …Interrupt and display again.

For example: Execute display according to 4. name order.

M1-15
 M1 File management
Part management
5 Load

9: Screen confirmation ( F9 ) …For screen number figure of box cursor displayed in

Windows, perform screen confirmation.

M1-16
 M1 File management
Part management
6 Save

6. Part management Save

Screen figures are registered in as part.

M1-17
 M1 File management
Part management
6 Save

M1-18
 M1 File management
Part management
6 Save

Registration table of screen

1 Select the menu

1: Execute/2: Interrupt/3: Management/4: Retrieve/5: Print/6: Preceding page/7: Next page/8:
Display again/9: Screen confirmation
Selection method…Selected place
Or, press the number FUNCTION KEY.

2 Operations
Automatically display sides . update time.
Please input screen name (comment) freely.

1: Execute ( F1 )…Display screen number indicated by box cursor, press key to

overwrite.
When([...] or folder) other than components are designated with box cursor, register
in again.

2: Interrupt ( F2 )…Close the list, interrupt the command.

3: Management ( F3 ), 4: Retrieve ( F4 ) 5: Print ( F5 ) 6: Preceding page

( F6 )
7: Next page ( F7 ) 8: Display again ( F8 ) 9: Screen confirmation ( F9 )
Refer to [M1] 5. part management Call out Call-out table of screen.

Do not create a folder of the same name with an existing file.

Otherwise, name of the folder cannot be displayed. Likewise, you cannot remove a file of the same
name or change its name.
Utilize other explorer function, etc to change its name.

M1-19
 M1 File management
CAD data FD
7 management List
input

7. CAD data FD management List input

Display a list of files registered on floppy, and call out from the list.

In this operation, the list shows not only CAD data, but all files registered in the floppy.
On preceding page . next page, press Shift key and or .
For selection menu 3: Retrieve, please refer to [M1] File management Call out Call-out
table of screen.
When indicator of floppy drive lights up again, do not draw out this floppy, which will otherwise
affect the floppy and CAD/CAM as well.
When there are auxiliary lines, please select auxiliary line main menu after callout.
When screen data created with CamMagic LA are read with LA500, LA600 and LA600A/E, set
"File format toolbar" in "Specified old LA files," execute output, please refer to page2-19 and
page 2-22-2.
Besides, after the screen data, which contains BEAM ON2, BEAM ON3, BEAM OFF2 and BEAM OFF3 and
is created with CamMagic LA, is output in "specified old LA file format", it becomes BEAM ON1 and BEAM
OFF1 respectively.
Errors may occur to a floppy due to dust, when data on it cannot be input/output normally,
utilize standard Windows "disk scanning" function to determine whether it is a broken floppy.

M1-20
 M1 File management
CAD data FD
8 management List
delete

8. CAD data FD management List delete

Display the list of files registered in floppy, remove from the list.

In this operation, the list shows not only CAD data, but all files registered in the floppy.
On preceding page . next page, press Shift key and or .
For selection menu 3: Retrieve, please refer to [M1] File management Call out Call-out
table of screen.
When indicator of floppy drive lights up again, do not draw out this floppy, which will otherwise
affect the floppy and CAD/CAM as well.
Errors may occur to a floppy due to dust, when data on it cannot be input/output normally,
utilize standard Windows [disk scanning] function to determine whether it is a broken floppy.

M1-21
 M1 File management
CAD data FD
9 management Input

9. CAD data FD management Input

10. Input CAD data registered in during CAD data FD management and output.

When indicator of floppy drive lights up again, do not draw out this floppy, which will otherwise
affect the floppy and CAD as well.
When there are auxiliary lines, please select auxiliary line main menu after callout.
Errors may occur to a floppy due to dust, when data on it cannot be input/output normally,
utilize standard Windows "disk scanning" function to check whether it is a broken floppy.

10. CAD data FD management Output

Output (input to) CAD data from floppy.

M1-22
 M1 File management
CAD data FD
11 management List

11. CAD data FD management List

Files registered in floppy are displayed on screen.
Display update time, sides (bytes), number of directories, number of files, all file sides, all disc area
and available disc area.

When indicator of floppy drive lights up again, do not draw out this floppy, which will otherwise
affect the floppy and CAD as well.

12. CAD data FD management Delete

Delete CAD data registered in 10. CAD data FD management Output.

When indicator of floppy drive lights up again, do not draw out this floppy, which will otherwise
affect the floppy and CAD as well.

M1-23
 M1 File management
13 Word pattern 2

13. Word pattern 2

Word pattern2 includes 62 kinds of upper case and lower case HELVETICA font (No.2) letters and
digits, etc for registration. Words include 2 types: negative (hollow words) and positive (shadow
words).
Word sides are generated within the range about 120 120 mm for each word. Magnify . minify
according to requirements after callout.

1) Call-out method
Register in fixed disk with the following file names of folder [MOJI2]:
Call out via File management File management Callout call out File management
/ [MOJI2] .

2) Method of operation
For details of method of operation, refer to [J4] Mark Marked character configuration method.

3) Precautions
1. Origin of each word is the lower left point.
2. Processing starting . ending is for all arcs.
3. Do not set diameter tool correction not specified. If you want to perform diameter tool correction,
Manual setting OFF SET setting , OFF SET direction should be left.
4. Callout words are grouped.

M1-24
 M1 File management
13 Word pattern2

M1-25
 M1 File management
13 Word pattern2

M1-26
 M1 File management
13 Word pattern2

M1-27
 M1 File management
14 Word pattern3

14. Word pattern3

Word pattern3 includes 62 kinds of upper case and lower case TYPEWRITER FORMED font
letters and digits, etc . for registration. Words include 2 types: negative (hollow words) and
positive (shadow words).
Word sides are generated within the range about 120 120 mm for each word. Magnify . minify
according to requirements after callout.

1) Call-out method
Register in fixed disk with the following file names of folder [MOJI3]:
Call out via File management File management Callout call out File management
/ [MOJI3] .

2) Method of operation
For details of method of operation, refer to [J4] Mark Marked character configuration method.

3) Precautions
1. Origin of each word is the lower left point.
2. Processing starting . ending is for all arcs.
3. Do not set diameter tool correction not specified. If you want to perform diameter tool correction,
Manual setting OFF SET setting , OFF SET direction should be left.
4. Callout words are grouped.

M1-28
 M1 File management
14 Word pattern3

M1-29
 M1 File management
14 Word pattern3

M1-30
 M1 File management
14 Word pattern3

M1-31
 M1 File management
15 FD format

15. FD format
[L1] Please refer to NC input and output NC creation 22.

16. Temporarily save Save

Temporarily save existing screen.

17. Temporarily save Load

Call out the screen saved in 16. Temporarily save Save.
If there is display screen when executing this function, it will ask whether to delete it.
Deleting, Y
Not deleting, N

M1-32
 M2 Log file
1 Log file Change

[M2] Log file

1. Log file Change
Process log file in order.

When log file name is not changed, operations from power ON till OFF will be recorded in
LOGFILE.LOG file.
When using this command to change a log file, record operations of the changed log file from the
beginning till ending of changing, however, the changed log file cannot be removed, generally,
do not use it.

2. Log file Execute

Execute a log file.

For details of log file name HWTEST (hard software check) BACK (return to the previous step),
see [T] notes.
When performing nesting (automatic . free), duct outspread Ellipse log file execution, etc in
operation procedure, log file cannot be executed. Or set floppy when inputting/outputting
in/from floppy during operations.

3. Automatically execute log when starting Creation Start

4. Automatically execute log when starting Creation End
When CAD screen starts up, it will automatically create log files to be executed, after creation of
this log screen, you can change various kinds of settings for startup of CAD screen.

In delivery, Settings for startup of CAD screen are as follows:

If you want to make settings different from the ones for startup of CAD screen, after creation of
"log automatically executed when starting", they will be changed automatically when CAD screen
starts up.

M2-1
M2-2
 M2 Log file
Automatically execute
4 log when starting
Creation End

For example, initial value of number of digits of size line is changed into 3 digits from 1 digit.

[Notes]
1. To delete a created log, click Create start , then click Create end .
2. If 2 screens are simultaneously open at CamMagic LA (for copying between drawings, etc.), the
log file will not created correctly.

5. Delete unnecessary log files Delete Execute

Delete unnecessary created log files according to [Log file | Change]

6. Log file registration tool

Log files of customer’s operations are registered in floppy.
1. Please set a formatted floppy.
2. Select Windows "start" button "program (P)" "Mitsubishi Electrical CamMagic
LA" "CamMagic LA log file registration tool."
3. Press "registration executing" button.
As a result, two log files "LOGFILE.LOG" and "BACK.LOG" are registered in floppy.

M2-3
 N1 Special function
1 Involute

[N] Special function

[N1] Special figures

1. Involute
2. Simulation [A3] Special figures
3. Calculation results Please refer to 1~5.
4. Rack
5. Ellipse

N1-1
 N1 Special function
6 CAD data converter

6. CAD data converter

Convert between different formatted files. (For example, DXF dwg (CamMagic LA, in screen data
form))
[Input conversion]
Convert files of DXF, etc into screen data files for CamMagic LA (extension name = dwg). After
conversion,
end "CAD data conversion function", call out screen data files converted for CamMagic LA from
CamMagic
LA CAD screen and display the operations.
[Output conversion]
Pictures on CAD screen of CamMagic LA are registered in files of file management, etc as screen
data file for CamMagic LA (extension name = dwg), converted into any form of DXF, etc and
registered in designated folder.

During conversion, switch into CAD

screen for CamMagic LA to perform
operations.

For original folder at conversion place, DXF folder conversion status after inputting DXF.
DXF input/output function is standard function is optional functions.
After purchasing CamMagic LA (DXF input/output conversion function loading) perform
conversion regularly and note that trial conversions should be done before hand.

N1-2
N1-3
 N1 Special function
6 CAD data converter

For "parameter setting" of converter type, perform the following settings.

a. DXF parameter setting

Error of conversion point at the time of input

When inputting, specify number of valid digits after decimal point.
Please input digits 0~10.
Error of conversion point at the time of output
When outputting, specify number of valid digits after decimal point.
Please input digits 0~10.

N1-4
Mode of size . mark analysis is the same with that of IGES conversion.
Setting Operation
OFF Size and annotation are not converted.
ON Size and annotation are converted to a size line.
Although the conversion rate is low, editing as a Size
is possible.
ON (size line Size line is converted to segment groups and annotations.
analysis) Although the conversion rate is high, editing as a Size
is not possible.
Polyline width designation
The line width can be eliminated at polyline conversions. When set to "Disable", the polyline
width is eliminated, leaving only the line. When set to "Enable", conversion occurs using the
polyline width specified in the DXF file.
When a line width is present, the line is rectangular.

N1-5
DXF conversion function
[Input conversion]
Convert files of DXF, etc into screen data files for CamMagic LA (extension name = dwg).
After conversion, end "CAD data conversion function", call out screen data files converted for
CamMagic LA from CamMagic LA CAD screen and display the operations.

[Output conversion]
Pictures on CAD screen of CamMagic LA are registered in files of file management, etc as
screen data file for CamMagic LA (extension name = dwg), converted into the form of DXF and
registered in designated folder.

1. DXF data input into a floppy is

converted into screen data for
CamMagic LA.

N1-4-2
N1-4-3
Parameter setting of type of converter

Error of conversion point at the time of input

When inputting, specify number of valid digits after decimal
point.
Please input digits 0~10.
Error of conversion point at the time of output
When outputting, specify number of valid digits after decimal
point.
Please input digits 0~10.
Specify whether size line . mark analysis are valid or not.

N1-4-4
 N1 Special figure
6-2 Endpoint connection

6-2. Endpoint connection

When endpoints of more than two figures (line segment or arc) separate from each other, endpoints will be
automatically connected within setting range.
DXF data input figures, etc are valid when correcting the ones with lower drawing precision.
[For 2 endpoints]
Prolonged point of intersection of two figures is the connection point, prolong/shorten two
elements to the connection point.
[More than 3 endpoints]
Determine average coordinates of 3 figure endpoints as the connection point, change endpoint of each
element according to the connection point.

0.050

N1-4-5
 N1 Special figure
Figure collation
6-3
function

6-3. Figure collation function

Execute screen elements collation ( deletion of same figures, connection of disconnected figures,
uniformization of overlapped figures) .

N1-4-6
 N1 Special figure
Figure collation
6-3
function

The initial value is

“Distinguish”

The initial value is

“Distinguish”

N1-4-7
 N1 Special figure
Figure collation
6-3
function

The initial value is

“Distinguish”

0.001

N1-4-8
 N1 Special figure
Figure collation
6-3
function

[Figure collation function Precautions]

1. It is possible that figure data cannot be collated properly for once.
Please change for proper setting until collation object figures disappear, repeat the operations.

2. Group figures (parts, etc.) cannot be figure collation objects.

For figures of a group, if you want to perform figure collation, please execute the following
operations:

"Select | lower level" from "Nesting" menu "Group edit" TAG

Group figures for executing figure collation
"Figure collation" from "Special function" menu "Special figure" TAG
Input "Figure collation . condition" list, "1: collation execution" or F1
Figure of object parts within specified range
Input Enter , figure collation should not be performed for part figures, execute figure
deletion for upper figures. Do not input Enter .
After performing figure collation, "Select | lower level" from "Nesting" menu "group edit"
TAG

N1-4-9
 N1 Special figure
7 Plot print…

7. Plot print...
Figures, etc on screen are output to printer or xyplot.
Reconnect printer or xyplot to the computer of CamMagic LA, and make necessary settings
"printer addition" in Windows. For Windows setting "printer addition", since printer is different
from xyplot, please consult printer or xyplot manufacturer.
Note 1) When output from CamMagic LA to printer (plot) cannot be performed normally, first confirm
Windows side operations whether "print test" can be output normally.
For details of "print test", refer to page N1-7.
Note 2) If Windows side operations "print test" can be output normally, then, the reason why output cannot be
executed from CamMagic LA may be that the edition of driver of printer/plot used for Windows are
old, please purchase the latest edition and try again.

N1-5
 N1 Special figure
7 Plot print...

N1-6
 N1 Special figure
7 Plot print...

Plot print Precautions

1) In plot printing, size of size line may not be printed, and dotted lines may be printed as real
ones.
This is probably caused by printer (plot) device or printer (plot) drivers.
You can change edition of drivers provided by printer (plot) manufacturer or select
MONOCHROME in plot print "detailed settings" for correction.

2) You can consult the seller or manufacturer about how to purchase printer/plot drivers. We
cannot provide these drivers due to copyrights.

3) When using printer drivers "LIPS4/4C, Win95J DRIVER V5.02" from CANNON Corp., output
from CamMagic LA to printer cannot be performed, please utilize a new edition later than
"V5.10".

4) For old PENPLOTTER "HP 7470A" "HP 7475A" "HP 7550A" "HP 7580A" "HP 7580B" "HP
7587A" "HP 7585B" "HP 7596B" from HP Corp., if you do not specify a low baud rate, you
cannot connect to Windows environment, and "print test" cannot be performed.

5) Above-mentioned old PENPLOTTER of HP Corp. will be provided together with drivers for
Windows95. Drivers for Windows NT may not be provided by some manufacturers.

6) For the series of PENPLOTTER "Desk Jet" produced by HP Corp. if graphic memory in plot is
increased by 8MB in normal state, you cannot connect to Windows environment, "print test"
may not be performed.

7) (Not only for printer) According to type of plot, use centronics standard cable machine type
and RS-232C CABLE type when connecting Windows computers.
For more information of PRINTER/PLOT/PENPLOTTER connected to Windows computer,
please contact the seller or manufacturer.

8) "Detailed settings" screen color setting is valid for color change in PENPLOTTER.
Color of color printer cannot be specified.

9) In Windows95, Windows98 and Windows ME, dotted lines may become real ones after output
from Microsoft Windows printing system to ink-jet printer, which is caused due to Microsoft
Windows Printing System problems, besides CamMagic LA, this may occur to common CAD
software. This will not occur without output from Microsoft Windows Printing System, in
addition, this will not happen in Windows NT4.0 or Windows 2000.

10) For "Plot print Actual size output", "Actual size precision" is beyond our promises.
For size of printed figure, due to the use environment such as printing paper thickness and
humidity, printing precision of printer, different computers and OS (Windows), results will
differ.

N1-7
Due to "function of output closest to actual size", the size precision may be barrack, thank you
for understanding.

N1-8
 N1 Special figure
8 Endpoint connection

8. Endpoint connection
On the screen following DXF/IGES/BMI input conversion of CAD data converter, there are very
short distance between endpoints, connect endpoints of selection elements within specified
connection range value.

N1-9
 N1 Special function
Free-form curve
9
Drawing

9. Free-form curve Drawing

10. Free-form curve End
11. Free-form curve Edit [A3] Special figure

12. Free-form curve Complete linearization Please refer to 10~14

13. Free-form curve Curve offset

14. Corner mode Line 3 blocks
15. Corner mode Arc [A2] Corner . cut/off set

16. Corner mode Point of intersection Please refer to 21~24

17. Corner mode Point of intersection

18. Outside point group conversion
19. Spring curve Open curve
20. Spring curve Close curve
21. Spring curve Pass-through point edit [A3] Special figure

22. Spring curve Spring removal Please refer to 15~21

23. Spring curve Tolerance setting

24. Spring curve Tolerance changing

N1-10
 N2 Returning conversion
1 Returning table data
conversion
Y->V change

[N2] Returning conversion

1. Returning cable data conversion Y->V conversion
2. Returning cable data conversion NC data edit Please read carefully
3. Returning cable data conversion Conversion file edit other optional
4. Returning cable data conversion Check file edit instructions.
Please refer to

5. NC output FLD output [L1] 10

6. NC output Puncher [L4] 3.

N2-1
 Other company NC
N3
change
1 3.5 model FLD input

[N3] Other company NC change

1. 3.5 model FLD Input
2. 3.5 model FLD List of FD
3. Outside NC input . . . Please read other
4. A corporation conversion A corporation conversion execution option instructions.
5. A corporation conversion Conversion result output
6. M corporation conversion M corporation conversion execution
Please refer to
7. NC output Edit [L1] 2
8. Inverse conversion [L1] 19

N3-1
 N4 Sheet change
1 3.5 model FLD input

[N4] Sheet change (See the following page)

1. 3.5 model FLD Input
[L1] 8
2. 3.5 model FLD Output [L1] 10
3. 3.5 model FLD List of FD [L1] 12
4. NC sheet change See other option instructions
5. NC data Edit [L1] 2
6. All lines [A3] 13
7. Path setting Processing reference point [J1] 1
8. Path setting Beam ON1 [J1] 7
9. Path setting Beam OFF1 [J1] 8
10. Path setting Automatic [J1] 13
11. Path setting Manual [J1] 12
12. NC creation NC code addition [I1] 4

13. NC creation NC data creation [L1] 1

14. Sheet NC change See other optional instructions

15. Inversion [L1] 19

N4-1
 O1 Screen operation
Screen operation
1
Zoom
[O] Screen operation
[O1] Screen operation

1. Screen operation Zoom up

2.Screen operation Zoom down

3. Screen operation Relative

O1-1
 O1 Screen operation
Screen operation
4
Continuous

4. Screen operation Zoom continuously

5. Screen operation Former

6. Screen operation Automatic

O1-2
 O1 Screen operation
Screen operation
7
Re-draw

7. Screen operation Draw again

8. Screen operation UP

9. Screen operation Left

O1-3
 O1 Screen operation
Screen operation
10
Right

10. Screen operation Right

11. Screen operation Down

12. Multi view set

O1-4
 O1 Screen operation
13 Multi view Change

13. Multi view Change

14. Multi view Delete

15. View switchover Multi

16. View switch Single

O1-5
 O1 Screen operation
17 Grid ON

17. Grid ON
18. Grid OFF

19. Grid Sides

* When CamMagic LA starts,

the
initial value is 5,000 in both X
and
Y direction.

20. Grid Origin

* When CamMagic LA starts,

the
initial value is 0,000 in both X
and
Y direction.

O1-6
 O1 Screen operation
21 Hardcopy
21. Hardcopy

a. Select “start”→”program”
→”CamMagic
LA” →”hardcopy tool”

O1-7
 O1 Screen operation
21 Hardcopy

O1-8
 O1 Screen operation
22 Auxiliary coordinates

22. Auxiliary coordinates

O1-9
 O1 Screen operation
Clip board paste
23
(rectangle)

23. Clip board paste (Rectangle designation)

O1-10
 O1 Screen operation
Clip board paste
23
(rectangle)

O1-11
 O1 Screen operation
24 Clip board paste (frame)

24. Clip board paste (designated frame)

O1-12
 O1 Screen operation
25 Frame login

O1-13
 P1 Exit
1 Exit

[P] Exit
[P1] Exit
1. Exit
◼ Function
Exit CamMagic LA operation.

◼ Procedure

1) Click the EXIT | Exit menu.

2) Click the Exit | Exit? menu.

Operation can also be ended by selecting

"End file/application" from the pull-down
menu, or by clicking the  button at
the upper right of the window.
3) At the "end confirmation" dialog box, click
OK to end?
[Yes]
to end CamMagic LA operation.

3) To end operation click [Yes]. If the drawing has been edited, a "save
To continue operation, click [No].
confirmation" dialog box opens.
Register drawing on the screen?

If [Yes] is clicked, a message prompts the

user to specify the file name under which
the file is to be saved. To overwrite at the
T o s a v e th e c h a n g es a n d e n d
indicated file name, press .
o p e r a t i on, c l i c k [Y e s ] .
To save under another file name, enter
To abandon changes and end operation,
click [No]. that file name, then press .
EXIT Enter registered file name (untitled) (/=File list)

Enter / to display the file

management screen, then perform the
save operation.
Specify the file name under which the file is
to be saved.
After saving the file, end CamMagic LA
operation.

2. Version information
Displays the CamMagic LA version information.

1) Click Exit | Exit –

Version Version Information | Version Check .

Before making inquiries to Mitsubishi, be

sure to verify the version, and include the
version information in your inquiry.

A list of currently usable optional functions

also displays.

P1-1
 [Z] GNU-GPL published
About GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
Load free software "Perl" on CamMagic LA. In order to operate CamMagic LA, you need to install
"Perl" in
your computer. Installation of "Perl" will be automatically performed when it is installed via CD.
For information
of software "Perl" use commitments, refer to the statements about reproduction by American
FREE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION, INC who possesses the copyright.
The following pages are GPL English original.

Z-1
Z-2
Z-3
Z-4
Z-5
Z-6
Z-7